Digital PDFs

AA-FP65A-TM

May 1985

444 pages

Original

18MB

view download

OCR Version

15MB

view download

Document:	tops20CmdsRef
Order Number:	AA-FP65A-TM
Revision:	0
Pages:	444
Original Filename:	AA-FP65A-TM_tops20CmdsRef.pdf

OCR Text

TOPS-20
Commands Reference Manual
AA-FP65A-TM

September 1985
This manual describes all operating system commands

available to the nonprivileged user of TOPS-20. For easy

reference, the command descriptions are arranged
alphabetically.
This manual supersedes the manual of the same name and

order number, AA-5115B-TM.
Change bars in the margins indicate material that has been
added or changed since the previous printing of this manual.
Bullets indicate that material has been deleted.

OPERATING SYSTEM:

SOFTWARE:

TOPS—-20 (KL Model B) V6.1

TOPS-20 EXEC V6.1

Software and manuals should be ordered by title and order number. In the United States. send orders
to the nearest distribution center. Outside the United States. orders should be directed to the nearest
DIGITAL Field Sales Office or representative.

Northeast/Mid—Atlantic Region

Central Region

Western Region

Digital Equipment Corporation

PO Box C52008
Nashua, New Hampshire 03061

Accessories and Supplies Center Accessories and Supplies Center
1050 East Remington Road
632 Caribbean Drive

Telephone:(603)884-6660

Schaurnburg. lHlinois 60195
Telephone:(312)640-5612

Sunnyvale. California 94086
Telephone:(408)734-4915

digital equipment fcorporotiono marlboro. massachusetts

First Printing, February 1979
Revised, January 1980
Updated, April 1982
Updated, December 1982
Revised, September 1985

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.

The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may
only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment
that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

olililtlal1

DEC
DECmate
DECsystem—10

MASSBUS
PDP
P/OS

RSX
RT
UNIBUS

VAX
VMS

DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS

Professional
Q-BUS

DECwriter
DIBOL

Rainbow

RSTS

Work Processor

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user’s critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future
documentation.

CONTENTS

PREFACE

vii

INTRODUCTION
COMMAND

Intro-1

DESCRIPTIONS

ACCESS

Obtains ownership rights

ADVISE

Sends

APPEND

Adds

ARCHIVE

Makes

ASSIGN

Allocates

ATTACH

Attaches

BACKSPACE

Moves

BLANK

Clears

BREAK

Ends

BUILD

Creates,

CANCEL

Withdraws

Closes

COMPILE

Translates

CONNECT

Connects

your

CONTINUE

Continues

COPY

Makes

CREATE

Creates

CREF

Translates

CSAVE

Stores

DAYTIME

Tells

the

DDT

Starts

commands
files

onto

a
a

magnetic
your

modifies,

queue

open

source

job

halted

user's

files

terminal

tape

terminal

TALK

set

backward

screen

directory

JFNs

into

object

programs

directory

program

files

64
71

files

compressed
date

46
54

file

.CRF

releases

programs

19
21

command

deletes

and

job

1
4

file

copies

your

job

requests

files

copies

for

tape

a directory

another

your

video

made

off-line

device
job

links

another

end

permanent

and

debugging

into

copy

listings

memory

file

time

program

iii

DEASSIGN

Gives up previously assigned devices

DEBUG

Loads your program with a debugging program;
compiles your program if necessary; then starts
the debugging

program

DEFINE

Establishes or withdraws logical names

DELETE

Marks

DEPOSIT

Changes contents of a memory location

195

DETACH

Disengages a job from your terminal

1089

DIRECTORY

Gives information about

DISABLE

Deactivates capabilities

121

DISCARD

Gives up the tape copy of on-line files

122

DISMOUNT

Gives up access to a structure or tape set

124

EDIT

Creates or

file

130

ENABLE

Activates capabilities

137

END-ACCESS

Terminates ownership rights to a directory

139

EOF

Writes an end-of-file mark on a magnetic tape

141

ERUN

Runs a program in an ephemeral

EXAMINE

Inspects a memory location

EXECUTE

Compiles,

program

147

EXPUNGE

Erases deleted files from a directory

155

FDIRECTORY

DIRECTORY command with subcommands

158

FORK

Specifies which

fork

FREEZE

Stops

running

fork

GET

Places an executable program in memory

HELP

Displays

INFORMATION

Gives information about such items as system,

KEEP

Protects a

LOAD

Places a

job,

files

for

edits a

loads,

and

101

erasure

later

files

starts a

112

fork

143
145

159

is current

162

information on system programs

and directory parameters

fork from being cleared

program

from memory

in memory

Validates you as a user, creates your job, and

begins charging
your

your

account

164

166

168
189
192

201

206

job

LOGOUT

Ends

MERGE

Merges an executable program with current memory

209

MODIFY

Changes output or batch requests

211

MOUNT

Mounts

PERUSE

Types

structure

files

editing

your

program

terminal

Prints

files

POP

Returns

Prints

files

PUNCH

Punches

PUSH

Begins

Runs

system

RECEIVE

Allows

communication

REENTER

Starts

the

REFUSE

Disallows

REMARK

Treats

RENAME

Changes

RESET

Terminates

RETRIEVE

Returns

off-line

Rewinds

REWIND

files

using

238

level

line

TOPS-20

printer

249

onto

cards

paper

inferior

level

TOPS-20

tape

257

265

program

269

with

subsequent

your

memory

communication

the

247

specification

current

magnetic

tape

your

271

restart

address

terminal

comment

process

files

with

input

terminal

274

only

277

files

and

279

clears

its

memory

disk

set

273

282

284

its

load
289

RUN

Runs

SAVE

Stores

SEND

Sends

SET

Sets
HOST

241

point

SET

222

plotter

superior

set

Read-only mode

PLOT

tape

executable

copy

memory

messages

various

Connects

job-

your

program

and

Moves

START

Starts

SUBMIT

Submits

SYSTAT

Gives

information

TAKE

Starts

processing

TALK

Makes

communication

TDIRECTORY

DIRECTORY

TERMINAL

Sets

TRANSLATE

Gives

TYPE

Prints

program

control

tape

various

files

293

names

your

set

forward

332

system

and

command

file

address

338

job

350

status

358

another

user

terminal

and

361

365

characteristics
ppn's

334

system

subcommands

for

298

326

batch

with

parameters

system

specified

the

links

with

another

about
of

295

tape

memory

terminal

directory

files

command

file

directory-related

terminal

magnetic

terminals

SKIP

291

vice

366

versa

379

381

another job

Disengages

UNDELETE

Restores deleted

files

UNKEEP

Cancels

the

status

UNLOAD

Unloads

VDIRECTORY

DIRECTORY command

APPENDIX

FUNCTIONAL GROUPING

APPENDIX

ALPHABETICAL SUMMARY OF TOPS-2¢ COMMANDS

B-1

APPENDIX

FILE

c-1

kept

magnetic

from

its

terminal

383

UNATTACH

385

fork

389

tape
with
OF

ATTRIBUTES

387

subcommands

391

TOPS-20

A-1

COMMANDS

Index-1

INDEX

PREFACE

The TOPS-2@ Commands Reference Manual
1is
an
alphabetically-arranged
description of all operating system commands (EXEC commands) available
to the nonprivileged timesharing user of TOPS-20.
In addition, there are two appendixes
commands
grouped by function, and an
showing what variety of argument each
program or otherwise affects memory.
To

for quick reference - a
alphabetical summary of
uses
and
whether
it

list
of
commands
<calls
a

use the TOPS-20 Commands
Reference
Manual
properly,
you
should
first read and understand Getting Started With TOPS-20 and the TOPS-20
User's Guide.
The occasional summary of
1information
vyou
will
£find
here
cannot substitute for the more complete presentations offered in
those

manuals.

INTRODUCTION

COMMANDS

AND

ARGUMENTS

complete TOPS-20 command consists of the command
name
and
wusually
one
or
more arguments.
In the most general sense, arguments are any
combinations
of
1letters,
numerals,
punctuation
marks
and
other
characters that you type after the command name itself to complete the
meaning of the command.
These arguments can be
file
specifications,
switches,
subcommands,
and
values
for, switches and subcommands, as
well as words and numbers (the
arguments
to
the
SET
and
TERMINAL
commands,
for
example).
The
following
pages
contain
general
information about each variety of argument.

File

Specifications

Information and programs for TOPS-2f are usually
stored
in
uniquely
labeled
files.
Therefore, file specifications or "filespecs" are the
most common variety
of
argument
to
a
command.
A
complete
file
specification is of the form
dev:<dir>name.typ.gen;att;...;att
where

dev:

1is

device

(usually

<dir>

a directory name

file

structure)

(enclosed

angle

square

[

]

brackets)

name

filename

.typ

file

.gen

generation

;att

file

type
number

attribute

You need file attributes in only a few situations and can usually
let
dev:,
<dir>, and .gen take default values (that is, values defined by
the state of your job
see the Special Features section below), so
you can give most file specifications in the shortened form, name.typ,
without being unclear.
In a few cases, an entire
file
specification
is assumed if you do not supply one when you give the command (for the
CREATE
and
EDIT
commands,
for
example,
and
for
LOAD-class
commands - COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG).

Intro-1

INTRODUCTION

Whenever you omit the dev:
field of the filespec, the system
assumes
you
mean
your
conhnected
structure
(DSK:).
This
1is
the
public
structure (usually named PS:), which all users must log in to,
unless
you
connect
to a directory on another structure by using the CONNECT
command.
Give the INFORMATION STRUCTURE command if you are unsure
of
the

name

for

your

connected

structure,

Whenever you omit the <dir> field of the filespec, the system
assumes
you
mean
your
conhnected directory.
Unless you have given a CONNECT
command, this is your "log-in" directory, the directory on the
public
structure
that
you
must
1log
in
to
and
which usually has a name
composed of your surname, or surname and initials, enclosed
in
angle
or
square
brackets.
You change your connected directory by giving a
CONNECT command.
Use the DIRECTORY command to see the
name
of
your
connected

directory.

When you omit the
assumes
the

you mean

file.

.gen
the
few

field

the

filespec

highest generation
commands,

for

the

system

(largest generation

example,

DELETE,

usually

number)

RENAME,

of
and

DIRECTORY,
act
on
all
generations
of
a file unless you specify a
particular generation.)
When you create and edit text files,
compile
and
debug programs, or do anything else to produce another generation
of a file, the system automatically works with
the
highest
existing
generation and labels the changed file with the next higher generation
number.

Therefore

when

you

omit

the

generation

number

filespec

given
as
argument to a TOPS-20 command, you are assured of using the
most recent version of the
file.
Although
you
can
override
this
default
action
by
specifying
particular
generations
of input and
output files, it is simplest and most
straightforward
to
allow
the
defaults to prevail.
Specification
of
file
attributes
1is
optional.
You
can
attributes
in
order to have a file automatically marked for
when you log out; to associate a file with a
wvalid
account;
forth.
Appendix C lists the available file attributes.
Pressing the ESC key
cause
any
default
terminal.
There

are

two

instead of typing a
for
the
remaining

characters

(called

assign
deletion
and
so

filespec field
will
fields to be printed

"wildcard"

characters)

that

usually
on your

you

can

include
in
any field of a filespec to include all files matching the
rest of the filespec.
An asterisk (*)
fills
1in
for
2zero
or
more
characters
of a field, while a percent sign (%) fills in for a single
character only.
(However, only the complete field "DSK*:" is
allowed
as
wildcard
for the device field, and only the complete field "*" is
allowed as wildcard for the generation field.)
Therefore
you
could
give the command DIRECTORY *,CBL to find out what source files written
in COBOL are in your connected directory, or the command
DELETE
*, Q%
to remove the EDIT program's backup files from your directory.

Switches

Switches are arguments used with LOAD-class (COMPILE,
LOAD,
EXECUTE,
and
DEBUG) and EDIT-class (CREATE and EDIT) commands, as well as with
Queue-class commands - that is, those affecting entries in
processing
queues

(CANCEL,

DISMOUNT,

MODIFY,

MOUNT,

PLOT,

PRINT,

PUNCH,

and

SUBMIT)
.

Switches can also be used with the
DDT,
GET,
MERGE,
R,
and
RUN,
switch.

following program-control
The
REWIND command also

Intro-2

commands:
accepts a

INTRODUCTION

Switches allow you to give quickly many options chosen
from
a
large
list, and let you specify to which files they apply when you give more
than one

filespec

single

command.

Give switches on the same line as the
command,
¢typing
a
slash
(/)
before
each
switch.
If
vyour
command requires more than one line,
simply keep typing without giving a carriage return.
The system
will
begin
a
new
1line automatically and will read your command as if you
had typed it on a single line.
Or you may end your
command
1line
at
any
point
with
a
hyphen
(-) and carriage return, and continue the
command on the next line; the hyphen will not be
considered
part
of
your

input.

Keep in mind
the
way
each
class
of
command
considers
switches.
EDIT-class
commands
operate
on
only
one
file
at a time, and the
switches must
be
given
before
the
input
filespec - this
is
the
simplest

case.

Queue-class and LOAD-class commands treat switches according to
their
If you give them before any filespecs,
in the command line.
position
they act as default switches for all filespecs in
the
command
(they
will
be
in
effect
unless
you
override
them
with later switches
applying to individual files only).
If you give them after the
first
filespec,
they
apply only to the preceding file.
In addition, there
are a

few switches of a different sort for

the

PLOT,

PRINT,

and

PUNCH

commands - these apply to all files no matter where they appear in the
command line.
These are called job switches (because they affect
the
entire
printing
job)
and
are presented in a separate list in those
command

descriptions.

A switch is a default if the system
assumes
it
in
the
absence
of
others.
For
LOAD-class
commands,
/FORTRAN
1is the default for all
switches that specify which compiler to use (like /MACRO, /COBOL,
and
/PASCAL) .
The
/NOCOMPILE
switch
1is
the
default
for
/COMPILE,
/NOCOMPILE, and /RELOCATABLE.
Most defaults for these commands
apply
to
only
a
pair
of
switches;
however, the /BINARY, /NOSEARCH, and
/NOOPTIMIZE switches are assumed,
for
example,
unless
you
specify
/NOBINARY,

/SEARCH,

and

/OPTIMIZE.

Default switches for the other classes of command
operate
similarly.
Some
are
in
effect unless you specify their opposite; others are in
effect with a default argument unless you
specify
another
argument;
still
others must be specified to be in effect, but are supplied with
a default argument.
The list of switches presented with each
command
description
distinguishes
these
cases.
When
vyou give two or more
switches of the same kind (for example, /BINARY
and
/NOBINARY),
the
last

switch given

usually prevails.

Subcommands

are

variety

argument

used

chiefly

with

DIRECTORY~-class
(DIRECTORY,
FDIRECTORY,
TDIRECTORY, and VDIRECTORY)
commands and with the BUILD command.
If you want to give
subcommands
to any of the DIRECTORY-class commands, type a comma at the end of the
command line just before pressing
the
carriage
return.
After
the

can give
you
(@@)
sign
at
double
a
with
you
prompts
system
subcommands, one on each line.
If you
give
no
subcommands
to
the
DIRECTORY command, the ALPHABETICAL and HEADING subcommands will be in

effect,
giving
an
alphabetical
1listing
of
files.
For
a
few
subcommands,
default
arguments
will
be
in
effect if you give the
subcommands without supplying any.
You can give
subcommands
in
any
or declining special categories of information and
requesting
order,
specifying the format of
its
presentation.
If
you
give
mutually
Intro-3

INTRODUCTION

exclusive
subcommands
(ALPHABETICAL
the
1last-given
subcommand
prevails.

and CHRONOLOGICAL,
Note
that
the

TDIRECTORY,

are

and

VDIRECTORY

commands

equivalent

for example)
FDIRECTORY,
the

DIRECTORY

command with certain subcommands automatically included,
and
can
further
modified
with
other
subcommands from DIRECTORY's list.
cancel a DIRECTORY-class command
while
giving
subcommands,
type
CTRL/C.
The

BUILD

command

in
putting you
a final
comma
subcommand

operates

cancel

See the individual
about subcommands.

Other
Some

differently

from

DIRECTORY-class

automatically into subcommand
on
the
command
1line,
and
the

command

while

you

descriptions

mode without
in
offering

are

for

typing

be
To
a

commands

your typing
a
special

subcommands.

detailed

information

Arguments
command

arguments

slashes

"keywords,"

are

double

having

not

special

introduced

signs,

but

meaning

special

still
the

are

characters

particular

system.

Give

such

words,

these

or
the

same line as the command itself, leaving at least one space before and
between arguments.
Certain of these (for example,
the
LOGICAL-NAMES
argument
to
the
INFORMATION
command) are actually composed of more
than one word, joined by hyphens so that the system will not interpret
them
as more than one argument.
If the complete command will not all
fit onto one line,
simply
keep
typing:
the
system
automatically
begins
a
new line when necessary, but interprets the typing as if it
had all appeared on one line.
Or you may end a command
1line
at
any
point
with
a
command on the
your
A

hyphen
(=)
and
a
next line; the hyphen

carriage
will not

return, and continue
be
considered
part

the
of

input.

few command

arguments

must

accompanied

special

symbols

interpreted correctly.
Enclose directory names in angle brackets when
using them with the CONNECT or names (for DEFINE), device names
(used
with
ASSIGN),
and
structures
and
tape
sets
(used
with MOUNT or
DISMOUNT)

all

supplying
CANCEL

command,

colon.)

will

require

what
If

SPECIAL

you

usually

1look

colon

are

supplying

punctuate

the

structure
a

message

end.

and

jobnames,

command

(But

tape

set

and

argument

reminding

you

note

names

must

that

not

the

when

include

incorrectly,

the

system

this.

FEATURES

Defaults

The

concept of "defaults," or command arguments assumed
when
you
specify
a
choice,
1is
important for understanding TOPS-28.
speed processing of commands and
to
help
inexperienced
users,
system
uses
defaults when necessary for completing commands that
give.
By taking advantage of this defaulting action, you can make
not

system

work

faster

and

efficiently

prominently
the
available
choices
established defaults for these.
There
are
different
kinds
specifications
as
arguments
assumes
of

that

these

you

are

files

1in

specifying

override

this

referring
your

for

you.

of
default.
to,
say, the
to

the

connected

highest

structure

(most
and

structure,

directory,

default,

but

1if

Intro-4

vyou

manual

arguments

displays

and

When
you
give
PRINT command, the

different

only

This

command

do
To
the
you
the
the

file
system

recent)

generation

connected

directory.

generation

already

have

you

the

can

right

INTRODUCTION

(established by user membership in a group,
ACCESS

command)

perhaps,

prior

so.

When you give the INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS command
without
further
with a listing of all requests in the
presented
are
you
arguments,
display
The /USER switch allows you to limit this
batch input queue.
vyou give the switch without
If
named.
wuser
the
of
Jjobs
the
to
supplying a user name, your own user name is used
as
default.
(But
has meaning for
command
SUBMIT
related
the
to
switch
/USER
the
other
wunder
Jjobs
privileged users only, who can use it to run batch
names; for non-privileged users this switch effectively defaults
user
the
Only a few command arguments behave like
to your own user name.)
The /TIME switch to the SUBMIT command is worth noting:
/USER switch.

by not giving the switch, you set a time limit of 5 minutes; by giving
without specifying a time limit, you are setting a l-hour
switch
the
as
it
supplying
by
1limit
time
any other
limit; and you can set
argument

the

switch.

Note that none of the three switches to INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS and
/USER) is used as a
and
/FAST,
(/ALL,
OUTPUT-REQUESTS
INFORMATION
from
each calls for a listing that differs in some respects
default:
Howevr, the INFORMATION
command.
wunmodified
the
by
yielded
that
LOGICAL-NAMES command, which allows keywords ALL, JOB, and SYSTEM, has
The list of arguments associated with each
JOB as default for these.
command makes

these choices

To discover what default

clear.

argument

(if

any)

1is

established

for

or other argument, press the ESC key instead of
the default will be printed on your terminal.

subcommand,
switch,
giving the argument:

"Recognition" input is another feature of the TOPS-20 operating system
input, by finishing the typing of a command or
vyour
up
speeds
that
then
command argument for you when you have given only part of it and
prompting

As soon as

your

you

response.

have

typed

enough

command

argument

the system will finish
distinguish it from others, press the ESC key:
with guidewords
input
next
your
the word, if possible, and prompt
this manual does not show
(Note that
©parentheses.
1in
enclosed
guidewords except in the Format section of each command description.)
key without beginning an argument you make the
ESC
the
By pressing
system
the
If
one.
system print the default argument, if there is
you, either because you have not typed enough characters
help
cannot
your
default,
no
1is
to make your intentions clear or because there

terminal makes a warning noise - either a ringing bell or high-pitched

beep.

Because the ESC key does not produce a printed character, you may be
remember exactly where you pressed it when later examining
to
unable
this
If you want to avoid
the output from a hard-copy terminal.
terminal
your
make
to
command
RAISE
NO
TERMINAL
the
use
possibility,
produce lowercase input, to distinguish it from the uppercase printing

the

system.

file
(including
names
for device
recognition
use
You cannot
structures), jobnames (for example, with the MODIFY or CANCEL command)

logical

names.

Abbreviation

further
you can
arguments,
command
and
commands
By abbreviating
The
speed with which you give instructions to TOPS-2@.
the
increase
for
smallest unique abbreviation for a command or argument will stand
Intro-5

INTRODUCTION

the

entire

word;

the

system

will

for

INFORMATION

there

LOGICAL-NAMES

few cases
where
used
command.

DISABLE

even

though

DISCARD

and

DISMOUNT.

two

want

choice

this

for

too.

further

arguments,

other

commands

begin

CONTINUE

DEPOSIT

DIS

DISABLE

EXAMINE

EXECUTE
F

INFORMATION

(When

not

LOG

(When

logged

use

logged

in)

abbreviation

(or

recognition)

devices (including file structures),
as arguments to the MODIFY or CANCEL

and

Question

course

letters

DIS

FILE-STATUS

LOGOUT

of
example,

the

names

full;

with

LOG

can

non-unique
abbreviations
stand
for
a
For
example, DIS is the abbreviation for

Command

cannot

(You

JOB.

Special
Abbreviation

INFORMATION

You

vyou

default

determine
sufficient
abbreviations
by
wusing
the
ESC
key:
any
correctly
recognized abbreviation will stand for the
word.)
For
example,
the
abbreviated
command
FD stands for the FDIRECTORY command; I L stands

There are a
frequently

assume

passwords

cannot

few

cases.

The

and jobnames (given, for
command) must
be
typed

abbreviated

recognized.

Marks

Whenever

you type a question mark (?)
instead
of
(or
even
1in
the
middle
of) a TOPS-2¢ command or command argument, the system responds
with instructions
or
a
1list
of
possible
completions.
By
using

question
command

terminal
These

marks
or

and

argument,

recognition
you

can

have

when

you

the

system

the

HELP

are

session.

features,

together

information
on
various
the written documentation

with

system
for

programs,

TOPS-240.

Intro-6

unsure

help

you

command,

are

valuable

the

during

which

proper
vyour

provides

supplements

INTRODUCTION

DATE-TIME ARGUMENTS

TOPS-20
the
many of
formats for these
the

to
arguments
time
and
You can specify date
describe
sections
following
The
commands.
arguments.

Date

The examples below show the various formats that
the

date

are

acceptable

for

argument:

Jun 30 1981
May 1, 82
January 000005
F/13-83

3@ Jun 1981
1/May/1982
P@@5-January-90008@75
5/17/83

If the month and day are both numeric, the first number of the two, if
Otherwise, the second
1is considered to be the month.
less than 13,
number

is considered to be the month.
is
is

2/15/83
15/2/83

For example:

February 15th
February 15th

You can abbreviate the month to as few characters as possible

causing

it to be confused with another month.

Thus,

without

0
Jun

Jul
Ja

are acceptable abbreviations for October, June, July, and January.

Many commands allow you to give the day of the week or "today" for the
date.

If you specify the time along with the date, you must separate the two
arguments by at least one space and/or no more than one tab.
For the
e

time argument you can specify:
time according

to a

24-hour clock:

/AFTER:17:00:00
e

and

PM:

@SET ALERT 5:00PM

Intro-7

INTRODUCTION

the

following

time

zones:

Arguments

Zone

GMT

Hour

Offset

from

Greenwich

GST,

GDT,

Greenwich

)

AST,

ADT

Atlantic

EST,

EDT

Eastern

csT,

CDT

Central

MST,

MDT

Mountain

PST,

PDT

Pacific

YST,

Y¥YDT

Yukon

HST,

HDT

Hawaii/Alaska

BST,

BDT

Ber ing

DAYLIGHT

Daylight

time

for

your

zone

STANDARD

Standard

time

for

your

=zone

the

zone.

Examples

6: 00PM-EDT

5:00PM

EST

6:00PM-PST

9:00PM

EST

6: 00PM-GMT

1:00PM

EST

Note

that

The

basic

hyphen

time

(-)

format

is:

required

before

hh:mm:ss
where:

The

mm
ss

is
is

colon

between

Examples

and

00:03:00AM

1:25AM

14:3¢9

2:30PM

25:33

00:25:33AM

Date-Time

commands

from

today,

specify

optional.

clock):

Arguments

minutes

24-hour

event

time,
can

(based

hours

125

Relative
Many

hours, must be less than 24, and is optional
minutes, must be less than 6@, and is required
seconds, must be less than 60, and is optional

relative

occur

relative

from

times

dates

certain
in

and

certain

the

times.

amount

day of

You

the

can

time

week.

specify

from

the

Likewise,

past.

Examples
@SET

ALERT

+30

sets

@DIRECTORY,

produces

@@BEFORE

TODAY

were

alert
a

for

listing

created

Intro-8

before

minutes

from

files

that

today's

date

now

that

current

vyou

INTRODUCTION

EXEC

MESSAGES

The TOPS-20 Command Processor, or EXEC, displays messages in
response
when using the TOPS-2(
arise
that
conditions
other
or
errors
to
Command Language.
There are three kinds
of
EXEC
messages:
error,
warning,

and

information.

Error messages begin with a

indicates

question

(?).

mark

error

message

that a failure has occurred and execution of the command or

program has stopped.

If, for example, you type the wrong password

receive
you
command,
CONNECT
or
LOGIN
a
password, and the command is not executed.

the

message ?Incorrect

also
A warning message
Warning messages begin with percent sign (%).
indicates that a failure has occurred, but execution of the command or
command
For example, suppose you type the
program usually continues.
*,PAS, *.REL to list all the files with the extensions .PAS
DIRECTORY
.REL
any
contain
not
and .REL, and, your connected directory does
The EXEC lists all the files with the .PAS extensions and then
files.
prints the warning message,

$No such file type *.REL.

sometimes
(and
EXEC
the
The third type of message you can get from
Information messages are
the system) is an information message.
from
enclosed in square brackets [ ] and inform you about the status of the
For example, the message
of an EXEC command.
result
the
or
system
service
in
[DECSYSTEM~2@ continued] indicates that a temporary pause
message [n pages freed] indicates that your EXPUNGE
The
ended.
has
no
require
Usually information messages
command freed n disk pages.
response

from

you.

When you need more information than is provided by

EXEC

message,

This manual contains detailed
EXEC Message Manual.
the
to
refer
descriptions of all EXEC messages, plus actions to take for correcting
errors.

NEW AND CHANGED FEATURES

The TOPS-20 has been enhanced considerably for

TOPS-2f

Version

6.1.

arguments,
new
and
commands,
new
of
1list
a
is
following
The
Changes
commands.
existing
previously
to
switches
and
subcommands
affecting the command are shown as bulleted items.

New commands and arguments related to
listed

the

multiforking

separately.

New Commands

(excluding multiforking-related commands)

ERUN

PERUSE
SEND

SET HOST

(considered separate

from the

Intro-9

SET command)

feature

are

ACCESS

Obtains ownership rights to a directory and the group
user-group

list.

rights

Iits

Format

@ACCESS

(TO DIRECTORY)

dev:<directory>

Password :password
where

dev:<directory>

is the directory that you want to
Default dev:

- your

Default <directory>

access

connected

structure

- the directory
(on
specified
the
structure)

the

same

your

hnhame

connected
directory

password

the

requested

password
for

vyour

directory of the same

the

directory

name

1log-in

directory on a domestic

directory

your

(not
or

1log-in

structure)

Characteristics

Capabilities

Your capabilities (such as
Wheel,
Operator,
Confidential)
If you give
are associated with your log-in user name only.
the ACCESS command for a directory
whose
owner
has
Wheel
capabilities, say, you do not gain these capabilities.
Restrictio ns

One

directory

group

numbers

r—— ot

directory

Refers

Runs

names

allowed

directory

PUSH

EXEC

defined

DEFAULT-EXEC:

SYSTEM:COMAND,.,CMD

CANCEL

(wildcard)

CoPY,

— o—— ——

—

ettty

—

s, SBUS

INFINITY

oy A———— —

DEFINE

—

—— —

SUPERSEDE

LOAD-class

— —

File

recognition

commands

(COMPILE,

the

logical

DEBUG,

—— ——
——
—
—

/ [NOJMACHINE-CODE
/NOSTAY
/PASCAL
/SAIL
/SIMULA
/SNOBOL
/ [NOJWARNINGS

— ——

. — —

—

/MAC

—

/[NO]JCROSS~-REFERENCE

special

abbreviation

Default

is
the

switches
assumed that

the

LOAD-class

longer

commands.

—

DDT

and

MERGE

G
e

and

LOAD)

[NO]CREF)

for

/MACRO

passed to the
compiler's defaults

——

new

(same

/OVERLAY
DIRECTORY,

n CTED

EXECUTE,

definition

/18-BLISS
/36-BLISS
/ABORT
/FAIL
/ [NO]JFLAG-NON-STANDARD,

———

name

COMPLETE

Intro-19

compiler.
are the same

It
as

INTRODUCTION

INFORMATION
CLUSTER

SUPERIOR

INFORMATION

ARPANET

Displays

INFORMATION

several

new fields

DECNET

node—name

INFORMATION

DEFAULTS

PROGRAM

INFORMATION

DIRECTORY

Password

not displayed

Displays

TOPS-10 project—programmer

Displays

INFINITY

argument

number

PERMANENT

and

WORKING

parameters

INFORMATION

Displays

INFORMATION

JOB

name

LOGICAL-NAME

host

logical-name

Accepts wildcards

INFORMATION

node

logical

names

MAIL

SYSTEM

INFORMATION

e
e

SYSTEM

Indicates whether

DECnet terminals allowed

Indicates whether operator

console

Indicates whether
to

all

messages

terminal

level

zero

and

are

Displays version numbers

in decimal

/FAST

Runs

SYSTEM:LOGIN,CMD and

Displays

date

and

time

Intro-11

SYSTEM:COMAND.CMD
last

sent

one messages

users

VERSION

to log

to
are

the
sent

INTRODUCTION

LOGOUT

/FAST n
e
RECEIVE

Runs
and

PS:LOGOUT.CMD

and

SYSTEM:LOGOUT.CMD

REFUSE

USER-MESSAGES

SET

[NO]STATUS-WATCH
TERMINAL

SET

[NO]

TERMINAL

command)

[NO-]EPHEMERAL

FILE

[NO]
SET

DEFAULT

PROGRAM
SET

(same

EPHEMERAL

MAIL-WATCH

notification-count
SET

[NO]

TRAP

JSYS

/DEFINED
/UNDEFINED
SUBMIT

Runs

SYS:BATCH.CMD

Displays

file.

SYSTAT

job's

originating

host

"Origin"

column

SYSTEM-STATUS

Indicates

whether the sending of level
to all users is enabled

one messages
TERMINAL

[NO]JINHIBIT
[NOJRECEIVE

(same

REFUSE

and

H19

VT102
VT200-SERIES
TYPE,
UNFORMATTED

Intro-12

RECEIVE)

2zero

and

level

INTRODUCTION

New Multiforking-class

The

most

Commands

significant

feature,

Commands

argument

addition

display

multiforking-class

to the
accept
a

which

information

EXEC

1is

the
name or

fork

about

commands.

forks

are

multiforking
number as an
considered

FREEZE
KEEP

UNKEEP

New Multiforking-class

Arguments

and

Switches

CONTINUE

fork-name
fork=number
/BACKGROUND
/NORMALLY (formerly a subcommand)
/STAY (formerly a subcommand)
FORK

fork-name

(interchangeable

with

existing

fork-number)

INFORMATION
FORK-STATUS
DEFAULT

INFORMATION

PROGRAM

PROGRAM~-STATUS

Displays

SET

PROGRAM and

SET

DEFAULT

PROGRAM

RESET

(wildcard)
. (period)
fork-name
fork=number
SET

NAME

SET

fork-name

PROGRAM

KEEP

PROGRAM

NONE

[NO]

DEFAULT

PROGRAM

KEEP

PROGRAM

NONE

START

/BACKGROUND
/NORMALLY
/STAY

Deleted
These

subcommands

components

and

have

arguments

been

removed

Intro-13

from

the

EXEC.

settings.

INTRODUCTION

APPEND

and -COPY

Arguments
(NOPARITY

to the ASCII
was
never

subcommand:
implemented

NOPARITY
and
and
PARITY
is

PARITY.
now the

default.)
TAKE

Second

filespec

LOG-FILE

General

field deleted.

Replaced

in Release

5 by

subcommand.

Notes

A colon

after

device

name

now

optional

these

DISMOUNT,

EOF,

commands:
ASSIGN,

BACKSPACE,

DEASSIGN,

DEFINE,

INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES, INFORMATION
VOLUMES, MOUNT, REWIND, and SKIP

STRUCTURE,

On autobaud lines, any character
the attention of systenm.

In
in

typed

an effort to reduce the number of top
future
releases
of
TOPS-20,
the

commands have been placed under
format
TERMINAL [NO] RECEIVE.
placed

under

the

the
The

the

INFORMATION

terminal

level EXEC
REFUSE
and

TERMINAL command
TERMINAL command

gets

commands
RECEIVE

in
has

the
been

SET command.

Commands that were modified
in
this
release,
also
remain
available
1in
their
old
format.
For example the TERMINAL
command is available as TERMINAL or SET TERMINAL,

Intro-14

ACCESS (Cont.)

Commands

CONNECT

for

making

directory

your

connected

directory
END-ACCESS

for

surrendering

rights

accessed

directory
MOUNT

STRUCTURE

for

making

and

ensuring

accessed

structure

the

available

continued

for

access,

availability of

structure

Examples

Access

another

@ACCESS

user's

directory.

Password:
Access

another

your

@ACCESS

user's

connected

directory

you

can

copy

file

from

rights

you

directory.

Password:

@COPY

<HOLLAND>MAX.MEM

<HOLLAND>MAX.MEM.l1l

@END-ACCESS

HOLMAX.MEM
HOLMAX.MEM.1l

directory

<MANUALS>CHKCRF.MAC

?Directory

@ACCESS

[OK]

Access the login
want to borrow.

@COPY

access

user

whose

CHKCRF.MAC

privileges

required

"“<MANUALS>CHKCRF.MAC"

Password:

@COPY

<MANUALS>CHKCRF.MAC CHKCRF.MAC

<MANUALS>CHKCRF.MAC.4

@END-ACCESS

group

CHKCRF.MAC.1l

[OK]

ACCESS (Cont.)

Access the directory of a
examine his directory and

@MOUNT STRUCTURE

SNARK:

Structure

Mounted

@ACCESS

SNARK:

user on
another
copy a file from

structure.
it.

SNARK: <HOLLAND>

Password:

’

@DIRECTORY
SNARK: <HOLLAND>
SNARK: <HOLLAND>

ACCT.MEM.1
ACTGEN.
.1

COMP.FOR.
1
COMPUT.CBL.
1

+.REL.1
DIFFER.FOR.1
1
«QOR,
MAIL.TXT.
2

OVERVIEW.MEM.1

Total of 9 files
@COPY SNARK:<HOLLAND>§OMP.FOR
SNARK:<HOLLAND>»COMP,.FOR,1
@END-~ACCESS

SNARK: <HOLLAND>

@DISMOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:

Structure

SNARK:

Dismounted

COMP.FOR.1l

[OK]

Then

ADVISE
Links your terminal with another user's terminal so that you can give
The advisee can still give commands to his job.
commands to his job.
Format

@ADVISE

(USER)

argument

where

argument

is either a user name or

number.

terminal

1line

Characteristics

Input

Other

Job

For as long as the ADVISE command
you give affect the advisee's job
Ending

is in effect, the commands
instead of your own.

Advice

To end
an
terminals,
on

either

Refused

Advice

advising
you must

1link
that
type CTRL/E.

you
have
formed
between
This CTRL/E is not echoed

terminal.

Ordinarily, you cannot advise a job unless its
terminal
Iis
set
to
receive
advice.
However,
1if
you
have Wheel or
Operator capabilities
enabled,
you
can
ADVISE
any
job,
providing
the
wuser
has
not
given
the
TERMINAL INHIBIT
command
.

Special

ADVISE

Commands

Once you are advising another
Jjob,
you
can
give
special
commands
to
send
comments
or
control
characters, or to
relink to a terminal
that
has
broken
1links
with
yours.
These

commands

CTRL/E

are:

End

ADVISE

link

CTRL/TM

Restart

an ADVISE link after a

CTRL/TM

(

Start

comment

CTRL/TM

)

End

comment

CTRL/TM

Display

typed

the

terminal

(or

the

(or

list

BREAK

advised

use

use
of

the

ADVISE

command

REMARK command)

REMARK command)
control

characters

ADVISE (Cont.)

CTRL/~<CHAR>

Send

CTRL/CHAR

Note that the tilde character
()
can
have
different
meanings
with
various
terminal
models.
Consult your terminal's
manual
for
the character equivalent to 36 octal in ASCII
code.

Special

Cases

Advisee

Has

Than

One

Job

than one

job

logged

under

the

wuser

name

Yyou

specify, the system gives you a list of that user's terminal
numbers and associated programs to choose from, then
prints
TTY:
to prompt your response.
Type your choice of terminal
number
Advising

after

the

prompt.

Pseudoterminal

(PTY:)

If you try to advise a PTY:

and

asks

the system informs you of

you to confirm with a carriage

return.

this

Restrictions

Compatible

Terminals

Unless the terminals
involved
in
an
advising
1link
have
compatible characteristics (e.g., terminal width, ability to
handle tabs and lowercase letters), some information can
be
To avoid this problem, the user of the
lost or overprinted.
faster or more capable terminal should adjust his terminal's
characteristics,
if
possible
before the ADVISE command is
given.

Detached

Jobs

You cannot advise detached

jobs.

Warning

Talking

Between

a VT10@

and

VT52

If links between VT10@ and VT52
terminals
are
established
using
an
ADVISE
(or
TALK) command, the VT52 may function
improperly during or after the
1linked
interval
(e.g.,
by
CTRL/Q commands to print multiple lines
frequent
requiring
of output).
Turning the terminal
off
and
then
on
again
(after the linked interval) will correct this problem.

ADVISE (Cont.)

Effect

Terminal

ADVISE

The

term inal's

command
1leaves
your
terminal
at
command level, controlling his job.

the

advisee's

Commands

RECEIVE ADVICE

for

allowing

REFUSE ADVICE

for

preventing

REMARK

for

sending

TALK

for linking terminals so
affect only your own job

TERMINAL

INHIBIT

for

other

users

other

users

comments

refusing

communication
messages, user
mail.

advise
from

you

advising

you

only

all

that

your

commands

types
of
terminal
advice, links, system
and
notices
of
new

including
messages,

Examples

Advise

user,

then

@ADVISE D.CROWLEY
Escape character
D.CROWLEY
LINK

FROM

JOB

LATTA,

immediately

<CTRL>E,

type

CTRL/E

<CTRL>"?

end

for

advice.

help

EXEC
TTY

226

[Advising]

INot displayed

“[Advice

terminated]

Advise

user's

job

@ADVISE BONSAVAGE
Escape character
BONSAVAGE

JOB

terminal

and

access

<CTRL>E,

TTY

IT'LL

DIRECTORY

ACCESS

THE

directory

type

<CTRL>"?

for

him.

for

help

EXEC

LINK FROM LATTA,
[Advising]

@ACCESS <SARTINI>

226

Password:

@!0KAY, NOW YOU CAN
@!Thank you.
“E

" [Advice terminated]

USE

1IT.

FOR

YOU,

THEN

YOU CAN

USE

IT.

ADVISE (Cont.)

Advise

another

user,

demonstrating

how

wuse

the

FILCOM

program.

D,CROWLEY

@ADVISE

Escape character

is <CTRL>E,

D.CROWLEY

EXEC

JOB

LINK FROM LATTA,
[Advising]

TTY

226

!EERE'S HOW 29 COMPARE
@FILCOM
*=VERCBL.TXT,

differences

type <CTRL>"? for help

FILES

USING THE FILCOM PROGRAM.

BAKVER.TXT/A

encountered

*AC

@ISEE?

@IMODE.

THE SWITCH AT THE END

(/A)

MEANS TO COMPARE THEM IN ASCIT

DON'T FORGET THE CTRL/C WHEN

YOU'RE

DONE.

@ ! THANKS.,
“E

“Tadvice terminated]

Advise

a user who

Choose one

@ADVISE
TTY25,

LATTA
EXEC

TTY4l,

EXEC

TTY27,
TTY: 27

EXEC

Escape character
LATTA

Job

is logged

EXEC

is <CTRL>E,

LINK FROM D.CROWLEY,
[Advising]

[Advice

in at

than

one

them.

terminated]

TTY

225

type <CTRL>"? for help

terminal.

APPEND
Adds

the

existing

contents of one or more

destination

source

file on disk,

files

the

end

leaving the original

of a

new

source

files

unchanged.

Format

QAPPEND (SOURCE FILE)
@@subcommand

source

fllespec(s)

(TO)

destination

filespec,

where

source

filespec(s)

is a

single

series

file

them

specification,

separated

by commas.

destination filespec

is the specification of the
destination
file on disk; this can be a new file.

@@subcommand

means that after

(when

ASCII

type
an optional
mode or format of

used

final

APPEND Command Subcommands
with the paper tape reader

specifies
are

that

written

the
1in

comma

you

can

keyword, modifying the
information transfer.

PTR:)

files being

ASCII

mode,

appended

with

36-bit

words
each
<consisting
of
five
7-bit
bytes
and
a parity bit; the parity bit
means that the eighth hole of the
paper
tape is never punched.
BINARY

specifies that the files being
appended
are
composed
of
36-bit
words,
each
consisting of six 6-bit bytes, with
the
seventh

always

hole

always
to
calculation.

BYTE

and

the

paper

tape

set

eighth

hole

set

causes

checksum

specifies that
the
byte
size
of
the
destination file is to be n (any decimal
number).
If you do not
give
the
BYTE
subcommand,
the
destination
file will
have the same byte size
as
the
source
file.

IMAGE

specifies that the
are
composed
of
consisting of one
most
significant

files being
appended
36-bit
words,
each
8-bit
byte;
the
28
bits
are
1lost
on

output.

IMAGE

BINARY

same

BINARY,

but

lacking

the

checksum

APPEND (Cont.)

APPEND

(when

used

with devices

Command

other

Subcommands

than

specifies

ASCII

the

that

are
written
words
each

bytes

and

paper

the

tape

files

reader)

being

in ASCII mode,
consisting
of

parity bit;

appended

with
five

36-bit
7-bit

the parity bit

means that the least significant
set to @ on input and is lost on
BINARY

calls for a direct
36-bit bytes

BYTE

specifies that
the
byte
size
of
the
destination file is to be n (any decimal
number).
If you do not
give
the
BYTE
subcommand,
the
destination
file will
have the same byte size
as
the
source
file.

IMAGE
IMAGE

BINARY

same

BINARY

same

BINARY

transfer

bit
is
output.

data

1in

Output

As each file is appended, the system prints its specification and
if recognition is used on the destination
the
word
[OK].
file specification, the system prints its status (0ld generation,
New
generation, New file, or Superseding, for disk files; or OK,
if the files are appended to a non-disk device).

Characteristics

Files

Appended

Order

Specified

The APPEND command attaches source files to the
file in the order you specify them; the contents
specified source will appear at the end of
the
file when APPEND is finished.

Subcommands

destination
of the last
destination

Optional

For most purposes you do not need to
use
subcommands
when
transferring
information
with
the
APPEND command.
These
subcommands, specifying the format of
the
appended
files,
are
required
only when using certain devices (for example,
devices of the form MTn:
(tape drives) using labeled tapes,
or PTR:
(paper tape reader)) or under particular conditions
(for
example,
when
transferring
files
over
network
facilities).
If
you
are
appending information from disk
files
or
from
your
terminal
and
you
do
not
wuse
any
subcommands,
the
data will be appended as written, whether
in a standard format (usually ASCII or binary) or not.

APPEND (Cont.)

Special

Cases

Wildcard

Characters

Wildcard characters (* and %)
specifications
only.
The
alphabetical

Appending

can be
used
in
files
are
then

source
file
appended
in

order.

Information

from

your

Terminal

If you type TTY:
in place of
source
file
specifications,
the
system
appends
any
characters
you
then type (after
completing the command itself), until you give a
CTRL/Z
to
return
your
terminal
to
TOPS-20
command level.
CTRL/U,
CTRL/R, CTRL/W, and the Delete key can be used to
edit
the
current line of terminal input.

Restrictions

Source

Files

With

Differing

You can use the
magnetic
tape,

Formats

APPEND
command
to
transfer
data
from
a
terminal, card reader, paper tape reader, or

other device to disk files, but if
differing
formats
are
specified
some

Mixing

data

can

Sequenced

and

lost

the

Unsequenced

source files
written
Iin
within the same command,

transfer.

Files

Source files created by the EDIT program should not
contain
sequence
numbers when they are appended.
Mixing files that
contain sequence numbers with files that do not
will
cause
EDIT to function improperly if used on the resulting file.

Appending

Archived

Files

You can append the contents of an archived file
to
another
file,
by specifying it as the first (or source) argument of
an APPEND command.
You can then edit
the
resulting
file,
because it does not gain archive status although part of its
contents are the same as those of
the
archived
file;
the
archived
file
remains unchanged.
However, you cannot give
the specification of an archived
file
as
the
second
(or
destination)
argument
of
an APPEND command, as this would
change the file's contents.

Commands

COPY

for

making

copies

files

APPEND (Cont.)

Examples

Use

the

APPEND command

@QAPPEND FORT.FOR
FORT.FOR.8 [OK]

Append

two

join

two

files.

FIL,FOR

files to

@APPEND FORT.FOR,
FORT.FOR.8 [OK]
GORT.FOR.6 [OK]

the end of a

third

file.

GORT.FOR GIL.FOR

Access a directory and append a file from it
connected

your

@ACCESS

directory.

file

files

the

Password:

@APPEND <MANUALS>REL3A.MEM REL3A.MEM
4
<MANUALS>REL3A.,MEM,.
@END-ACCESS <MANUALS>

[OK]

Use a wildcard character

end of another

(%)

to append several

file.

@APPEND %ORT.FOR HIL.FOR
FORT.FOR.8 [OK]
GORT.FOR.6
HORT.FOR.3
MORT.FOR.2

[OK]
[OK)
[OK]

Use

a wildcard

new

file.

character with the APPEND command

to create

@APPEND *,TXT BACKUP.TXT
MAIL.TXT.1 [OK]
NEWRUN,TXT.1 [OK]
NX.TXT.1 [OK]

the
of
Append a message from your terminal to the beginning
the symbolic generation
Use
5.
Example
1in
created
file
number -1

specify this action.

@APPEND TTY:,BACKUP,TXT BACKUP,TXT.-1
TTY:

ITHIS IS A BACKUP FILE FOR ALL TEXT FILES.
Z

BACKUP.TXT.1

[OK]

ARCHIVE

a permanent
tape,
and

Asks that
magnetic
modified.

off-line
prevents

copy of
specified
the disk copy (if

files
be
made
on
retained) from being

Format

QARCHIVE (FILES)
@@sub command

filespec,...,

where

files pec

is the specification of a file of
you

want

means

@@sub command

permanent

that,

after

arguments

commas,

the

you

form

can

give

already

shown

means that'after a final comma
type

the

following

RETAIN

which

of
be

which

copy

optional

causes

the

you

can

subcommand:

disk

copies

the files being archived to
retained in your directory,

rather

than

deleted

and

expunged

Output

Notic e

Archive

Sent

Whenever

ARCHIVE

command

file

Requestor

taken

(for

off

example,

1line

when

you

RETAIN
subcommand),
the
operator
notifying you that the file has been

result
not

also

sends
a
archived.

mail

vyour

give

the
message

Characteri stics

Archi ved

Files

Unalterable

You cannot change the contents
of
ARCHIVE command once the command is

specified
in
an
even if the files
are not immediately copied to tape.
This
means
that
you
cannot
alter
or
add
to
them by using the EDIT or APPEND
command, or overwrite them
by
using
the
COPY
or
RENAME
command.
In
general,
files
for which you have requested
archival must not be given as the second
filespec
argument
of these commands.

files
given,

ARCHIVE (Cont.)

Archived

Files

Invisible

The files you
specify
in
an
ARCHIVE
command
ordinarily
become
invisible
to
most
TOPS-2@ commands as soon as the
ARCHIVE command is
given.
However,
1if
you
1include
the
RETAIN subcommand when giving the ARCHIVE command, the files
remain visible.
©See Related Commands, below, for a list
of
commands you can use with invisible files.

Commands

CANCEL ARCHIVE

for

canceling

archival

requests

DELETE,

with

the

ARCHIVE

subcommand
for deleting

archived

CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand
deleting
for
copy of files
tape

files

disk
the
only
that also have a

copy

DIRECTORY,

with

the ARCHIVE subcommand
on
for requesting information
archived
files
(visible
and
invisible) only

DIRECTORY,

with

the

INVISIBLE subcommand
for requesting information
invisible files only

DISCARD

for giving

on-line

INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS

SET FILE

accomplished

for restoring

off-line

files

for

visible

files

invisible

files

(visible
and
on-line status

INVISIBLE

making

invisible

SET FILE VISIBLE

for

making

visible

tape copy of

for
determining
if
archival
files
specified
the
for
has
invisible)
and
(visible

been

RETRIEVE

up the

files

invisible)

ARCHIVE (Cont.)

Examples

Archive

file.

@ARCHIVE

ARTEST.FIL

ARTEST.FIL.1

[Requested]

Archive

file,

status

files.

@ARCHIVE

but

keep

copy

disk.

Check

Retain

contents

the

Archive

requested,

ARTEST.FIL.1

Archive

requested

Attempt

to use the EDIT
editor
to
edit
an
(first you must make it visible).
Note that,
unedited backup copy is
the
archived
file,
edited file has no archive status.

@INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS ARTEST.FIL
ARTEST.FIL.l

Archive

requested

QEDIT ARTEST.FIL
$No

such

Input:

20100

filename,

@SET FILE

file

VISIBLE ARTEST.FIL

ARTEST.FIL.1

[OK]

@EDIT

ARTEST.FIL

Edit:

ARTEST.FIL.1

90199

New

*EQ

Creating

ARTEST.FIL.2

ITEST FILE FOR ARCHIVING

*1200

99200

IFIRST MODIFICATION

g0300

*P“:*

00109

ITEST

90200
*EU

IFIRST MODIFICATION

FILE

FOR

ARCHIVING

[ARTEST.FIL2]
,

@INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS ARTEST.*
ARTEST.QIL.1

Archive

requested

@TYPE ARTEST.QIL

ITEST FILE FOR ARCHIVING

@TYPE ARTEST.FIL
ITEST

FILE

FOR

ARCHIVING

IFIRST MODIFICATION

@DIRECTORY ARTEST.*
MISC:<LATTA>
ARTEST.FIL,2

.QIL.1
Total

files
14

archived
file
afterwards, the
and
that
the

ASSIGN

Reserves a

specific

input-output device

for your

job.

Format

@ASSIGN

(DEVICE)

dev:

where

dev:

is the name of the device
you
want
to
colon after the device name is optional.

assign.

The

Restrictions

Assigning

Magnetic

Tape

Drives

You can use the ASSIGN command to assign tape drives only if
they
are
of the form MTAn:.
Tape device names of the form
MTn:
are
1logical
device
names
only,
and
are
assigned
automatically at

the

time of MOUNT TAPE commands.

Commands

DEASSIGN

for

releasing

assigned

MOUNT

previously

device

for
mounting
a
structure
or
magnetic
tape
set
without
assigning a specific drive

INFORMATION AVAILABLE

DEVICES

for

finding out

can
be
assigned

which

assigned
or
to your job

devices

have been

Examples

Assign a

tape drive

your

job.

@QASSIGN MTAQ:

Find
then

out which devices are
available
assign one to your job.

@INFORMATION AVAILABLE

PCDR@,

DCN,

SRV

Devices
@GASSIGN

CDP

assigned
PCDRO:

timesharing

DEVICES

Devices available to this job:
DSK, PS, SNARK, MISC, LANG, MTAl,
CDR,

for

FEl-15,

PTY2¢-61,

to/opened

by this

LPT,

LPTd,

NUL,

PLT,

job:

TTY4l

LPT1
PLTY

use,

ATTACH

Attaches

job

your

terminal.

Format

@ATTACH

(USER)

number

name

the

number

the job number
Default
the
only
job,
or
only
detached
job, or only job
other
than
your
current
job,
logged
in under the
user name you give

PASSWORD:

name

(JOB

password

where

password

user

the

name

the

associated

job's

owner

password

(not

requested if you are currently logged in
under the same user name as the job that
you are attaching)

Characteristics

Current
If

job
out

Job

Detached

you give

the

ATTACH

command

is
detached.
You
this detached job.

can

while

use

the

logged

in,

your

current

LOGOUT n command

log

Hint

Using

ATTACH

Restore

Phoned-in

Jobs

If you log in to the system by telephone lines
and
service
is
interrupted
for
any
reason, use the ATTACH command to
restore the connection.
If you do not do
this
within
the
time limit set by the system manager (usually five minutes),

your job will be
to log in again.

logged

out

automatically

and

you

will

have

ATTACH (Cont.)

Warning

Attaching

Attached

Jobs

The system will ask
you
to
confirm
your
choice
with
a
carriage return before attaching to your terminal a job that
is attached elsewhere.
If you attach an attached
job
that
is
running
a program, that program may be sent one or more
CTRL/Cs,

which

themselves.
DETACH

command

attached,

ATTACH

Effect

The

are
at

can

affect

avoid

programs

this

from

the

then

attach

that

possibility

terminal

this

which

job

handle

you
the

your

must

CTRL/C

give

program's

terminal

with

job

command.

Memory,

Terminal,

and

Job

ATTACH

command affects neither memory nor the
job
that
vyou
attaching (but see Warning, above), and leaves your terminal

TOPS-20

command

level

unless

program

being

run

the

job.
If a program is being run, your terminal is left at command
level, if any, in the job.
Your terminal's characteristics
will
be
those
established
in the job from which you gave the ATTACH
command; if you were not logged in, they will be reset to
system
default characteristics.

Commands

SYSTAT

for

finding

associated

out

with

the

any

wuser

name

and

job

DETACH

for

disengaging

job

from

your

own

UNATTACH

for

disengaging

job

from

any

other

terminal

Examples

Attach

@QATTACH

your

only

job,

which

presently

detached.

LATTA

Password:

Attach

one

several

@ATTACH LATTA
# required
@SYSTAT LATTA

?Job

37
54

@ATTACH

DET
DET

EXEC
NRRY
LATTA iz

detached

jobs.

LATTA has more
LATTA
LATTA

Password:_

than

one

detached

job

number

ATTACH (Cont.)

Check
[*]),

your jobs (your current job is marked with an
then attach the only detached job.,
Verify the

asterisk
system's

action.

LATTA

@SYSTAT
37
58
50*

26
NEWRUN
LATTA
DET
EXEC
LATTA
231
EXEC
LATTA
@ATTACH LATTA
Detaching job # 59
@INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
Host

AURORA

Job 58,
Account

User
341

LATTA,

PS:<LATTA>,

Start a program in one
attach another of your
@INFORMATION
Host

Then

detach

and

continue

JOB-STATUS

AURORA

Job 9,
Account

@RUN

job.
jobs.

TTY231

User LATTA,
341 TTY26

PS:<LATTA>,

FFACTOR

~“C

@DETACH CONTINUE
Detaching

job

INot displayed

TEDDY,

@SYSTAT
9

45%*
GATTACH

Controller

terminal

Dept.

TOPS-20

LATTA
DET

FFACTO

LATTA

41
SYSTAT
LATTA fié

LATTA

[Attached

TTY4l,

confirm]

Password:

Monitor

6.1 (7)

it,

and

BACKSPACE
Moves a magnetic tape set backward over a specified number of files or
records.

Format

(DEVICE)

@BACKSPACE

n units

dev:

where

is the name of the tape set or magnetic tape drive that

dev:

you

name

want to move backward.

The colon after the device

is optional.

is the number of files or records over which

units

backspace
Default

either FILES or
Default units

you

want

RECORDS
- FILES

Restrictions

BACKSPACE with

Open

Files

If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has
opened a magnetic tape drive and you then give the BACKSPACE

first ask if
command for that tape drive, the system will
You must do so for
to close the associated file.
you want
BACKSPACE to succeed, but you will

continue
now be

the

probably

wunable

program from that point because the file will

closed.

RECORDS Argument Used

for Unlabeled Tapes Only

BACKSPACE
the
to
argument
RECORDS
the
You cannot give
a labeled tape, because read and write
command when using
the
to
tape
operations for labeled tapes always move the
beginning

of a

file

first.

BACKSPACE (Cont.)

Commands

SKIP

for

moving

a magnetic

REWIND

for backspacing a
logical beginning

UNLOAD

for completely
source reel

tape
(the

tape

set

volume
or
beginning of

rewinding

Backspace

your

magnetic

@BACKSPACE MTA@:

tape

1 FILE

one

tape
set
the first

magnetic

Examples

forward

file.

tape

to
its
file)
onto

the

BLANK

Clears your video

terminal

screen.

Format

@BLANK

(SCREEN)

Characteristics

This command moves the cursor to line 1 of the screen, providing
you with a clean area for typing commands and receiving system
output.

Restriction

The BLANK command functions only if you have

set

your

terminal

type with the TERMINAL command or the unsupported TTYINI program.

BREAK

Breaks the
command.

communication

link

made

between

terminals

with

the

TALK

Format

@BREAK

(LINKS WITH)

argument

where
argument

user

name

Default

line

all

number.

communication

links

Restrictions

Does

Not

End

Advice

The

BREAK command, given at either of
the
ADVISE
command,
does
not
ADVISE link, type CTRL/E.
by

two
end

terminals
advice.

Jjoined

end

Commands

TALK

for

establishing

another
REFUSE

LINKS

communication

links

with

terminal

for

preventing

your

terminal

future

communication

1links

with

Examples

Use

the

BREAK

command

end

TALK

speak

another

user,

YOU TELL ME WHERE THE

PROJECT

ESTIMATES ARE STORED?

session

with

another

@BREAK

Use
to

the
end

@TALK
LINK

@IHI.

TALK
the

command

conversation.

then

use

BREAK

PORADA
FROM

@ISURE:

LATTA,

CAN

@I THANKS.
@BREAK

TTY

THEY'RE ON TAPE LS2.0
BYE

IN THE

“_

LIBRARY.

BUILD
Creates, modifies, or deletes a subdirectory to a directory
you have

which

write access.

Format

(DIRECTORY NAME)

@BUILD

str:<directory>

@@subcommand

where

(mounted)

is the name of the

str:

directory

the

containing

structure

you

are

building.

directory

is the name of

The

building.

the

directory

you

name

are

can

alphanumeric
fewer
or
39
contain
following
the
including
characters,
The
S.
- __and
special characters:
name must be enclosed in angle brackets
<> or square brackets

@@subcommand

indicates that you

subcommand

mode

BUILD command

line

[].

automatically

after

completing

enter

the

Summary of BUILD Command Subcommands (defaults in boldface)
ABORT

ABSOLUTE-ARPANET-SOCKETS
ACCOUNT-DEFAULT account
ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
ARPANET-ACCESS
ARPANET-WIZARD
CONFIDENTIAL
DECNET-ACCESS

DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION octal protection code

Default

n 7777880

Default

n -

Default

n -

DIRECTORY-GROUP group number
DISABLE

ENABLE
ENQ-DEQ

FILES-ONLY
GENERATIONS n
IPCF

KILL

LIST

NAME-ONLY
FAST

VERBOSE
MAINTENANCE

MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES n
ABSOLUTE-ARPANET-SOCKETS
ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
NOT

ARPANET-ACCESS
ARPANET-WIZARD
CONFIDENTIAL

BUILD (Cont.)

DECNET-ACCESS
DIRECTORY-GROUP

group

number

ENQ-DEQ
FILES-ONLY
NOT

IPCF

(Cont.)|

KILL
MAINTENANCE
OPERATOR
REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES

SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP
USER-OF-GROUP

group

number

WHEEL

NUMBER

octal directory number
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT date or +n
ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT date or +n

OPERATOR

PASSWORD

39-character

Default

259

Default

word

PERMANENT | pages
INFINITY
PRESERVE
PROTECTION

octal

protection

code

7777900

PUSH
REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES

SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP group number
TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER n,n

USER=-OF=GROUP

group

number

WHEEL

WORKING]|

pages

Default

INFINITY

BUILD

Command

ABORT

Subcommands

cancels
BUILD

all

work

command.

does

done

during

current

directory

was

new,

remains

not
unchanged.

exist;

allows

directory owner

old,

ABSOLUTE-ARPANET-SOCKETS

the

ARPANET

network

connections

establish

using

32-bit

absolute
socket
numbers;
users
with
Wheel
or Operator capabilities can also
perform this
function.
For
wuse
only
with
systems
that
are
members of the

ARPA

network.

Guide

for

WHEEL

ACCOUNT-~DEFAULT

See

OPERATOR

the

TOPS-20AN

information.

User's

Requires

capabilities,

account

causes
charged

the

user

his

for
does

specified
a terminal

not

command.

account

to
be
session whenever
include an account
1in

259

BUILD (Cont.)

ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES

causes on-line files that
have
to be marked for archiving.

expired

ARPANET-ACCESS

allows the directory owner to
establish
ARPANET
network
connections.
This
subcommand
works
in
conjunction
with
pre-established system manager controls.
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities.

ARPANET-WIZARD

allows
the
directory
owner
to
use
special queues for sending and receiving
information on the ARPANET network.
For
use
only
with systems that are members
of the ARPA network.
See the
TOPS-20AN

User's
Guide
for
more
information.
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities.
CONFIDENTIAL

grants the directory owner
confidential
information
access
capabilities,
allowing
him
to
obtain
confidential
information
within
the
system
via
certain monitor calls.
See the
TOPS-2¢

Monitor

Calls

Reference

details.
Requires
capabilities.
DECNET-ACCESS

DEFAULT-FILE-~PROTECTION

WHEEL

Manual for

OPERATOR

allows the directory owner to
establish
DECNET
network
connections.
This
subcommand
works
in
conjunction
with
pre-established system manager controls.
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities.
octal protection code
assigns this number as

protection
code
subsequently placed

default
for
the
of
each
file
in the directory.

The protection code is
constructed
(by
addition)
from
the
octal values shown
below:

77
40
20

full access to the file
read the file
write and delete the file

execute
the

the

program

contained

file

append to the file
@2
1list
the
files
specification
using DIRECTORY-class commands
@@ no access to the file
Default code - 7777080

See the TOPS-20 User's
Guide
for
information about protection codes.

BUILD (Cont.)

DIRECTORY~-GROUP

group

number

places the directory in a group, thereby
allowing
wusers in the same group access
to it according to the middle two digits
of
the
protection
code, and access to
files in the directory according to
the
middle
two
digits
of
each
file's
protection code.
You can assign
up
to
40
directory
group
numbers
to
each
directory, with values
ranging
from
1
through
262143
(2**18 - 1),
See
the
TOPS-20

System

discussion of
DISABLE

suspends
you

any

may

Manager's

special

have

subcommand

Guide

for

groups.
capabilities

activated

with

the

ENABLE

activate

any

the

that
ENABLE

TOPS-20

command.

ENABLE

allows

you

privileged

capabilities that the system manager has
given you and that you may
need
during
the BUILD session.
ENQ-DEQ

grants the directory owner
the
to
perform
global
Enqueue and
functions;
TOPS-2@

these

Monitor

Requires WHEEL or
FILES-ONLY

declares
files-only

are
Calls

discussed
Reference

Restrictions

1in

the

Manual.

OPERATOR capabilities.

the
directory
to
directory,
1i.e.,

associated

ability
Dequeue

with
a
Files-only

be
one

a
not

user.
See
Directories,

below.
GENERATIONS

specifies a default for
the
number
of
successive
generations
of
files to be
retained in the directory.
This
number
must
be from # to 15, with # meaning an
infinite number.
Default

IPCF

allows the directory
owner
to
execute
all privileged IPCF functions; these are
discussed in the TOPS-2¢
Monitor
Calls
Reference
Manual.
Requires
WHEEL
or
OPERATOR

KILL

capabilities.

eliminates

the directory and
any
files
it
contains
from
the system; you must
confirm this subcommand
with
an
extra
RETURN,

BUILD (Cont.)

NAME-ONLY

LIST

FAST

VERBOSE

your terminal of
1listing at
provides a
directory
the
parameter values set for
TOPS-20 commands, BUILD subcommands,
by
always
The FAST listing
or by default.
name,

subdirectory's

includes

the

log-in,

group

limits,
storage
permanent
working and
have been set, directory
they
if
and,
number
number, account default, maximum
this
to
allowed
subdirectories
of
last
of
time
and
directory, the date
memberships,

and

user

this
by
assignable
numbers
group
The VERBOSE listing adds the
directory.
by
assigned
other values that c¢an be

NAME-ONLY
while
subcommands,
BUILD
restricts output to the directory name.
Default

MAINTENANCE

FAST

execute
to
owner
allows the directory
system maintenance functions or
certain

TOPS-20
monitor calls; discussed in the
Manual.
Reference
Calls
Monitor
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities.
MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES n

allows the owner of

this

directory

build up to n subdirectories of his own,
the
from
and subtracts an equal number
value of this parameter for the superior
directory

[ ABSOLUTE-ARPANET-SOCKETS

ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES

ARPANET-ACCESS
ARPANET-WIZARD
CONFIDENTIAL
DECNET-ACCESS

DIRECTORY-GROUP group number
ENQ-DEQ

FILES-ONLY
NOT

IPCF

withdraws the specified subcommand

KILL

MAINTENANCE
OPERATOR

REPEAT--LOGIN-MESSAGES

SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP group number
USER-OF-GROUP group number

WHEEL

BUILD (Cont.)

NUMBER

octal

directory

number

assigns

a specific directory number to a
directory
(note:
usually
the
default is adequate).
Directory numbers
new

through

users,

they

must

never

are

reserved

assigned
for

system

use.

Default

directory

by
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT

date

number

the

tape

expiration

files that are to go off
migration or archiving.
"+n",

the

expiration

date

the

default

system

maximum
(ABOUT)
ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT

date

with

the

will

are

days

moved

off

cannot

exceed

Check

the

command

INFORMATION

the

disk

expiration

for

the
the
the

grants

Operator

capabilities

the

owner

directory;

these

are

OPERATOR

date

files
that
are
to
be
created in
directory.
If
you
specify
"+n",
expiration
date will be n days from
creation date.

the

further

the

TOPS~20

Operator's

the
system

discussed

PASSWORD

for

SYSTEM-STATUS.

establishes

OPERATOR

date

maximum,

date

line because of
If you
specify

date

files

line.
The

assigned

establishes

from

system

39-character

Guide.
Requires
capabillities.

WHEEL

word

assigns

a
alphanumeric

to the
special

password,
consisting
characters and hyphens
directory.
You can
include
characters

password

each

special

characters

except

;

of
(-),
any
and ?

typing

CTRL/V

before

character.

Unlike

special

in
file
specifications,
is
required
only when creating
password, not when using it.

CTRL/V

the

BUILD (Cont.)

PERMANENT | pages
INFINITY

storage
disk
permanent
allocates
directory,
the
to
capacity (in pages)
an equal number from the
subtracts
and
the
of
permanent disk storage capacity
allows
INFINITY
directory.
superior
Operator
or
Wheel
with
users
an unlimited
allocate
to
capabilities
The
directory.
number of pages to the
storage of the superior
disk
permanent
The
INFINITY.
be
directory must also

number

limited
the

of
to

that

pages

the number of

can

free

be used
pages

structure.

for
intended
1is
The INFINITY argument
it is not
directories;
system
special
intended for general
Default pages -

PRESERVE

users.

250

of
values
preserves the
PERMANENT,
directory's

superior
the
and
WORKING

parameters.
MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES
the PERMANENT, WORKING,
stops
PRESERVE

subcommands
MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES
and
from the
values
the
subtracting
from
directory.
superior
the
in
quotas
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities.

PROTECTION octal

protection code

protection
directory
assigns the given
The protection
the directory.
to
code
from
addition)
code is constructed (by
the octal values

g4
)Y/

full

shown below:

the directory

access to

the
1in
access to files
expung ing
(including
with
files), consistent

protection of

connect to

the

files

directory
individual
file
the

directory

without

a password, undelete files,
giving
and
directory,
expunge the entire
change times, dates, and accounting
other
All
information for files.
file
the
by
governed
1is
access
protection of each file.
create files in the directory
no access to the directory
Default

code -

777700

for
Guide
See the TOPS-2@ User's
information about protection codes.

BUILD (Cont.)

PUSH

creates

one

EXEC

from

command
new

and
to

information
BUILD

You

that

return

BUILD.

you
REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES

want

causes

all

the

can

the

with

create

system

this

TOPS-20

obtain

during

the

command

Example

refers
the
You

POP

the

BUILD

issue

conditions

define

DEFAULT-EXEC:,

terminal

then

See

the

you may need

This
subcommand
defined
by
command

your

Give

DEFAULT-EXEC:.

1issued

can

create

session.

inferior

you

leaves

level.

commands

level

which

to
the
logical
use

job

the

DEFINE

logical

the

name

each

time

you

messages

EXEC
name
name,

the

EXEC

PUSH.

(mail

sent

privileged users to all users, contained
in the file, PS:<SYSTEM>MAIL.TXT) to
be
printed on the user's terminal each time
he logs in to this directory.
If
this
subcommand
is
not
given,
only
those
system

time
SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP

messages

group

logged

created

are

since

the

last

printed.

number

allows propagation of any or all of
group
numbers
in
a
directory's
group list to the subdirectories of

directory.
Issuing
this
the first step required in
subdirectory group rights.

the
user
that

subcommand is
establishing
You complete

the process by issuing the USER-OF-GROUP
subcommand
for
each subdirectory.
You
can assign up to
40
subdirectory
user
group
numbers
to
each directory, with
values
ranging
from
1
to
262143
(2**18 - 1).
TOPS1#-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER

allows

project

TOPS-10

number,

programs

project-programmer
create

subjobs

TOPS-28.

The

number
in
programmer

number.
from

for
USER-OF-GROUP

number

the

project

the

that

Separate

(PPN)

the

compatible
number

range
is

programmer

number

require

number

example

programmer

with

octal

10-377777.
six-digit

octal

project

number

The

number

with

comma,

the

given

17,76.

assigns

the

group.
numbers

You
can
assign up to 40 group
to each directory,
with
wvalues

ranging
See

the

for

directory owner

from

262143

TOPS-20 System

discussion

(2**18

Manager's

of groups.

1).

Guide

BUILD (Cont.)

WHEEL

grants Wheel capabilities to
the
owner
to
him
allowing
directory,
the
of
functions
privileged
the
all
perform

are
these
system;
the
on
TOPS-20
the
in
further
or
WHEEL
Requires
Guide.
OPERATOR capabilties.

available
discussed
Operator's

WORKING[?ages

INFINITY

allocates

working disk storage capacity

and
directory,
the
to
pages)
(in
the
from
number
equal
an
subtracts
the
of
capacity
storage
working disk
This working space
directory.
superior
the
to
allocated
is
is temporary and
only while the user is logged
directory
in.
Ordinarily, working
storage limits are equal.

and

permanent

INFINITY
allows
users
with
Wheel
or
an
allocate
to
capabilities
Operator
the
to
pages
of
number
unlimited
The working disk storage of
directory.
be
also
must
directory
superior
the
INFINITY,
The number of pages that can
be used is limited to the number of free
pages

The

the

structure.

INFINITY argument

special

system

intended

directories;

intended for general
Default pages -

for

it is not

users.
250

Characteristics

BUILD and

“ECREATE

privileged
the
The BUILD command is identical in format to
If you use BUILD with Wheel or Operator
command.
“ECREATE

“ECREATE,
as
power
same
capabilities enabled, it has the
create directories and modify the parameters of
to
namely,
<capabilities,
these
Without
any directory on the system.
restricted set of
to modify a more
BUILD
use
you can
you can modify a directory if you have write
directories:
The LOGIN,
immediately superior directory.
the
to
access
the
to
write access
obtains
command
CONNECT, or ACCESS
directory; or, if you have sufficient group rights
superior
its
to the superior directory, you can use BUILD to modify
subdirectories.

Information

directories,
create
For a description of using "ECREATE to
see
the
TOPS-2¢
Operator's
Command
Language
Reference

Manual.

BUILD (Cont.)

Quotas

Subtracted

Working
maximum

from

the

Superior

Directory's

and permanent disk
storage
page
number
of subdirectories allowed

Allotments

1limits,
and
the
to a subdirectory

are subtracted from the quotas allocated to the
immediately
superior
directory.
This subtraction occurs at the time of
their
allotment
to
a
subdirectory.
If
the
superior
directory's:
quota is not sufficient, the BUILD command will
fail.
(Note that if you
have
enabled
Wheel
or
Operator
capabilities,
you
can
stop the subtraction of quotas from
the superior directory with the PRESERVE subcommand.)

To increase
quantities

the superior directory's quota or any
of
these
you
must either kill some of its subdirectories
or reduce their allotments of the quantity.
Or you can
ask
the system manager to increase the allotment of the superior
directory.
Remember that unless
you
specify
working
and
permanent
page
limits, they will assume a default value of
250 pages.
The BUILD command will
fail
in
this
case
|if
there
are
not
at
least 250 pages free in the immediately
superior directory.

Assigning
If

Infinite

you

have

Wheel

assign
the
2**35-1) to
to

Quotas

INFORMATION

infinite

storage

command

disk

Operator

capabilities

maximum
storage
a directory.
This
DIRECTORY

capacity.

construct

storage

capacity

enabled,

you

can

1limit
of
34359738367 (i.e.,
will appear in
the
response
command

you

subdirectories

assigned,

even

then
to

the

this

+INF,

wuse

denoting

the

BUILD

directory,

maximum,

will

any

not

be subtracted from the superior directory.
You can use this
feature to assign infinite storage capacity to a
number
of
users sharing a private structure.
Then these users may use
storage

pack

space

fills

the

structure

without

limit

until

the

disk

up.

Hints

Keeping

Track

Subdirectories

Subdirectories appear as files of
type
.DIRECTORY
in
the
immediately superior directory, so the DIRECTORY * ,DIRECTORY
command
for
the
superior
directory
will
indicate
any
existing
subdirectories.
To suppress the listing of these
files you can use the SET FILE PROTECTION
command
to
give
them
a
protection of #9000F, but then you must specify the
files completely (including
generation
number)
to
access
them in the future.

BUILD (Cont.)

a
below
subdirectories
If there are two or more levels of
can do something else to allow a
you
directory,
superior
a group of
into
subdirectory
put each
listing of them:
which the owner of the highest-level superior directory is a
owner
Then, if you obtain the group rights of this
member.

if the superior
by using the LOGIN or ACCESS command
(e.g.,
on
directory is on the public structure, or ACCESS if it is
structure), the INFORMATION DIRECTORY <directory.*>
another
command with the NAME-ONLY subcommand will produce a listing
superior
beneath the
level
every
at
subdirectories
of
group
the
For this feature to operate properly
directory.
protection code must be at
subdirectory's
each
of
field
least

Modifying

44d.

Subdirectories

Easily

by making
1is,
that
above procedure,
the
By following
subdirectories at every level members of groups of which the
a
also
1is
directory
superior
owner of the highest-level
the modification of these subdirectories
you make
member,
these
You can use the BUILD command to modify
much easier.
and
read
or
subdirectories
have the group memberships of

connect

each

write to them, as long as you
not
need
You
owner.
this

subdirectory's immediate superior to make

modifications.

Restrictions

Giving

Capabilities to

Subdirectory Owners

Operator,
(Wheel,
capabilities
give
to
order
In
Confidential,
Arpanet-Wizard,
Absolute-Arpanet-Sockets,
Yyou
Eng-Deq, IPCF, or Maintenance) to a subdirectory owner,
and they must be
capabilities yourself,
these
must have
and
Wheel
BUILD command.
the
time of
the
enabled at
capabilities allow you to assign any capabilities.
Operator
The INFORMATION DIRECTORY command for your log-in directory
tells you which capabilities you have,

Modifying

Other

if any.

Directories

you
Unless you have Wheel or Operator capabilities enabled,
only
of
parameters
the
modify
to
command
BUILD
the
use
can
you
which
those directories subordinate to a directory to
Characteristics - BUILD and
(See
access.
write
have
Easily,
Subdirectories
Hints - Modifying
and
“ECREATE,
If your installation allows it, you can use the SET
above.)
these
of
parameters
some
change
to
command
DIRECTORY
directories.

Files-only Directories

By giving the FILES-ONLY subcommand you make the directory a
A files-only directory
files-only directory (see Figure 1).
not be given
should
is not associated with a user and so
a
Although
group memberships.
user
or
capabilities
these
files-only directory can have subdirectories, none of
You cannot give the ACCESS or
directory.
user
a
be
can
LOGIN command

for

files—only directory.
33

BUILD (Cont.)

Killing

Directories

You

cannot

you
kill

kill a directory that has
subdirectories;
first
must
kill
those subdirectories one by one.
(When you
a directory, the files
it
contains
are
deleted
and

expunged.)

Also,

logged

into

it.

Restricted
Your

cannot

connected

BUILD

Command

kill

it,

directory

there

are

you

open

Use

system

manager

may

make

available
only
capabilities.

the

BUILD

users

and

with

SET

DIRECTORY

enabled

Wheel

Commands

INFORMATION

DIRECTORY

for

examining

established
INFORMATION

DISK-USAGE

for

SET

DIRECTORY

for

the

determining

directory's
assigned to

disk
files

changing

parameters

directory
how

much

space

certain

directory

<CHEM>

<CHEM.ALLEN>

<<CHEM.BLAKE:-

)

<CHEM.ALLEN.LAB>

<CHEM.BLAKE.LAB: -

(files-only)

<CHEM.LAB-NOTES>
(files-only)

<CHEM.TESTS>
(fites-only)

(tiles-only)

MR-§-3904-85

Directories

and

Subdirectories

already

parameters

Figure

are

files

’

commands
Operator

you

BUILD (Cont.)

Examples

The examples show how a user with a directory named <CHEM> builds
subdirectories

in the pattern shown

in Figure 1.

employees,
or
students
your
of
Build directories for two
assigning disk space and passwords and placing them in one of
your directory groups; check their parameters.
@BUILD <CHEM.ALLEN>
[New]
@@WORKING 50

@@PERMANENT 50
@@PASSWORD 619JIM
@@DIRECTORY-GROUP 2391
@ALIST
NAME

<CHEM.ALLEN>

Working disk storage page limit 50
Permanent disk storage page limit 54
Account default for LOGIN - none set
Directory groups 2391
Qe
@BUILD
[New]

<CHEM.BLAKE>

@@WORKING 5@
@@PERMANENT 50
@@PASSWORD 127BIL
@@DIRECTORY-GROUP 2391

@eLIST
Name

<CHEM.BLAKE>

Working disk storage page limit 54
Permanent disk storage page limit 50
Account default for LOGIN
Directory groups 2391

none

set

Modify

Blake's

directory

allow

him

create

subdirectories.

@BUILD <CHEM.BLAKE>
[01d]
@@MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES 2
ee

Build a files-only directory to store examination questions.
@BUILD <CHEM.TESTS>
[New]
@@AFILES-ONLY

@@WORKING 10
@EPERMANENT 10
@@PASSWORD MINERVA

@@DIRECTORY~GROUP 2391
Q@

BUILD (Cont.)

Build a files-only directory as a library directory for
your
subdirectory
owners.
Place the directory and these users in
the same group.

@BUILD
[New]

<CHEM.LAB-NOTES>

@@FILES-ONLY
@@WORKING 25

25
@@PERMANENT

774000

@@PROTECTION

@@DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION 775200
@@DIRECTORY-GROUP

Q@
@BUILD
[014d]

<CHEM.ALLEN>

2392

@@QUSER-GROUP
Q@
@BUILD

2392

<CHEM.BLAKE>

[014d]

2392

@@QUSER-GROUP
Q@
User

Blake

quits.,

@BUILD

[01Id]

Delete

his

directory.

<CHEM,BLAKE>

QE@KILL

[Confirm]

Q@
Modify a
have 350

subdirectory so that the
disk pages available.

@BUILD

subdirectory's

owner

will

<TUCKER.TEST>

[01d]

@@PERMANENT 350
@ee
?Request

Please

exceeds

fix

superior

incorrect

directory

permanent

quota.

subcommands.

The action above produced an error message.
error,
PUSH
out
of
the
BUILD
session
superior directory's permanent quota is.

To
to

correct
what

learn

the
the

@ePUSH
TOPS-20

Command

processor

5(702)

QINFORMATION DISK-USAGE
PS: <TUCKER>

790

Pages

assigned

261

Working

7546

Pages

pages,
free on

Then return to the
quota that is less
disk pages.

@POP
[Continuing
@EPERMANENT

261 Permanent pages allowed
PS:, 144454 pages used.

BUILD session,
and
specify
than the superior directory's

BUILD
170

of directory

Qe
36

a
permanent
quota of 261

PS:<TUCKER.TEST>]

CANCEL

Cancels

requests made

with

queue-class

command.

Format

@CANCEL

(REQUEST TYPE)

queue

(ID)

the

name

o f

identifier/switch(es)

where
queue

following

the

queue,

from

the

using

the

chosen

list:
for
requests
ARCHIVE command

ARCHIVE

for

BATCH

made

requests made

using

the

SUBMIT

using

the

PUNCH

the

MOUNT

command

for

CARDS

requests made

CARDS

for

MOUNT

command

requests made

STRUCTURE
PAPER-TAPE

for

requests made

PAPER-TAPE

for

PLOT

using

MOUNT

commahnd

TAPE

using

the

PUNCH

command

requests made

using

the

PLOT

command

for

requests made

using

the

command

for

RETRIEVE

requests

RETRIEVE
request

made

using

the

command

number

the
by

unique
the

identifier

system

your

assigned
request.

This is the
number
appearing
under
the
heading
"“Reqg#" in
the list of requests shown
by
the
appropriate
INFORMATION
command

(see

below).
requests,
argument

Commands,

cancel
archival
use
"filespec"

instead.

CANCEL (Cont.)

jobname

the jobname
of
the
request,
either
the
first
six
characters
of
the
first
filename in the request or the
argument
you
supplied
to
a
/JOBNAME
switch
when
making
the request
(for
batch
requests),
six
characters

output
and
or the first
of
each

filename
in
the request (for
retrieval
requests),
or
the
first
six
<characters
of the
structure alias or tape set
n
This
1is
the
name
appearing
under the heading "Name", "Req
Name",
or
"Job
Name" in the
list of requests shown by
the
appropriate
command

INFORMATION

(see

Commands,

below)
.

filespec

the specification of
Use
this
argument
archival requests.

the
asterisk
cancels
all
your
the

/switch

one

the

specified

following

a
to

file.
cancel

identifier
in

requests

queue.

switches:

/JOBNAME
: jobname

which gives
request

the

you

jobname

want

See
Special
Cases
Switch, below.
/SEQUENCE:n

which
number

gives
of the

the
batch

the

cancel.

/JOBNAME

sequence
output

request you
want
to
cancel.
The INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS
or

INFORMATION

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

command
with
the /ALL switch
gives
the
sequence
number
assigned
to
these
requests.
Use
this
switch
in
CANCEL
commands
placed
within batch
jobs:
then
you
c¢an
cancel
requests
made
earlier in the
batch job even though
you
do
not
know
the
request
ID
number.

CANCEL (Cont.)

/USER:user

name

which
cancels
the
request
entered
given
wuser
name.
asterisk
(*) both
ID number

and

specified
under
the

Use
an
for request
argument
to
cancel
all

this
switch
to
requests of all users
specified
queue.
privileged users only.

the
For

Output

When you complete a CANCEL command

removing

request,

the

request

(those

made

system

responds
with
"[1
Job
Canceled]"
and
makes
the appropriate
deletion
from
the
indicated
queue.
If
the
job
s
being
processed,
the
response
is
"[1
Job
Canceled
(1
was
in
progress)1”, but if the job is already
finished,
it
1is
simply
"[No

Jobs

Killed]".

Characteristics

Request

ID or

Jobname as Argument

You can cancel a
Queue-class

single

queue

commands - MOUNT,

CANCEL

PLOT,

PRINT,

PUNCH,

with

RETRIEVE,

or SUBMIT) by giving either its request
ID number
or
its
jobname
as
the
second argument of a CANCEL command.
This
argument is interpreted as a request
ID
number
unless
it
includes
one
or
more
non-numeric
characters.
If
the
argument includes non-numeric characters it
1is
interpreted

as a jobname.
By giving a jobname as the second argument of
a CANCEL command, you
cancel
all
your
requests
of
that
jobname
in
the
specified
queue,
But
see
also Special
Cases -

Special

/JOBNAME

Switch,

below.

Cases

/SPOOLED-OUTPUT

Switch

You can give the special switch, /SPOOLED-OUTPUT, after
the
CARDS,
PAPER-TAPE,
PLOT,
or
PRINT argument to the CANCEL
command.
By doing so you cause any accumulated requests
1in
the
spooler
queue for the appropriate output device (CDP:,
PTP:, PLT:, or LPT:, respectively) to
be
canceled,
rather
than
filled
when
you
1log
out.
Do not give any further
arguments to a "CANCEL queue /SPOOLED-OUTPUT" command.

CANCEL (Cont.)

/JOBNAME

Switch

In the singular case when you want to cancel
several
queue
same
requests
of
the
jobname using a single command, and
that jobname is purely numerical (for
example,
5045),
you
must
use the /JOBNAME:jobname switch as the second argument
to the CANCEL command.
Do not also give the request
1ID
or
jobname
as
a
command
argument
if
you
give
the
/JOBNAME: jobname switch.

Restrictions

Cannot

Cancel

You

Filled

cannot

request

use

once

Tape-mount

the
the

(i.e., once
vyou
[setname
defined
give up your tape
DEASSIGN

Cannot

Cancel

CANCEL command
first
volume
have
received
MTn:]).
as
resource in

LOGOUT

Certain

Requests

command

Archival

to withdraw a
MOUNT
TAPE
of
tape has been mounted
a
message
of
the
form,
Use

this

will

the

DISMOUNT

case.

also

command

that

the

Note

dismount

the

tape

set.

Requests

You cannot use the CANCEL command to
withdraw
an
archival
request once the operator has initiated archival procedures.
Thus,
even
though
files
remain
on
disk
between
the
first and second archive runs, you cannot cancel
operator's
a request during this time.
If you try to
after archiving has begun, you receive the

Note

?File

has

that

this

ARCHIVE

archive
error

command

status:

does

(for

not

these

remaining

files

filename
terminate

example,

TOPS-20
command
processor
remaining
filename
in
the

are

cancel a
request
error message:

multifile

CANCEL

ARCHIVE

continues
request.

judged

CANCEL

*.,*);

the

processing
each
Cancel requests for

individually.

Commands

for

ARCHIVE

requesting

archival

INFORMATION

ARCHIVE-STATUS

for
finding
out
status of files

INFORMATION

BATCH-REQUESTS

for
examining
requests
batch input queue

INFORMATION

MOUNT-REQUESTS

for

examining

structure-

INFORMATION

for
line

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

examining
printer,

punch,
queues

and

the

requests
tape-mount

archival

1in

the

queue

requests
in
plotter,

paper

tape

file

the
card
punch

CANCEL (Cont.)

INFORMATION RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS

for
examining
retrieval queue

MODIFY

for
changing
removing them

MOUNT

for

PLOT

placing

requests

1in

requests

the

without

requests

tape-mount

the

structure-

queue

for placing

requests in a plotter

queue

for

placing

printer

PUNCH

for

placing

card-

RETRIEVE

for

requests

line

the
queue

the

batch

made,

then

queue

placing

input

paper-tape-punch

placing

retrieval

SUBMIT

requests

queue

Examples

Cancel

specific

request.

@CANCEL PRINT REMAX
[l Job canceled]
2.

Cancel

all

your

batch

requests.

@CANCEL BATCH *
[3

Jobs

canceled]

Find out what line
printer
requests
you
have
cancel one of two jobs bearing the same jobname.
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /USER
Printer

Job Name

Queue:

MYCOPY
MYCOPY
MYCOPY
HOLMAX
HOLMAX
There are

Reqg#

142
143
144
141
1490
5 Jobs

Limit

User

81
LATTA
/Lower
/After: 8-Nov-79
81
LATTA
/After: 8-Nov-79 18:00
81
LATTA
/After: 8-Nov-79 18:00
200
LATTA
/After: 8-Nov-=79 17:00
200
LATTA
/After: 8-Nov-79 18:00
the Queue (None in Progress)

@CANCEL PRINT
141
[1 Job Canceled]

18:00

CANCEL (Cont.)

Get a list
you gave),

of your printing jobs (and
then cancel three of them.

@INFORMATION

Printer

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

some

the

switches

/ALL/USER

Queue:

Job Name
MYCOPY

Reqi#

Limit

142

/Prio:20
MYCOPY

143

User
LATTA

/Lower

/After:

8-Nov-79

/After:

8-Nov-79

18:00

8-Nov-=79

18:00

/After: 8-Nov-=79
/Seq:1726
(None in Progress)

18:00

/Seq:1728
81

LATTA

/Seq:1729
MYCOPY

144

LATTA

/After:

/Seq:1730
HOLMAX

There

are

@CANCEL

Cancel

Job

Cancel

Jobs

LATTA

the

Queue

Canceled]
a

plotter

request.

PLOT 94

@CANCEL
[1

200

PRINT MYCOPY

[3 Jobs

140

Canceled]
a

mount

request

for

structure

tape

set.

@CANCEL MOUNT 24
[1

mount

Find

out

structure

request
what

canceled]

requests

mount

are

the

mount

queue.

Cancel

your

request.

@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS

Tape/Disk
Volume

Mount Queue:
Status
Type

Write

Req

Name

Reqg#

Job#

68
13
65

MARK

MTA1l

Tape

Enabled

MARK

126

TAPE

MTA3

Tape

Enabled

TAPE

148

Waiting

Disk

LATB

157

LATB
There

are

Requests

@CANCEL MOUNT
[1

mount

157

request

the

canceled]

Queue

User

HOVSEPIAN
WALLACE
LATTA

CANCEL (Cont.)

Find

out

what

requests

are

mount
request
that
has not
tape that has been mounted.
@INFORMATION

Tape/Disk
Volume

the

mount

yet been

queue.

filled,

and

Cancel

dismount

MOUNT-REQUESTS

Mount Queue:
Status
Type

MARK
MTA1l
Tape
DBLO2
MTAQ
Tape
NCV19
Waiting
Tape
There are 3 Requests in

Write

Req Name

Req#

Job#

29
31
32

15
24
24

Enabled
MARK
Enabled
LAT
Enabled
NCV
the Queue

@CANCEL MOUNT 32

[1 mount request canceled]
@DISMOUNT TAPE LAT:
[Tape dismounted, logical name

LAT:

deleted]

User

HOVSEPIAN
LATTA
LATTA

Closes open

files

(JFN)

your

job

and

releases

their

JFNs.

Format

@CLOSE
where

the JFN (Job File
Default n - all

Number) of a file
JFNs for open and

closed

files

Output

When

the
on
vyour
close.

CLOSE command is completed, the system prints a
message
terminal for each JFN that it has closed or attempted to

Characteristics

Usually

Unnecessary

The CLOSE command is used to preserve the contents of a file
after
the
abnormal
termination of the program that opened
it.
Under ordinary conditions you do not need
to
use
the
CLOSE

Special

command.

Cases

For

Closed

Files

If you give the
JFN, the JFN is

CLOSE command
released.

for

existing

but

closed

Restrictions

Closing

Mapped

Files

You

cannot close files that are mapped into memory; in
this
you
may
give the RESET command, which clears memory.
(Note, however, that RESET will delete and expunge a
mapped
file if the file is new, rather than save it as CLOSE would.
To save a new mapped file, give the
SET
PAGE-ACCESS
@:777
NONEXISTENT
command, and follow this with CLOSE.)
If RESET
by itself does not close the file, you
may
£first
have
to
give
the
POP
command
to
return to a higher level of the
TOPS-20 command processor; then give the RESET command.
case

Once memory has
at

the

current

been
and

cleared,

lower

all

levels

files

are

TOPS-240.

closed

for

processes

CLOSE (Cont.)

Commands

INFORMATION

FILE-STATUS

for

in
INFORMATION

MEMORY-USAGE

for

determining

your

which

files

are

open

files

are

job

determining

which

mapped
RESET

for

closing

mapped

files

and

clearing

memory

Examples

open

file.

@CLOSE 4

7 EDIT-BUFFER.OUT.100@¢36

Try to
close

close
those

containing

[OK]

all your open files.
Give the RESET command
to
that are mapped.
(Note that the file EXEC.EXE,

the

TOPS-20

command

processor,

cannot

closed.)

still

@CLOSE

TEST1.CBL.1

PS:<TEST>EDIT.EXE.4

[OK]

PS:<SYSTEM>EXEC.EXE.3

Can't

file

File

mapped

Can't

file

File

still

mapped

Can't

file

File

still

mapped

QRESET
@CLOSE
1l

PS:<SYSTEM>EXEC.EXE.3

COMPILE

Translates

source

fi les

into object

(relocatable binary)

files.

Format

@COMPILE

(FROM)

/switch(es)

source/switch(es)

object,...

where

switches

are
keywords
chosen
from
the
list
below,
indicating your choice of COMPILE command options.
They have different
effects
depending
on
their
position
in
the command line:
placed before all
files in the command, they
act
as
defaults
for
all;
otherwise,
they
affect
only
the
nearest
preceding file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches

source

is the file specification
of
a
source
program.
The filename must be of 6 or fewer characters, and
the file type of 3 or fewer characters; you cannot
use a generation number.
Default - arguments you
gave
in
your
1last
LOAD-class command

object

is the filename you choose for the object file; it
must be of 6 or fewer characters.
Default - filename of the source
file
(file
type is .REL)
means
that,
arguments of

Foeoe

Summary of

COMPILE

Command

after
commas,
you
can
the form already shown
Switches

/10-BLISS
/36-BLISS
/68-COBOL
/74-COBOL
/ABORT
/ALGOL
/BINARY
/COBOL
/COMPILE
/CREF
/CROSS-REFERENCE
/DEBUG

/FAIL
/FLAG-NON-STANDARD

/FORTRAN
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)
"
/LIST
/MAC
/MACHINE-C ODE
/MACRO
/NOBINARY

/NOCOMPILE
/NOCREF

/NOCROSS-R EFERENCE

(defaults

give

in boldface)

COMPILE (Cont.)

/NODBUG
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD

/NOLIST
/NOMACHINE-CODE
/NOOPTIMIZE
/NOSTAY

/NOWARNINGS
/OPTIMIZE

/PASCAL
/SAIL
/SIMULA
/SNOBOL
/STAY
/WARNINGS

Descriptions of these switches are
given
below.
Although
the
system
will
not
reject
switches
described
wunder
any of the
LOAD-class commands, only those switches commonly associated with
COMPILE are described here.

COMPILE

Command

Switches

/18-BLISS

compiles the
Default

file using the BLISS-10 compiler.
for files of type .Bl@ and .BLI

/36-BLISS

compiles

file

the

Default

/68-COBOL

compiles

the

Default

/74-COBOL

compiles the
Default

/ABORT

stops a
returns

/ALGOL

compiles the
Default

/BINARY

for

file
for

using
files

the
of

using
files

the
of

BLISS-36

type

COBOL-68

type

compiler.

.B36

.C68

compiler.
or

.68C

file using the COBOL-74 compiler.
for files of type .C74 or .74C

compile if a fatal error
your terminal to TOPS-20
file
for

using
files

is
detected
and
command level.

the ALGOL compiler.
type .ALG

allows generation of an
each source file given.
a /NOBINARY switch.

object (binary)
Use this switch

file
for
to cancel

Default

/COBOL

compiles the file using the COBOL compiler, either
COBOL-68
or
COBOL-74, that your installation has
stored in the file SYS:COBOL.EXE.
Default for files of type .CBL

/COMFPILE

forces compilation of the source file
even
if
a
current
object
file
already
exists.
Use this
switch along with the /LIST
or
/CREF
switch
to
obtain
1listings
when
you
have
current
object
files.
(See also the /NOBINARY switch.)

/ CREF

same

/CROSS-REFERENCE

COMPILE (Cont.)

/CROSS-REFERENCE
creates

information

file

for

containing

cross-reference

each compilation.

The

filename

that of the object file; the file
type
1is
.CRF,
Use
the
CREF
command to obtain a listing of the
file.
(For COBOL files, this switch automatically

produces
a
cross-reference
TOPS-20 User Utilities Guide
the CREF program.

1listing.)
See
the
for information about

/DEBUG

produces
an
object
file
containing
debugging
information beyond what is usually inserted during
a compilation.
(For FORTRAN
programs
only,
and
only if you have not given the /OPTIMIZE switch.)

/FAIL

compiles the
Default

file using the FAIL compiler.
for files of type .FAI

/FLAG-NON-STANDARD

indicates
/FORTRAN

compiles

non-standard
the

file

Default
Default

using

syntax
the

file.

FORTRAN

compiler

in the absence of a standard
source
file type and a language switch
for files of type .FOR

/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)
"
passes the specified switches to the compiler that
will
process
the
file(s)
to
which this switch
applies.
You must include the switches in
double

quotation marks

").

/LIST

prints a listing of the program in
ASCII
format;
the
name
of
this listing is the filename of the
object file.
The
/CREF
switch
overrides
/LIST
when they both apply to the same file.

/MAC

same

/MACHINE~-CODE

produces a file containing the
generated
machine
code.
The
filename
1is that of the object file;
the file type is .LST.
For high-level languages.
Default

/MACRO

assembles the file using the MACRO assembler.
Default for files of type .MAC

/NOBINARY

prevents

/MACRO

generation

object

(binary)

file.

Use this switch along with /LIST or /CREF to allow
these switches to take effect without producing
a
new object file.
/NOCREF

same

/NOCROSS-REFERENCE.

COMPILE (Cont.)

/NOCOMPILE

prevents compilation if the associated object file
is
current;
otherwise
it
forces
compilation.
Cancels
/COMPILE
or
/RELOCATABLE.
See
Characteristics - Compiling
New
Sources
Only,
below.
Default

/NOCROSS-REFERENCE

prevents the
Default
/NODEBUG

creation of a

cross-reference

excludes special debugging
object file.
(For FORTRAN
Default

/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD

prevents

the

flagging

file.

information
from
programs only.)

of nonstandard

syntax

your

the

file.
Default

/NOLIST

prevents

line

printer

listing

the

program.

Default
/NOMACHINE-CODE

prevents generation of a

file

containing

machine

code.
Default

/NOOPTIMIZE

prevents the generation of
a
globally
optimized
object file.
(For FORTRAN programs only.)
Default

/NOSTAY

stops
the
background

compiler
from
being
placed
fork.
Use
when
/STAY
1is

default

the

for

in
set as

a
a

compiler.

/NOWARNINGS

prevents display of

/OPTIMIZE

calls
for
generation
of
a
globally
optimized
object
file, that is, one that runs as quickly as
possible.
(For FORTRAN programs only, and only if
you have not given the /DEBUG switch.)

/PASCAL

compiles

the

Default

/SAIL

compiles

the

Default

file
for

warnings

using
files

/SIMULA

compiles the

file using

/SNOBOL

compiles the

file

Default

for

files

using

files

the
of

nonfatal

errors.

PASCAL compiler.

type

the
of

for

.PAS

SAIL compiler.

type

.SAI

the

SIMULA compiler.

the

SNOBOL compiler

type

.SIM

.SNO

COMPILE (Cont.)

/STAY

returns your terminal to TOPS-2¢ command level
so
that
you
can perform other work while the system
continues
to
compile
your
program.
You

immediately

receive

the TOPS-20

prompt

$),

and can then issue any user command.
Be
careful
not
to
send incorrect data to programs expecting
terminal input.
(Refer to the
CONTINUE
command,
Restrictions:
Programs
Competing
for
Terminal
Input.)

This switch saves you from having to:
issue a
T
to
make sure the compiler has begun; give a “C to
halt
compilation;
and
1issue
a
CONTINUE
/STAY
command
to
remain
at
command
level
during
compilation.
/WARNINGS

displays warnings
Default

for

nonfatal

errors.

Characteristics

Compiling

New

Sources

Only

The system usually compiles only
those
sources
for
there
are
no
current object files, that is, sources
write dates are more recent than those of the
object
of the same name.

which
whose
files

However, sources for
are
compiled
even
can

Default

always

force

Switches

Not

which you supply a new object
filename
1if there are current object files.
You
compilation with the /COMPILE switch.

Passed

Compiler

Only switches specified in a LOAD-class command
are
passed
to
the compiler; default switches are not passed.
Instead,
the system assumes that the defaults for
the
compiler
are
the same as the defaults for the LOAD-class command.

Using

Standard

File

Types

you specify source files with standard types (.FOR, .MAC,
.CBL,
or
.ALG)
in
a
COMPILE
command,
the
system
automatically
calls
the
appropriate
compiler
when
compilation
is
necessary.
If you specify source files by
filename only, the system searches your connected
directory
in
the
above
order for a file of this name and a standard
type.

compile

programs

from

sources

nonstandard file types, give a switch to indicate
compiler (/FORTRAN, /MACRO, /COBOL, or
/ALGOL).

that

have

the
A

proper
switch

will
take
precedence
over
a
standard
file type if they
indicate different languages.
If no compiler
1is
indicated
with
either
a
switch or a standard file type, the FORTRAN

compiler

used.

COMPILE (Cont.)

Hints

Plus

Signs

(+)

Between

Filespecs

you give two or more
as

arguments

filespecs separated

COMPILE,

if they were a single file.
under
any
filename
given
command, or (if none) under
and
Indirect

file

type

Files

they

Establishing

plus

signs

together

Their object module
1is
stored
as the "object" argument of the
the last filename in
the
group

.REL.
Arguments

You can store the arguments (source
and
switches)
of
a
COMPILE
command
in an
specify them by typing an at sign (@) and
COMPILE

are compiled

command

object
filespecs,
indirect file, and
its filespec as
a

argument.

Default Arguments with

the

SET Command

You can issue the SET DEFAULT
COMPILE-SWITCHES
command
to
set
up
default
global
arguments
to the COMPILE command.
Insert this SET command in your COMAND.CMD
file
to
change
your own defaults permanently.
Wildcards

Illegal

with

COMPILE

The COMPILE command does not accept
and %) iIn a file specification.

Effect

characters

Memory

The

COMPILE command clears any unkept

the

appropriate compiler.

wildcard

forks

from memory and loads

Commands

LOAD,

EXECUTE,

and

DEBUG

other

LOAD-class

performing

commands

functions

for

COMPILE (Cont.)

Examples

Compile

FORTRAN program.

@COMPILE

RSD2.FOR

FORTRAN:

RSD2

MAIN.

Do the same
compiler.
TOPS-20

thing, using a
Use
the
/STAY

command

@COMPILE

switch
switch

to
to

indicate
the
proper
return immediately to

level.

RSD2/FORTRAN/STAY

@PUSH
TOPS-20

@EDIT

Command

processor

6(1015)

Create an indirect file using the EDIT
editor.
compile
several
programs, forcing a compilation
one and storing its object file under a new name.
@CREATE

UPDATE.CMD

Input:

UPDATE.CMD.
1l
/COBOL FSTQ,

@016¢

SNDQ,

00200
*E
(UPDATE.CMD1]
,

@COMPILE

QUPDATE.CMD

COBOL:

DMN

[FSTQ.CBL]

COBOL:

DMN

[SNDQ.CBL])

COBOL:

DMN

[THDQ.CBL]

COBOL:

DMN

[FTHQ.CBL]

EXIT

@DIRECTORY,

@@CHRONOLOGICAL WRITE
@@REVERSE

@e
PS: <LATTA>
ANNUAL.REL.1

THDQ.REL.
1

SNDQ.REL.,
1
SNDQ.CBL
FSTQ.CBL

Total

files

THDQ,

FTHQ/COMPILE

Use
it
to
of the last

ANNUAL

COMPILE (Cont.)

(,CRF)

Produce a cross-reference

file for a

FORTRAN

program

the

output

you already have a current object file; prevent the

although

generation of a new object program.

Check

for

file.

@COMPILE /CREF/FORTRAN/COMPILE/NOBINARY RSD2
FORTRAN:

RSD2

MAIN,
@DIRECTORY,

@@CHRONOLOGICAL WRITE
@@REVERSE
ee
PS:<LATTA>

RSD2.CRF.1

@17CRE.TMP.1000617;T

RSD2.REL.1
RSD2.FOR

Total

files

CONNECT

Connects

your

job

directory.

@CONNECT

(TO

DIRECTORY)

Format

dev:<directory>

PASSWORD:password

where
dev:<directory>

the

directory

which

= your

you

want

connect

dev:

Default

<directory> - the directory
the
specified structure) of
same

hame

connected

Default

structure

your

(on
the

connected

directory
Default

(if

arguments

are

given)

your
log—-in
directory
public structure
password

the

password

requested

for

your

the

directory

1log-in

directory

directory to which you already
or sufficient group rights)

have

the

(not
or

ownership

Characteristics

Capabilities
Your capabilities (Wheel, Operator, Confidential, etc.)
are
associated
with your log-in user name only.
If you connect
to a directory whose owner has Wheel
capabilities,
you
do

not

gain

these

capabilities.

Hints

Obtaining

Group

Rights

You can obtain group rights equal to those
directory
by
giving
the
ACCESS command
addition to, CONNECT for that directory.

of the owner of a
instead of, or in

CONNECT (Cont.)

Restrictions

Features Not Affected

not

affect

the

valid

for

your

The Queue-class commands charge processing requests to

your

For some

features,

system

directory used:

CONNECT

does

System Accounting

The SET ACCOUNT command
log-in

user

name

only.

allows

arguments

Generally, charges for system use

are made to your log-in user name.

Queue~-class Commands

log-in

user name only.

Commands

ACCESS

for obtaining group as well as ownership rights

MOUNT

for making a structure available

to those of the owner of a directory

for

equal
and

connecting

ensuring the continued availability of the structure

Examples

Connect to another user's directory.
@CONNECT <HOLLAND>
Password:

)

Try

access

directory.

Discovering

files-only directory, connect to it instead.

@ACCESS

that

?Directory is "files-only" and cannot be accessed

@CONNECT <MANUALS>
Password:

1is

CONNECT (Cont.)

Connect

structure

return

another

wuser's

directory

and

directory

your

JOB-STATUS

connected

then

log-in

commands

your

on
on

directory

along

you

different

file

that

structure;

then

PS:.
to

Give
check

INFORMATION
which

your

directory.

@INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
Host

AURORA

Job.

36,

TTY207,

Account

User

LATTA

341

@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure

SNARK:

mounted

@CONNECT SNARK: <HOLLAND>
Password:

@INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
Host

AURORA

Job 36,
Account

TTY207,
341

User

LATTA,

SNARK:<HOLLAND>

User

LATTA,

SNARK:<LATTA>

@CONNECT <LATTA>
@INFORMATION JOB
Host

Job

AURORA

36,

TTY207,

Account

341

@CONNECT

@INFORMATION
Host

Job

JOB-STATUS

AURORA

36,

TTY207,

Account

User

LATTA

341

@DISMOUNT STRUCTURE

Structure

SNARK:

dismounted

Connect to your directory on
your
full
rights
to
Iit,.
JOB-STATUS

command

log-in

command

that

verify

depends

directory on

another
After
your

these

structure
giving
an

connected

rights.

PS:.

@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure

@ACCESS

SNARK:

mounted

SNARK:

@CONNECT SNARK:
@INFORMATION JOB
Host

AURORA

Job 36, TTY2Q7, User LATTA, SNARK:<LATTA>
Account 341
@INEQBMATION DIRECTORY <LATTA.*>,

@@NAME-ONLY
Q@
Name

SNARK:<LATTA.ALLEN>

Name

SNARK:<LATTA.BLAKE>

Name

SNARK:<LATTA.LAB-NOTES>

Name

SNARK:<LATTA.TESTS>

@END-ACCESS SNARK:<LATTA>
@CONNECT
@DISMOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure

SNARK:

dismounted

and
obtain
INFORMATION

directory,

Then

return

give

your

CONTINUE

Continues

execution

fork

that

was

halted.

Format

@QCONTINUE

(FORK)

argument /switch

where
argument

the fork name or fork number
Default - the current fork

/switch

is
a
keyword,
indicating your

CONTINUE

chosen
from
the
list
choice of CONTINUE command

Command

below,
options

Switches

/BACKGROUND

keeps your terminal at TOPS-20 command
1level
and
continues
execution
of
the
program
in
a
"background" fork.
When the program
attempts
to
do terminal input or output, it halts and displays
the message [FORK-NAME wants the TTY].

/NORMALLY

restores your terminal
within the program.

command

level

(if

any)

1level

and

Default

/STAY

keeps

your

terminal

TOPS-2@

continues
execution
of
"background" fork.
Output

command

the
from

program
in
the
program

a
is
sent
to
the
terminal
and
1is
intermixed
with
whatever output is currently displayed.
When
the
program attempts to read from the terminal, it can
randomly intercept input intended for the EXEC
or
another
program.
Therefore, use this switch with
programs
that,
once
started,
do
not
request
further terminal input.

Characteristics

Continuing

Noncurrent

Fork

When you
continue
a
noncurrent
fork,
fork-name argument in a CONTINUE command,
becomes your current fork.

by
the

including
specified

Hints

Stopping
To

Background

stop

Program

background

program,

give

the

FREEZE

command.

the
fork

CONTINUE (Cont.)

Providing

Input

Background

Program

A background

program, continued with
CONTINUE
/BACKGROUND,
sends
the
message
[FORK-NAME wants the TTY] when it wants
input.
A background program, continued with CONTINUE /STAY,
prints
the
program
prompt,
£for
example PASCAL>, when it
wants input.
To provide input to a program that is
running
in
a
background fork, return to program command level with
CONTINUE /NORMALLY.
(Some programs require you to
type
an
extra RETURN after CONTINUE /NORMALLY to display the program
prompt).
Then,
type
the
required
program
input.
(See
below, Restrictions, Programs Competing for Terminal Input.)

Monitoring

your

Program

CONTINUE /STAY and CONTINUE
/BACKGROUND,
by
keeping
vyour
terminal
at
TOPS-20
command
1level
(EXEC),
1let
you use
TOPS=-2@ commands to monitor the
progress
of
your
program
while
it
1is
running.
Use
the
INFORMATION
FORK-STATUS
command to display the CPU time used and the
kept
and
RUN
status
of
each
fork
belonging to the current EXEC level.
More commands for monitoring your programs are listed
below
in Related Commands.
Running

Multiple

Programs

Simultaneously

To simultaneously run multiple programs in background
forks
or use commands that affect memory, use one or a combination
of the
following
methods
after
placing
a
fork
in
the
background with CONTINUE /STAY or CONTINUE /BACKGROUND:
PUSHing

Type

an
the

and
a
another

Inferior

EXEC

PUSH command

Level
to

create

inferior

EXEC

level

fresh copy of memory (address space).
Then run
program and return to EXEC command
1level
with

CONTINUE
/STAY
or
CONTINUE
/BACKGROUND.
The
new
program does not affect the
background
program
since
both
programs are at a different EXEC level.
However,
see Restrictions below.
PUSH
to
a
new
EXEC
before
running each new program.
KEEPing

the

Type

Fork

the

KEEP

command

give

the

background

fork

"kept" status.
(A kept fork is not cleared from memory
when another
program
1is
1loaded.)
Then
run
another
program
and return to EXEC command level with CONTINUE
/STAY or CONTINUE /BACKGROUND,
KEEP
each
background
fork
before running another program.
Check the status
of your forks with INFORMATION FORK-STATUS.

Continuing

Forks

Using

the

Fork

Name

You can continue a fork by typing the fork
name
as
if
it
were
the
CONTINUE
command.
To
function as the CONTINUE
command, the fork must be "kept" with the KEEP
or
the
SET
PROGRAM
KEEP
command.
For more information, refer to the
descriptions of these commands.

CONTINUE (Cont.)

Information
The

CONTINUE

command

ohe

multiforking-class
commands.
For
more
multiforking,
see
the
section
named
Programs in the TOPS-20 User's Guide.

the

TOPS-20

information about
Running
Multiple

Restrictions

Similar

Programs

Competing

for

Files

If you have two
similar
programs
running
simultaneously,
they
may try to access the same files at the same time (for
example, temporary files labeled
by
Jjob
number,
used
by
compilers).
This
may
cause
unpredictable
situations to
develop.
To avoid the possibility, run different
kinds
of
programs.

Programs

Competing

for

Terminal

Input

If you use CONTINUE /STAY to run a program in
a
background
fork,
the program can request input from the terminal while
you are giving input to the EXEC or another
program.
This
input
can be randomly intercepted by the background program
when it requests terminal input.
Usually though,
the
EXEC
or the current program receives the input.
When
terminal
input
1is
intercepted
by
the
background
program, the program will usually type input error messages.
To give input to the program, stop the program by typing two
CTRL/Cs
or
the
program's
exit
command.
Then,
1if
the
background program is at a higher EXEC command
level,
give
POP
commands
to
return
to
the EXEC level that holds the
background program.
(POP terminates the
current
EXEC
and
erases
programs
in its memory.) Finally, give the CONTINUE
/NORMALLY command; this puts you at program command level so
that you can give the requested input.
Remember,

input

intercepted

the

background

program

randomly.
Therefore,
vyou
may have to type extra CTRL/Cs,
program exit commands, and POPs.
To reduce confusion
about
the
direction of terminal input, it is recommended that you
use CONTINUE /STAY only when you plan to work at the current
EXEC
1level
while a program runs in a background fork.
You

should also CONTINUE /STAY programs that simply end
without
requesting
terminal
{input.
Use CONTINUE /BACKGROUND when
you plan to work at a lower EXEC level or at another program

command

level.

When a program started with
CONTINUE
/BACKGROUND
requests
terminal
input,
it sends the message, [FORK-NAME wants the
TTY].
No input is taken by the background program until you
return
to
program
command
level with CONTINUE /NORMALLY.
You
should
CONTINUE /BACKGROUND
programs
that
request
terminal

input.

CONTINUE (Cont.)

Maintaining

Access

Directories

While a fork is running in the background,
use
caution
in
using the CONNECT, ACCESS and END-ACCESS commands.
Changing
your
directory
access
could
leave
the
fork
unable
to
reference certain files.
No

I/O

Control

with

Some

Programs

Most programs read and write data to
the
terminal
through
standard
input
and
output
designators.
Some
programs
however, use different methods
of
communicating
with
the
terminal.
Therefore, when you use /BACKGROUND and /STAY to
control terminal input and output from
a
background
fork,
the
input
and output behavior of programs with nonstandard
designators can be unpredictable.
Continued

Programs

Not

Prompt

for

input

When you continue a
program,
the
program
continues
from
exactly
where
it
was
interrupted.
If
the
program was
waiting for input, it
will
simply
continue
to
wait
for
input;
it
won't prompt you again.
For example, assume you
are running the DECmail/MS program and you press
CTRL/C
at
the MS> prompt.
Next, you CONTINUE MS.
The cursor moves to
the next line but no MS> prompt appears.
This is because MS
has
continued
to
do
the last thing it was doing when you
interrrupted it with CTRL/C - waiting for a command
at
the
MS>

prompt.
MS does not know
displayed before the cursor.

that

its

prompt

longer

So,
when
you
continue
a
program
and
nothing
happens,
consider
what you were doing when you CTRL/C'd the program.
If you were at the MS> prompt, type an MS command or,
press
RETURN
again to redisplay the MS> prompt.
If you had typed
a portion of and MS command, press CTRL/R to
redisplay
the
command.
If
you
had
typed
a portion of
press CTRL/K to redisplay the message.

Effect

Memory

and

mail

message,

Terminal

The CONTINUE /NORMALLY command resumes processing the program
in
memory,
and
leaves
your
terminal at program command level (if
any).
The
CONTINUE
/BACKGROUND
and
CONTINUE
/STAY
commands

resume
at

processing

TOPS-20

command

the

program

in memory,

but

leave

your

terminal

level.

Commands

DETACH

CONTINUE

for

disengaging

your

from
your terminal
the
program
that
running
FORK

for

changing

the

current

and
the

current

job

continuing
job
is

fork

CONTINUE (Cont.)

halting

for

FREEZE

background

progr am

fork

for monitoring files being written

INFORMATION FILE-STATUS

INFORMATION FORK-STATUS

your

program

for displaying the number and

the

for monitoring your program's

use

for monitoring your program's

use

status of each fork in your job

INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE

INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS

memory

of CPU

time

for giving a fork a kept status

KEEP

obtaining

for

PUSH

command level

1lower

TOPS-20

(and a fresh copy of

memory)

program
for starting your current
1ts alternate entry point (if
at
any)

REENTER

for starting your current

START

the beginning

program

other multiforking-class commands
for performing related functions

RESET, SET NAME,
SET PROGRAM, UNKEEP

— —— —

—— T

— —

—— — S

—

D c—— — — — —

. ———— — O

—

— a—

Examples

Display the fork status with the INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
Notice that the arrow points to the current fork.
command .
Then, give the CONTINUE command to continue the program in
the current, halted

fork.

@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS

~—EDIT (1): Rept, BALT at 6253, 0:02:54.4
=> DUMPER (2): HALT at 700384, 9:01:19.3
@CONTINUE

DUMPER>

Run the DSR program and then halt it by typing two CTRL/Cs.
Give the CONTINUE /BACKGROUND command to continue DSR in a
background fork and return to EXEC command level. Then, give
the KEEP command so that you can load another program without
clearing the running, background, DSR fork.

Check the status

of DSR with the INFORMATION FORK-STATUS command.

@RUN DSR

DSR>TEST.RNO

@CONTINUE /BACKGROUND
@KEEP
[Keeping

DSR]

@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS

=> DSR (1): Kept, Background, Running at 413164, P:00:00.8
61

CONTINUE (Cont.)

Now begin editing a file with the EDIT program.
During
your
editing
session
the system notifies you that the background
fork wants input.
To return to DSR command level, first exit
the
edit
program.
Then
check
the
fork
status with the
INFORMATION

FORK-STATUS

command.

Notice

that

terminal
I/0
wait
state
and
that EDIT
fork.
Since the fork you want to continue
fork,
you
must
specify
the
fork
name
command.
Now type CONTINUE DSR.
@EDIT

DSR

1is

1in

is now the current
is not the current
with the CONTINUE

COMAND.CMD

Edit:

COMAND,CMD.
2

00100

SET DEFAULT PRINT /NOHEADER /NOTIFY:YES

20200

SET

PROGRAM MS KEEP START
SET PROGRAM HOST KEEP CONTINUE
SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWTICHES PAS
INFO MAIL
TAKE

20300
00400
20500
20600
*1350

90350

/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD

SET PROGRAM DUMPER KEEP CONTINUE

DSR> [DSR:
*E

wants

the

TTY]

[COMAN
CMD.
D.
3]

@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=>

EDIT

DSR

(l):

Kept,

HALT

6253,

Background,

0:00:51.4

TTY

I/O wait

the

(find)

g:00:00.8

@CONTINUE

4404426,

DSR

DSR>

Begin

editing

EDIT.
TOPS-20

Give
a
command

long

file,

CTRL/C
level.

giving

and
Give

then the M command
the CONTINUE /STAY

command

to return to
command
and

then
INFORMATION
FILE-STATUS commands to check the progress
of EDIT as it searches through the file.,
(Notice
that
the
byte
position
shown
1in
response to successive INFORMATION
FILE-STATUS
CONTINUE

program

@EDIT
Edit:

commands

command

grows
return

larger.)
EDIT so

Finally,
give
you can give more

commands,

DOC-PLAN.MEM

DOC-PLAN.MEM.1

*FABCDS$
Yes?

(Type

for

@CONTINUE /STAY
@INFORMATION
Connected

help):

FILE-STATUS
PS:<LATTA>,

JFNS:

<LOADTEST>EDIT.EXE. 4

Read,

EDIT-BUFFER.OUT. 100046

Read,

2
1

DOC-PLAN.MEM. 1

Read,

<SYSTEM>EXEC.EXE. 153

Device

assigned

to/opened

Execute

Write, #.(7)
43520.(7)
Read, Execute

this

job:

TTY222

the
EDIT

CONTINUE (Cont.)

@INFORMATION FILE-STATUS

DOC-PLAN.MEM, 1

Read,

DOC~-PLAN.MEM. 1

Read, 130560.(7)

@INFORMATION FILE-STATUS 2

@CONTINUE

112640.(7)

begun,
has
compilation
After
Start compiling a long file.
to stop the compilation and return to the
CTRL/Cs
two
type
EXEC command level.

Use the CONTINUE /STAY command to

resume

Edit
compilation, and then PUSH to a new EXEC command level.
POP and
the
give
then
1level,
1lower
a text file at this
to return to the compilation in progress.
commands
CONTINUE
The compiler finishes, in this case, after you have done so.
@COMPILE

MACRO:

DUMPER.MAC
DUMPER

“C
@CONTINUE /STAY
@PUSH

TOPS~-2@ Command processor
@EDIT PROFIL.TXT
Edit: PROFIL.TXT.2

#
*SAPRILSJUNES:”
JUNE 19,
0a100
JUNE 12
00500
JUNE 5
@750
JUNE 18
ge90ad
91400

JUNE

4(555)

1978

[PROFIL,
TXT. 3}

@POP
@CONTINUE
EXIT

COPY

Creates

copy of

file.

Format

@COPY (FROM)
@@subcommand

source

filespec

(TO)

destination

filespec,

where

source

filespec

destination

is the
device

filespec

specification
whose contents

of
you

the
want

file
or
to copy

is the
specification
of
the
file
or
device in which you want to store a copy
of the file
Default - same as
source
filespec
but
in
your
connected
directory,
if
necessary
using
the
next
higher
generation number

@@subcommand

means that after a final
specify
the
mode
and
transfer
with
one
of
subcommands:

COPY

Command

comma
'you
can
format
of
the
the
following

Subcommands

(when used with the paper tape
or paper tape punch - PTR: or

reader
PTP:)

ASCII

specifies
that
the
file
being
coplied
1is
written in ASCII mode, with 36-bit words each
consisting of five 7-bit bytes and
a
parity
bit;
the
parity
bit
means that the eighth
hole of the paper tape is never punched.

BINARY

specifies
that
the
file
being
copied
is
composed
of 36-bit words, each consisting of
six 6-bit bytes with the seventh hole of
the
paper
tape
set
always
to @ and the eighth
hole set
always
to
1l;
causes
a
checksum
calculation.

BYTE

specifies
that
the
destination
file
is

number) .

subcommand,

you

the

byte
to
be
not

destination

the

size
of
the
n (any decimal
give

same byte size as the source
also
Hints - Viewing
Display
below.
IMAGE

the

file

will

file.
Screen

BYTE

have
See
Data

specifies
that
the
file
being
copied
is
composed
of 36-bit words, each consisting of
one 8-bit byte; the 28 most significant
bits

are

set

input

and

are

lost

on output.

COPY (Cont.)

IMAGE

BINARY

same as
BINARY,
calculation

COPY

(when
paper

used
tape

but

lacking

Command

the

checksum

Subcommands

with devices other than the
reader or paper tape punch)

specifies
that
the
file
being
copied
|is
written in ASCII mode, with 36-bit words each
consisting of five 7-bit bytes and
a
parity
bit;
the
parity
bit
means
that the least
significant bit is set to # on input
and
is

ASCII

lost

calls

BINARY

output.

for

a direct

transfer of data

36-bit

bytes
BYTE

specifies

that

the

byte

size

the

condition
under
which
the destination file of
the

COPY
same

destination
file
1is
to
be
n (any decimal
number) .
If
you
do
not
give
the
BYTE
subcommand,
the
destination
file will have
the same byte size as the source
file.
See
also
Hints - Viewing
Display
Screen
Data,
below.

IMAGE

BINARY

same

BINARY

same

BINARY

ALWAYS
NEWER

sets
the
overwrites

OLDER

name.

ALWAYS

allows the source file to be
destination file.
Default for COPY command

NEVER

does not copy the

SUPERSEDE | NEVER

file

OLDER

already

allows the source file
destination file if

version

exists,

NEWER

file

exists.

the

copied

the

destination

copied

destination

the

file

the generation number
1is
1less
than
or
equal
to the generation number specified
in the destination file
and
the
file's
write date is older than the source file.

same as OLDER except allows the copy
if
the
file's
write date is "newer" than the source
file.

COPY (Cont.)

Output

As each file is copied, the system prints the
specifications
of
the
source
and
destination files and the word [OK].
The delay
before you see this [OK] indicates how long it took to
copy
the
file.
If
you
use
recognition
on
the
destination
file
specification, the system prints, !New Generation!,
INew
Filel,
or
|Superseding!, to Indicate the status of disk files, or l0K!,
if the file is copied to a non-disk device.

Characteristics

Optional

Subcommands

Each

subcommand,

paper

tape

With

Paper

Tape

used

when

reader

(PTR:),

copy

Information

specifies

from

the

interpretation

eight-bit bytes, represented as eight-hole
1lines
on
paper
tape.
When
wused
with
the
paper tape punch (PTP:), each
subcommand
specifies
a
mapping
of
information
to
the
eight-bit bytes of paper tape.
Optional

Subcommands

With

Other

Devices

Each subcommand can be used under particular conditions, for
example,
when
transferring
files
over network facilities
(using
DCN:
and
©SRV:),
to
specify
the
byte
size
of
information
being
copied.
In
general,
you can use COPY
command

subcommands

whenever

size

information

being

you

need

specify

the

byte

copied.

Hints

RENAME

Faster

Than

COPY

for

Transferring

Files

For moving a set of files from one directory to
another
on
the
same structure, the RENAME command is a faster and more
efficient means than COPY,
This
is
because
RENAME
only
changes
the
file
specifications;
it
does
not
copy the
contents of the files,
Also,
a
file
transfer
with
the
RENAME

transfer

command

with

original
copies
copies are often
Using

Devices

leaves

the

only

COPY

one

command

set

1leaves

files,

two

and
the destination copies.
The
unnecessary and must be deleted.

Source

and/or

Destination

while

sets:

the

original

Filespecs

By specifying a device
filespec,
you
can

as
the
source
and/or
destination
wuse
the
COPY
command
to
transfer
information between cardor
paper-tape-handling
devices,
magnetic
tape
drives,
1line
printers, terminals, or other
output devices.
However, the PLOT, PRINT,
PUNCH
and
TYPE
commands, and appropriate utility programs (e.g., DUMPER and
EDIT), offer more flexibility for most applications.

COPY (Cont.)

Copying

From

TTY:

You can simulate the action of the CREATE
command
for
creating
files
by
copying from device TTY:
to a new
filespec, ending your input with a CTRL/Z; use
CTRL/U,
CTRL/R,
CTRL/W, and the DELETE key to edit the current
line of terminal input.
You can simulate the action of
the
TYPE
command for displaying files by copying from
an existing filespec to device TTY:.
Viewing

Display

Screen

Data

If you specify TTY:
as the
destination
filespec
and
then
give
the
BYTE
8
subcommand, characters in the
source file will be sent literally
to
your
terminal.
Do
this
to
examine
special display screen data (for
8-bit

Erasing

the

ASCII

files

only).

Contents of a

File

While

Keepinig

the

Filespec

You can erase the contents of a file
by
copying
from
device
NUL:
to
the file.
NUL:
1is a receptacle for
unwanted program output and a supplier of null input.
Spooled

Output

Action

If you send information to
output
devices
using
the
COPY
command,
your
request is processed according to
the
status
which
you

of
set

the
SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION
parameter,
with
the
SET
SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION

command.

Using

Wildcards

Source

and/or

Destination

Filespecs

You can use wildcard characters (*
and
%)
1in
source
and/or
destination
filespecs
to copy many files at a
time.
Default values
will
be
assumed
for
filespec
fields
you
do
not
specify.
Note
that
1if you use
wildcard characters to copy more than one
source
file
into a single destination file on disk, the contents of
each source file will appear in a different
generation
of
the
destination
file; the highest generation will
contain a copy of the last source file only.
Use
the
APPEND
command
to
put
the contents of several files
into a single file.

COPY (Cont.)

Specifying

New Account or

Protection Number

The COPY
command
1lets
vyou
specify
the
new
file's
protection
number,
and
the
account to which storage
fees for it will
be
charged.
Follow
the
new
file
specification
with
a
semicolon
(;) and the letter P
before giving a new 6-digit protection number, and with
a
semicolon
and
the
letter
A
before
giving a new
account (which must be valid for your user
name).
If
you
do
not specify an account for a new file, it will
take as a default the account you
gave
in
your
most
recent

SET

ACCOUNT

command.

However,

non-default protection numbers will be
maintained
higher
generations
of
existing
files,
unless
specify otherwise in the COPY command that creates
higher generation.

for
you
that

Restrictions

Copying

Archived

Files

You can make a copy of an archived file by specifying it
as
the
first
(or
source)
argument
in
a
COPY command, and
specifying a file of different name or type as
destination.
You
can edit the new file, because it does not have archive
status although it has the same
contents
as
the
original
file.
However,
vyou
cannot
give
the specification of an
archived file as the second (or destination) argument
of
a
COPY command, as this would replace the file's contents.
1If
you

attempt

so,

whatever

source

argument

you

supply

will
be
copied
1into
the
next
higher
generation of
archived file, leaving the archived file
intact.
And,
you
include
the
generation
number
when
specifying
archived file as the second argument of a COPY command,
command will fail.

the
if
an
the

Warning

Destroying

the

Contents

Files

If you give a destination file specification that includes a
generation
number, the source file will be copied into that
file, replacing any previous contents if that generation
of
the
file
already
exists.
Those
contents
cannot
be
recovered.
But see Restrictions - Copying
Archived
Files,
above.

COPY (Cont.)

Commands

APPEND

for adding information to a file or
putting
the contents of many files
into

RENAME

single

file

for changing only the specification

SET SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION

file

for changing

DIRECTORY with the TIMES
WRITE subcommand and VD

the

setting

the

SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION

parameter,

which determines when
to output devices are

files
copied
processed

for displaying the
date
and
that the file was written

time

Examples

Make an extra copy of a

file

@COPY FORT.TXT BACKUP.TXT

FORT.TXT.1 => BACKUP,TXT.3

in your connected directory.

[OK]

Copy
a
file
from
your
directory
into
another
user's
directory,
allowing
the destination file to be labeled with
default file specification (the source file specification).
@ACCESS

Password:

@COPY

TEST1.CBL

TEST1.CBL.2 =>

@END-ACCESS

<SARTINI>TEST1.CBL.2

[OK]

Use a wildcard character to
copy
several
directory on another structure to magnetic
@ACCESS SNARK:
@COPY SNARK:NA*,TST MT2:

SNARK:NACCESS.TST.
2
SNARK:NADVISE.TST.2
SNARK: NAPPEND.TST.2
SNARK:NASSIGN.TST.2
SNARK:NATTACH.TST.2

@END-ACCESS

Use

the

SNARK:

COPY command

=>
=>
=>
=>
=>

MT2:NACCESS.TST
MT2:NADVISE.TST
MT2:NAPPEND.TST
MT2:NASSIGN.TST
MT2:NATTACH.TST

files
tape.

[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]

to create a short text file.

@COPY TTY: NEW-FILE.TXT
TTY: => NEW-FILE,TXT.2

THIS
~2

FILE WAS CREATED

USING

THE COPY COMMAND.

@TYPE NEW-FILE,TXT
THIS FILE WAS CREATED USING THE COPY COMMAND.

from

your

COPY (Cont.)

Copy
a
file
from
your
directory
into
another
user's
directory.
Give the SUPERSEDE NEVER subcommand to cancel the
COPY command if the other user already
has
a
copy
of
the
file.

@ACCESS

<STEVENS)>

Password:
@COPY STATS.TXT

<STEVENS>,

@@SUPERSEDE NEVER
Qe

STATS.TXT.l

gNot

superseding

<STEVENS>STATS.TXT.3

current

file

CREATE

Invokes

your

defined

editor

create

file.

Format

@CREATE

(FILE)

/switch(es)

filespec

where

switches

are keywords, chosen from the list below,
your choice of CREATE command options
Defaults are shown

filespec

the

indicating

list of switches

is a specification for the file you want to create
Default the
1last
file
specification
and
1in a
gave
you
switches
associated
CREATE or
EDIT
command
during
the
current terminal session

Summary of CREATE Command

Switches

(defaults in boldface)

NOTE

These switches are valid
logical

name

EDITOR:

only

to be

the

Default

1if

you

have

type -

.EXE

EDIT program.

defined

/BAK

/Cl28
/C64
/DECIDE
/DPY

/EXPERT

/INCREMENT:n

100

/ISAVE:n
/LOWER
/M33
/M37
/NOBAK
/NODECIDE
/NONSEPARATORS
/NONUMBER
/NOVICE
/NUMBER
/OLD
/OPTION:name

/PLINES:n

Default n - 16

/R
/READONLY

/RONLY

/RUN:filespec

Default

file

/SAVE:n

/SEPARATORS
/SEQUENCE

/START:n
/STEP:n

/UNSEQUENCE
/UPPER

/WINDOW:n

Default n - argument of /INCREMENT switch
Default n -

100

Default n -

190

CREATE (Cont.)

CREATE

/BAK

causes an
at
the

Command

Switches

unedited copy of the file to be
end
of
an
editing
session

specification name.Qyp, where
file's original specification
Default

name.typ

saved
under
1is

the

/Cl128

calls for
a
128-character
alphabet,
allowing
insertion
of control characters in an alternate
format.
©See the TOPS-20 EDIT
Reference
Manual
for details.

/C64

calls for a 64-character
alphabet,
use
of
an
alternate
format
for
control characters

disallowing
insertion of

Default
/DECIDE

lets you decide whether to accept or reject each
change
caused
by
the
operation
of
the
S
(substitute) command of the EDIT program

/DPY

has

/EXPERT

tells
the
EDIT
program
that
you
need
only
abbreviated
error
messages, and fewer warnings
and reminders

/INCREMENT:n

specifies the value to add to each
of the file to obtain the next line
Default n - 100

/ISAVE:n

instructs
file
of
lines you

/LOWER

specifies that
all
alphabetic
characters
you
type
should be considered lowercase characters;
give
uppercase
characters
by
preceding
the
corresponding
1lowercase character with a single
quotation mark (').

/M33

has

effect

the

current

/M37

has

effect

the

current monitor

/NOBAK

prevents an unedited copy of the file from being
saved
at
the
end
of an editing session under
specification name.Qyp, where
name.typ
1is
the
file's original specification

effect

the

current

monitor

1line
number
number

the EDIT program to update the
specification
name.Qyp
after
insert

backup
every n

monitor

CREATE (Cont.)

/NODECIDE

ensures

the
(substitute)

automatic
command of

operation
of
the EDIT program

the

Default

/NONSEPARATORS

specifies that
the
characters
.
(period),
$
(dollar sign), and % (percent sign) are ordinary
textual
characters
and
not
field
delimiters
(separators)
in the accompanying file
Default

/NONUMBER

suppresses the
each line of a

/NOVICE

tells the
complete

EDIT program
that
you
want
to
see
error
messages
and
all
appropriate

warnings;

opposite

printing
file

1line

numbers

/EXPERT switch

Default

/NUMBER

prints

with

line

number

for

each

line

the

file

Default

/OLD

causes the first backup file to be
saved
under
the
specification
name.Zyp,
where name.typ is
the file's original specification

/OPTION:name

sets any EDIT switches contained in lines of the
SWITCH.INI file in your log=-in directory labeled
with name (of 6 or fewer characters).
See
the
TOPS-20

EDIT

information
/PLINES:n

specifies
to each P

Reference

about

Manual

SWITCH.INI

for

how
many lines to print
1in response
(print) command of the EDIT program

Default

same

/READONLY

prevents any changes
to
the
file
current session of the EDIT program,
it a read-only session.
This switch
given in the SWITCH.INI file.

/RONLY

same

/RUN:filespec

specifies an executable program
you
end the current session of
with the G command
Default file type - .EXE

/SAVE:n

/READONLY
during
the
i.e., makes
<cannot
be

/READONLY

instructs
file
(of
EDIT

/ SEPARATORS

files.

to
the

be
run
when
EDIT program

the EDIT program to update the
specification name.Qyp) after

program

commands

that

modify

the

backup
every n

file

notifies the EDIT program that the characters
.
(period), $ (dollar sign), and % (percent sign),
are not
ordinary
textual
characters
but
are
field separators in the accompanying file

CREATE (Cont.)

/SEQUENCE

tells the EDIT program not
to
strip
the
line
numbers from the file when the EDIT session ends
Default

/START:n

specifies the first line
number
for
the
EDIT
program to use when numbering the file
Default n - argument of /INCREMENT switch

/STEP:n

same

/UNSEQUENCE

tells the EDIT program
from the file when the

/UPPER

specifies that
all
alphabetic
characters
you
type
should be considered uppercase characters;
give
1lowercase
characters
by
preceding
the
corresponding
uppercase character with a single
quotation mark (').

/INCREMENT

to strip the line numbers
EDIT session ends

Default

/WINDOW:n

specifies the number
pages
to
be
held
session
Default n - 10

n (between
in
memory

18
and
during

99)
of
the EDIT

Characteristics

Input

Mode

and

Edit

Mode

The CREATE command runs the EDIT system
program,
first
in
Input
mode
and
then
in
Edit
mode.
(However, see also
Special Cases, below.) Input mode automatically begins
each
line with a line number (unless you have given the /NONUMBER
switch), and allows you to put
any
alphabetic
or
numeric
information
into
the
file.
When you have finished doing
this

and

press

the

ESCAPE

key,

the

EDIT

program

puts

you

into Edit mode and prompts you with an asterisk (*), just as
if you had typed the EDIT command with the specifications of
the newly-created file as argument.
If you want to save the
file in its present state, give the E (for end)
command
to
the
EDIT
program.
Otherwise
you can give any other EDIT
command to change or add to the file before saving it.

Hints

Saving

Backup

Files

Periodically

Give the /ISAVE:n switch to save an updated copy of the file
you
are
creating
after
every n lines inserted.
Then you
will lose only a few lines of input in the event of a system
failure.
The
similar
/SAVE:n
switch
1is
useful for the
CREATE command only in Edit mode, where it saves an
updated
copy
of
the
file after every n EDIT program commands that
modify the file.

CREATE (Cont.)

SWITCH.INI

File

that you
switches
command
If there is a group of CREATE
always or often use with CREATE or EDIT commands, put them
log-in
in your
into a file of specification SWITCH.INI
in a line of that file beginning with EDIT:abc,
directory,
identify
to
where abc is any set of characters you choose
Then if you include the single switch /OPTION:abc
the line.
these switches
when you give a CREATE or EDIT command, all
will

Further

in effect.

Information

For more information about the EDIT program, see the TOPS-20

EDIT Reference

Special

Manual.

Cases

Using

an Editor

Other

than

EDIT

The CREATE, EDIT, and PERUSE command

descriptions

this

that these commands call on the EDIT program
assume
manual
If your job uses another editing program,
for their action.

for

example

EDT, the switches and examples shown here will

not be applicable.

The editor used by CREATE, EDIT, and PERUSE is specified by
logical name EDITOR:, so you can find out the name of this
LOGICAL-NAMES
INFORMATION
the command,
program by giving
The Jjob-wide definition (if any) will be given
EDITOR:.
first, followed by the system-wide definition; the Jjob-wide
1If the definition of
definition prevails if both exist.
PERUSE
EDIT and
CREATE,
the
©SYS:EDIT.EXE,
is
EDITOR:
in this manual.
function as described
will
commands
(for
Otherwise, you must consult the appropriate manual
example, the EDT-2¢ Reference Manual) for information.
to define 1logical name
DEFINE command
the
You can use
your
available at
program
any editing
be
to
EDITOR:
Then this editor will be in effect when you
installation.

give the CREATE or EDIT command.

Effect

Memory

unkept

The CREATE command clears any

forks

from

memory,

loads the editor program defined by the logical name EDITOR.

then

Commands

DIRECTORY-class commands

for getting lists of existing files

EDIT

for modifying existing

PERUSE

for reading existing

EDIT/READONLY)
75

files

(same

CREATE (Cont.)

Examples

Create

file.

@CREATE

FILEl.TXT

Input:

FILEL,TXT.
1l

p9100

ITHIS IS A SHORT

00200

TEXT

FILE.

[FILE.TXT.1]
Create

and edit
program)

system

(using
another

the P
file.

and

commands

the

@CREATE FILEB.TXT

Input :FILEB, TXT.1

00100
00200

ITHIS

90100

IS ANOTHER

SHORT

TEXT

FILE.

ITHIS IS ANOTHER SHORT TEXT FILE.

*R100
00100

ITHIS

00200

(00108/1)

Lines

00100

ITHIS

SECOND

TEXT

FILE.

deleted

IS A SECOND TEXT FILE.

*E
[FILEB, TXT. 1]

Create,

then

execute,

@CREATE

FILEE,.FOR

Input:

FILEE.FOR.1

o100

00200
g0300
00400
00500

THIS

FORTRAN

IS A

SHORT

program.

TEST

101

[FILEE.FOR.
1]

@EXECUTE

FILEE.FOR

FORTRAN:

FILEE

MAIN,

LINK:

[LNKXCT

FILEE

THIS

ONLY

END

CPU

TIME:

PROGRAM.

TYPE 101
FORMAT
( ' THIS IS ONLY A FORTRAN TEST.')
END
)
T

Execution]
A

FORTRAN

TEST.

EXECUTION.

0.04

ELAPSED

TIME:

EXIT

@.44

EDIT

CREF

Runs

the

files

CREF program, which
type

produces

cross-reference

1listings

from

.CRF,

Format

QCREF destinati on-filespec=source~filespec

/switch

where

destination-fil espec

is the name of

the

which
you
want
to
contents of the .CRF
Default

source-filespec

file

send
file

the

device

processed

LPT:

the name of

the

.CRF

file

you

want

process

Default -

the names of all files of
type .CRF produced during
the
current
terminal
session

/switch

is one or more

CREF

keywords

Program

from

the

following

list.

Switches

Advances magnetic tape reel by one file.
You
can
type
this
switch
more
than once in the command
string.

Backspaces magnetic tape reel by
one
file.
You
can type this switch more than once in the command
string.

Cancels the
SWITCH.INI

processing

Restores the processing
your SWITCH.INI file.

Types

the

any

switches

any default

CREF help file.

SWITCH.,INI
/K

your

file.

/JH

1is

switches

1illegal

CREF

file.

Suppresses

Regular

Symbol

Table

the

listing.
/M

Suppresses OPDEF/Macro

Includes

Preserves an input file with the file type .CRF or
.LST.
These
types
of
input files are normally

the

Table

Op Code Table

deleted.

in the CREF
the

listing.

CREF listing.

CREF (Cont.)

Requests the line number at which the CREF listing
is
to
start.
CREF types out "RESTART LISTING AT

LINE:",

after

which

you

type

the

line

number

and

press
RETURN.,
If you use an indirect file, CREF
looks for the number in the indirect file.
/R
s
most
useful
for
physical
(non-spooled)
1line
printers, and is illegal in a SWITCH.INI file.

Suppresses the program listing

tables

you

and lists only

the

select.

Skips to the logical ehd of the magnetic tape.

Rewinds

Zeroes
the
DECtape
historical switch, and

the

magnetic

tape.

directory.
is illegal.

This

Characteristics

Current

.CRF

Files

If you have
files
of
type
.CRF
produced
by
LOAD-class
commands during the current terminal session, the unmodified
command CREF produces
1listings
of
them
and
deletes
the
files.
By
supplying
an argument of the form shown in the

Format section above, you can copy the listing for a current
.CRF
file
to
another
file
or
device.
To run the CREF
program
command
«CRF

Files

yourself when you have
R CREF instead.

From

current

.CRF

files,

give

the

Session

If your only files of type .CRF (created by the CREF program
or
one
of
the LOAD-class commands) were produced during a
previous
terminal
session,
the
command
CREF
puts
your
terminal at command level in the CREF program, symbolized by

an asterisk

(*).

CREF
1in this
for advice on

Thus

case.
how to

is equivalent

See Hints
proceed.

Further

the

command

Information,

below,

Hints

Producing

.CRF

Files

You can produce cross-reference files by including the /CREF
switch
1in
any
LOAD-class
command
that actually causes a
compilation (i.e., is not
prevented
from
doing
so
by
a
/RELOCATABLE
switch
or
by the existence of current object
files).

Preserving

.CRF

Files

After

Processing

Give the /P switch immediately after
the
CREF
command
to
preserve
.CRF
files.
Ordinarily
they
are deleted after
being sent to an output device or copled into another file.
78

CREF (Cont.)

Further

Information

For a brief on-line description of the
CREF
program,
give
the
HELP
CREF command.
For more detailed information, see
the TOPS-20 User Utilities Guide.

Effect on Memory and

Terminal

The CREF command replaces the contents of
any
unkept
forks
in
memory
with the CREF program and leaves your terminal at TOPS-2§
command level, or at command level within
CREF
(denoted
by
an
asterisk

prompt

[*]).

Commands

LOAD-class commands

for producing

.CRF files

Examples

Give the CREF command to obtain a listing of your
@CREF

CREF:

.CRF file.

TESTF1

Compile two FORTRAN
programs,
using
the
/CREF
switch
to
produce
LCRF
files,
Then
give the CREF command to obtain
listings of these, and use the /P switch to preserve the .CRF
files.

@COMPILE /CREF TESTF1l.FOR,
FORTRAN:

TESTF1

MAIN.,

FORTRAN:

TESTF2

MAIN.

@CREF/P
CREF:

TESTF1

CREF:

TESTF2

TESTF2.FOR

CREF (Cont.)

Determine what .CRF files you have, then mount a tape.
Give
the
CREF command, and once within the CREF program, have the
cross~-reference listing produced
from
one
of
these
files

copied
onto
tape.
(The
automatically when you give
were

produced

@DIRECTORY

during

.CRF
files
are
the
CREF
command

terminal

session.)

*,CRF

PS:<LATTA>
TESTM1.CRF.2
TESTM2.CRF.1

Total

@MOUNT

files

TAPE

CRFMAC:/WRITE-ENABLED

[Mount Request CRFMAC Queued, Request-ID
[Tape set CRFMAC, volume CRFMAC mounted]
[CRFMAC defined as MT3:]

128]

@CREF
*MT3:=TESTM2

[CRFXKC

*~C

core]

@DISMOUNT TAPE CRFMAC:
[Tape

dismounted,

logical

name

CRFMAC:

not
processed
because
they

deleted]

CSAVE

Makes a non-sharable copy of the program
file,

compressed

executable

format.

in memory and stores

Format

@CSAVE

(ON FILE)

filespec

(WORDS FROM)

locl

(TO)

loc2,

loc3

loc4,...

which

vyou

where

filespec

the

want

locl loc2,
loc3 loc4,

file

specification

wunder

to store the program
Default filespec - program

name.EXE

are
pairs
of
octal
numbers
or
symbolic
expressions
that
specify
the
span(s)
of
memory locations you want to save

Default locl

loc2

- 2@ to

occupied

last

1location

by program

Caution

Inefficiency of

CSAVE

Compared

SAVE

The CSAVE
command
saves
in
a
compressed-formatted
file
whatever
program the system finds in memory.
When the file
is returned to memory, this format prevents other users from
sharing
the
in-memory
copy
of
the
file.
Therefore you
should ordinarily use the SAVE command instead
for
storing
programs

executable

format.

Commands

GET

for

putting

LOAD

for

putting

source or

RUN

for

running

executable

SAVE

usual

command

saved

for

file

output

files

into memory

programs

saving

into memory

programs

in executable

format

CSAVE (Cont.)

Examples

Save

your

currently

loaded

program

compressed

executable

format.

QCSAVE

DMN.EXE.1

SAVED

Mount a magnetic tape set.
Then load an
ALGOL
program
and
save it in three places in executable format:
once in a disk
file under the same filename, again in a disk
file
wunder
a
new filename, and once on magnetic tape.
@MOUNT TAPE TAPBAK: /WRITE-ENABLED
{Mount Request TAPBAK Queued, Request-ID
[Tape set TAPBAK, volume TAPBAK mounted]
[TAPBAK defined as MT2:]

144]

@LOAD TESTAl
LINK:

EXIT

QCSAVE

TESTAl.EXE.1l

Saved

QCSAVE BAK
BAK.EXE.l

Saved

@QCSAVE MT2:
MT2:BAK

Saved

@DISMOUNT TAPE TAPBAK:
[Tape dismounted, logical

name

TAPBAK:

deleted]

DAYTIME
Displays the current day, date, and time on your terminal.
Format

@DAYTIME

Hints

Using

DAYTIME

The DAYTIME command, which does not require you to be logged
If
in, lets you check the system's clock against your own.
use
terminal,
hard-copy
a
from
output
the
saving
you are
this command to make a record of the date and time.
Examples

Give the DAYTIME command.
@DAYTIME

Friday, April 20,

1984 £9:21:19

DDT

Loads

there),

m erges

th en

debugging

starts

program

into

memory

it.

(unless

one

already

Format

eDDT/ switch(es)

where

/swit ch

one

the

/OVERLAY

following:

allows

pages of the DDT program
1loaded
over
pages occupied
existing program in memory

be
the

to
by

/USE-SECTION:n
specifies
@

to
37
debugging
run,

the

memory

octal)

section

into

program

(from

which

the
1loaded,

merged

Characteri stics
If

Debugging
If

you

have

along

Yo ur

already

with

your
program.

debugging
If

Program

Program,

But

Not

Already
loaded a
program,

some

then

existing
placed

starts

XDDT's

program
into

this

pages

the

program

DDT

command

Program,

into

memory
starts
the

Already

Loaded

symbols
1is
in
memory
without
a
DDT command merges SYS:XDDT.EXE into
debugging

include

in memory,

memory,

debugging

Debugging

If a program containing
debugging
program, the

memory,

Loaded

some

then

and

you

program.

the

DDT

receive

However,

same

pages

program
the

error

1is

if
the

not

message,

"?Illegal to overlay existing pages." To
force the pages
to
be
overlaid,
reissue
the
DDT
command using the /OVERLAY
switch.

Th ere

Current

you

not

memory

1is

contain
memory

have
the

symbols,
and

Compa tibility

starts

with

Program

program

current

the

DDT

in memory,

fork,

command

it.

your

puts

program

does

SYS:XDDT.EXE

in
not

into

DDT Versions

The

UDDT program run by the DDT command has
been replaced by
XDDT
program.
For
compatibility
with programs that
reference UDDT, a stub program
named
UDDT
references
the

the

XDDT

program.

DDT (Cont.)

Hints

DDT

Using

Create

Program

into
You can use DDT to begin typing instructions directly
first putting the instructions into a file
without
memory,
(period)
Give a RESET .
for later compilation and loading.
current fork, then the DDT command.
the
<clear
to
command
Then you can give
This will load the SYS:XDDT.EXE program.
When using
commands within XDDT to create your own program.
system
the XDDT program, you can use all the symbols in the
Calls
Monitor
TOPS-20
the
See
MONSYM.MAC.
file
parameter
MONSYM.MAC.
about
information
for more
Reference Manual
This method of writing a program is most useful for testing
special cases, or for learning to use TOPS-2@ monitor calls.
Special

Cases

Using

COBDDT

program,
COBOL
a
If you put COBDDT into memory along with
Use
starts the UDDT program, not COBDDT.
DDT command
the
the REENTER command to start COBDDT in this case.
Effect on Memory and

Terminal

current
The DDT command merges the SYS:UDDT.EXE program into the
If you
or loads and starts SYS:XDDT.EXE.
it,
starts
and
fork
starts
have already loaded a debugging program, the DDT command
program.

this

Commands

for loading your program

DEBUG

particular
FORDDT

debugging

along

program

with

(e.g.,

COBDDT).

for selecting the current fork.

FORK
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE

displaying
for
occupied by the

of
numbers
the
program in memory.

pages

Examples

Give the DDT command to begin
current

fork

in memory.

@DDT

DDT

debugging

program

the

DDT (Cont.)

Give the DEBUG command to debug a
FORTRAN
program;
CTRL/C to return to TOPS-20 command level so you can
the current load averages and number of jobs for the

type
a
find out
system.

Return

case)

giving

the

your

debugging

program

(FORDDT

this

DDT command.

@DEBUG TESTF1
LINK:
Loading
[LNKDEB

FORDDT

STARTING

Execution]

FORTRAN

DDT

°C

@SYSTAT SYSTEM

Fr1 20-Apr-79 13:50:981
35+14

Jobs

Load

36:47:55

(class

.72

.81

1.33

eDDT
STARTING

FORTRAN

DDT

>> START
THIS

END

CPU

TIME:

TEST.

EXECUTION

@¢.864

ELAPSED

TIME:

0.33

EXIT

QINFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE

66. pages, Entry vector loc @
g-12
Private
R, W, E
400
Private
R, W, E
4091-466
<SUBSYS>FOROTS.EXE.3

Display

the

programs

FORK-STATUS

the

CLIP

program

INFORMATION

with

the

3-7¢

memory

Then

use

and

with
the

new current

FORK-STATUS

254000

FORK

fork.

then

merge

CW,

the

INFORMATION

command

Verify
the

EMACS

FORK-STATUS

(1):

Kept,

CLIP (2): Kept,
UNITS
(3): HALT

HALT

HALT at
at 162,

50340,

0:00:03.6

70363, 0:00:00.2
0:00:00.9

@FORK CLIP
@INFORMATION

EMACS

CLIP

UNITS

FORK-STATUS

(1):

(2):

(3):

Kept,

HALT

HALT at

HALT

eDDT

DDT

162,

50340,
70363,

9:00:03.6
0:00:00.2

0:00:00.9

to
this

UDDT

CLIP program.

@INFORMATION

command.

len

make

with

program

DEASSIGN
Releases a device from your job and places the device back in the pool

of available devices.

Format

@DEASSIGN

(DEVICE)

dev:

where
dev:

deassign;

is the name of the device you want to

asterisk

(*)

deassigns

log-in terminal)

all

devices

job.

assigned to your

after the device name is optional.

(except your

The

colon

Restrictions

Open

Files

The DEASSIGN command will not deassign a device that 1is
An error is generated, and the
accessing an open file.
that file is closed or until
until
deassigned
not
device is
you log out. When you log out, all devices are deassigned.
Related

Commands

for assigning a particular device

ASSIGN

your

job

for finding out which devices are

INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES

ones have
which
and
available,
already been assigned to your job
for

MOUNT

mounting

structure

and assigning the
tape
magnetic
or
drive
disk
available
first
tape drive to your job

DEASSIGN (Cont.)

Examples

Deassign

device

@DEASSIGN

PCDR@:

Find

which

out

deassign

all

(in

this

devices
of

DSK,

PS,

SNARK,

CDR,

PCDR#,

CDP,

card

reader).

assigned

this

that

case

assigned

TTY222,

FEl1-15,

job,

(Note

never

TTY222:,

MTA2,

MT@,

LPT,

LPT@,

LPT1

NUL,

PLT,

PLT@,

DCN

MTA2,

MT@,

PCDR

to/opened

this

job:

@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES

Devices

available

DSK,

PS,

SNARK,

CDR,

PCDRO,

DCN,

SRV

Devices

CDP,

assigned

this

PACK,

job:

FNT2¢,

FE1-15,

MTA2,

LPT,

LPT@,

PTY15-61,

NUL,

PLT,

to/opened

this

job:

TTY222

then

done.

PTY15-61,

PTY15

@DEASSIGN

your
was

job:

FTN2¢,

SRV

Devices

to
this

DEVICES

this

PACK,

Verify

@INFORMATION AVAILABLE
available

are

these.

that
your
terminal,
deassigned.)

Devices

case

LPT1
PLT@®

DEBUG

Loads your
compiling

debugging

program
into
memory
along
with
a
the
source
file
first if necessary.

debugging
program,
Then it starts the

program.

Format

@DEBUG

(FROM)

/switch(es)

source/switch(es)

object,...

where

switches

are
keywords
chosen
from
the
list
below,
indicating
your
choice of DEBUG command options.
They have different
effects
depending
on
their
position
in
the command line:
placed before all
files in the command, they
act
as
defaults
for
all;
otherwise,
they
affect
only
the
nearest
preceding file.
Defaults
are

shown

the

list

of switches

source

is the file specification of the
source
program.
The filename must be of 6 or fewer characters, and
the file type of 3 or fewer characters; you cannot
use
a
generation
number.
This argument is not
necessary if you supply an object filespec.

object

is the file specification of the
object
program.
The
filename
must be of six or fewer characters,
and the file type must be .REL; you cannot
use
a
generation number.
This argument is not necessary
if you supply a source filespec.
Default (if
you
give
neither
source
nor
1last filespecs
=~
filespecs)
object
and associated switches you gave in a
LOAD-class

g oo

means
that,
after
arguments
(source,

form already shown

Summary of

DEBUG Command

Switches

/10-BLISS
/36-BLISS
/68-COBOL
/74-COBOL
/ABORT

/ALGOL
/BINARY
/COBOL
/COMPILE
/ CREF
/CROSS—-REFERENCE
/DDT

command

commas,
you
can
give
more
switches,
and object) of the
(defaults

in boldface)

DEBUG (Cont.)

/DEBUG
/FAIL
/FLAG-NON-STANDARD
/FORTRAN

/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
/LIBRARY
/LIST
/MAC
/MACHINE-CODE
/MACRO
/MAP
/NOBINARY
/NOCOMPILE
/NOCREF
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
/NODEBUG
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
/NOLIBRARY

/NOLIST
/NOMACHINE-CODE
/NOOPTIMIZE
/NOSEARCH
/NOSTAY

/NOSYMBOLS
/NOWARNINGS
/OPTIMIZE
/PASCAL
/RELOCATABLE
/SAIL
/SEARCH
/SIMULA
/SNOBOL
/STAY
/SYMBOLS
/WARNINGS

DEBUG Command

Switches

/10-BLISS

compiles the
Default

file using the BLISS-10 compiler.
for files of type .Bl@ and .BLI

/36-BLISS

compiles

file using the BLISS~36
for files of type .B36

compiler.

Default
/68-COBOL

compiles the
Default

file using the COBOL-68
for files of type .C68

compiler.

/74-COBOL

compiles

the

file using the COBOL-74
for files of type .C74

compiler.

the

Default

/ABORT

stops

returns

/ALGOL

compile if a fatal error is detected and
your terminal to TOPS-20 command level,

compiles the
Default

file using the ALGOL compiler.
for files of type .ALG

DEBUG (Cont.)

/BINARY

allows generation of an object (binary)

file for

file given.

each source

Default

/COBOL

file
compiles the
COBOL~68
either
has
installation
SYS:COBOL, EXE.

Default for

/COMPILE

the COBOL compiler,
using
your
that
COBOL-74,
or

files of type

file

the

stored

.CBL

forces compilation of the source file even if a
Use this
current object file already exists.
to
switch along with a /LIST or /CREF switch
object
current
have
you
when
1listings
obtain
files.

/CREF
/CROSS—~REFERENCE

same as /CROSS~REFERENCE.

cross~reference
containing
file
The filename
for each compilation.

a
creates
information

Iis
the file type
is that of the object file;
Use the CREF command to obtain a listing
.CRF.
this switch
(For COBOL files,
of the file.
cross—-reference

produces

automatically

See the TOPS-20 User Utilities

Guide

loads the DDT debugging program along with

your

listing.)

for more information about the CREF program.

/DDT

/DEBUG

object

file.

produces an object
information beyond
during compilation.
and

only

switch).

/FAIL

you

file containing debugging
1is wusually inserted
what
(For FORTRAN programs only,
have not given the /OPTIMIZE

compiles the file using the FAIL compiler.
Default for

files of type

.FAI

/FLAG-NON-STANDARD

indicates nonstandard syntax in file.

/FORTRAN

compiles the file using the FORTRAN compiler .

Default in the absence of a standard source
file type and a language switch
Default for files of type

.FOR

/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"

passes the specified switches to
that will process the file(s)
switch applies. You must include
in double quotation marks

/LIBRARY

same as /SEARCH.

").

the compiler
to which this
the switches

DEBUG (Cont.)

/LIST

prints

line

printer

ASCII

format;

the

filename
overrides
file.
/MAC

same

/MACHINE-CODE

produces

listing
name

the

this

program

listing

in
the

of the object file.
The
/CREF
switch
/LIST when they both apply to the same

/MACRO.,

code.

file

The

the
file
languages.

containing

filename

type

1is

the

that

generated

.LST.

the

For

machine

object

file;
level

high

Default

/MACRO

assembles

the

Default
/MAP

produces

files
for

using

files

loader

the

map and

address)

.MAC

stores

object .MAP,
where
object
module containing the start
start

MACRO assembler.

type

nnnLNK.MAP,

1is
the
address;
where

nnn

the

file

name of
or
(if

the
no

job

your

number.

/NOBINARY

prevents

generation

object

Use
this
switch
along
allow these
switches
to
producing

/NOCOMPILE

new

object

file.

/CREF to
without

file.

prevents compilation if
file
is
current;
compilation.
/RELOCATABLE

(binary)

with /LIST or
take
effect

the
associated
otherwise
it

Cancels
switch.

the

object
forces

/COMPILE

cross-reference

file.

Default
/NOCREF

same

/NOCROSS—-REFERENCE

/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
prevents

the
Default

/NODEBUG

excludes

object

creation

special

file.

debugging

(For

FORTRAN

information

programs

from

your

only.)

/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
prevents

line

cross-reference

printer

listing

file.

Default

/NOLIBRARY

same

/NOLIST

prevents a line
Default

/NOMACHINE-CODE

prevents
code.

/NOSEARCH.

printer

generation

Default

listing

file

the

program.

containing

machine

DEBUG (Cont.)

/NOOPTIMIZE

prevents the generation of a globally

/NOSEARCH

requires all modules in the object file
1library
(the
file
accompanied
by
this
switch in the
command line) to be loaded even if they are
not
called
by
your
program,
Cancels the /SEARCH

object file (for
Default

FORTRAN

optimized

programs only).
'

switch.
Default
/NOSTAY

stops
the
background
default

/NOSYMBOLS

/NOWARNINGS

for

prevents a

with

the

prevents

compiler
from
being
placed
in
a
fork.
Use
when
/STAY is set as a
the

compiler.

symbol

table

display

object

file.

from being
warnings

loaded
for

along

nonfatal

errors.

/OPTIMIZE

calls for generation
of
a
globally
optimized
object
file,
that is, one that runs as quickly
as possible.
(For FORTRAN
programs
only,
and
only if you do not also give the /DEBUG switch).

/PASCAL

compiles the

/RELOCATABLE

identifies the input
file
as
an
object
file
(regardless
of
1its
extension)
and
prevents
compilation of the source file, forcing
use
of
existing object file even if the object file
an

Default

file using

for

out of date.
Default for

the

files of

files

PASCAL compiler.

type

.PAS

.REL

/SAIL

compiles the
Default

/SEARCH

requires that the object file library (the
accompanied
by this switch in the command

searched

file using the SAIL compiler.
for files of type .SAI

for modules called

your

file
line)

program

Only these modules
by a program subroutine.
or
are loaded, along with modules called
from
the
system libraries, which are always searched.
/SIMULA

compiles the

/SNOBOL

compiles

Default

the

Default

file using

for

file using

for

the

SIMULA compiler.

the

SNOBOL compiler.

files of

files

type

.SIM

.SNO

DEBUG (Cont.)

/STAY

returns your terminal to TOPS~-20
command
level
so
that
you
can
perform other work while the
system continues executing
the
DEBUG
command.
You immediately receive the TOPS-20 prompt (@ or

and can then

1issue

any

user

command.

careful
not
to send incorrect data to
expecting
terminal
input.
(Refer

programs
to
the

CONTINUE

Programs

competing
This

command,

for

switch

terminal

saves

you

Restrictions:

input.)
from

having

to:

issue

“T
to
make sure the
“C to halt debugging;

debugger has begun; give a
and issue a CONTINUE /STAY

command

remain

command

1level

during

debugging.
/SYMBOLS

loads a symbol table along with the
helpful for debugging a program.
Default

/WARNINGS

displays warnings
Default

for

nonfatal

object

file;

errors.

Characteristics

Compiling

New Sources

Only

Before debugging programs, the
system
ordinarily
compiles
any source (and only those sources) whose write date is more
recent than that of the object file of the same
name.
You
can
override
this action with the /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE
switch.
Note that the DDT debugging program
1is
used
when
/RELOCATABLE prevents a new compilation.
Default

Switches

Only

to
the
the

Using

Not

Passed

Compiler

switches specified in a LOAD-class command
are
passed
the compiler; default switches are not passed.
1Instead,
system assumes that the defaults for
the
compiler
are
same as the defaults for the LOAD-class command.

Standard

File

Types

you specify source files with standard types (.FOR, .MAC,
.CBL, or.
ALG)
in a DEBUG command, the system automatically
calls
the
appropriate
compiler
when
compilation
is
necessary.

you

specify

source

files

filename

only,

the system searches your connected directory
1in
the
above
order for a file of this name and a standard type.
To debug
programs from sources that have nonstandard file types, give
a
switch to indicate the proper compiler (/FORTRAN, /MACRO,
/COBOL, or /ALGOL).
A switch will take
precedence
over
a
standard file type if they indicate different languages.
If
no compiler is indicated with either a switch or a
standard
file type, the FORTRAN compiler is used.

DEBUG (Cont.)

Name

Debugging

Program

Loaded

DEBUG

Ordinarily
the
DEBUG
command
causes
the
appropriate
debugging
program
to
be
loaded
along
with your program
(FORDDT with FORTRAN programs.
COBDDT with COBOL
programs,
DDT
with MACRO and ALGOL programs).
Use the /DDT switch to
specify that

DDT be

used.

Hints

Commas

Between

Filespecs

If you give two or more filespecs
separated
by
commas
as
arguments
to
DEBUG, the loaded programs exist in memory at

the same time and will act as a single program.
You can use
this
feature
to
substitute
one
module for another under
varying conditions or for different applications.
Plus

Signs

Between

Filespecs

If you give two or more filespecs separated

plus

signs

(+) as arguments to DEBUG, they are treated as a single file
by compilers.
Their
object
module
1is
stored
under
any
filename
given
as the "object" argument of the command, or
(if none) under the last filename in the group and file type
.REL.

Indirect

Files

Arguments

You can store the arguments (source
and
switches)
of
a
DEBUG
command
in
an
specify them by typing an at sign (@) and
DEBUG

command

Establishing

object
filespecs,
indirect file, and
its filespec as
a

argument.

Default Arguments with

the

SET Command

You can issue the SET DEFAULT
COMPILE-SWITCHES
command
to
set
up
default
global
arguments
to
the
DEBUG command.
Insert this SET command in your COMAND.CMD
file
to
change
your

Including

own defaults

all

permanently.

FORTRAN Debugging

Information

If you are debugging a
FORTRAN
program
and
you
wish
to
examine
1line
numbers or DO loops, or use statement tracing
or array dimension checking, give the
/DEBUG
and
/COMPILE
switches

with

the

DEBUG

command

include the necessary

information.

Running

LINK Directly

The DEBUG command
automatically
runs
LINK,
the
system's
loader
program,
but
1if you require control of the loading
LINK
TOPS-20
the
See
process you can run LINK directly.
Reference

Manual.

DEBUG (Cont.)

Wildcards

Illegal

with

DEBUG

The DEBUG command does not accept
%) in a file specification.

wildcard

characters

and

Effect
on Memory

The DEBUG command clears any unkept
appropriate
compiler if necessary,
compatible debugging program.

forks from memory, loads
the
then loads your program and a

Commands

COMPILE,

LOAD,

and

EXECUTE

other

LOAD-class

performing
DDT

for

commands

related
and

for

functions

starting

the

DDT

debugging program, or for starting
the
debugging
program
you
have
already

loaded

Examples

Debug

FORTRAN

@DEBUG

program.

FORT.FOR

FORTRAN:

FORT

MAIN.

LINK:

[LNKDEB

FOR

STARTING

DDT

Execution]

FORTRAN

DDT

Debug

FORTRAN

program

compilation
and
the
debugging information.
@DEBUG

/COMPILE

FORTRAN:FORT

using

/DEBUG

[LNKDEB
STARTING

Loading
FORDDT Execution]
FORTRAN

DDT

/COMPILE

switch

FORT.FOR

MAIN.

LINK:

the

switch

to generate

force

additional

DEBUG (Cont.)

Using incompatible switches, try to debug
system ignores one of them and continues.,)
@DEBUG/COMPILE/OPTIMIZE/DEBUG

FORTRAN: FORT

$ERROR
/DEBUG

program.

(The

FORT

IS GLOBAL OPTIMIZATION NOT
- /OPT IGNORED

SUPPORTED WITH

MAIN.

LINK:

Loading
FORDDT Execution]

[LNKDEB
STARTING

FORTRAN

DDT

Get a
Debug

time-ordered list
an old version of

of TEST1
it.

files

@TDIRECTORY TEST1.*
WRITE
PS:<LATTA>

TEST1.CBL. 2

5-Jan-85

13:10:57

.REL. 1

6-Dec-84

10:08:17

Total
@DEBUG

of 3 files
TEST1/RELOCATABLE

LINK:
[LNKDEB

Loading
DDT Execution]

DDT

1in

your

directory.

DEFINE

Establishes or cancels logical names for your jobe.
Forma t

@DEFI NE

(LOGICAL NAME)

name:

1list

where

is
any
combination
of
up
characters
that
you want to
Use an asterisk (*) for this
all logical names.
The colon

name:

optional.

is
a
series
of
directories,
file

list

logical

to
39
alphanumeric
use as a logical name.
argument
to
withdraw
after the logical name

devices,
file
structures,
specifications,
and/or
other

names; each item should
be
separated
by commas.
Default - not specifying a list
withdraws
logical name definition

from

the others

the

Characteristics

Designates a

Colon

Logical

Name

Normally, when you give a logical name to an EXEC command in
the
place
of
a
filespec, structure, or directory name, a
colon must follow the logical name.
However, for the DEFINE
and
INFORMATION
LOGICAL-NAMES commands, where the argument
can only be a logical name, a colon after the
1logical
name
is

optional.

Hints

DEFIN E

Your DEFINE
command
is
valid
for
the
current
terminal
session
only.
If
there are logical names that you always
want to use, put DEFINE commands into a LOGIN.CMD
(or,
for
batch
jobs
started
by
SUBMIT commands within the control
files of other batch jobs, a BATCH.CMD) file in your
1log-in
directory.
Redef ining

System

Logical

Names

You can use
the
DEFINE
command
to
redefine
any
system
logical
name
for
your
own
Jjob.
By
repeating a system
logical
name
1in
1its
own
search
1list
you
expand
its
definition
to
1include
the
other
1items, iIn the order you
specify.
Consider the system logical name
SY¥S:,
which
|is
searched
whenever
you
give
a
program name in place of a
TOPS~-20
command.
If
you
redefine
SYS:
to
be
str:<directory>,
SYS:
you
can
run
programs
in
str:<directory> by typing just their names.
This will
work
as
long
as
the
program names are not the same as TOPS-20
commands.

DEFINE (Cont.)

Logical

Names as Dummy

You can use

devices

when

Filespecs

logical

writing

names

programs.

dummies

for

filespecs

Then, just before running

as
these
such a program, use the DEFINE command to define
without changing the program
filespecs or devices,
real
itself.

Information

For more information about

TOPS-20 User's Guide.

I
I
I

|
|
|

I
|
|
|
|

Special

using

1logical

names,

see

the

Cases

Using Recognition in the Filespec

a
in
Normally, when you attempt to wuse recognition
nonexistent filename, the system rings the terminal bell.
However, for the DEFINE command, instead of ringing the
terminal bell, the system may append part(s) of the default
name
logical
to the
..8,
.¢ or
file specification,
This is because DEFINE allows you to define a
definition.
directory or filespec that may not yet exist.

..0
Note that a logical name definition that includes .0 or
“may not work for vyour use of the logical name; it is
recommended that you specify the complete directory name

filespec.

Restriction

|
|

Adding Comments to a DEFINE Command Line

You can add a comment to the end of any TOPS-28

command

long

and

the comment with one of the comment characters:
preceding
an exclamation point (!) or a semicolon (;). However, only
the exclamation point can be used with the DEFINE command.

|
|
|
Using

Short Logical Names Only

Although logical names can be up to 39 characters

include dollar signs ($), hyphens (-), and underlines
can
programs originally
(), some commands and programs (e.g.,
written

for

the

TOPS-10

operating

system)

accept a more

These can be no more than 6
limited set of logical names.
If
characters 1long and cannot include any special symbols.
all your logical names are of this kind, they will be
acceptable to any TOPS-2@ programs and commands.

DEFINE (Cont.)

Commands

INFORMATION

LOGICAL-NAMES

for

finding

definitions

out

the

logical

current

names

Examples

Define

@DEFINE

logical
LGN:

for

<MANUALS>,

Withdraw the
@DEFINE

name

logical

your

job.

name.

LGN:

Define a logical name to be a set of directories to
have
access.
Then use the logical name to copy a
one of them into your connected directory.
@DEFINE

MSM:

<MANUALS>,

<SARTINI>,

which you
file from

@COPY MSM:4-UPED.TXT
<MCELMOYLE>4-UPED.TXT.1
Add

one

your

that

you

the

program

@DEFINE

can

SY¥S:

own

run

4-UPED.TXT.1

directories

.EXE

files

the

that

definition

SYS:

directory by typing

name.
SYS:,AURORA:<WHITING,TOOLS>

100

[OK]
so

just

DELETE

Marks

file(s)

for

eventual

erasure,

Format

@DELETE (FILES)
@eesubcommand

filespecC,...,

where

is the specification of
you want to delete.

filespec

Default

.gen -

file

all generations
the
of
specified files

means

that
after
commas
you
give more file specifications

means that after
can
give
one

@@subcommand

that

can

a final comma
you
of
the
following

subcommands
:

DELETE

Command

Subcommands

ARCHIVE

both deletes the disk copy (if any)
and
gives
up
the
tape
copy
of
specified archived files.

CONTENTS~-ONLY

deletes
and
1immediately
expunges
only
the
disk
copy of files that
also have a tape copy.
Note
that
you
must use the RETRIEVE command,
not UNDELETE, to restore such files
to disk.

DIRECTORY

deletes and immediately expunges
a
subdirectory
without
making
the
disk space available to
the
files
of
other
users.
Subdirectories
appear
as
files
with
the
type
.DIRECTORY
in
the
immediately
superior directory.
For users with
enabled
Wheel
or
Operator
capabilities only.

EXPUNGE

immediately and

the

specified

permanently

files

erases

from

the

directory.
FORGET

deletes
and
immediately
expunges
the
specified files without making
their disk space available
to
the
files
of
other
users;
for users
with
enabled
Wheel
or
Operator
capabilities only.

191

DELETE (Cont.)

KEEP n

saves the n most recent generations
of
the
specified
files
while
deleting the rest.
Default

Output

Notice of

Deleted

Archived

Files

Whenever

an archived file is completely expunged as a result
of
your
DELETE
command
(that
1is, when you also give the
ARCHIVE subcommand),
the
operator
sends
a
mail
message
notifying the owner of the directory from which the file was
taken.

Characteristics

Privileged
The

Subcommands

DIRECTORY

and

DELETE

FORGET

subcommands

the

DELETE

command

are
Intended
for privileged users only, and only as a last
resort, because they withhold freed disk space
from
system
use.
Users with enabled Wheel or Operator capabilities can

run

the

CHECKD

program

recover

this

disk

space.

DIRECTORY should not be used unless the KILL subcommand to a
BUILD command fails to delete the directory.
FORGET is
for
removing
damaged
files from directories, and should not be
used unless DELETE without subcommands fails to
delete
the
file.

Hints

Removing

If
it

Open

Files

DELETE with the EXPUNGE
may
be
that some job

INFORMATION

FILE-STATUS

has
done
so.
If it
mapped) RESET command

Recovering

Deleted

Archived

subcommand fails to erase a file,
in the system has opened it.
The

command

tells

whether

your

own

Jjob

has, give the CLOSE or (if the file is
before repeating DELETE and EXPUNGE.

Files

If you have
given
the
DELETE
command
with
the
ARCHIVE
subcommand to delete an archived file, and the disk copy has
already been expunged, you may still be able to recover
the
tape
copy.
The
operator
will
send
a MAIL message (see
Output, above) concerning the discarded
tape
copy
of
the
deleted
file.
Use
this
information,
along
with
Hints - Undoing DISCARD, in the DISCARD command description,
to attempt recovery of the deleted file.

192

DELETE (Cont.)

Special

Ca ses

With

Files

the

"Permanent"

Attribute

The system erases only the contents of any files
that
have
the
Permanent
attribute
(e.g.,
MAIL.TXT
in
your log-in
directory) when you include them in a DELETE command.
Thelir
file
specifications
remain
among
your deleted files, and
cannot

removed

TOPS-20

commands.

Restrictio n

Using

Logical

Names When

Specifying

Files

for

Deletion

If you include a logical name when specifying arguments to a
DELETE
command,
the
system
will search for the specified
file in only the
first
directory
of
the
1logical
name's
definition.
This
restriction
prevents
the accidental
deletion of another file if the file you intended to
delete
has

already been deleted.

Warning

Erasure of

Deleted

Files

Ordinarily
an
UNDELETE
command
given
during
the
same
terminal
session
as
an original deletion will recover the
deleted files, unless you included the EXPUNGE subcommand to
DELETE
or
gave
a subsequent EXPUNGE command.
However, if
any user or a batch job logs out
while
connected
to
Yyour
directory,
all deleted files are permanently erased.
Also,
if available disk space is low on the system,
the
operator
or
the
system
itself may expunge all deleted files from a
structure even though you have not logged
out.
A warning
message is usually sent before this happens.

Commands

DIRECTORY, with the
DELETED subcommand
DISCARD

for displaying
files
for giving

on-line

1list

up only the

files

deleted

tape copy

for

INFORMATION DISK-USAGE

for finding out how much disk
space
is
available,
and
how
much
|is
associated with deleted files

UNDELETE

for

183

removing

EXPUNGE

files

permanently

recovering deleted

files

deleted

DELETE (Cont.)

Examples

Delete

two

@DELETE

your

TTY,SCM,

files.

VERCBL,.BAT

TTY.SCM.1l [OK]
VERCBL,BAT.2 [OK]
Delete

all

your

produced

expunge

them).

object

the

@DELETE ::REL,

[OK]
[OK]
[OK]

TESTF1l.Q0OR.4

[OK]

Killed Job 32,
at

25-Apr-84

and

program.

all

your

Then

1log

Dbackup

out

(this

files

will

* Q%

TESTAl.REL.,1
TESTF1.REL.1
TESTCl.0BL.2

@LOGOUT

files

EDIT

User J.L.PAGE,

Account 341,

10:15:51,

@:1:46

Used

TTy 41

1:23:59

Delete some files, and check what files are currently deleted
in
your
<connected directory.
Give the UNDELETE command for
two of these, then expunge the remaining
deleted
files
and
verify that they are gone.
@DELETE

*,QXT

4-UPED.QOXT.7

[OK]

MAIL.QXT.1l [OK]
REMARK.QXT.3 [OK]
@DIRECTORY,

@@DELETED

PS:<J.L.PAGE>
4-UPED.QXT.1,2,3,4,5,6,7

« TXT.7,8,9
MAIL,.QXT.1
MEMO.QMD.
1
REMARK.QXT.1,2,3
TTY.SCM.
1

VERCBL.BAT.
2

Total

@UNDELETE

files

TTY.SCM,

TTY.SCM.1 [OK]
VERCBL.BAT.2 [OK]
@EXPUNGE
PS:<J.L.PAGE>

VERCBL.BAT

pages

freed]

@DIRECTORY,

@@DELETED
ed
@

194

DEPOSIT

Modifies

the

contents

specific memory location.

Forma t

@DEPOSIT

(MEMORY

LOCATION)

address

(CONTENTS)

data

where

address

octal

number

data

symbolic

symbol

numerical

expression

Output

Statusof Pages

When you complete a DEPOSIT command, the system gives you
a
message
indicating the status of the page you are trying to
change:
" [New]"
for
previously
nonexistent
pages,
"[Shared]" for those having Copy-on-Write status, or "?Can't
write that page" for other pages.
(See also Hints - Setting
the
Page-~access
of
Memory
Pages,
below.)
However,
no
message is printed for deposits made to private pages.
Hints

Using

Symbols

For

Using

symbols

that

program,

you

followed

by an

DDT

are

can

defined

specific

ampersand

(&)

and

multiple

by
the

giving
symbol

modules

the module name
name.

Instead

Usually the DEPOSIT
command
is
program
provides
more
powerful
contents

wunnecessary,
as
the
methods for modifying

DDT
the

of memory.

Abbreviating DEPOSIT Arguments
The contents of each memory location are represented as
two
6-digit
octal
numbers.
By
inserting
a
pair
of commas
between these two numbers, you
can
abbreviate
them.
For
example,
to
deposit
000004000050
into
memory
location
151983,

use

the

@DEPOSIT
This

the

151003

same

@DEPOSIT

command

4,,50

151003

4000050

195

DEPOSIT (Cont.)

Note
For

that you can

example,

the

@DEPOSIT

also

insert

commas

command

1+43,,

between

expressions.

5+7

deposits 000004000014 into memory location 1.
(Expressions
are
considered to be octal unless they contain an 8 or a 9,
in which case they are considered
to
be
decimal
and
are
translated

The

octal.)

DEPOSIT command

letter

Deposit

itself can be abbreviated

by the

single

Address

Defaults

the

One

Examined,

and Vice

Versa

first

argument of a
DEPOSIT
command
defaults
to
the
by your most recent EXAMINE command.
(You
must press the
ESCAPE
key
to
take
this default.)
The
argument of an EXAMINE command defaults to the address whose
contents were modified by your most recent DEPOSIT
command.
Therefore
you
can examine a memory location, deposit a new
value in it, and verify your action,
while
specifying
the
location
only
once.
If you give DEPOSIT commands without
intervening EXAMINE commands (or vice
versa),
the
default
address increases by 1 for each subsequent command.
address

Setting

the

examined

Page—-access

Memory

Pages

If the system responds to a DEPOSIT command
with
an
error
message
of the form, "?Can't write that page", give the SET
PAGE-ACCESS COPY-ON-WRITE command for the page.
Then
give
DEPOSIT
again.
If the system allows it, you will be given
your own copy of the page to modify.
Using

DEPOSIT With

Inferior

Processes

To
modify
memory
for
a
process
inferior
to
the
one
immediately
below
the
TOPS-20 command processor, you must
give the FORK command to specify this process
before
using
DEPOSIT.
Remember that for an inferilor
superior
processes
must
be
running
PROGRAM-STATUS tells you which processes

Effect

The

process to run, all
too.
INFORMATION
these are.

Memory

DEPOSIT command

changes

one

location

in memory.

Commands

DDT

for

calling

allowing more
of
EXAMINE

program,

memory

for displaying
specific memory

106

debugging

efficient modification

the
contents
location

DEPOSIT (Cont.)

for
selecting
memory you want

FORK

INFO RMATION

MEMORY-USAGE

for

displaying

pages,
SET

PAGE-ACCESS

for

their

making

specified

the
process
to modify
a

1list

contents

whose

memory

and

status

write

possible

pages

Examples

Deposit

@DEPOSIT

value

a memory

location.

1500 21

Modify a memory
location,

@DEPOSIT T3+1

@EXAMINE T3+1

T3+1/

P+2

location,

using

symbols.

Then

examine

the

P+2

(4/

21)

Try to deposit a number into a page of memory that
does
not
allow
it.
Examine
memory,
set
the page to Copy-on-Write
status, and try again (succeeding this time).

@DEPOSIT 716585 #
?Can't write that page
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
216.

pages,

Section

g~-11

Entry

vector

Private

loc

462207

len

Private

4900-401
402~-660

Private
R, W, E
<FIELD-IMAGE>FORTRA.EXE. 3

700-730
731-733

<NEXT-RELEASE>PAl050.EXE. 4
Private
R, W, E

@SET

PAGE-ACCESS

@DEPOSIT

716

COPY-ON-WRITE

716505 @

[Shared]

QEXAMINE
716505/

716505
@

197

254000

13-271
1-31

R,
R,

CW,
E

DEPOSIT (Cont.)

Check your program status
(the
arrow
[=>]
indicates
your
Select an inferior process, deposit
current process [fork]).
a value into a memory location, and verify
that
memory
for
the superior

process

is not changed

to this.

@INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS
Used 0:00:05 in 0:10:11
TOPS~-20: 0:00:03.5
SET UUO-SIMULATION (FOR PROGRAM)
SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY (OF PROGRAM)
=> MACRO (l): “C from IO wait at 775701,
Fork 2: HALT at 472052, 0:00:00.1
@FORK 2
@DEPOSIT

3500 12

@EXAMINE 3500

12
3500/
@FORK 1

@EXAMINE 3500

3500/

202200,,1136

198

0:00:00.3

DETACH

Disconnects

your

job

from

your

terminal.

Format

@DETACH

(AND)

argument

where

argument

can be

one

CONTINUE

these:

- directs

to
had

the

proceed,
typed

current

just
the

program

as if you
CONTINUE

command

REENTER

reenters
just
as
REENTER

START -

current program,
you had typed the

command

starts the
current
just
as if you had
START command

Default its

the

present

program

program,
typed the

1left

state

Characteristics

Effects

Detached

Jobs

Detached jobs use scarce system
resources
(e.g.,
swapping
space,
process
slots, job slots) and can prevent new users
from

logging

in.

Warning

Programs Writing
If a program
device TTY:,
a

Effect

the

Controlling

Terminal

(Device TTY:)

running in a detached job attempts to write
the job will wait until it is again attached

to
to

terminal.

Terminal

The DETACH command leaves your
in the state before log-in.

109

terminal

detached

from

the

system

DETACH (Cont.)

Commands

ATTACH

for

joining

detached

SYSTAT

for

f£inding

out

SUBMIT

for

running

independent

UNATTACH

for disengaging

which

job

jobs

are

another

your

terminal

detached

jobs

job

from

its

terminal

Examples

Detach

your

job.

@DETACH

Detaching job #

Detach
log in

while

your job
again.

@DETACH START
Detaching
BOSTON,

job

the

program

memory,

then

TOPS-20

LATTA

@LOGIN

starting

Development

System,

TOPS-2@

Monitor

6.1(7)

341

Log in and put a program in
memory;
detach
the
Jjob
while
starting
this program, and repeat the entire procedure.
Log
in a third time and
begin
execution
of
a
third
program.
Interrupt
this execution with CTRL/C, then detach this third
job while continuing its program.
Now you
have
three
Jjobs
running
at
once.
Instead
of logging in again, attach the
first job (specifying the job number) and verify the system's

action.
@LOGIN
Job

LATTA
on

341

TTY230

@GET DMN
@DETACH START
Detaching

BOSTON,

€@LOGIN

job

TOPS-2@

LATTA 341

Job 22 on TTY222

26-Mar-84

14:38:09,

Last

26-Mar-84

11:36:12

5
Development

System,

26-Mar-84

14:42:083,

TOPS-20 Monitor

6.1(7)

Last Login 26-Mar-84 14:38:09

@GET TESTAl

@DETACH START
Detaching
BOSTON,

job

TOPS-2#

@LOGIN

LATTA

Job

22
Development

System,

TOPS-20

26-Mar-84

14:44:02,

Last

Monitor

6.1(7)

341

TTY222

110

26-Mar-84

14:42:03

DETACH (Cont.)

@EXECUTE

TESTF1l

FORTRAN:

TESTF1

MAIN,

LINK:

[LNKXCT

Loading
TESTFl1l

Execution]

“C

@DETACH CONTINUE
Detaching

BOSTON,

job #

TOPS-2@

53
Development

@ATTACH LATTA
?Job # required @ATTACH LATTA 5

LATTA has more

Password:

EXIT

@SYSTAT
5%
22
53

LATTA
222
DET
DET

System,

EXEC

LATTA

TESTAl

LATTA

TESTF1

LATTA

111

than

TOPS-20

one

Monitor

detached

6.1(7)

job

DIRECTORY

Displays

information about

the

files

a directory.

Format

@DIRECTORY (OF FILES)
@@subcommand

filespec, e,

where

is the specification
of
a
file
which you want information
Default filespec - *,*
%

filespec

means that after
commas
more file specifications

means that, after
give
one
or
successive lines

@@subcommand

Summary of

DIRECTORY Command

Subcommands

ACCOUNT
ALPHABETICALLY
ARCHIVED

BEFORE date

and/or

time
BY-PAGES

CHECKSUM

SEQUENTIALLY
WRITE

CHRONOLOGICAL

CREATION
READ

TAPE-WRITE
COMPLETE
CRAM

WRITE
CREATION

DATES

OFFLINE-EXPIRATION
ONLINE-EXPIRATION
READ
|TAPE-WRITE

112

you

about

can

give

a final comma, you can
more
subcommands
on

(defaults

in boldface)

DIRECTORY (Cont.)

DELETED

DOUBLESPACE

EVERYTHING

FIND number of generations

GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT

Default number - 1

HEADING
INVISIBLE

LARGER number

pages

LENGTH
LPT

ACCOUNT
CHECKSUM
CRAM

DATES
DOUBLESPACE
FILE-LINES

GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT
HEADING
LENGTH
LPT

PROTECTION
REVERSE
SEPARATE
SIZE

SUMMARY-LINES
TIMES
USER
OFFLINE

ONLINE

OUTPUT filespec

Default

PROHIBIT-MIGRATION
PROTECTION
RESIST-MIGRATION
REVERSE
SEPARATE

SINCE date

and/or

time

SIZE

SMALLER

number

pages

WRITE
CREATION

TIMES

OFFLINE-EXPIRATION
ONLINE-EXPIRATION
READ

L?APE-WRITE
USER

WROTE
CREATED

filespec - DIR.DIR

DIRECTORY (Cont.)

DIRECTORY

Command

Subcommands

prints

ACCOUNT

the
fees

storage

to
which
files are

account

for

the

charged

lists

ALPHABETICALLY

the

files

alphabetical

order

Default

restricts

ARCHIVED

the

files only,
offline and
BEFORE

date

listing

visible
online

restricts listing
written before the

and time or
week (or
and time

day of
TODAY)

and

archived
invisible,

to
files
date
and

1last
time

given

SEQUENTIALLY

computes and prints 6-digit
octal
checksums for the files, either

CHECKSUM | BY-PAGES

sequentially and
beyond
the
EOF
mark, or

without
going
(end-of-file)

by pages
on
disk,
accounting
for
holes
1in
files and pages
beyond
the
EOF
mark;
output

will
this

be followed
case.
Default

by letter

BY-PAGES

CREATION
CHRONOLOGICAL

lists
first)

|WRITE
READ

files
1in
according

order

(oldest

TAPE-WRITE

date

they

were

last

changed,

date

they were

last

read,

date
their
created,
Default

prints

COMPLETE

creation,

the

tape

copy

was

- WRITE

complete

file

specification,
which includes
structure and directory names
CRAM

compresses

printing

114

formats

space

and

time

the

reduce

DIRECTORY (Cont.)

CREATION

WRITE

READ
TAPE-WRITE
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION
ONLINE-EXPIRATION

DATES

the specified

lists for

files,

the

date of creation,

date

they were last changed, or

date

they were

date

the

read,

last

tape copy was created,

date of expiration
Default

deleted
to
descriptions
been
yet
not
have
that

limits
files

DELETED

- WRITE

expunged
DOUBLESPACE

EVERYTHING

DIRECTORY

the

double-spaces

output

command

the
order,
this
in
prints,
the
about
1information
following
specification;
files - file
number; size
account
protection;
(and
bytes
in
and
pages
in
associated

byte

size);

generation

of
retention count; date and time
of last change (Write),
creation,
the
of
and
read,
time
last
copy; the
tape
any
of
creation
the
created
name of the user who
user who last
the
of
and
file,
in

wrote

FIND

the

file.

all
of
prints the specifications
the n most recent generations
but
files
any
of the files, omitting
having n or fewer generations

Default n -

tells the number of generations of
the system will retain
file
each

GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT

the given directory

prints a
category

HEADING

each
1labeling
headline
information supplied
of

the command
Default

restricts the listing to

INVISIBLE

LARGER

only,
files
off-line

both

lists only files of

than

115

pages

invisible

on-line

size

and

greater

DIRECTORY (Cont.)

LENGTH

gives the file
the associated

length in
byte size

bytes

LPT

directs the command output to
instead of to your terminal

and

LPT:

ACCOUNT

CHECKSUM

CRAM
DATES

DOUBLESPACE
FILE-LINES
GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT
NO

HEADING
LENGTH

suppresses

the

information
specified

LPT
PROTECTION

LINES

REVERSE

pertaining
to
files,
which is

SEPARATE

refers

SIZE

the

SUMMARY-LINES

TIMES

information
lines, giving

USER

action

associated
subcommand.
to

DIRECTORY

with
the
(FILE-

the

1information

the
the

individual
bulk
of

command

output.

refers

the

following
the
file
a total
file-count,

and
total
page-count
and
checksum
if
required
subcommands.)
Default - HEADING
OFFLINE

restricts the listing to (visible)
off-line files only, both archived
and

ONLINE

OUTPUT

total

not

archived

restricts
files
filespec

the

listing

on-line

directs the command output
specified file rather than
terminal
Default

PROHIBIT-MIGRATION

restricts
that
are
they

the
your

DIR.DIR

the
1listing
to
£files
never migrated, because

were

PROHIBIT

filespec

to
to

specified

SET

FILE

command

PROTECTION

prints
the
protection
(protection number) of the

RESIST-MIGRATION

restricts
the
that the system

migration.
specified

1listing
to
files
considers last for

These
in

code
file

SET

files

were

FILE

RESIST

command.
REVERSE

causes
such

ordering

subcommand,
ALPHABETICALLY
or

CHRONOLOGICAL,

output

116

reverse

arrange

its

DIRECTORY (Cont.)

SEPARATE

lists the
complete
specification
file on a separate line
each
for
(instead
of
1listing
successive
generation
numbers of the file on
the
same
line,
separated
by
1listing
of
instead
and
commas;
files
of
the
same
hame
and
different
type by file type only,
indented under the first
complete
file specification)

SINCE date and time or
day of week (or
TODAY) and time

limits
1listing
to
files
written
after
the date
(or
of week) and time given

prints the

SIZE

size of

the

files

size

less

last
day

1in

pages

SMALLER

lists only files of

CREATION
TIMES

|WRITE

lists,

READ

the

TAPE-WRITE
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION

ONLINE-EXPIRATION

®
®»

for

®»

CREATED

USER

or
last

time

and

read,

date

time and

date

created,

they

were

tape

the

last

copy was

time and date of expiration
Default

gives

|WROTE

files,

specified

the

time and date of creation,
were
they
time and date

changed,

®»

than

pages

- WRITE

the name of the

user who

created

the

file,

changed

the

file

last

Default

- WRITE

Hints

Listing

Unneeded

Files

In preparation for deleting

will

fall

files

quotas,

within

that

your

you can get a

directory

list of

your

subcommands,
SIZE
largest files by using the LARGER and/or
oldest or least-used files with DATES, TIMES,
your
of
and
and BEFORE.
With FIND you can discover extra generations of
files.

117

DIRECTORY (Cont.)

Finding

Files

Particular

Age

Size

examine only files of a certain age
or
size,
give
the
pair of subcommands BEFORE and SINCE, or LARGER and SMALLER,
with appropriate arguments.

Comparing

Checksums

Files

You

can

use

the

numbers

reported

compare

two

files:

they

the

have

CHECKSUM

differing

subcommand

contents

they

will almost certainly yield different values; and
identical
files will have the same checksums.
The CHECKSUM subcommand

causes

Special

checksum

checksums

well.

Cases

Asterisks

Appearing

asterisk

(*)

DIRECTORY

error,

one

error

new

appearing
by

before

filename

indicates

possible

hardware-related

read

area of disk.
the file, use

new specification.

error

file

should

move

program

the

file,

To
the

the

disk

still

If
to

recover

(usually,

DIRECTORY-class

operation

test
COPY

the

and

specification.

command.

file

Filespecs

command

caused

functional

Before

whether
command

COPY

response
marginally

there actually is
to copy the
file

command

asterisk

the

succeeds,

will

there

precede

the
COPY command fails,
to
another
drive
and
repeat
fails, you may have to write your

everything

but

just

one

page).

Commands

for

Labeled

the

missing

Magnetic

part

the
you
the
own
the

Tapes

The

FDIRECTORY,
TDIRECTORY,
and
VDIRECTORY
commands
for
labeled
magnetic
tapes
are
equivalent to
the DIRECTORY
command for labeled
magnetic
tapes.
All
these
commands
rewind
the
tape
set to the beginning of the first volume,
print a directory of files, then rewind the set again.
You
can
give
only these subcommands when using DIRECTORY-class

commands

with

DOUBLESPACE,

labeled

magnetic

HEADING,

LPT,

tapes:
NO,

ALPHABETICALLY,

OUTPUT,

REVERSE,

SEPARATE.

and

Commands

FDIRECTORY

(Full

TDIRECTORY

(Time-ordered

DIRECTORY)

other
DIRECTORY)

commands

related
VDIRECTORY

(Verbose

DIRECTORY)

118

DIRECTORY-class
for

©performing

functions

DIRECTORY (Cont.)

Examples

Obtain

listing

your

files.

@DIRECTORY
PS: <HERRICK>

4-UPED, TXT.13
ACCT20,FOR.1
DUMPER.,MAC.
1
F-0,.DIRECTORY.
1
FORD.CTL.2,3,4,5,6
MEMO.CMD.
1

.FIL.,1
2
.FRM,
MULTIP, FOR. 2

Total

files

Use
a
DIRECTORY
command
with
a
filespec
consisting
of
wildcard
characters
and
the account attribute (;A) to find
out

which

files'

storage

fees are being

charged

account

MONITOR,

@DIRECTORY

*,*; AMONITOR

PS: <HERRICK>
FORD.CTL.
2
MEMO. FRM, 2

Total

files

Find out what files of type .TXT there are in your
connected
directory and in one to which you have group rights.

@DIRECTORY *.TXT,

<SARTINI>*,TXT

PS: <HERRICK>

4-UPED.TXT.13
MAIL.TXT.1
REMARK, TXT. 4

Total

files

PS: <SARTINI>
CHAP21,TXT.
33
CHAPT2,TXT.16
CHAPT3, TXT. 8
PRIVATE.TXT.1
TEST.TXT.1

Total

Grand

total

files

119

DIRECTORY (Cont.)

SINCE
and
Give
a
DIRECTORY
command
with
the
BEFORE
subcommands
to
find out which files were changed during the

week

March

1979.

@DIRECTORY,

@@BEFORE 3-12-85
3-5-85

@@SINCE
ee

PS: <HERRICK>

DIVIDE.FOR.
4
MULTIP.FOR.
2

QUOTNT.EXE.1
SQUARE.EXE.1
Total

files

Give the DIRECTORY
command
to
1list
directory that you have access to.
@DIR WORK:<HERRICK>
WORK: <HERRICK>

CALENDAR.TXT.
26

COMAND.MIC.3
QUERY.DAVE.1
.GENE,
2
RESULT.SCM.1
WEEKLY.STA.15

Total

files

129

all

the

files

DISABLE
Disables any special capabilities, such as those of Wheel or Operator,
that

you

have

enabled.

Format

SDISABLE
@

(CAPABILITIES)

Characteristics

Resumption of

Standard

Prompt

The DISABLE command causes the system to resume the standard

sign

prompt (@)

in place of the dollar sign prompt (),

indicated enabled capabilities.

which

Warning

Disabling

Promptly

Be sure to disable your capabilities as
finished using them,

accidentally damage

soon

you

have

so that you or a program you run cannot

the

system.

Commands

ENABLE

for

activating

manager

any

has given you

capabilities

that

the

system

Examples

Disable your capabilities.
SDISABLE
@

Try copying a file from a directory "to which you have no
your capabilities (assuming you have
enable
Then
access.
your
wup
been granted capabilities), copy the file, and give
capabilities with the DISABLE command.
@QCOPY

<MON-SPCS>FFE.SPC

?Directory access privileges required

@ENABLE
$COPY <MON-SPCS>FFE.SPC

{MON-SPCS>FFE.SPC.1 => FFE.SPC.2
$SDISABLE
@

121

[OK]

DISCARD

Gives

the

tape

copy

specified

on-line

files.

Format

@DISCARD

(TAPE

INFORMATION FOR FILES)

filespec,...

where

filespec

is
the
specification
of
whose tape copy you want to

reee

means

that

give more

after

file

commas

a
file
discard
you

can

specifications.

Characteristics

Action

DISCARD

The DISCARD command causes the tape pointer in the FDB (File
Descriptor
Block)
of the specified file to be deleted.
It
does not actually destroy the tape copy of
the
file,
The
tape
copy
1s
destroyed
when
the tape is recycled by the
operator.

Withdrawing
When

Archive

Hints

Status

Undoing

DISCARD,

below.)

Files

give the DISCARD command for
an
on-line
archived
you withdraw archive status from the disk copy of the
That is, the file
becomes
an
ordinary
disk
file,
you can edit or delete if you wish.

for

You

also

you

file,
file.
which
DISCA RD

(See

Non-archived

Files

can

also use the DISCARD command to
of
files
that
have
been
(automatically, by the system) and then

copy

RETRIEVE

command.

give
up
migrated

the

tape
tape

retrieved

using

the

Hints

Undoi ng

DISCARD

You receive a mail message from the operator for every
file
whose
tape
copy
you
discard.
The message gives the tape
number, saveset number, and file number within
the
saveset

each
tape
copy.
If you have given the DISCARD command
for a file and later wish to use the tape copy, you
may
be
able
to
recover
it using this information, as long as the
tapes have not yet been recycled.

122

DISCARD (Cont.)

Commands

permanent
a
that
for requesting
copy of specified files be made

ARCHIVE

DELETE

tape

(with CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand)

for deleting only the disk copy of files

that

also

have

tape copy

for requesting that an off-line file

RETRIEVE

restored

to disk

Examples

Discard

the

tape copy of a

file.

@DISCARD TESTER.EXE

TESTER.EXE.1

[OK]

Attempt to alter an archived file.

When you find out it

has

(this revokes its
copy
tape
its
discard
status,
archive
the
Archive
alteration.
the
perform
archive status) and
resulting

file and check its status.

@APPEND FOO, LOG DRCHIVE, TXT
FOO.LOG.
1

?File has archive status, modification is prohibited:

@DISCARD DRCHIVE,TXT

DRCHIVE.TXT.1

[OK]

@APPEND FO0O.LOG DRCHIVE, TXT
FO0O.LOG.1 [OK]
@ARCHIVE DRCHIVE, TXT

DRCHIVE.TXT.1l [Requested]
QINFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS DRCHIVE TXT
DRCHIVE.TXT.1l Archive requested

123

DRCHIVE.TXT.l

DISMOUNT

Gives

access

the

specified

structure

tape

set.

Format

@DISMOUNT medium

(NAME)

dev:

/switch(es)

where

medium

one

the

following

optional

arguments:

STRUCTURE

for

dismounting

structures
TAPE

for

(disk

file

packs)

dismounting

magnetic

tapes

dev:

is either the
structure
identification
(or
alias), or a logical name referring
to the tape set, e.g., the tape
setname
specified
in
your
previous
MOUNT
command, or a logical device name of the
form
MTn:.
The colon after the device

name
/switches

optional.

are
keywords,
chosen
from
below,
indicating
your
DISMOUNT

command

DISMOUNT

(for

use

with

the
choice

list

options

Command

Switches

argument

STRUCTURE

only)

Switch

/NOWAIT

tells
the
system
to
return
your
terminal
to
TOPS-20
command level as soon
as
vyou
give the DISMOUNT command, and
to

send

message

your

terminal
when the request has
been
processed.
Otherwise,
your
terminal
waits
for the
message.

124

DISMOUNT (Cont.)

Switch

/REMARK:"remark"

sends the specified remark (of
119 or fewer characters, which
dquotation
must be enclosed in
"]) to the operator
["
marks
your
of
notified
when he is
remark is sent
The
request.
the
include
only if you also
/REMOVE switch,

you
that
operator
tells the
physically
to
him
want
from
structure
the
dismount

/REMOVE

the drive; makes the structure
mount
unavailable for further
also
See
requests.,
DISMOUNT
of
Hints - Action
/REMOVE
Including
Command
Switch,

/STRUCTURE -ID:structure

below.

identification
the
of
name
the
gives
recorded in the
as
structure
give
you
when
disk(s); used
as argument dev:,
alias
some
the
See Hints - Using
above.
/STRUCTURE-ID Switch,

below.

Characteristics

Action of

DISMOUNT STRUCTURE Command

Ordinary DISMOUNT STRUCTURE

The DISMOUNT STRUCTURE command reduces by 1

the

mount

count of the specified structure (i.e., the number of
users who have given a MOUNT but not a DISMOUNT command
if you had given a previous MOUNT
for the structure)
DISMOUNT STRUCTURE command
ordinary
An
it.
for
command
does not withdraw the structure from system use.

DISMOUNT (Cont.)

Including

/REMOVE

you

Switch

include

DISMOUNT

the

/REMOVE

STRUCTURE

command,

switch
the

made

when

specified

wunavailable
for
further
mount
operator
1s informed of your dismount

giving
structure

requests.

the
is

The

request, and any
further action depends
on
him.
If
he
denies
vyour
request, the structure is again made available to other
users; 1f he grants your request, the structure remains
unavalilable for
further
mount requests, and is taken
off
1line
and
physically
removed.
Under
extreme
conditions
the
operator may take a structure off line
and physically remove it even though
some
users
have
not dismounted the structure.
Before doing so, he will
usually send a message to such users to allow
them
to
close their files.

Action

DISMOUNT TAPE

Command

The

DISMOUNT TAPE
command
unloads
the
currently
mounted
volume
of
the
specified
tape
set
(i.e.,
rewinds
it
completely
onto
1its
source
reel)
so
that
it
can
be
physically
removed
by
the
operator, and returns the tape
drive to the pool of available resources.
(Note that if the
/NOUNLOAD
switch
was given in your original MOUNT command,
no volumes are unloaded by the
system
or
removed
by
the
operator,

even

after

your

DISMOUNT

command

completed.)

a logical name (e.g., the setname of the tape set)
1is
used
in
the DISMOUNT command to specify the tape set, the system
also withdraws the definition
of
the
1logical
name.
Use

DISMOUNT

the

TAPE

form

command.

device

only

MTn:,
Use

names

for

1i.e.,
UNLOAD

the

tape

drives

drives
to

form

having

obtained

unload

device

using

tapes

from

names

the

MOUNT

drives

having

MTAn:.

Hints

Omitting

"medium"

If the dev:
unambiguous
tape

set

Argument
argument

(i.e.,

mounted

of
you

using

specify

the

your
do not

have

same

device

DISMOUNT

both

name),

the
medium,
The
shortened
dev:/switch(es), is sufficient.
Using

the

/STRUCTURE-ID

command
will
be
a structure and a
you

command,

need

not

DISMOUNT

Switch

The

/STRUCTURE~ID switch gives the name of the structure
as
recorded in the disk(s) of the pack itself, where it is used
by the system for identification.
You may use
this
switch
to dismount a structure that had been mounted using an alias
different from its structure identification.
(See
Hints
-

Using

the

/STRUCTURE-ID

description.)

126

Switch,

the

MOUNT

command

DISMOUNT (Cont.)

Using

INFORMATION
If

you

VOLUMES

give

dismounting

before

DISMOUNT

the

INFORMATION

tape

set,

the

TAPE

VOLUMES

system

will

command

respond

before

with

list

of the volids for mounted volumes, including volids for
any
volumes
newly
added
to
the
set.
You
should
keep
an
up-to-date record
of
these
for
use
with
further
MOUNT
commands.

Effect

The

Terminal
DISMOUNT

command

with

the

/NOWAIT

switch,

leaves

your

terminal
at
TOPS-20
command
1level.
If you have not given the
/NOWAIT
switch,
your
terminal
waits
until
the
system
has
processed
your
request, or until you give a CTRL/C to return to
TOPS-20

command

level.

This

CTRL/C

does

not

cancel

your

request.

Commands

CANCEL

INFORMATION

for withdrawing
processed
AVAILABLE

requests

before

they

are

DEVICES

for finding
assigned to
INFORMATION

mount

which tape
your job

devices

(if

any)

have

been

MOUNT-REQUESTS

for finding out information
requests
for
structures
currently mounted tape sets

about
pending
mount
and
tape
sets,
and
:

INFORMATION

STRUCTURE
for finding out information
about
the
specified
mounted
structure,
1including its mount count and
the names of
wusers
who
have
given
the
MOUNT,
CONNECT, and ACCESS commands for the structure

INFORMATION

VOLUMES

for finding out the volids of all
(including newly created volumes)

127

mounted
volumes
of a tape set

DISMOUNT (Cont.)

Examples

Dismount a magnetic

tape

set you have been

using.

@DISMOUNT TAPE MT3:
[Tape dismounted]
Dismount

the

same

tape

set,

LAT:
dismounted, logical

@DISMOUNT TAPE

[Tape

referring

name

LAT:

its

setname.

deleted]

Find out the volids of your tape set before
dismounting
in case the tape set has been extended to another volume.,

it,

@INFORMATION VOLUMES MT3:
Volumes of tape set LAT: LAT,00J16
@DISMOUNT MT3

[Tape
Find

dismounted]
out

you

have

any

mount

requests

pending

any

currently
mounted
tape
sets.
Dismount a currently mounted
tape set (these display the actual device name
(here,
MTAQ)
in

the

column

headed,

Status).

@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS/USER
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume
Status
Type

Write

Req Name

Reqi#

Job#

User

LATTA

UNLBLD

MTA@®
Tape
Locked
UNLBLD
128
There is 1 Request in the Queue
@DISMOUNT TAPE UNLBLD:
[Tape dismounted, logical name UNLBLD: deleted]

Dismount

structure

@DISMOUNT SNARK

Structure

SNARK:

you

have mounted

dismounted

128

named

SNARK.

DISMOUNT (Cont.)

Find out whether your mount request for a structure has
been
satisfied
yet
(it
has
not).
Use
the
CANCEL command to
withdraw this request.
@INFORMATION

MOUNT-REQUESTS

Tape/Disk

Mount

Volume

Status

MARK
TAPE
LATB
There

Queue:

Type

Write

MTAl
Tape
MTA3
Tape
Waiting
Disk
are 3 Requests in

Req Name

Enabled
Enabled

the

MARK
TAPE
LATB

Req#

Job#

126
148
157

64
13
65

User
HOVSEPIAN
WALLACE
LATTA

Queue

@CANCEL MOUNT 157
[1 mount request canceled]

Find out
whether
you
can
safely
dismount
and
remove
a
structure
you
have
mounted.
Use
the SEND command to ask
another user to dismount
the
structure;
then
enable
your
capabilities and give a DISMOUNT command that will physically
remove it.

LATB:

@INFORMATION STRUCTURE
Status

structure

Mount count:

LATB:

open

file count:

units

structure:

Foreign

Users
Users
No

who have MOUNTed LATB:
ACCESSing LATB: LATTA,

users

CONNECTed

@SEND GBLAINE PLEASE

LATTA, GBLAINE
GBLAINE

LATB:

DISMOUNT

LATB:

I MUST REMOVE THE STRUCTURE. THANKS,
@INFORMATION STRUCTURE LATB:
Status

structure

users

CONNECTed

@END-ACCESS
@ENABLE
RP@6

CABINET"

TMount Request
Structure
$DISABLE

units

structure:

LATB:

LATB:<OPERATOR>

SDISMOUNT STRUCTURE

LATB:

Mount count: 1, open file count: @,
Foreign
Users who have MOUNTed LATB: LATTA
Users ACCESSing LATB: LATTA
No

SOON AS CONVENIENT.

LATB:

LATB: /REMOVE/REMARK:"PLEASE

LATB Queued,
removed

129

Request-ID 164]

LEAVE

LATB: =

EDIT'

Invokes

your

defined

editor

modify

file.

Format

@EDIT

(FILE)

/switch(es)

input

filespec

(OUTPUT AS)

output

filespec

where

switches

input

are keywords, chosen
from
indicating
your
choice
options
Defaults
are
shown
switches

filespec

is the specification
edit
Default - last

the

file
associated
in a CREATE
during
the
session

output

filespec

Summary of

EDIT

the
of
in

1list
EDIT
the

file

below,
command

1list

you want

specification
and
switches
you gave
or
EDIT
command
current
terminal

is the specification with which you
want
to
name the edited file
Default - the input file
specification,
but with a generation number 1
higher
than
the
highest
existing generation number

Command

Switches

(Defaults

boldface)

NOTE

These

the

switches are
EDIT editor.

applicable

only

you

are

wusing

/BAK

/C128
/C64
/DECIDE
/DPY
/EXPERT
/INCREMENT :n

Default

100

/ISAVE:n
/LOWER

/M33
/M37
/NOBAK
/NODECIDE
/NONSEPARATORS
/NONUMBER
/NOVICE
/NUMBER
/OLD
!

This manual assumes that you are using the EDIT program to edit.
Refer
to
the
Special
Cases
section
below
for
information
relating to other editors.

130

EDIT (Cont.)

/OPTION:name
/PLINES:n

Default

/RUN:filespec

Default

file

/SAVE:n
/SEPARATORS
/SEQUENCE
/START:n
/STEP:n
/UNSEQUENCE
/UPPER
/WINDOW:n

Default
Default

n
n

argument
160

Default

/R
/READONLY
/RONLY

EDIT

/BAK

Command

type

.EXE

INCREMENT

switch

Switches

causes an unedited copy
of
the
file
to
be
saved
at
the end of an editing session under
the specification name.Qyp, where name.typ
is
the file's original specification
Default

/C128

/C64

specifies
insertion
alternate
Reference

128-character
of
control
format.
See

Manual

specifies a
use
of
an

for

alphabet,
allowing
characters
in
an
the
TOPS-20
EDIT

details.

64-character alphabet, disallowing
alternate format for insertion of

control characters
Default
/DECIDE

lets you decide whether to
accept
or
reject
each
change
caused by the operation of the S
(substitute)

command

effect

EDIT program

has

/EXPERT

tells the EDIT
program
that
you
need
only
abbreviated error messages, and fewer warnings
and reminders

/INCREMENT:n

specifies the value that will be added to each
line
number
of
the
file to obtain the next
line number
n

the

/DPY

Default

current monitor

100

/ISAVE:n

instructs
the
EDIT
program
to
update
the
backup
file
of
specification name.Qyp after
every n lines you insert, instead of
only
at
the end of the EDIT session

/LOWER

specifies that all alphabetic
characters
you
type
should
be
considered
lowercase
characters;
give
uppercase
characters
by
preceding
the
corresponding
lowercase
character with a single quotation mark (').

131

EDIT (Cont.)

/M33

has

effect

the current monitor

/M37

has no

effect

the

/NOBAK

prevents an unedited copy
of
the
file
from
being
saved
at the end of an editing session
under specification name.Qyp,
where
name.typ
is the file's original specification

/NODECIDE

ensures
the
(substitute)

current monitor

automatic
of

operation
of
the
EDIT program

command

the

Default

/NONSEPARATORS

notifies

the

EDIT program

(period),

(dollar

sign) are to be regarded
characters
and
not
(separators) in the file

that

the

sign),

and

characters

(percent

as
ordinary
textual
as
field
delimiters
being edited

Default

/NONUMBER

/NOVICE

suppresses the
each line of a

printing
file

line

tells

program

that

you

the

complete
warnings
switch.

EDIT

numbers

want

with

see

error
messages
and all appropriate
and reminders;
opposite
of
/EXPERT

Default

/NUMBER

prints

line

number

for

each

line

the

file

Default

/OLD

causes the first backup file to be
the
specification name.Zyp, where
the file's original specification

/OPTION:name

sets any EDIT switches contained in
1lines
of
your SWITCH.INI file labeled with name (of six
or fewer characters).
The system expects this
file to be in your log-in directory.

/PLINES:n

specifies how many lines to print in
response
to each P (print) command of the EDIT program
Default

saved under
name.typ is

same

as /READONLY

/READONLY

prevents any changes to the
file
during
the
current
session of the EDIT program, that is,
makes it a
read-only
session.
This
switch
cannot be given in the SWITCH.INI file.

/RONLY

same

/RUN:filespec

specifies the
the
current
the G command

/READONLY

Default

132

program
session
file

type

to
of
-

be run when
you
the EDIT program
.EXE

end
with

EDIT (Cont.)

instructs
the
EDIT
program
to
update
the
backup
file
of
specification name.Qyp after
every n EDIT program commands that modify
the

/SAVE:n

file

notifies

/ SEPARATORS

the

EDIT program

that

the

characters

.
(period),
$
(dollar sign), and % (percent
sign) are not ordinary textual characters
but
are field separators in the accompanying file
tells the EDIT program not to strip
the
1line
numbers
from
the
file when the EDIT session

/SEQUENCE

ends

Default
/START:n

specifies the first line number for
the
EDIT
program to use when numbering the file
Default n - argument of /INCREMENT switch

/STEP:n

same

/UNSEQUENCE

tells the
EDIT
program
to
strip
the
1line
numbers
from
the
file when the EDIT session

/INCREMENT

ends

specifies that all alphabetic
characters
you
type
should
be
considered
uppercase
characters;
give
lowercase
characters
by
preceding
the
corresponding
lowercase
character with a single quotation mark (').

/UPPER

Default

specifies the number n (between 18 and 99)
of
pages
to
be
held
in memory during the EDIT

/WINDOW:n

session
Default

Characteristics

Edit

Mode

Input

Mode

The

EDIT command runs the EDIT system program in Edit
mode,
an
asterisk
prompt
(*).
(However, see also
Special Cases - Using an Editor Other than EDIT, below.)
In
Edit
mode
you
can use any EDIT program commands to modify
the specified file.
If the EDIT program starts by
printing
the
word Input instead of Edit, the specified file does not
You are then in Input mode, just as if
you
had
yet exist.
CREATE
command
instead of EDIT.
See the CREATE
used
command description for details.

which

133

EDIT (Cont.)

Saving

Backup

Files

Periodically

Whenever you use EDIT, be sure
file
you
are
modifying,
1in
default the system renames the
name.Qyp

the

end

/SAVE:n
switch
you
periodically
during
edits.
SWITCH.INI

can
the

unedited
editing

copy

copy of
failure.

your

session.

the
By

file

using

to
the

have
this
backup
file
updated
editing
session
to reflect your

File

there

to keep an extra
case of a system

often

group of

use

file

with

EDIT

command

switches

that

CREATE

you

commands,

put

them

always
into

named SWITCH.INI in your log-in directory, in a line of
that file beginning with "EDIT:abc", where abc is any set of
characters you choose to identify the
1line.
Then
if
vyou
include
the single switch /OPTION:abc when you give an EDIT

CREATE

command,

all

these

Programs

and

Editing

switches

will

effect.

Hints

Debugging
You

Your
can

use

EDIT

written

commands

run

system

powerful

programs,

final

changes

files

but

you

the

containing

language.

programs

for

Sources

that

offer

testing

should

source

use

source

The

DDT

EDIT

files.

DEBUG

efficient

temporary
the

programs

and

corrections

command

make

Information

For

EDIT

Special

modify

programming

techniques

your

Further

the

information

Reference

about

the

EDIT

program,

see

Manual.

the

TOPS-2¢

Cases

Using

Editor

The

CREATE,

manual

Other

than

EDIT,

assume

and

that

for
for

their action.
example
EDT,

not

applicable.

EDIT
PERUSE
these

If your job uses
the switches and

The editor used by CREATE,
logical
name
EDITOR:, so
program

EDITOR:.

giving
The

command

commands

the

function
consult

1is

INFORMATION

definition

SYS:EDIT.EXE,

described

the

CREATE

this

(if

and

manual.

the appropriate
manual
(for
Reference Manual)
for information.

134

1in

this

program

is specified
by
the name of this
LOGICAL-NAMES

any)

will

first, followed by the system-wide definition;
definition
prevails
if
both
exist.
If the
EDITOR:

EDIT

another editing program,
examples shown here will

EDIT, and PERUSE
you can find out

command,

Jjob-wide

descriptions
call

EDIT

given

the
job-wide
definition of
commands

Otherwise,
example,

the

will

you

must

EDT-20

EDIT (Cont.)

You

can

use

EDITOR:

the

DEFINE

any

command

editing

installation.
Then this program
give the CREATE or EDIT command.
Attempting
If

you

Edit

Archived

attempt

define

program

will

1logical

available

effect

name

your

when

vyou

Files

edit

on-line

archived

file,

the

system

will let you produce an edited version of the archived file,
but will retain the original (archived) file unchanged under
the
specification name.Qyp (or name.Zyp if you included the
/OLD switch in the EDIT
command),
where
name.typ
1is
the
file's
original
specification.
See
also Hints - Editing
Files of Type .Qyp, below.
Editing

Files

Type

.Qyp

If you edit a file of type .Qyp (i.e., any file
whose
type
begins
with
the
1letter Q), the EDIT program does not save
the unedited copy as a backup file.
1In such cases, give the
/OLD
switch
to
retain
the
wunedited copy under file type
.2yp.
If the file of type .Qyp is
an
archived
file,
you
will
not be allowed to produce an altered version using the
EDIT

Effect

The
the

command

you

include

the

/OLD

switch.

Memory

EDIT

command clears any unkept forks from memory, then
program defined by the logical name EDITOR:.

1loads

editor

Commands

CREATE
DIRECTORY-class

unless

commands

PERUSE

for

creating

new

files

for

getting

lists

existing

for

editing

files

read-only mode

files

Examples

Edit

file.

@EDIT FILE.FOR

Edit:

FILE.FOR.1

Edit
copy

file using the EDIT editor, requesting that an
of
the
file
be
saved after every three EDIT

commands;

ask

] pecification

that

@EDIT /SAVE:3/0LD
E dit:

the

first

FILE.ZOR.
FILE.FOR

FILE.FOR.1

135

such

backup

file

saved

updated
program
under

EDIT (Cont.)

Edit a
1large
parameters
as
output file.

text
file,
adjusting
several
EDIT
you begin, and give new specifications

@EDIT /EXPERT/DECIDE/PLINES:50/WINDOW:99
Edit: REMARK.TXT.18

REMARK.TXT

program
for the

REVISION.TXT

Use the
for the
Example

EDIT editor to create a SWITCH.INI file with
switches used in Example 2, and one line for
3.
Use this file to repeat Example 3.

@CREATE

SWITCH.INI

Input:

SWITCH.INI.1

0100
20200
00300
*E

EDIT:ABC/SAVE:3/0LD
EDIT:DEF/EXPERT/DECIDE/PLINES:
50 /WINDOW: 99

[SWITCH.INI.1]
@EDIT /OPTION:DEF

Edit:

REMARK,.TXT

REMARK.TXT.18

136

REVISION,
TXT

one line
those in

ENABLE

Enables any special

capabilities you may have.

Format

@ENABLE

(CAPABILITIES)

$
Characteristics

Dollar

Sign

Prompt

The ENABLE command causes the system to print a dollar
sign
prompt ($), indicating enabled capabilities, in place of the
standard at sign prompt (@Q).
The
dollar
sign
prompt
|is
printed
after
ENABLE even if you have not been granted any
capabilities.

Capabilities of

Log-In

Directory Only

The ENABLE command activates only
those
capabilities
that
have
been
granted
to
the owner of your log-in directory.
You do not receive any capabilities as a result
of
CONNECT
or

ACCESS commands or group memberships.

Displaying

Capabilities

Capabilities are defined

by your

are

characteristic
of
vyour
Jjob
and
can
be
enabled
1in any
directory to which you connect.
To list your
capabilities,
give
the
INFORMATION
DIRECTORY
command
for
your
1login
directory.
More

Information

Capabilities are assigned with the
BUILD
command
subcommands
in
descriptions of

Special

special

BUILD command.
this
manual
capabilities.

See
the
for
brief

Cases

Dollar

Sign

Prompt

Batch

Jobs

Because a dollar sign placed in the location
of
a
TOPS-20
prompt
could
be
confused with a batch command, the system
precedes the enabled prompt with a space for batch jobs.

137

ENABLE (Cont.)

Capabilities

Changed

While

Logged

Capabilities are given to your job when you log in.
If your
capabilities
are
changed while you are logged-in, you must
log out and log in again for the change to take effect.

Warning

Disabling

Capabilities

Promptly

Because your commands are much more
powerful
if
you
have
capabilities enabled, you should disable them as soon as you
have finished using them.
Otherwise you or a
program
that
you run could accidentally damage the system.

Commands

DISABLE

for
that

suspending
any
capabilities
the
system manager has given

you

INFORMATION DIRECTORY
the login directory)

(for

for finding out which capabilities,
have been granted to you.

Examples

Enable

your

capabilities.

QENABLE

Try to assign a plotter to your job before taking it off line
for
repairs.
But
it
is already assigned to another user,
whose
terminal
is
set
to
refuse
1links.
Enable
your
capabilities
and
ask
him
to
deassign
the plotter.
Then
disable capabilities.
@ASSIGN

?PLT2:

PLT2:
Already assigned

@SYSTAT

~ 53

EXEC

send mail

job

R. SCHNEIDER

@TALK R.SCHNEIDER
?Refused,

the

user

instead

@ENABLE

STALK R.SCHNEIDER

LINK

FROM

F.DOMINO,

TTY

221

$;ROBIN -~ PLEASE DEASSIGN PLT2:.
IT MUST BE TAKEN
$;FOR MAINTENANCE,
USE PLT3: INSTEAD.
THANKS.
@;OKAY,

SURE.

@DEASSIGN
@

PLT2:

SBREAK
SDISABLE

@
138

OFF

LINE

END-ACCESS

Terminates your ownership rights to an
group rights borrowed from its owner.

accessed

directory,

well

end

Format

@END-ACCESS

(TO

DIRECTORY)

dev:<directory>

where

dev:<directory>

the

directory

which

you

want

access

Default

dev:

Default

- your

connected
-

the

structure

directory

the

(on

specified

structure)

the

same

your

name

connected

directory

Hints

Implicit
You

END~-ACCESS
can

access

only

one

directory

time

each

mounted

structure.
Each ACCESS command ends access obtained by any
previous ACCESS command for a
directory
on
the
specified
structure.

Therefore

you

not

need

give

command if you access another directory on
if the structure is dismounted.
Restoring

END-ACCESS

the

END-ACCESS

structure,

Rights

does

not

restore

owner

and

group

rights

obtained

by
a
previous
ACCESS command for the specified structure.
Give another ACCESS command to regain these.
(Note that you

must

access

your

1log-in

directory

obtained by the LOGIN command,
1lost
directory on the public structure.

regain

group

accessing

rights

another

Commands

ACCESS

for

obtaining

the group
DISMOUNT

for

decrementing

accessed
INFORMATION

ownership

rights

the

rights

directory

mount

count

previously

structure

STRUCTURE

for

finding

out

who

139

and

owner

accessing

structure

END-ACCESS (Cont.)

Examples

Give up your access rights to another user's directory.
@END-ACCESS

and
it,
from
file
Access another user's directory, copy a
Then give a command that depends
up your rights to it.
give
oh your own

directory

group

successfully this

@ACCESS

rights.

establish
time.

(It

these,

fails.)

and

Access

repeat

the

your

own

command,

Password:

@COPY

<HOLLAND>DIST.LST

<HOLLAND>DIST.LST.2 => DIST.LST.2

@END-ACCESS <HOLLAND>
@QINFORMATION DIRECTORY
?No such directory
@ACCESS

<LATTA,*>,

<LATTA>

@INFORMATION DIRECTORY
@@NAME-ONLY
Qe
Name
Name

[OK]

<LATTA.*>,

PS:<LATTA.A>
PS:<LATTA.A.F-0>

Get
Mount a structure, and access a user's directory there.
End the access and
of type .TXT.
files
his
of
1listing
a
dismount

the

structure.

@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: mounted
@ACCESS SNARK: <HOLLAND>
Password:

@DIRECTORY SNARK:<HOLLAND>*,TXT
SNARK: <HOLLAND>
ACCT.TXT.1

MAIL,. TXT. 2

REMARKS.TXT.
1
SYSTEM. TXT.1

Total of 4 files
@END-ACCESS SNARK:SHOLLAND)
@DISMOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: dismounted

140

EOF

Writes

command

end-of-file mark

for

unlabeled

tapes

the

specified

magnetic

tape.

Use

this

only.

Format

@EOF

(DEVICE)

dev:

where

dev:

the

name of

the magnetic

tape

want to write an end-of-file mark.
device name is optional.

drive
The

on
which
colon after

you
the

Hints

EOF

Seldom

Needed

and
Because tape-writing
programs
commands
automatically
in the appropriate places, you do
write
end-of-file
marks
But it can
be
useful
not ordinarily need the EOF command.
is interrupted (by your CTRL/C or by a
if
such
a
program
want
to
preserve
the
system failure and restart) and you
Also, you can shorten files on
information already written.
command
at
the
desired
an existing tape by giving an EOF
point.

Restrictions

EOF

With

Open

Files

has
that
If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program
and
vyou then give the EOF
opened
a
magnetic
tape
drive
command for that tape drive, the system will first allow you
associated file.
You must do so for the EOF
to
close
the
will
you
probably
be
unable
to
command to succeed, but
continue
the program from that point, because the file will
now

closed.

Commands

BACKSPACE

REWIND

other TOPS-200
tape drives

commands

SKIP

UNLOAD

141

for

controlling

magnetic

EOF (Cont.)

Examples

Put

end-of-file mark

(EOF)

@EOF MTAQ:

142

on your magnetic

tape.

ERUN

Runs

system

placing

program

the

without

program

disturbing

ephemeral

the

program

already

memory

fork.

Format

@ERUN

(PROGRAM)

filespec

where

filespec

the

file

specification of

system

Default

dev:<directory>

SY¥S:

Default

.typ

program

.EXE

Characteristics

Characteristics
The

ERUN

program

command
that

Ephemeral
runs

runs

Fork

program

ephemeral

ephemeral
fork

acts

fork.

A
EXEC

command (excluding those EXEC commands that run programs
or
otherwise affect memory).
Ephemeral forks and EXEC commands
share these characteristics:

They do not affect programs in memory.
For example,
if
you
exit a program and issue a SYSTAT command, or run a
program in an ephemeral fork, neither
the
command
nor
the ephemeral fork will disturb the program in memory.
A program
new

that

They

disappear

completes.
SYSTAT

the

runs

ephemerally

always

placed

fork.

command

when

For
or

nor

interrupted

example,
an

the

1if

you

ephemeral

fork

ephemeral

Whenever you stop or exit an
automatically reset (cleared

fork

when

stop
with

can be

processing

execution
CTRL/C,

neither

continued.

ephemeral fork,
from memory).

the

fork

Good
have

candidates for ephemeral forks are
programs
that
may
short execution times and simply display information in
a manner similar to the INFORMATION and SYSTAT commands.

Commands

INFORMATION

LOGICAL-NAMES

for

examining

the

definition

S¥S:
R

for

running

stored

143

SYS:

executable

programs

ERUN (Cont.)

user

executable

running

for

RUN

programs

SET

FILE EPHEMERAL

SET

PROGRAM EPHEMERAL

for

giving

for

running

ephemeral

file

permanent

attribute

fork

program

Examples

Display the status of the fork in memory with the INFORMATION
a program in an ephemeral
run
Then,
command.
FORK-STATUS
memory.
Jjob's
your
of
fork in order to preserve the state
Redisplay the fork status and note that the ephemeral program
has been reset and has not replaced the original fork.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS

=> EMACS

@ERUN

(l1):

TERMSTAT>SHOW

FREE

Lab

Terminals

-——

HALT AT

50340,

0:00:03.6

TERMSTAT

A
B

R P AfR WP D e

TERMINALS

use
e

—

Free

terminals

. A A S S WS A

17
12

D D S > TES S

2
4

TERMSTAT>EXIT

@INFORMATION

EMACS

FORK-STATUS

(1l):

HALT at

144

50340,

0:00:03.6

EXAMINE

Displays

the

contents

memory

location.

Format

@EXAMINE

(MEMORY

LOCATION)

octal

symbolic

address

Output

Contents

Memory

When you
memory

Location

complete
address

contents.,

SYMBOLIC

Message

EXAMINE

examined,

you

command,

previously

command,

this

the

followed

used

information

system
a

the
is

slash

SET

both

prints
(/)

the

and

its

TYPEOUT

MODE

symbolic

and,

in
parentheses,
numeric
(octal)
format.
(The
numeric
information
will
always
appear
for
this
setting of the
command; symbolic information
will
appear
if
the
system
finds that it is different from the numeric.)
Generally
separated

the
by

numeric format shows two 6-digit octal numbers
a pair of commas (,,).
If you do not see this

pair of commas, only the right half of the
memory
location
is
being displayed; as the left half is @.
However, if you
are not permitted
to
examine
this
1location,
the
system
prints only a message telling you of the restriction.
Hints

Using

Symbols
For

symbols

program,
followed

Abbreviating
The

that

you
by an

are

defined

1in

can
be
specific
ampersand (&) and

multiple

by
the

modules

giving the module
symbol name.

name

EXAMINE

command

can

abbreviated

the

single

letter

Default

The

Argument

argument

your

greater

you

inspect

EXAMINE

current
than

the

EXAMINE
last

command

address

section of memory with

defaults

examined,

only

allowing

minimum

But if you gave a more recent DEPOSIT command, the
of your current EXAMINE command
defaults
to
that
allowing you to verify the deposit.

With

Noncurrent

and

Inferior

Forks

EXAMINE

iy, T

The

fork.
forks,

—

EXAMINE

value

typing.
argument
address,

Using

for

command

To
make

with

command

displays

examine
the fork

the

fork

the
the

memory

memory
current

name

145

locations

of
fork

number

the

current

noncurrent or inferior
by
giving
the
FORK

argument.

EXAMINE (Cont.)

ensure
run an inferior fork after examining it, you must
Give the CONTINUE
all superior forks are running too.
command with the superior fork name or number as an argument
to let the superior fork continue its inferlors.

that

Commands

for
calling
a
debugging
program,
allowing
more efficient examination

DDT

memory

DEPOSIT

for
changing
the
<contents
specific memory location

FORK

for selecting the fork whose
you want to examine

memory

for

memory

INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE

displaying

pages,

SET TYPEOUT MODE

for

their

displaying

symbolic

1list

contents and

numeric

status

information
format.

Examples

Examine

location

@EXAMINE

550/

550

current fork.

550

74473,,414155

Examine location 20,

the

of the

symbolic mode.

first in numeric. typeout mode,

then

@SET TYPEOUT MODE NUMERIC

@EXAMINE 20

20/ 104000, ,56
@SET TYPEOUT MODE SYMBOLIC

@EXAMINE 20

P+l1/ 104000,, .JBBLT+11

Put a

program

occupies.

abbreviated

into

memory

(20/

104000,,56)

and

£find

out

what

400010

len

254000

@GET DMN
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE

pages,

Section

400

@EXAMINE

2550/

pages

Examine a location on page 2, and then (using
form of the EXAMINE command) one on page 404.

Entry vector
@

DMN,EXE.1l

W,
5

2550

6006170

@E 400550

400550/
0

146

loc

Private
R,

CW,

the

EXECUTE

Loads

program into memory, compiling the

your

Then

necessary.

starts

the

source

first

file

program.

Format

@GEXEC UTE

(FROM)

/switch(es)

source/switch(es)

object,...

where

are keywords chosen from the list below,

switc hes

sourc

indicating

They have
of EXECUTE command options.
choice
your
different effects depending on their position in the
the
in
files
all
before
placed
line:
command
otherwise
all;
for
command, they act on defaults
they affect only the nearest preceding file.
are shown in the list of switches
Defaults
program.
source
the
of
is the file specification
filename must be of 6 or fewer characters, and
The

the file type of 3@ fewer characters; you cannot use
This argument is not necessary
a generation number.
if you supply an object

program.
object
the
is the file specification of
The filename must be of six or fewer characters, and

objec t

the file

generation
if

type

must

number.

you supply a

Default

.REL;

you

cannot

source.

(if you give neither source nor
filespecs
filespecs) - last
gave
you
switches
associated

of EXECUTE Command Switches (defaults in boldface)

/10-BLISS
/36-BLISSS
/68-COBOL
/74-COBOL
/ABORT

/ALGOL
/BINARY
/COBOL
/COMPILE
/CREF
/CROSS-REFERENCE
/FAIL

/FLAG-NON-S TANDARD

147

object
and

more
give
of the form

already shown

Summa ry

command

can
Yyou
commas,
after
that,
means
arguments (switches, source, and object)

use

This argument is not necessary

LOAD~class

filespec.

EXECUTE (Cont.)

/FORTRAN
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
/LIBRARY
/LIST
/MAC
/MACRO
/MAP
/NOB INARY

/NOCOMPILE

/NOCREF

/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
/NOFLAG-NON~-S TANDARD
/NOLIBRARY
/NOLIST
/NOOPTIMIZE
/NOSEARCH
/NOSTAY
/NOWARNINGS

/OPTIMIZE
/PASCAL
/RELOCATABLE

/SAIL
/SEARCH
/SIMULA

/SNOBOL
/STAY

/WARNINGS
Descriptions
system
will
LOAD-class
EXECUTE

are

of these switches are
not
reject
switches

commands,

only

described

those

switches

commonly

associated

the
the
with

here.

EXECUTE

/10-BLISS

given
below.
Although
described
under
any of

compiles

Command

the

Default

file

for

Switches

using the BLISS-10 compiler.
files of type .Bl@ and .BLI

/36-BLISS

compiles the
Default

file using the BLISS-36
for files of type .B36

/68-COBOL

compiles the
Default

file using the COBOL-68 compiler.
for files of type .C68 or .68C

/74-COBOL

compiles

the

Default
/ABORT

stops

compile

and

returns
level.

/ALGOL

compiles

the

Default
/BINARY

allows

for

file
for

source

Default

148

your

COBOL-74

type

.C74

fatal

error
to

using

file

the
of

terminal

files

generation

each

using
files

compiler.

compiler.
or

.74C

1is

detected

TOPS-20

command

the ALGOL compiler.
type .ALG

object

given.

(binary)

file

EXECUTE (Cont.)

/COBOL

compiles the

file

either
COBOL-68
installation
has

wusing

the

COBOL

type

.CBL

or
COBOL-74,
stored
in

compiler,

that
the

vyour
file

SYS:COBOL.EXE.

Default

/COMPILE

for

files

forces compilation of the source file even if a
current
object
file already exists.
Use this
switch along with a /LIST or
/CREF
switch
to
obtain
1listings
when
you have current object
files.

/CREF
/CROSS-REFERENCE

same

as /CROSS-REFERENCE.

creates

file

information

for

containing

cross—reference

each

compilation.

using

the

The

file

name is that of the object file; the file
type
is
.CRF.
Use
the
CREF
command to obtain a
listing of the file.
(For
COBOL
files
this
switch automatically produces a cross-reference
listing.)
Default

/FAIL

/FLAG-NON-STANDARD

/FORTRAN

compiles the

Default

file

for

files of

indicates nonstandard

compiles the
Default

file
1in

syntax

.FAI

file

using the FORTRAN compiler.
the
absence
of
a
standard

source

file

switch
for files

Default

FAIL compiler.

type

and

language

.FOR

/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"

passes the specified switches to
the
compiler
that
will
©process
the
file(s) to which this
switch applies.
You must include the
switches
in double quotation marks ("
").

/LIBRARY

same

/SEARCH.

/LIST

prints a line printer listing of the program in
ASCII
format;
the name of this listing is the
filename of the object file.
The /CREF
switch
overrides
/LIST
when
they
both apply to the
same

file.

/MAC

same

/MACHINE-CODE

produces
a
file
containing
machine
code.
The
filename
object
file;
the
file
¢type

/MACRO.

high-level

/MACRO

assembles

the
1is
1is

generated
that of the
.LST.
For

languages.

the

Default

149

file using

for

files

the

MACRO assembler.

type

.MAC

EXECUTE (Cont.)

/MAP

produces

loader

map and

stores

object .MAP,
where
object
module containing the start
start

job
/NOBINARY

address)

the

file

1is
the name of the
address; or (if
no

nnnLNK.MAP,

where

nnn

your

number.

prevents generation of an object (binary)
file.
Use
this
switch
along with /LIST or /CREF to
allow these switches
to
take
effect
without

producing

new object

file.

/NOCOMPILE

prevents compilation
1if
the
object
file
1is
current;
otherwise
it
forces
compilation.
Cancels the /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE switch.

/NOCREF

same

NOCROSS-REFERENCE.

/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
prevents

the

<creation

cross-reference

file.
Default
/NOFLAG~-NON-STANDARD

prevents the
the file.

flagging

non-standard

syntax

Default
/NOLIBRARY

same

/NOLIST

prevents a line
Default

/NOMACHINE-CODE

/NOSEARCH.

prevents

machine

printer

generation

listing

the

file

program.

containing

code.

Default

/NOOPTIMIZE

prevents the generation of a globally optimized
object file (for FORTRAN programs only).
Default

/NOSEARCH

requires

all

modules

the

object

file

library

(the
file
accompanied
by
this switch in the
command line) to be loaded even if they are not
called
switch.

your

program.

Cancels

the /SEARCH

Default
/NOSTAY

stops

the

compiler

background
default for
/NOWARNINGS

prevents

from

being

placed

fork.
Use
when /STAY
the compiler.

display

warnings

set

€for

nonfatal

errors.

/OPTIMIZE

generates a
i.e.,
one
(For

globally
that
runs

FORTRAN

programs

optimized
object
file,
as quickly as possible.
only,

not
also give the /DEBUG
command description).)

150

and

switch

only

(see

you

the

DEBUG

EXECUTE (Cont.)

/PASCAL

compiles the file using the PASCAL compiler.

/RELOCATABLE

identifies the input file

Default for

(regardless

files of type

its

.PAS

extension)

object

and

file

prevents

compilation of the source file, forcing use of
an existing object file even if the object file
is

out

of date.

Default

for

files of type

.REL

compiles the file using the SAIL compiler.

/SAIL

Default

/SEARCH

for

files of type

.SAI

requires that the object file library (the file

accompanied by this switch in the command line)

program

be searched for modules called by your

Only these modules
or by a program subroutine.
from
with modules called
along
are loaded,
system libraries, which are always searched.

/SIMULA

compiles the file using the SIMULA compiler.

/SNOBOL

compiles the file using the SNOBOL compiler.

Default

for

Default for

files of type

.SIM

.SNO

returns your terminal to TOPS-20¢ command

/STAY

level

vyou can perform other work while the
that
so
You
system continues to execute your program.
the TOPS-2# prompt (& or
receive
immediately
Be
command.
user
$), and can then issue any

careful

expecting
CONTINUE

not to send

Competing

terminal
command,

incorrect data to programs

Refer
input.
Restrictions:

for Terminal

Input.)

This switch saves you from having to:

“T

the
to
Programs
1issue

to make sure execution has beqgun; give a “°C

CONTINUE /STAY
issue a
to halt the job; and
1level during
to remain at command
command
execution.

/WARNINGS

displays warnings for nonfatal errors.
Default

Characteristics

Compiling New Sources Only

Before executing programs, the system ordinarily compiles
any source (and only those sources) whose write date is more
You
recent that that of the object file of the same nhame.
LE
/RELOCATAB
or
/COMPILE
the
with
action
this
can override
switch.

151

EXECUTE (Cont.)

Using

Standard

File

Types

you specify source files
.CBL,
or
«ALG)
in
an
automatically
calls
the
compilation
1is
necessary.

filename
in
the
type.

only,
above
To

standard types (.FOR,
.MAC,
EXECUTE
command,
the
system
appropriate
compiler
when
If you specify source files by

the system searches
order for a file of

execute

nonstandard

with

file

programs

types,

give

your
this

from

connected directory
name and a standard

sources

switch

that

have

the

proper

indicate

compiler (/FORTRAN, /MACRO, /COBOL, or
/ALGOL).
A
switch
will
take
precedence
over
a
standard
file type if they
indicate different languages.
If no compiler
is
indicated
with
either
a
switch or a standard file type, the FORTRAN
compiler is used.
Default

Switches

Not

Passed

Compiler

Between

Filespecs

you give

arguments

two

EXECUTE,

filespecs

the

loaded

separated
programs

exist

commas
in

memory

as
at

the same time and will act as a single program.
You can use
this
feature
to
substitute
one
module for another under
varying conditions or for different applications.
Plus

Signs

Between

Filespecs

If you give two or
(+)
as
arguments

file by compilers.
filename
given
as

(if

none)

under

the

-REL.

Indirect
You

Files
can

more filespecs separated
by
to EXECUTE, they are treated

store

the

arguments

command

argument.

Establishing

Default

Arguments

can
up

Insert
your

issue

the

default

this

own

signs
single

Arguments

EXECUTE

set

Their object module is stored under
any
the "object" argument of the command, or
last filename in the group and file type

(source

and

switches)
of
an
EXECUTE
command in an
specify them by typing an at sign (@) and

You

plus
as

SET

DEFAULT

global

command

defaults

with

the

your

152

filespecs,

indirect file, and
its filespec as an

Command

COMPILE-SWITCHES

arguments

permanently.

SET

object

the

COMAND.CMD

command

EXECUTE

file

command.

change

EXECUTE (Cont.)

Running

LINK Directly

system's
the
The EXECUTE command automatically runs LINK,
if you require control of the loading
but
loader program,
LINK
TOPS-2¢
the
See
process you can run LINK directly.
'
Reference Manual.
with

Wildcards Illegal

EXECUTE

The EXECUTE command does not accept wildcard
and %)

Effect

in a

file specification.

characters

Memory

The EXECUTE command clears any unkept forks

from

memory,

loads

commands

for

the appropriate compiler if necessary, then loads and starts your
program.

Commands

LOAD-class

COMPILE, LOAD, and DEBUG

other

RUN

for running executable programs

performing

related functions

Examples

Execute a program, indicating the language
file

with

standard

type.

@QEXECUTE CAFN.FOR
FORTRAN: CAFN
LOADING
LINK:

[LNKXCT CAFN EXECUTION]
OF

END

EXECUTION

CPU TIME:

@.04

ELAPSED TIME:

@.89

EXIT

Execute a program, indicating the 1language with a switch.
Specify the /STAY switch to return immediately to TOPS-20

command

level.

@EXECUTE CAFN/FORTRAN/STAY

153

EXECUTE (Cont.)

Execute
one

two

programs,

requesting

cross-reference

file

for

program,

and

them.

@EXECUTE

CAFN,

FORTRAN:

CAFN

TAFN/CREF

MAIN.

FORTRAN:

TAFN

MAIN.,
LINK:

[LNKXCT

TAFN

END

CPU

TIME:

EXECUTION]

EXECUTION

#.0¢4

ELAPSED

TIME:

programs

into

@.15

EXIT

Combine two source
run this program.

single

object

@EXECUTE CAFN+TAFN
FORTRAN:

CAFN

MAIN.
MAIN,
LINK:

[LNKXCT

TAFN

END

CPU

TIME:

EXECUTION]

EXECUTION

0.04

ELAPSED TIME:

#.16

EXIT

Execute

includes

ALGOL

program,

ensuring

required modules only;

@EXECUTE /COMPILE/MAP
ALGOL:
LINK:

CALEND
LOADING

EXIT

154

that

request

CALEND/ALGOL,

the

compilation

a map.
ALGMOD,LBR/SEARCH

EXPUNGE

Permanently

erases

all

the

deleted

files

from

directory.

Format

@EXPUNGE (DIRECTORY)
@@subcommand

dev:<directory>,

where

dev:<directory>

is the

name of

the

directory

you

wish

expunge;
you
may use wildcard characters
expunge more than one directory.
Default

dev:

- your

Default

connected

structure

the directory
(on
specified
the
structure) of
the
same

hame

your

connected
directory

Default

@@subcommand

(if no arguments - your
are given)
connected
directory

means that after a final comma you
one
or
more
successive lines

optional

can

subcommands

give

DELETE

deletes and expunges
temporary
files,
1i.e.,
those
with
the
Temporary
(;T) attribute, created by some
system programs to hold interim data.
Do not use
|if
you will have any further need of these files.

PURGE

expunges all

files which

you

have

opened

but

not

closed

REBUILD

rebuilds

the

symbol

table of the directory named

Output

After a successful EXPUNGE command, the system reports the number
of disk pages freed with the message [n pages freed].
If deleted
files are mapped, they will not be
expunged,
and so
will
not
contribute to the number of pages freed.
Occasionally the system
will report a negative number.
This can
mean
that
files
were
being written in the directory during the EXPUNGE, or (especially
if you include the REBUILD subcommand) that previous computations

for

directory
example,

size

had not adequately accounted

files written near

reload.

155

the

time of a

for some files,

system

crash

and

EXPUNGE (Cont.)

Hints

Using

the

REBUILD

Subcommand

The REBUILD subcommand is not needed under usual conditions,
as
the
system
performs
this
action
automatically.
Use
REBUILD if a messadge is printed on
your
terminal
advising
you to rebuild the symbol table of a directory.
Using

the

PURGE

Subcommand

The PURGE subcommand is
useful
<chiefly
for
removing
the
remains
of
files
that were being created at the time of a
system crash or a structure dismount.
Do not give it
while
anyone
might
be
using
the directory, because that user's
program might be deprived of necessary files as a result.

Special

Cases

Files

With

the

"Permanent"

Attribute

The system erases only the contents of any files
that
have
the
Permanent
attribute,
for
example your MAIL.TXT file,
when you try to expunge them.
The
file
specifications
of
permanent
files remain among your deleted files, and cannot
be removed by TOPS-20 commands.

Commands

DELETE

for

marking

files

later

lists

file

expunged

DIRECTORY-class

commands

for

obtaining

specifications
INFORMATION

DISK-USAGE

for
finding
directory

UNDELETE

for

recovering

out

the

size

deleted

files

Examples

Expunge

all

@EXPUNGE
PS:<LATTA>

deleted

pages

files

from

freed]

156

your

directory.

EXPUNGE (Cont.)

Find out how much of your disk space is in use and
how
much
is
occupied
by
deleted
files.
Delete some of your backup
files, then give the EXPUNGE command to erase all of these.
@INFORMATION DISK-USAGE
PS: <LATTA>
154 Pages assigned, 101

590 Working
33371

Pages

@DELETE

*,Q¥*

pages,
free

590

PS:

BLUE.QAR.1 [OK]
REMARK. QXT.1 [OK]
RIMOUSKI.QXT.1l [OK]

@EXPUNGE
PS:<LATTA>

[56 pages

use,

deleted

Permanent pages allowed

freed]

157

FDIRECTORY

The FDIRECTORY (Full DIRECTORY) command is equivalent to the DIRECTORY
command with the subcommands CRAM, EVERYTHING, and NOHEADING.
Use the
same format and subcommands with FDIRECTORY as
with
DIRECTORY.
For

further
manual.

information,

When used
DIRECTORY

see

the

with magnetic tapes,
for magnetic tapes.

DIRECTORY

the

command

FDIRECTORY

description

command

this

equivalent

Examples

Get

your

"Full

DIRECTORY"

listing,

your

terminal,

for

one

files.

@FDIRECTORY

TESTF1l.FOR

MISC:<LATTA>

TESTF1.FOR.17;P777700;A341

25-0ct-85

11:17:46

Never

162(7)

LATTA

25-0Oct-85

11:17:46

LATTA

Give the FDIRECTORY command for a file, this time
requesting
the
only
piece
of
information
about
current
files
not
ordinarily supplied by the command.
Ask for a heading also.
@FDIRECTORY

@@HEADING

TESTF1l.FOR,

@@CHECKSUM
Qe
MISC:<LATTA>

PGS

Write
Checksum

Read

TESTF1.FOR.17;P777700;A341

25-0ct-85

11:17:46

Bytes(SZ)

Tape-write

Never

158

162(7)

Ret

Creation

Creator
1

Writer

25-0ct-85

LATTA

11:17:46

566101P

FORK

Makes the specified fork your current fork.,
fork to which TOPS-20 commands are applied.

The current fork

1is

the

with

the

Format

@FORK

(IS)

fork

where

fork

is one of the

following:

Fork name
Fork

number

Default - the

fork

highest

fork

number

Characteristics

Default

Fork

FORK
the
with
If you do not specify a fork name or number
the fork with the highest fork number (usually the
command,
fork
the
last fork created) becomes your current fork, and

Fork

name

is printed

Name

and

in brackets,

[FORK-NAME].

Number

and
contain
they
program
the
Forks are named after
created.
are
they
that
order
the
in
numbered
multiforking class commands, the fork name
and
number

are
In
are

interchangeable,

Hints

Information

multiforking-class
TOPS-20
the
The FORK command is one of
For more information about multiforking, see the
commands.
TOPS-20
the
in
Programs
Multiple
Running
section named
User's

Special

Guide.

Cases

Fork

If you are a user with enabled Wheel privileges you can give

the

command,

(EXEC)

FORK @.

This references the command processor

itself.

159

FORK (Cont.)

Commands

INFORMATION

MEMORY-USAGE

for

examining

current

INFORMATION

FORK-STATUS

for

finding

status
INFORMATION

PROGRAM-STATUS

for

memory

out

each

finding

the

fork

what

number

your

fork

KEEP,

SET

FREEZE,

other

RESET,

SET

NAME,

PROGRAM,

and

UNKEEP

Make

first

and

job

attributes

have been set with the SET
command and the number and
of each fork in your job
CONTINUE,

the

process

PROGRAM
status

multiforking-class

commands

Examples

the

fork

you

created

your

current

fork.

@FORK 1
Display

the

fork

status,

and

make

the

last

fork

your
current fork.
Then, redisplay the fork
the result.
(In
the
FORK-STATUS
display,

indicates

the

@INFORMATION

EDIT

(l1):

DUMPER
HOST

current

created
check
(=>)

fork).

FORK-STATUS

Kept,

(2):

(3):

you

status to
an
arrow

HALT

Kept,

HALT

6254,
at

0:00:12.8

6065,

67543,

0:00:30.1
#:00:09.3

@FORK
@INFQRMATION FORK-STATUS
EDIT

(l1):

DUMPER

HOST

Make

the

fork

Kept,

(2):

HALT

Kept,

HALT

(3):

Kept,

HALT

FORK

named

DUMPER

6254,
at

0:00:12.8

6065,

67543,
your

0:00:30.1

0:00:09.3

current

fork;

status.

@FORK DUMPER
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
EDIT
=>

(1):

DUMPER

HOST

Kept,

(2):

(3):

HALT

Kept,

HALT

l60

6254,
at

0:00:12.8

6065,

67543,

0:00:30.1

0:00:09.3

then

display

FORK (Cont.)

Find out which forks
the first fork, then
second inferior fork

@INFORMATION
=>

QUILL

FORK-STATUS

(1l):

Fork

@INFORMATION

124,

pages,

Section

exist in your job.
Look at
memory
for
examine a particular location.
Make the
current, and do the same thing there.

HALT

Kept,

HALT

50349,

21019,

P:00:04.5

G:00:00.4

MEMORY-USAGE
Entry

loc

4570

len

6-55
56-77
116-123

W, E,
Private
R, W, E
RANDOM:<QUILL>TECPUR.EXE.112¢@
Private
R, W, E
Private
R, W, E

620-637
640-643

RANDOM:<QUILL>ABBRE.:EJ.614
@
RANDOM:<QUILL>TYPE,.,:EJ.27
@-3

644-645
646-661
662-663

RANDOM:<QUILL>INIT.:EJ.17
@-1
R, E
RANDOM:<QUILL>LSTSQ.:EJ.424
@-13
R,
RANDOM:<QUILL>SYSTEM.:EJ.1
@#-1
R, E

@EXAMINE

6400

vector

Private

6400/

R,
E

200040, ,4636

@FORK 2
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
95.

pages,

Entry vector

Section @
R,
f-11
Private
13-15
Private

W,
R,
R,

E,
W,
W,

loc¢

15710

Private
E
E

16-110

RANDOM: <TOOLS>DEFFNA.3

117

Private

166
170
172

Private
Private
Private

R,
R,
R,

W,
W,
W,

E
E
E

174
224

R,
R,

W,
W,

E
E

226
231-25¢

Private
Private
Private
Private

R,
R,

W,
W,

E
E

@QEXAMINE

2600

2600/

len

16l

3-75

CW,

FREEZE

Halts

execution of

fork.

Format

@FREEZE

(FORK)

fork

one of

the

where

fork

following:

Fork name
Fork

number

Default -

the current

fork

Characteristics

Same

Function

CTRL/C

The FREEZE command stops running background forks while
are at EXEC command level.
The effect is the same as if
typed two CTRL/Cs while at the fork's program level.

you
you

Hints

Information

The FREEZE command is one of the TOPS-20
multiforking-class
commands.
For more information about multiforking, see the
section named
Running
Multiple
Programs
in
the
TOPS-20
User's

Guide.

Commands

CONT INUE/BACKGROUND

for continuing

INFORMATION FORK-STATUS

for displaying

the

FORK,

other multiforking-class commands

background

halted

fork

the

fork status

INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS
KEEP, RESET, SET NAME,
SET PROGRAM, and UNKEEP

Examples

Give
the
background
points

FREEZE
fork.
the

command
to
stop
Then, display the

current

the
current
running
fork status.
The arrow

fork.

@FREEZE
@QINFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> BLISS (l1l): "C from RUNNING at
EDIT (2): Kept, HALT at 6254,

162

500000,

0#:00:13.1

0:00:00.5

FREEZE (Cont.)

Display the fork status and give
running
background fork.
Then,
check the result.

the FREEZE command
redisplay the fork

to stop a
status to

@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
BLISS
=>

EDIT

(1):
(2):

Background,
Kept,

HALT

@FREEZE BLISS
Q@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS

BLISS
=>

EDIT

(1):
(2):

“C

from

Kept,

RUNNING
6254,

RUNNING

HALT

163

6254,

500000,

0:90:13.1

@0:00:00.5

500000,

0:200:13.1

0:00:00.5

GET

Places

executable

program

into memory.

Format

@GET

(PROGRAM)

filespec /switch

where

filespec

the

specification of

executable program
Default file type

octal)
loaded.
program

The

containing

.EXE

(from
@
to
37
into
which
your
program
1is
to be
You can use this switch only if your
can be contained in one section.

Memory

GET command

program

file

/USE=-SECTION:n
specifies the memory section

/switch

Effect

any

into

clears

any

unkept

forks,

puts

for

examining

the

specified

memory.

Commands

INFORMATION

MEMORY-USAGE

contents

memory

KEEP

for making
kept

the

specified

fork

fork.

LOAD

for
1loading
program into

a
source
memory

MERGE

for putting an
executable
into
memory without first

object

program
clearing

memory

SAVE

for storing
in
memory
format

START

for starting
current fork

l64

a copy of
in a file

the

the
program
in executable

program

the

GET (Cont.)

Examples

Put

an executable

program

into memory.

@GET TESTFl.EXE

Verify that you have a magnetic tape drive assigned
to
your
job.
Get one of your executable programs, save a copy of it
on tape, and then start it.
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
Devices available to this job:
DSK, PS, SNARK, MISC, LANG, REL3, DX2@, MTAQ
LPT, LPT@, LPT1l, CDR, PCDR@, CDP, FE@-15
PTY23-61, NUL, PLT, PLT@, DCN, SRV
Devices assignhed to/opened by this job: MT@, TTY230
@GET TESTF1
@SAVE MT@:
MT@: TESTF1 Saved
@START
THIS

END

TEST.

EXECUTION

CPU TIME:

0.03

ELAPSED TIME:

EXIT

165

0.72

HELP

Displays

explanatory

text

for

many

TOPS-20

system

features.

Format

QHELP

(ON

SUBJECT)

name

where

name

the

name of

topic

chosen

response to the command HELP
Default name - HELP

Sample

ACCT20
COBDDT
DLUSER

ACCTPR
COBOL
DUMPER

ACTGEN
CONV2#8
EDIT

HELP

APL
CREF
FE

from

the

1list

given

Command

Arguments

APLSF
DAEMDB
FILCOM

BLIS10
DBINFO
FORDDT

CHECKD
DBMEND
FORDML

CHKPNT
DIRTST
FORMAT
MAIL

FORTRA

HELP

ISAM

LIBARY

LINK

LPTSPL

MACRO

MAKLIB

MAKRAM

MAKVFU

OPLEAS

PLEASE

PTYCON

QUEUE

RDMAIL

RERUN

RSXFMT

RUNINP

RUNOFF

SCHEMA

SORT

SYSERR

SYSJOB

TRANSL

ULIST

USAG20

USAH2¢

WATCH

Characteristics

Other

HELP
Note

Command
that

some

Arguments
of

the

HELP

command

arguments

shown

here

may

be
omitted
1if
the
associated topics are not available at
your site.
The list may include
other
texts
inserted
by
your
system
administrator
to describe features special to
your system.
Also,
this
1list
1is
revised
frequently
¢to
reflect
improvements
and
additions
to
standard
TOPS-20
programs.

Hints

Printing

HELP

Files

the

Line

Printer

The texts displayed by the HELP command are stored in system
logical name HLP:
under the name of the topic and file type
«HLP.
Use the PRINT command to request your own copy.

166

HELP (Cont.)

Example

Ask

for

information

about

the

FILCOM program.

@HELP FILCOM

FILCOM V21B(60)

FILCOM compares two files in either ASCII mode
or binary depending upon switches or file name extensions.,
All standard binary extensions are recognized as binary by
default.
Switches are :/A compare in ASCII

mode

[

/W compare the Word mode but don't expand
/X expand files before word mode compare

167

files

INFORMATION

Displays

information

about

system

and

job

parameters.

Format

@INFORMATION

(ABOUT)

argument

where
argument

Summary of

is a
your

keyword, chosen from the list
choice of INFORMATION command

INFORMATION Command

Arguments

below, indicating
options

(defaults

in boldface)

ADDRESS-BREAK

ALERTS

ARCHIVE-STATUS

filespecs

ARPANET

LINES

AVAILABLE

|DEVICES

/ALL
BATCH-REQUESTS | /FAST
/PROCESSING-NODE:node name
/USER:user name
Default

user

name

your

user

name

CLUSTER
COMMAND-LEVEL

DECNET

node-name

FALL

CARDS
COMPILE-SWITCHES
PAPER-TAPE

DEFAULTS

PLOT

SUBMIT
TAKE

DIRECTORY dev:<directory>,

Default

@@QVERBOSE
@@FAST
@@NAME-ONLY
DISK-USAGE

FILE-STATUS

dev:<directory>

connected

dev:<directory>

octal

JFN

your

Default

dev:<directory> - your
connected
directory

Default

JFN

all

job

168

directory

JFNs

your

INFORMATION (Cont.)

FORK-STATUS
JOB-STATUS
SYSTEM

LOGICAL-NAMES

|JOB
ALL

logical

MAIL

name:

Default user name - your user

|user name
|

name

SYSTEM

MEMORY-USAGE

MONITOR~-STATISTICS
/ALL

OUTPUT-REQUESTS | /FAST
/USER:user name

Default user name - your

user

name

PROGRAM-STATUS
PSI-STATUS

/ALL

RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS | /FAST
/USER:user name Default user name - your

user

name

SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION

Default dev: = your connected

STRUCTURE dev:

structure

SUBSYSTEM~-STATISTICS
SYSTEM-STATUS

TAPE-PARAMETERS

Default number - your terminal

TERMINAL-MODE number

line

number

VERSION
VOLUMES

INFORMATION Command

ADDRESS-BREAK

ALERTS

Arguments

gives

the

location

lists

the

dates

(in

numeric

that

the

upon
depending
format
symbolic
SET
the
of
specification
previous
and mode of any
command)
MODE
TYPEOUT
address breaks for the program currently
Set with SET ADDRESS-BREAK.
in memory.

and

times

system is to signal you at the terminal.
indicates
display
The last line of the
sent
be
to
are
alerts
whether
terminal
your
to
unconditionally
previous specification
upon
(depending
Set with
of the SET AUTOMATIC command).
SET ALERT.

169

INFORMATION (Cont.)

ARCHIVE-STATUS

filespecs

prints
the
archive
status
of
all
specified
files
for which archival has
been requested or
for
which
migration
has been prohibited
Default filespec = *.*,* in your
connected directory
displays,

ARPANET

information

the

system

about

including ARPANET,

Networks.

The

the name of
followed by
Internet

and

Local

Internet

Milnet

display

member,

networks,

includes:

the
1local
host
its Internet name

Area

system
and its

address

the

status of the

network

whether
enabled

network

interface

output

whether

network

service

enabled

the date and time of the last network
interface
online transition, offline
transition, and cycle transition

interface
|is

LINES

AVAILABLE

DEVICES

lists
the
avallable
your job.
(use

devices
or
terminal
1lines
to you or already assigned to
Use ASSIGN to obtain
devices

MOUNT for
Default -

/ALL
BATCH-REQUESTS | /FAST
/PROCESSING-NODE:node
/USER:user name

structures).
DEVICES

name::

lists
the
jobs
being
processed
and
waiting
to
be
processed
by the batch
system.
The list includes:
e

the
the

jobname and request ID number
of
request (an asterisk (*) appears

before the
jobname
if
the
currently being processed)

e
e

iJjob

|is

the scheduled run time of the request
the

name of

the

request

the

user

who

initiated

the values of the switches /AFTER and
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT,
if
wvalues
were
given
1in
the
original
SUBMIT
or
subsequent MODIFY command

Use SUBMIT,
this list.

170

MODIFY,

CANCEL

change

INFORMATION (Cont.)

The
/ALL
switch
adds
the
switches
/ASSISTANCE,
/PRIORITY,
/RESTARTABLE,
/SEQUENCE, and
/UNIQUE
¢to
this
1list,
while
/FAST
eliminates
the display of
all
switches
and
column
headings;
/PROCESSING~NODE
specifies
the
DECnet
network node about whose batch jobs
you
want
information;
/USER
restricts
descriptions to jobs of the user
named,
and
can
be given with any of the other
three switches.
Default

user

name

your

user

displays the names of the systems
Common File System (CFS) cluster:

CLUSTER

local cluster node
are logged in on).

accessible
systems

COMMAND-LEVEL

CFS
the

(the

nodes
CFS

system

(the

hame

you

other

cluster).

accessible HSC
servers
(the
HSC50
device controllers in the cluster).

prints
the
status
of
the
LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD
parameter,
which
prevents you from giving another TOPS-20
command
until
any
error
message
resulting from a
previous
command
has
been
printed.
Set
with
SET
LATE~-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD.

DECNET

node-name

tells
whether
the
specified
DECnet
network
node
1is
accessible
to
your
system,
If you do not
specify
a
node
name, the system prints the name of your
host
system,
the
total
number
of
reachable
nodes,
and
the names of all
reachable nodes.

Default node-name - all

accessible

nodes
ALL
CARDS

COMPILE-SWITCHES
PAPER-TAPE

DEFAULTS

PLOT

PROGRAM
PRINT

SUBMIT
TAKE

displays,
in
a
format
suitable
for
entering
them,
default
arguments
established
at
the
«current
level
of
TOPS-2f)
for
the
specified
command.
CARDS and PAPER-TAPE refer to the
PUNCH
CARDS
and
PUNCH
PAPER-TAPE
commands,
respectively.
COMPILE-SWITCHES
refers
to
LOAD-class
commands
and
PROGRAM
refers to the SET PROGRAM command.
The
ALL
argument
displays the defaults for
all
these
categories.,
Set
with
SET
DEFAULT.

Default

171

ALL

INFORMATION (Cont.)

DIRECTORY dev:<directory>,

@@FAST
@@VERBOSE

@@NAME-ONLY

lists
the current parameter values
set
for
the indicated directory
(with
the
exception of the directory password)
by
the
SET DIRECTORY or BUILD commands, or
by default.
The
subcommands
call
for
either a short list of non-default (that
is, user-determined) values only (FAST),
or
a
complete
1list including defaults
(VERBOSE), or
a
1listing
of
directory
names
only
(NAME-ONLY).
If
you
use
NAME-ONLY, specify a
directory
1in
the
form
<directory.*>,
<*directory*>,
or
<*>,
The
categories
of
information
include:

the

name of

the

working

capabilities

whether
ARPANET

whether
expired
files
automatically archived

directory number

default

file

default

account

directory

default
number
of
maintained for files

maximum

and

directory

permanent

storage

(assigned

you can
network

limits

withheld)

establish
DECnet
connections

should

protection
for

protection

number

generations

subdirectories

allowed

date and time that
you
started
the
current
terminal
session with LOGIN
(for log-in directory only)

off-line

and

on-line

expiration

defaults

group memberships

user
group
humbers
subdirectories

172

assignable

INFORMATION (Cont.)
e

TOPS-10

project—-programmer

number

Set
with
SET
DIRECTORY
subdirectories) BUILD.
Default dev:<directory> -

(for

your
connected

directory
Default
DISK~USAGE

subcommand

FAST

dev:<directory>

prints,
e
e

for

the

name

the

number

storage,
pages, if

working

total

indicated

the directory
of

pages

and
any

the

and

of assigned
number

permanent

number

wildcard

page

unused

file
structure
directory
The

directory

limits

pages

containing

characters,

and

disk

deleted

can

the

included
in the <directory> field.
For
example,
type
<gdirectory*>,
<directory.*>, or <*> to get information
about
all
matching
directories
or
subdirectories.
Default dev:<directory> - your
connected

directory
FILE~-STATUS

octal

JFN

gives,
for
the
internal
number
opening)

specified
identifying

JFN
each

(an
file

the

JFN

the

associated

the mode of access (Append,
Execute,
Read,
or Write) for which the JFN is
open (or
was
opened
last,
if
NOT
OPENED

precedes

file

the

specification

access

mode)

special
access
conditions,
namely
DATA
ERROR
1if
an
error is made in
accessing the file,
or
EOF
if
the
file
pointer
1is
at
the end of the
file

if appropriate, byte pointer and byte
size,
which tell the number of bytes
transferred to or from the file,
and

173

INFORMATION (Cont.)
@

assigned
a list of devices currently
this job But if a
by
opened
or
to
another
by
opened
been
has
file
for

process

sole

1ts

use,

you see

only the message, "Restricted JFN".
Default JFN - all JFNs for your job
gives a summary of the

FORK-STATUS

belonging

fork

status

each

to your current copy of

the TOPS-2¢ command processor,

including

RUN status, and total CPU
status,
Kept
(=>)
arrow
An
far.
so
used
time
indicates your current fork.

prints

JOB-STATUS

your

host system

(Displayed only

1s
system
host
ARPANET network.)

part of a

your

DECnet or

Jjob

number

user

name

connected

directory

account;

session remark

terminal

number

output
your
which
to
network node
sent.
are
requests
device,
host
your
not
if
only
(Displayed
SET
command,
the
with
Set
node.)

(if

not

your

log-in directory)

(if any)

LOCATION.

parameters
these
of
some
You can set
with CONNECT, SET ACCOUNT, SET LOCATION,
and

SET SESSION-REMARK.

ALL

LOGICAL-NAMES

JOB
SYSTEM

logical

name:

prints the logical

names and definitions

for your
or
both;
system-wide
and
job-wide
the
prints
1logical
specified
the
of
definitions
withdraw logical
and
Establish
name.

established
been
have
which
for
or
job, for the system,

names

174

with

DEFINE,.

INFORMATION (Cont.)

For

the

DEFINE

LOGICAL-NAMES

and

INFORMATION

commands,

colon

following the logical name is
optional.
However,
in
INFORMATION
LOGICAL-NAMES
the logical name SYS:
must
always
be
followed
by
a
colon.
Otherwise, the
system interprets SYS as an abbreviation
for the SYSTEM argument.
The wildcard characters, * and % can
be
included
in
the
1logical
name.
For
example, type A*
to
1list
all
1logical
names
that
begin
with the letter 'A’'.
Refer to example 6.
Default
MAIL

[user

name

SYSTEM

JOB

tells whether there is unread
mail
the user, if you have read access to

for
the
user's
mailbox; otherwise, you see only
the message, "Mailbox protected."
Also,
displays
any system messages since your
last login when you type SYSTEM
instead
of user~name.
Send mail with one of the
two mail programs, MAIL and
DECmail/MS.
Read
mail with the RDMAIL or DECmail/MS
program.

Default
MEMORY-USAGE

prints,
job

for

user

the

name

current

your

the
number
assigned

location
(in
numeric
or
format - depending
upon
specification

pages

the

user

process

command)
program's

SET

and
length
entry vector

name

your

memory

symbolic
previous

TYPEOUT MODE

of the current
(see with
SET

ENTRY-VECTOR)

and

on each

succeeding

line

the page numbers of
a file or program

the file specification if
the
pages
are
file
pages;
the
process
specification if the pages are mapped
from
another
process;
PRIVATE
otherwise.

175

pages

occupied

INFORMATION (Cont.)

the page numbers
of
file
pages
or
process
pages.
If a page is mapped
by
indirect
pointers,
the
file
specification
1is printed to which it
is mapped; "Fork n" means that
these
pages
are
mapped indirectly through
another process (process
n)
of
the

job;

"No

these

page"TM

destination
e

Refer

Read

exist.
pages

sections

access

the

description

information

yet

access

Example

extended

not

of
the

accesses to
the
PAGE-ACCESS):

Execute

either

when

does

Copy-on-Write

command

gives

mean

access

Write

MONITOR-STATISTICS

page

the permitted
(set with SET
R

<can

conditions,

end

pages
of

for

this

obtaining

assigned

memory.

you

the
1length
of
time
(in
hours,
minutes,
and
seconds)
since
the
monitor was reloaded

an
analysis
of
monitor
time, by percentages

the
number
-writes, and

of
swap-reads
and
file-reads and -writes

the
number
available to

of
pages
of
user programs

the

number
of
terminal
wake-ups
(occasions when a program "wakes up"
after waiting for terminal input
or
output
to
finish,
and of terminal
interrupts (occasions when a program
is
1interrupted by a CTRL/C, CTRL/O,
or CTRL/T
(or
other,
wuser-enabled
control
characters)
typed
at
a
user's terminal)

the
the
the
and
CPU

memory

average number of
processes
in
balance
set (NBAL, a subset of
run
set - these
are
runnable,
each
receives a share of total
time) and in
the
remainder
of

the
run
waiting to

176

overhead

set
(NRUN
be run)

these

are

INFORMATION (Cont.)

the number of seconds
of
CPU
time
given to each of the scheuler queues
(where
the
leftmost
listing
describes
the
highest
priority
queue,
for
interactive
processes,
and
the
rightmost
1listing
1is for
CPU=-bound processes)

if class scheduling is enabled,
the
allotted share and actual use of the
system (expressed as a percentage of
total
CPU
time) by each class, and
the
1-,
5-,
and
15-minute
load
averages

All
the

each

class

averages and totals are computed
time since system start-up.

for

/ALL

MOUNT-REQUESTS | /FAST

/USER:user

name

prints a

1list,

your

terminal,

pending
structure-mount
and tape-mount
requests,
and
of
tape-mount
requests

currently

being

satisfied.

The

1list

includes

the volid of
the
first
volume
of
tape
that
will
be mounted, or the
volid of the mounted
tape,
or
the
structure
identification
of
each
disk pack that will be mounted

the status of each
volume
of
tape
(either
the
number
of
the
tape
drive, in the form, MTAn,
on
which
it is mounted, or Waiting)

the

type of

request

(either

Disk

the

Tape)

the

tape density

tape-mount

specified

request

the mode
(either
Enabled,
1if
the
/WRITE-ENABLED
switch was specified
or
assumed
in
the
original
MOUNT-TAPE
command,
or
Locked
if
/READ-ONLY applies)
in
which
each
volume of tape is to be mounted
the

request number (i.e.,
of each request

the

number

number)

request

177

the

job

request

that made

the

INFORMATION (Cont.)

the
job

user name
that made

of the
owner
the request

the

Use

the
MOUNT,
CANCEL
(for
pending
requests),
and
DISMOUNT (for satisfied
requests) commands to change this list,.

The
the

/ALL

switch adds
display:

the
the

following
to
/ASSISTANCE,

/PRIORITY,
/RESTARTABLE/,
/NOTE,
/SEQUENCE,
/UNIQUE,
and
/REMARK
switches, whether a tape
mount
request
is
for
a
1labeled
tape,
and the tape
volume-set
name.
The
/FAST
switch
eliminates
column
headings and the sum
of
the
number
of
requests;
/USER
restricts
descriptions
to
Jjobs of the
user named, and can be given with either
of

the other
Default

two switches.
user name - your

user

hame

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

/USER:user

name

prints a listing, at your
the requests being sent or
to
includes

terminal,
of
waiting to be
device.
The
1list

sent

the name of
paper
tape
printer)

the jobname and request ID number of
the request (an asterisk (*) appears
before the jobname if the request is
currently being processed)

the
output
1limit,
in
appropriate
units
(number
of pages, minutes of
plotter time, feet of paper tape, or
number of cards)

the
the

values
of
the
switches
/AFTER,
/FORMS,
and
/UNIT,
if
given
non-default values in
the
original

Use

output

the queue
(card
punch, plotter,

name of the user
request, and

PRINT,

PLOT,

MODIFY

command.

PRINT,

CANCEL

178

PUNCH,

PLOT,

change

who

PUNCH,

this

list.

punch,
or line

initiated

subsequent

MODIFY,

INFORMATION (Cont.)

The
/ALL
switch
adds
the
/NOTE
and
/SEQUENCE
switches
to this list, while
the /FAST switch eliminates the
display
of
all
switches
and
c¢olumn headings;
/USER restricts descriptions to jobs
of
the
user
named,
and can be given with
either of the other two switches.
Default

PROGRAM-STATUS

gives

the

user

name

following

current
1level
of
processor (EXEC):

your

user

information
the

for

TOPS-20

of
CPU
time
total elapsed
in

name

the

command

the amount
used,
and
you logged

you
have
time since

the
amount
of
TOPS-20
processor time used

SET
UUO-SIMULATION
(set
with
SET
UUO-SIMULATION)
if
the
TOPS-10
compatibility package is enabled
to

command

simulate
TOPS~-10
monitor
calls
issued by a program you are running

SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY
(set
with
SET
CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY)
if
vyour
program is allowed to handle
CTRL/C
interrupts itself
the

settings

SET

TRAP

the

settings

SET

DEFAULT

the

settings

SET

PROGRAM

time

An arrow
fork.
tells

established

with

the

established

with

the

with

the

SET TYPEOUT commands

PROGRAM

command

established
command

a summary of the status of each fork
belonging to the current copy of the
TOPS-2# command processor, including
kept
status,
RUN status, and total
CPU

PSI-STATUS

and

used

(=>)

far

indicates

your

current

you:

whether

the
(programmed-softwaresystem is in use (ON)

PSI
interrupt)
not (OFF)

the
memory
table
and

address
of
the
level
of the channel table - 0

set

179

none

was

INFORMATION (Cont.)

the numbers of the
priority
levels
for
which
there
are interrupts in
progress
(1
and/or
2
and/or
3),
where 1 is the highest priority

the
numbers
of
(ready) to accept

channels with

channels
enabled
interrupts, and of

pending

For further discussion of
system
see
the
TOPS-2@

Reference

Manual.

interrupts
the
interrupt
Monitor Calls

/ALL
RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS | /FAST
/USER:user

name

prints a
1list,
at
your
terminal,
of
pending
retrieval
requests.
Each file
for
which
you
request
retrieval
constitutes
a separate request, even if
specified
within
a
single
RETRIEVE
command.
The list includes:
e

the
six

name of the request
(the
first
characters of the filename)

the

request

the volids of
the file

the

name

number

each

the

tape

user

who

containing

made

the

request

The /ALL switch
1includes
the
complete
specification
(up
to
49 characters of
the
file,
while
the
/FAST
switch
eliminates
column
headings;
/USER
restricts descriptions
to
requests
of
the
wuser
named
and
can
be used with
either of the other two switches.
Note

that

display
the
unless
you
privileges.
Default
SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION

the

/ALL

switch

does

not

complete file specification
have
Wheel
or
Operator
user

name

your

user

name

tells you whether the
system
processes
your
spooled
output
requests
immediately, or defers
them
until
you
log
out.
Set
with
SET
SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION.,

180

INFORMATION (Cont.)

STRUCTURE

dev:

gives,
e

for

each

structure

named:

Iinformation as to whether the system
performs
checking
operations while
writing
to
the
data
or
swapping
areas
of the structure.
The system
would
perform
this
checking
by
immediately reading the data that it
has just
written.
If
the
system
manager has enabled these functions,
the following lines
appear
at
the
top
of
the
display:
"Write
verification for data",
and
"Write
verification for swapping".

the number of users who have mounted
the
structure,
the
number of open
files
on
the
structure,
and
the
number of disks in the structure

kind

structure -

Public

Private,
Domestic
the TOPS-20 User's

or
Foreign
Guide)

(see

names

users

who

have mounted

the

users

who

have

accessed

the

users

who

have

connected

structure

nhames

structure

names
the

structure

The colon after the
structure
name
1is
optional.
Use
an
asterisk * for dev:
to
specify
all
mounted
structures.
Mount
MOUNT

and

dismount structures with the
commands.
Default dev: - your
connected
and

DISMOUNT

structure

SUBSYSTEM-STATISTICS

gives,
for
each
subsystem
specified
by
the
SETSN
following information:

1its

name and

system
e

total

runtime

since

SNAMES,

STIMES

number

page

faults

average

second

has

the

number

long-term waits

caused

- SPFLTS

has

SNBLKS

its average
number
of
memory)-SSIZE

181

the

name
the

started

per

caused

last

(any
JSY¥S),

working-set
size
(the
pages
it
occupies
in

INFORMATION (Cont.)

the number of times a SETSN JSYS has
executed for it (excluding the
been
EXEC

subsystem)

See the TOPS-20 Monitor Calls
Manual for more information.
SUPERIOR

Reference

tells you the number of forks
that
are
superior
to
the
current
EXEC
level.
This number is equal to
the
number
of
times
you gave the PUSH command without
intervening POP commands.
Note
that
many
programs
have
PUSH
commands
and
that
some
programs
automatically do a PUSH.
These
PUSHes
also change the number of superior forks
reported by this command.

SYSTEM-STATUS

tells

you:

whether

what kinds of logins are
allowed
local,
remote,
pseudo-terminal,
DECnet, Arpanet, or console

whether
accounting
(assessing
and
recording charges for system use) is
being

is present

done

whether account validation (checking
accounts against lists of authorized
users)

the operator

enabled

whether working
set
preloading
Iis
set preloading is
(Working
enabled
discussed in
the
System
Manager's
Guide
and
in
the
Software
Installation Guide.)

whether

sending

level

zero

system

primarily
(messages
messages
interest to operations personnel)

of
is

enabled

whether sending of level
messages
(messages
of
all users) is enabled

whether sending of operator messages
(like
BUGCHK, BUGINF, and "RESOURCE
LOW") to the CTY (central
terminal)
is

enabled

whether

(automatic
drives) is

182

one
system
interest to

tape-drive

assignment
enabled

allocation
of

tape

INFORMATION (Cont.)

(the delaying of a
retrieval-waits
specified
command's execution until

off-line

retrieved)

are [automatically]

files

are enabled

the system's expiration default date

for off-line

files

the current setting of the scheduler

bias control

whether class scheduling is enabled,
it is enabled, the special
if
and,
and
class (if any) for batch Jobs,
(if any)

the default class

TAPE-PARAMETERS

gives

the

default

these

settings

parameters for magnetic tapes:

tape density, in bits per inch

tape parity

format

(ODD or EVEN)

CORE-DUMP,

(ANSI-ASCII,

INDUSTRY-COMPATIBLE,
SYSTEM-DEFAULT), and

tape record length,

Set with

TERMINAL-MODE number

file

automatic

whether

in bytes

SET TAPE.

gives the

following

information

about

LA36,

vVT52,

the specified terminal:

its type (for example,

or SYSTEM-DEFAULT)

its speed (baud rate), in bits per
is
terminal
the
If
second.
through
to the system
connected
node,

another

such

that

does

not

receive

TOPS~-20
another
DECserver-18@ or
system, the terminal speed cannot be
This is
determined by this command.
the display by the
in
indicated
speed
1Terminal
message
indeterminatel.

whether all

output

originate

from

whether it

your

own

Jjob

|is

inhibited.

refuse

1links,

set

advice,

and

system

messages

in
it 1is set to pause
whether
printing output when you type the
pause character, and/or at

of each full page of output

183

the

end

INFORMATION (Cont.)

the pause
that
you

and
may

continue
have
set

TERMINAL

PAUSE

(only

TERMINAL

and

CHARACTER

PAUSE

TERMINAL
effect,
and

PAUSE

were

specified

not

the

the length
width
(in
its page

1if

type

command

END-OF-PAGE

COMMAND
are
in
CTRL/S
and CTRL/Q

(in number
number of

uppercase,

characters)

of lines)
and
characters) of

whether it is
capable
lowercase
characters,
set to ralse lowercase
will
with

characters
with
the

of
printing
whether it is
letters
you
and

whether

mark
(flag)
capital
a single quotation mark

1letters
(')

whether it has a formfeed mechanism,
and
whether
it
1is
set
to
only
indicate
formfeeds
or
to
perform
them
whether it has mechanical tab stops,
whether
it
1is
set
to immediately
echo input you type
whether

FULLDUPLEX

Set with
displays
VERSION

tells

e
e

operating

HALFDUPLEX

mode

TERMINAL.,
The
SYSTAT
terminal numbers.

command

you:

the

name

the

TOPS-20

and

octal

the

octal

command

e¢

the

host

system's

the

(EXEC)

(and

decimal

number,

1if

the

name

number

version

processor

name

system

operating

version

version
program

the

any)

current

TOPS-20
use

octal

the

fork

for

which
program
data
vectors (PDVs)
exist and that are
associated
with
the
current process.
(Refer 'to the
Monitor Calls Reference
Manual
and

to
the
description of the /PVBLOCK
switch in the LINK Reference
Manual
for
information
on
PDVs.)
See
Example

184

INFORMATION (Cont.)

the
decimal
simulation

version
of
the
uuo
package
in
use
(if
a

TOPS-10 program

The

format of

in memory)

a version number

is:

a.b(c)-d

where:
(1) a
and
b
are
respectively
for major and minor changes
incremented
in the software
(2)
¢
gives
a
rough
number of times the
the
of
indication
(3)
edited
software component has been
holdover from earlier versions of
a
d,
used,
rarely
now
1is
which
TOPS-20
identifies the programmer(s) responsible
for

the

software

gives the volids

VOLUMES setname:

component.

currently

mounted

the
the

1in
volumes
created
newly
and
after
A colon
specified tape set.
tape

set name

is optional.

Hints

Specifying

the Current Fork of TOPS-20

Use the FORK command to specify the fork to be described
MEMORY-USAGE
FILE-STATUS,
ADDRESS-BREAK,
the
with
fork
current
your
Find out
arguments.

and VERSION
INFORMATION

FORK-STATUS.

Commands

SYSTAT

for printing
of

the

information about the

current

state

system.

Examples

Use an INFORMATION command to determine your current terminal

settings.

@INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE

TERMINAL VT100

TERMINAL SPEED

9600

TERMINAL NO IMMEDIATE
TERMINAL FULLDUPLEX

185

INFORMATION (Cont.)

Mount a structure and access your directory on the structure.
Compare
the
disk
space
available in this directory and in
your connected directory.
(Note that
there
are
many
more
pages
free
on
vyour
connected structure (MISC:) as a whole
than on structure SNARK:; this is likely to make your use
of
the system more efficient if you work only within MISC:.)

@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure

SNARK:

mounted

@ACCESS SNARK:
@QINFORMATION DISK-USAGE

SNARK: <LATTA>

198 Pages assigned
400 Working pages,
2836 Pages free on

@INFORMATION

SNARK:

400 Permanent
SNARK:

pages

allowed

pages

allowed

DISK-USAGE

MISC:<LATTA>

119

Pages assigned
590 Working pages, 590 Permanent
33172 Pages free on MISC:

Print a file, ordering several copies and supplying a note to
be attached to it.
Use an INFORMATION command to verify that
your request is in the output
queue.
Modify
the
date
on
which
the
job
will
be
printed,
and
use the INFORMATION
command again to confirm this action.
@PRINT

TESTF1.FOR /AFTER:17:0@0/COPIES:
20/FORMS: NARROW/NO -

TE:"T-TH
[Printer

LAB"
job TESTFl

@INFORMATION

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

Printer Queue:
Job Name
Req#
TESTF1

There

219

@MODIFY PRINT 219
[l Job modified]

TESTF1

There

219,

Limit

54]

/ALL/USER

User
LATTA

/Forms :NARROW

8-Nov-85 17:00
the queue (none
/AFTER:15-NOV-85

OUTPUT—REQUESTS

Printer Queue:
Job Name
Reqg#

request-ID

Limit

/After:
1 job in

@INFORMATION

queued,

/Note:T-TH LAB
in progress)

/Seq:1791

17:00

/ALL/USER

Limit

User

219
54
LATTA
/After:15-Nov-85 17:00
1 job in the queue (none

186

/Forms :NARROW
/Note:T-TH LAB
/Seq:1791
in progress)

INFORMATION (Cont.)

the
Then give
17.
in memory section
program
Place a
command to verify that the program
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
at
beginning
numbers,
page
The
was appropriately placed.
indicate that section 17 is in use, because a section
17000,
Also, the left half of the
comprises 1000 (octal) pages.
entry vector location contains

17.

@GET GRADES.EXE.l /USE-SECTION:17
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE

64.

pages, Entry vector loc 17,,542 len 254000

Section @
Section 17
17000-17002
17374-17425
17600-17637
17643-17645

Private
R, W, E,
Private
R, W, E,
R, CW, E
1-3
GRADES.EXE.1
R, CW, E
4-35
GRADES.EXE.l1
R, CW, E
36-75
GRADES.EXE.1
R, CW, E
76-100
GRADES.EXE.l1l

Issue the INFORMATION

command

VERSION

for

information

your memory area that have program data vectors
in
programs
Note that the merging of such programs
associated with them.
yields consolidated
AGET

information.

IOLIB

@INFORMATION VERSION

BOSTON TOPS-2@ System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6.1(7)
TOPS-200 Command processor 6.1(5)
Program

PDVs:

IOLIB

Program name IOPAK, version 1.1(420)

@GET MATHLB

@INFORMATION VERSION

BOSTON TOPS-2@ System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6.1(7)
TOPS-20 Command processor 6.1(5)
Program

PDVs:

is MATHLB

Program name MATHLB, version 3.33(36#8)

@MERGE IOLIB
@INFORMATION VERSION

BOSTON TOPS-20 System,

TOPS=-20 Monitor 6.1(7)

TOPS-2@ Command processor
Program

PDVs:

6.1 (5)

is MATHLB

Program name MATHLB, version 3.33(360)

Program name

IOPAK, version

1.1 (420)

@MERGE RPTGEN
@INFORMATION VERSION

BOSTON TOPS-2@ System, TOPS-28 Monitor 6.1(7)
TOPS-20 Command
Program

PDVs:

processor

is MATHLB

6.1 (5)

Program name REPORT, version 3.1(156)
Program name MATHLB, version 3.33(360)
Program name IOPAK, version 1l.1(420)

187

INFORMATION (Cont.)

Use the INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES command with the
to
1list
all the job-wide and system-wide logical
begin with the letter 'P’'.

@QINFORMATION

Job-wide:
PAS:
PB:

PUB:

=>
=>

LOGICAL-~NAMES 2:

PUB:<DBONIN, PASCAL>
PUB:PHONE.BOOK

PUBLIC:<DBONIN>

System-wide:
PCL:

POBOX:

RANDOM:<PCL>

PUBLIC:

POST-OFFICE:
PS:

PUBLIC:<OPERATOR>

GIDNEY:

188

* wildcard
names that

KEEP

Protects

fork

from

being

cleared

from memory.

Format

@KEEP

(FORK)

fork

where

fork

one

the

following:

Fork name
Fork

number

Default -

the

current

fork

Characteristics

The
has

Kept

Forks

KEEP command gives a fork a
these characteristics:

"kept"

status.

A kept

fork

A kept fork is not reset when another program is brought
into
memory.
Normally,
when
a
program
1is
run, it
replaces the fork currently in memory.
However, if
the

program in memory is
run, the new program
allows

you

A kept

fork

to
is

in a kept
is placed

fork and a new program is
in
a
new
fork.
This

have

several

programs

not

cleared

from memory

command
unless
one
of
specified:
the fork name, a

in memory.
with

the

RESET

these
RESET
arguments
period or an asterisk.

A kept fork can be restarted by
typing
the
kept
fork
name
as
an
EXEC
command.
The kept fork name can be
abbreviated to the point where it is
wunique
from
EXEC
commands
and other kept fork names.
ESCAPE recognition
and question mark help
also
function
with
kept
fork
names.

The KEEP command sets the kept fork to
restart
at
its
starting
address
when the kept fork name is given as a
command.
For information on changing the fork's restart
address
see
Hints,
Setting
the
Kept
Fork's Restart
Address.

A kept fork is named
after
the
program
it
contains.
Forks
are
numbered
in
the
order
in which they were
created.
In multiforking—-class commands the
fork
name
and number are interchangecable.

Inferior

Any

Forks

inferior

forks

created

189

by a

kept

fork

are

also

kept.

KEEP (Cont.)

Hints

Keeping

Forks

Automatically

Place
SET
PROGRAM
KEEP
commands
in
your
COMAND.CMD file for programs that you normally
forks.
Then
when
you
1load
the
program,
automatically
keeps
the
fork
and
notifies

message

[Keeping

FORK-NAME].

The SET PROGRAM command applies only
to
the
current
EXEC
level.
If
you
want
vyour
SET
PROGRAM commands to be in
effect after a PUSH command,
put
the
commands
into
vyour
COMAND, CMD
file.
The
COMAND.CMD
file
is
executed
automatically after every PUSH command.

Kept

Forks

Continued

Using

the

Fork

Name

The KEEP command sets
the
fork
to
be
restarted
at
its
starting
point
when
the
fork name is given as a command.
So, if a program that was kept
with
the
KEEP
command
Iis
running
in
a
background
fork, and you type the kept fork
name, execution of the program is canceled and
the
program
returns to its start address, which is usually the program's
prompt.

With the SET PROGRAM KEEP command, you to
at
which
the fork will restart when the
as a command.
The
starting
point
can
continue,
reentry,
or
start
address.

specify the
point
fork name is given
be
the
program's
The
command
SET

PROGRAM

the

KEEP

as
the
was kept
running

CONTINUE

gives

the

name, execution of the program
s placed at program level.

fork

CONTINUE
/NORMALLY command.
with the
SET
PROGRAM
KEEP
in
a
background
fork, and

name

same

function

So, if a program that
CONTINUE
command
is
you type the kept fork

continues and

your

terminal

Information
The KEEP command is one of
the
commands.
For more information
section named
Running
Multiple
User's Guide.

TOPS-20
multiforking-class
about multiforking, see the
Programs
in
the
TOPS-2¢

Restrictions

Limited

Number

Forks

There is a limited number of forks available
on
a
system.
When
all
forks are in use, existing users cannot add forks
and new users cannot log in.
Therefore, KEEP only necessary
forks and return idle forks to the system with the UNKEEP or
RESET

commands.

190

Commands

INFORMATION FORK-STATUS

for displaying

RESET

for clearing

the

fork status

forks from memory

kept

for changing

UNKEEP

fork

unkept

CONTINUE,

FORK,

SET NAME,

and

INFORMATION

FREEZE,

PROGRAM-STATUS,
SET

PROGRAM

other

multiforking-class

commands

Examples

Display the fork

command.
fork a

kept

Then,

status

give

fork and

with

the

INFORMATION

the

FORK=-STATUS

KEEP command to make the current

redisplay the

fork status.

@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): HALT at 6254,

FILCOM

(2):

FILCOM

(2):

0:00:00.5

“C from IO wait at 700272,

0:00:00.3

QKEEP
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (l): Kept, HALT at 6254,

“C from

0:00:00.5
IO wait at 700272, 0:00:00.3

Display the fork status, and
fork

verify the new

status.

KEEP

the

FILCOM

fork.

Then

—— — —

— —

—

— —

—

— —

—

— —

—

——

—

——

— —

—— —

——

KEEP (Cont.)

R@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS

=> EDIT (l): Kept, HALT at 6254, @:00:00.5
FILCOM (2): “C from IO wait at 700272, 0:00:00.3

@KEEP FILCOM
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS

=> EDIT

(l):

FILCOM

Kept,

(2):

HALT at 6254,

0:00:00.5

Kept, “C from IO wait at 776721,

191

0:00:00.3

LOAD

Loads

your

program

into

memory,

compiling

the

source

file

first

|if

necessarye.

Format

@LOAD

(FROM)

/switch(es)

source/switch(es)

object,...

switches

are
keywords
chosen
from
the
list
below,
indicating
your
choice
of LOAD command options.
They have different
effects
depending
on
their
position
in
the command line:
placed before all
files in the command, they
act
as
defaults
for
all;
otherwise
they
affect
only
the
nearest
preceding file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches

source

is the file specification of the
source
program.
The filename must be of 6 or fewer characters, and
the file type of 3 or fewer characters; you cannot
use

generation

necessary

object

the

The

file

you

number.

supply

specification

filename

must

the

file type must
generation number.

you

supply a

Default

source

(if

and

means

that,

arguments

form

Summary

LOAD

the

fewer

give

(defaults

/DEBUG
/FAIL

/FLAG-NON- STANDARD
/FORTRAN
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"switch(es)"
/LIBRARY
/LIST

192

program.

source

last

switches

you

switches,

/10-BLISS
/36-BLISS
/68-COBOL
/74-COBOL
/ABORT
/ALGOL
/BINARY
/COBOL
/COMPILE
/CREF
/CROSS-REFERENCE
/DDT

/MAC

not

you

nor

filespecs
gave

command

comma,

(source,

Switches

characters,

neither

can

and

already shown

Command

object

filespecs)

associated

after

argument

filespec.

you

LOAD-class
K

This

object

and
be
.REL;
you
cannot
use
a
This argument is not necessary

object

give

object)

boldface)

more
of

the

LOAD (Cont.)

/MACHINE-CODE
/MACRO
/MAP
/NOBINARY
/NOCOMPILE
/NOCREF
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
/NODEBUG
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
/NOLIBRARY
/NOLIST
/NOMACHINE~-CODE
/NOOPTIMIZE
/NOSEARCH
/NOSTAY
/NOSYMBOLS
/NOWARNINGS
/OPTIMIZE
/PASCAL
/RELOCATABLE
/SAIL
/SEARCH
/SIMULA
/SNOBOL
/STAY
/SYMBOLS
/WARNINGS

LOAD Command

/10-BLISS

compiles the
Default

Switches

file using
for

files

the BLISS-1@ compiler.
of

type

.Bl#

and

.BLI

/36-BLISS

compiles the
Default

file using the BLISS-36
for files of type .B36

/68-COBOL

compiles the

file using

the

/74-COBOL

compiles the

file

the COBOL-74 compiler.

/ABORT

stops a compile if a fatal
error
1is
detected
and
returns
vyour
terminal to TOPS-20 command

Default

for

COBOL-68 compiler.

files of type

using

files of

compiler.

type

.C68

.C74

.68C

.74C

level.

/ALGOL

compiles the

/BINARY

allows generation of an

Default

for

each

file using

for

source

files

the ALGOL compiler.

type

object

file given.

.ALG

(binary)

file

Default

/COBOL

compiles the file
either
COBOL-68
installation
has

using
the
COBOL
compiler,
or
COBOL-74,
that
your
stored
in
the
file

SYS:COBOL.EXE.

Default

193

for

files

type

.CBL

LOAD (Cont.)

/COMPILE

forces compilation of the source file even if a
current
object
file already exists.
Use this
switch along with a /LIST or
/CREF
switch
to
obtain
1listings
when
you have current object
files.

/CREF

same

as /CROSS-REFERENCE,

/CROSS—-REFERENCE

creates
a
file
containing
cross-reference
information
for
each
compilation.
The file
name 1s that of the object file; the file
type
is
.CRF.
Use
the
CREF
command to obtain a
listing of the file.
(For
COBOL
files,
the
switch automatically produces a cross-reference
listing.)
See the TOPS-20 User Utilities Guide
for more information about the CREF program.
/DDT

loads the DDT debugging
object file.

program

along

with

your

/DEBUG

produces an object
file
containing
debugging
information beyond that usually provided during
a compilation (for use
with
FORTRAN
programs
only,
and
only
1if
you
have
not
given the
/OPTIMIZE switch).

/FAIL

compiles the
Default

file using the FAIL compiler.
for files of type .FAI

/FLAG-NON-STANDARD

indicates
/FORTRAN

compiles

nonstandard
the

Default

file

syntax

using

the

file.

FORTRAN compiler.

in the absence of a standard source
file type and a language switch
for files of type .FOR

/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
passes the specified

switches to
that
will
process
the
file(s)
switch applies.
You must include
") .
in double quotation marks ("

the

to
the

compiler
which the
switches

/LIBRARY

same

/SEARCH.

/LIST

prints a line printer listing of the program in
ASCII
format.
The name of this listing is the
filename of the object file.
The /CREF
switch

overrides

/LIST

when

they

same

file.

/MAC

same

/MACHINE-CODE

produces
a
file
containing
machine
code.
The
filename
object
file;
the
file
type
high=level languages.

both

apply

the

/MACRO.,

194

the

is
1is

generated
that of the
.LST.
For

LOAD (Cont.)

/MACRO

assembles

the

Default
/MAP

produces

file

using

the

for

files

loader

map

and

MACRO assembler.

type

.MAC

stores

the

file

object .MAP,
where
object
1is
the name of the
module containing the start address; or (if
no
start
address)
nnnLNK.MAP,
where nnn is your
job number.
/NOBINARY

prevents generation of an object (binary) file.
Use
this
switch
along with /LIST or /CREF to
allow these switches
to
take
effect
without
producing a new object file.

/NOCOMPILE

prevents compilation if the
associated
object
file
is
current;
otherwise
it
forces
compilation.
Cancels
the
/COMPILE
or
/RELOCATABLE

switch.

Default

/NOCREF

same

/NOCROSS-REFERENCE,

/NOCROSS—-REFERENCE

prevents
the
file.
Default

/NODEBUG

creation

excludes
special
your object file.
Default

debugging

cross-reference

information

from

/NOFLAG~-NON-STANDARD

prevents the
file.

flagging

of non-standard

syntax

the

Default

/NOLIBRARY

same

/NOLIST

prevents

/NOSEARCH,

line

printer

listing

the

program.

Default

/NOMACHINE-CODE

prevents
machine

generation

file

containing

code.

Default

/NOOPTIMIZE

prevents the generation of a globally optimized
object file (for FORTRAN programs only).
Default

/NOSEARCH

requires all modules in the object file library
(the
file
accompanied
by
this switch in the
command line) to be loaded even if they are not
called
by
your
program.
Cancels the /SEARCH
switch.
Default

/NOSTAY

stops the
compiler
from
being
placed
in
background
fork.
Use
when /STAY is set as
default for the compiler.

195

a
a

LOAD (Cont.)

/NOSYMBOLS

/NOWARNINGS

prevents a

with

the

prevents

symbol

table

display

object

file.

from being

warnings

loaded

for

along

nonfatal

errors.

/OPTIMIZE

calls for generation of
a
globally
optimized
object
file, that is, one that runs as quickly
as possible (for
FORTRAN
programs
only,
and
only
if
you
do
not
also
give
the
/DEBUG
switch).

/PASCAL

/RELOCATABLE

/SAIL

/SEARCH

compiles the
Default

file
for

using
files

the PASCAL compiler.
type .PAS

identifies the input file
as
an
object
file
(regardless
of
its
extension)
and
prevents
compilation of the
source
file,
/RELOCATABLE
switch
forcing
wuse of an existing object file
even if the object file is out of date.
Default

for

compiles the
Default

for

files

file

using
files

type

.REL

the SAIL compiler.
type .SAI

requires that the object file library (the file
accompanied by this switch in the command line)
be

searched

for

modules

called

by your

program

or by a program subroutine.
Only these modules
are loaded, along with modules called from
the
system libraries, which are always searched.
/SIMULA

compiles

the

Default

file
for

using
files

the
of

SIMULA

type

compiler.

.SIM

/SNOBOL

compiles the
Default

file using the SNOBOL compiler.
for files of type .SNO

/STAY

returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command
level
so
that
you
can perform other work while the
system continues to
1load
your
program.
You
immediately
receive
the
TOPS~-20 prompt (@ or
$), and can then issue any
user
command.
Be
careful
not to send incorrect data to programs
expecting
terminal
input.
(Refer
to
the
CONTINUE
command,
Restrictions:
Programs
Competing
for
Terminal
Input.
This
switch
saves
you
from having to:
issue a “T to make
sure loading has begun; give a “C to
halt
the
job;
and
issue
a
CONTINUE
/STAY command to
remain at command level during loading.

/SYMBOLS

loads a symbol table along with the
(helpful for debugging a program).

object

Default
/WARNINGS

displays

warnings

Default

196

for

nonfatal

errors.

file

LOAD (Cont.)

Characteristics
Compiling

New Sources

Only

Before loading programs, the system ordinarily compiles
any
specified
source
(and only those sources) whose write date
is more recent than that of the
object
file
of
the
same
name.
You
can
override
this action with the /COMPILE or

/RELOCATABLE

Using

Standard

switch.

File

Types

you specify source

the

FORTRAN compiler

files with

standard

types

(.FOR,

.MAC,

for
example)
in
a
LOAD command, the system automatically
calls
the
appropriate
compiler
when
compilation
is
necessary.
If
vyou
specify source files by filename only,
the system searches your connected directory for a
file
of
this
name
and
a
standard
type.
To
load programs from
sources that have nonstandard file types, give a
switch
to
indicate
the
proper compiler (/FORTRAN, /MACRO, /COBOL, or
/ALGOL).
A switch will take precedence over a standard file
type
if
they indicate different languages.
If no compiler
is indicated with either a switch or a standard
file
type,

Default

Switches Not

Passed

used.

Compiler

Hints

Commas

Between

Filespecs

you give

arguments

two or more

LOAD,

filespecs

the loaded

separated

programs exist

commas

in memory at

the same time and will operate as a single program.
You can
use
this feature to substitute one module for another under
varying conditions or for different applications.
Plus

Signs

Between

Filespecs

If you give two or more source filespecs separated
by
plus
signs
(+)
as arguments to LOAD, they are compiled together
as if they were a
single
file.
Their
object
module
|is
stored
under any filename given as the "object" argument of
the command, or (if none) under the
last
filename
in
the

group
Indirect

and

Files

file

type

.REL.

Arguments

You
can
store
arguments
(source
and
object
filespecs,
switches) of a LOAD command in an indirect file, and specify
them by typing an at sign (@) and its
filespec
as
LOAD
command

argument.
197

LOAD (Cont.)

Establishing

Default

Arguments

with

the

SET

Command

You can issue the SET DEFAULT
COMPILE-SWITCHES
command
to
set up default global arguments to the LOAD command.
Insert
this SET command in your COMAND.,CMD file to change your
own
defaults permanently.

Running

Link

Directly

The LOAD
command
automatically
runs
LINK,
the
system's
linking
loader,
but
1f
vyou
require
more control of the
loading process you can run LINK directly.
See the
TOPS-20
LINK

Using

GET
If

Reference

Instead

you have

Manual.

LOAD

used

the

SAVE

command

save

your

programs

executable
format,
you
can use the GET command
LOAD to place them in memory.
This is
a
faster
expensive means of loading programs into memory.
Wildcards

Illegal

with

LOAD

The LOAD command does not accept
%)
in a file specification.

Warning

- Generation

instead of
and
1less

Numbers,

Long

wildcard

characters

and

Filespecs

You must not give generation numbers when
specifying
source
or
object
files;
the
system
automatically
uses
the
highest
generation.
Also, most compilers require filenames of 6 or fewer
characters and file types of 3 or fewer characters.

Commands

COMPILE,

EXECUTE,

and

DEBUG

other

LOAD-class

commands

related
SAVE

for

performing

functions

saving

program

START

for

the

1loaded

.EXE

file

for starting the loaded
program

SET

DEFAULT

COMPILE-SWITCHES

for

establishing

default
switches
LOAD-class commands
INFORMATION

DEFAULTS

COMPILE-SWITCHES

for

examining

for

default

switches
establ ished
for LOAD-class commands

198

LOAD (Cont.)

Examples
1.

Load

object

file

@LOAD

LSTSQ.REL

LINK:

into

memory.

EXIT

Load

the

object
@LOAD

same

file

program,

allowing

the

system

update

the

necessary.

LSTSQ/FORTRAN

FORTRAN:

LSTSQ

MAIN.
LINK:

EXIT

Load a MACRO program
(Notice the filename
@LOAD

and request a
of this map.)

loader

map or

memory

map.

TEST2/MAP

MACRO:

LINK:

EXIT

@TDIRECTORY
WRITE

PS: <LATTA>
FT.MAP.1

6-APR-85

15:23:17

TESTZ2.REL

Load
only

COBOL program, forcing a new compilation
the required modules.
Request a map.

that

includes

@LOAD /MAP TEST1/COMPILE, COBLIB/SEARCH
COBOL:
DBL
[TEST1.CBL]
LINK:

EXIT

Compile
a
program.
cross-reference listing
in executable format.
@COMPILE

COBOL:

Then
load
it,
this time.
Finally,

TEST1/COBOL

DBL

[TEST1.CBL]

@LOAD /COMPILE/CREF
COBOL:
DBL
[TEST1.CBL]
LINK:

EXIT

@SAVE
TEST1.EXE.1l

SAVED

199

requesting
a
save the program

LOAD (Cont.)
Combine two FORTRAN sources into an object

program

under

Start this program.

new name.,

@LOAD LSTSQ+ABRR REGRES
FORTRAN:

LSTSQ

MAIN.

LINK:
EXIT

@START

modules
several
Create an indirect file, and use it to load
Request cross-reference files, then give the CREF
at once.
to

command

turn these

into listings.

@CREATE SERVTT.CMD
INPUT:

PS:SERVTT.CMD.1l

po100
pB200
pB300
P0400

HJRAD/COMPILE, FORLIB/SEARCH
HJVTT/COMPILE, FORLIB/SEARCH
HJINI/RELOCATABLE
$

.
[SERVTT.CMD1]
@LOAD /CREF @SERVTT.CMD
FORTRAN: HJRAD
MAIN.

FORTRAN:
MAIN,
LINK:

HJVTT
LOADING

EXIT

@QCREF

CREF:

HJRAD
HIVTT

200

Begins

your

timesharing

job

and

connects

you

your

log—-in

directory.

Format

@LOGIN /FAST (USER) name
(SESSION REMARK) remark

(PASSWORD)

password

(ACCOUNT)account -

where

hame

pwd

is your secret
your terminal)

acc

your

use

user

name

password

account name or

(which

number

1is

that

not

you

printed

are

authorized

remark

is an optional remark of up to
39
characters
that
identifies
the
terminal
session
for
accounting
purposes.
Check
with
INFORMATION
JOB-STATUS.
Change with SET SESSION-REMARK,

/FAST

is an optional switch that prevents
the
following:
processing
of
your
LOGIN.CMD and COMAND.CMD files
and the system's
LOGIN.CMD
and
COMAND.CMD
files,
printing
of system mail, and printing of the notice
of new mail.
(Your system manager may
remove
this
switch from your system.)

Output

Acknowledgement

Valid

The system acknowledges a valid LOGIN
command
by
printing
your
job
number, terminal number, and the current date and
time.
In addition, it prints the date and time of your last
login.
You can use this information to determine if another
user has learned your password and logged in to your account
since the last time you logged out.
Note

that

your
your

account,
last login

access

Notice

batch

job

automatically

The
batch
and should

your

account.

User

Mail

and

System

logs

and

logs

1login sets the date and
not
be
confused
with

out

time of
1illegal

Mail

When you log in, the system notifies you if another user has
sent
you
a
message
with one of the system mail programs.
The
system
then
1lists
any
system
mail
(mail
sent
by
privileged
users
to
all users) that has accumulated since
your last login.
Note that this mail
appears
in
the
1log
file if a batch job is run for you between the time the mail
was sent and the time you logged in.

201

Output

from

Command

Files

After a successful LOGIN, the system processes the LOGIN.CMD
and
COMAND.CMD
files
1in
the directory defined by logical
name SYSTEM:
and the command files in your login directory.
The files are processed in this order:
l.
2.

SYSTEM:LOGIN.CMD
LOGIN.CMD

SYSTEM:COMAND.CMD

4.,

COMAND,CMD

The system displays any output from the
commands
1in
these
files
on
your
terminal.
After execution of each command
file,
the
system
displays
the
message
"End
of
file-name.CMD".
If the last command in the command file is
a TAKE command
with
no
arguments,
this
message
1is
not
displayed.
'

Characteristics

Getting

the

Attention of

the

System

Before logging in, you may have to press any alphanumeric or
special
character
to display the system herald or greeting
and the @ prompt necessary for typing the LOGIN command.
If you are dialing
in
by
telephone
to
a
1line
declared
autobaud
by
the
system
manager,
this
initial character
enables
the
system
to
determine
your
terminal's
speed
setting,
as
1long
as
the
speed is 300, 1200, 1800, 24040,
4800, or 9600.
Type a second character
if
the
terminal's
speed
is 110 or 15@¢.
If your initial character(s) fails to
get the system identification message, press the
BREAK
key
twice, followed by another character(s).

Rights,

Capabilities,

and

Charges

The LOGIN command gives you ownership rights to your
1log-in
directory,
and
any group rights established for you on the
public structure (usually named PS:).
In addition, you
are
granted
whatever
capabilities
(for
example, Maintenance,
Wheel)
have been awarded to you, and can be sure
that
any
charges
you
incur for the use of system resources, such as
CPU time or the batch and printing systems, will be recorded
to

your

user

name,

202

Hints

Commands
For

Files

Executed

Affecting

Entire

Commands

that

TERMINAL

and

Log-in

Session

affect

Time

Current

your

entire

DEFINE,

belong

Level

Only

Jjob,

for

example,

Commands

that

affect only the
current
level
of
TOPS-28,
for
example, many SET commands, must be put into COMAND,CMD
if you want them to
be
executed
automatically
after

every

For

PUSH

Affecting
As

soon

Batch
as

processes

logical

command

name

well

after

Jobs

one
the

your

command

SYSTEM:

directory.

batch
files

and

jobs
in

the

The

logs

the

in,

command

files

the

directory

are

system

defined

files

processed

your

1in

this

order:

Note

SYSTEM:BATCH.CMD

BATCH.CMD

3.
4.,

-SYSTEM:COMAND.CMD
COMAND.CMD

that

certain

example,

have

time

limit

already

been

set

executed.

Such

specified

batch

job

issuing

Affecting

Jjob,

After

this

the

directory.

the

batch

job,

the

name

log

before

The

set

for
file,

commands
either

are
values

the SUBMIT command that starts
default values in effect for the

Batch

Jobs,

See

Hints -

For

Files

command
the

SYSTEM:

also

below.

Command

SYSTEM:

file

these

are

its

Commands

executing

executes

SUBMIT command.

Nested

Duplicate

and

parameters

by switches

the

Avoiding

parameters

its

same

file,
name

command

the
in

files

system

your

may

contain

commands

that
you
already
have
1in your own command
files.
To avoid executing
the
same
commands
twice,
remove
duplicate commands from your command files.
To
display a SYSTEM:
command file, give the command
TYPE
SYSTEM:file-name.CMD.
For

Affecting

Nested

Batch

Jobs

By
placing
a
SET
DEFAULT
BATCH.CMD
file,
you
cause
effect
a

your
A Final
To

for

SUBMIT

batch

TAKE

nested

command

batch

within

SUBMIT
these

job,
the

command
defaults

batch

control

job

file

in
to

your
be in

started

another

"End

jobs).

Command

suppress

the

display

file-name.CMD"
after execution
the last command in the file a
arguments.

203

the

message

of a
TAKE

command file, make
command
with
no

Simplifying

Log-ins

you
By using the SET DIRECTORY ACCOUNT-DEFAULT command
LOGIN commands to require just your
cause subsequent
user name

Special

and

password.

Cases

Commands You Can Issue Before Log-in

You can give these commands and arguments before logging in:
Arguments

Command
ATTACH
BREAK
DAYTIME

AVAILABLE

INFORMATION

COMMAND-LEVEL
MAIL

TERMINAL-MODE
VERSION
LOGOUT

LATE-CLEAR~-TYPEAHEAD

SET

TIME-LIMIT

(except with subcommands LPT or OUTPUT)

SYSTAT
TERMINAL
UNATTACH

Logging

PTYs

You do not need to give a password
your own user name

Must

In Within

Log

to a PTY

when

1logging

(pseudo-terminal).

1in

under

Five Minutes

initial
your
of
minutes
If you do not log in within five
will be logged out automatically and you
Jjob
your
CTRL/C,

will
Logging

have to
to

Last

type CTRL/C again.
Available

If you attempt to log

Job

Slot

in to the last available job slot, the

will send you an error
but
in
you
1log
not
will
system
who
wusers
for
This job slot is intended
message instead.
To
attach detached jobs using the ATTACH command.
to
wish

out.

204

current

user

logs

Commands

ATTACH

for

joining

job
that
logged in
INFORMATION

DIRECTORY

your

has

terminal

already

for

displaying
the
date
time
that
you
started
current terminal
session

been

and

the
with

LOGOUT
SET

for

ACCOUNT

ending

for

DIRECTORY

ACCOUNT~DEFAULT

for

SESSION-REMARK

your

terminal

for

account

default

subsequent

making

session
terminal

job

session

specifying

account
SET

timesharing

changing

during
SET

your

log-—-ins

changing

remark
session

during

vyour

341
and

and
your

automatically
LOGIN,CMD file.

executing

the

341

@LOGIN C.RYDER

Job 39 on TTY4l 8-Mar-85 11:0#4:21,
End
End

of
of

SYSTEM:LOGIN.CMD.1
LOGIN.CMD,1

using

Last Login 7-Mar-85 ©£8:32:15

Log

the

default

account

number

and

the

/FAST

switch.

/FAST

Job

—

Type

character

using

C.RIDER

TTY4l

8-Mar-85

11:1@:34,

Last

8-Mar-85

11:04:21

—

@QLOGIN

——

—

———

—

Examples

—

INFORMATION

—

account

session

get

341

the

and

JOB-STATUS

TOPS-2¢

inserting

your

first

herald,

session
command,

then

1log

Give

this

see

——

—

——

—

——

—

remark.

BOSTON (KL2871), Development
@LOGIN URQUHART __ 341 DEBUG
Job

TTY29

QINFORMATION
Host

8-Mar-85

System, TOPS-28
ACCOUNT.PAS

09:15:15,

JOB-STATUS

Last

AURORA

Job 42,
Account

TTY29, User
341 Session

URQUHART
Remark:DEBUG

205

ACCOUNT.PAS

Monitor

Iin,

remark.

6.1(7)

7-Mar-85

09:2¢:32

LOGOUT

Ends

tim esharing

job.

Format

@LOGOUT /FAST n

where

/FAST is an optional

switch

LOGOUT.CMD and

the

that

system's

prevents

processing

LOGOUT.CMD files.

your

is an optional job number.
Specify n only when logging out
a job other than your attached job.

Output

System

Use

Under

Current

Account

The system acknowledges a valid LOGOUT command
by
printing
your
job
number,
user
name,
current
account,
terminal
number, and the current date and time.
Then
it
shows
the
total
amount
of
CPU
time
you
used
during the terminal
session and the total length of time
you
were
1logged
Iin,
followed
by
the account of CPU time used under the current
account and the length of time you were logged in under this
account.

LOGOUT.CMD

Output

Before logging you out, the system processes the commands in
your
login
directory's
LOGOUT.CMD
file
and the system's
LOGOUT.CMD file and displays any output from these commands.
Then,
after execution of each file, the system displays the
message End of LOGOUT.CMD, unless the last
command
in
the
file

TAKE

command.

Characteri stics

Expunging

Your

Log-in

and

Connected

Directories

Before logging you out,
the
system
expunges
any
deleted
files from your log-in and connected directories, and prints

message

assigned

iIf

either

permanent disk

directory
quota.

206

1is

still

exceeding

its

LOGOUT (Cont.)

Loggi ng

Out

Other

Jobs

By specifying a job number you can log
out
any
other
job
logged
in under the same user name as your attached job.
A
user with Wheel or Operator capabilities enabled can log out
any
Jjob
on
the system.
Whenever you log out another job,
the system prints the job's user name, terminal number,
and
current

with

program.

extra

When a job is
files are not

You

must

then

confirm

the

LOGOUT

command

RETURN,
logged out
processed.

by another

job,

the

logout

command

Hints

Fin al

TAKE

Command

To suppress the display of the message "End
of
LOGOUT.CMD"
after
execution
of
your
LOGOUT.CMD
file,
make the last
command in the file a TAKE command with
no
arguments.
Be
sure
the
file
contains
only
one
RETURN
after the TAKE
command.

Error s

LOGOUT.CMD

If there is an error
the system processes
cancels

the

LOGOUT

in
the
command
/FAST switch.,

Effect

Memory

and

in a command
the commands

command.

file

in
up

log

give

the

your
LOGOUT.CMD
file,
to the one in error and
out, correct
the
error

LOGOUT command

with

the

Terminal

The

LOGOUT command clears memory and leaves your terminal in
the
before log-in.
LOGOUT n.does not affect memory and leaves
your
terminal at TOPS-2@0 command level.
state

Commands

DETACH

for

disengaging

ending
LOGIN
UNATTACH

the

for

beginning

for

disengaging

ending

the

job

from

vyour

terminal

without

terminal

without

job
your
a

job

207

timesharing
job

from

job

another

LOGOUT (Cont.)

Examples

Log

job.

out your

QLOGOUT
End of
End of

2
SYSTEM:LOGOUT.CMD,
LOGOUT.CMD.5

Killed Job 18, User C.RYDER, Account 341, TTY 233,
at 8-Mar-84 16:25:46, Used @:0:5 in 1:2:16
Log out your job,

directory

is over

receiving

its

warning

storage quota.

message

that

your

@LOGOUT

<URQUHART> Over permanent storage allocation by 8 page(s).
Killed Job 39, User URQUHART, Account 341, TTY 41
at

Used @:0:1

8-Mar-84 16:33:12,

in #:1:5

out
Log
Check what jobs are logged in under your user name.
detached job and verify that it is gone, then log out your
a
attached

job.

@SYSTAT WALKER
EXEC
DET
18
SYSTAT
31
21*

18
@LOGOUT
User WALKER,
[Confirm]
@SYS WALKER
31
21%*
@LOGOUT

WALKER
WALKER

Detached,

SYSTAT

running

EXEC

WALKER

Killed Job 43, User WALKER, Account 341, TTY 226,
Used @:0:1 in @:1:1
8-Mar-84 16:35:16,
at

208

MERGE

Places an executable
whatever program (if

program

any)

into the current
already there.

1is

fork,

combining

with

Format

@MERG E

(PROGRAM)

filespec

/switch

where

files pec

the

file

specification

Default

/swit ch

is one

file

type

the

/OVERLAY

of any executable
.EXE

program

following:

allows pages of the DDT
program
to be loaded over pages occupied
by
the
existing
program
in
memory.

/USE-SECTION:n
specifies
the
(from
@ to 37

memory
section
octal)
into which

your

program

You

can

this

to
be
switch

can

use

your

program

one

section.,

merged.
only if

contained

Characteri stics

Executable

Files

Only

program

you

may

you

try

get

merge

not

immediate

executable

error

message

format,

(that

|is,

"?UNEXPECTED END-OF-FILE TRAP...") or a
delayed
one
(that
is,
M"?ENTRY VECTOR LENGTH IS NOT LESS THAN 1008") after the

merge.

either

executable
command

merged
Exist ing

does

Pages
there

MERGE

case,

program

not

alter

the

proper

Not
is

before
the

sure

that

you

investigating
entry

.EXE

vector

have

specified

further.
if

the

The
file

MERGE
being

format.

Overlaid

program

command,

and

already

pages

in
the

memory
new

when

program

you

give

overlay

it,

the
the

new program is not placed into memory, and the system prints
the
error message, "?Illegal to overlay existing pages." To
force the existing pages to be overlaid, reissue
the
MERGE

command

Effect

The
in

using

the

/OVERLAY

switch.

Memory

MERGE

t he
current

command
current

fork

combines the specified program with the program
fork.
It
does not affect the contents of the

unless

you

specify

209

the

/OVERLAY

switch.

MERGE (Cont.)

Commands

for

INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE

examining

the

contents

memory

saved

(executable)

GET

for putting

SAVE

program
the
for storing a copy of
fork in a file in
current
the
in

file

into memory

executable

format

for starting the program in memory

START
Examples

Merge an executable program into memory.
@MERGE TESTFl.EXE

a
merge
then
Place an executable system program in memory,
INFORMATION
Give
it.
with
program
debugging
system
MEMORY-USAGE
commands
to
verify
that
both
programs
are
intact.
@GET

SYS:DUMPER

@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE

34.

pages,

Entry vector loc 4715 len 3

Private
R, W, E,
Section @
RANDOM: <NEXT-RELEASE>DUMPER.EXE 4
]
RANDOM: <NEXT-RELEASE>DUMPER.EXE.4
4-44

R,
1
2-42

CW, E
R, CW,

@MERGE SYS:UDDT
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE

45,

pages,

Entry vector loc 4715 len 3

Private
R, W, E,
Section @
R, CW, E
1
RANDOM : <NEXT-RELEASE>DUMPER.EXE.4
)]
4-44
RANDOM: <NEXT-RELEASE>DUMPER.EXE.4
2-42
R, CW,
R, CW, E
1-4
RANDOM:<NEXT-RELEASE>UDDT.EXE.l1l
764-767
R, E
5-13
RANDOM:<NEXT-RELEASE>UDDT.EXE.l
778-776

210

MODIFY

Adds or changes switches for a request placed in

output

batch

quevuve.

Format

@MODIFY (REQUEST TYPE)

queue

(ID)

identifier /switch(es)

where

queue

is the waiting list in which you placed

request, chosen from the following list:

for requests made using the

BATCH

for requests made using
CARDS

PAPER-TAPE

the

PUNCH

the

PUNCH

command

for requests made using
PAPER-TAPE command

for requests made

PLOT

wusing

the

PLOT

the

command

for requests made using

In the

SUBMIT

command

CARDS

Output

original

the

command

switch
in

the

summary

and

descriptions,

word

the

column headed Applicable Queues means

all queues except the batch queue.

identifier

is one of the following:

request ID number

the unique identifier

assigned

This
to your request.
system
the
the
under
is the number appearing
of
1list
the
in
"Reqg#"
heading

INFORMATION
the
requests shown by
INFORMATION
or
BATCH-REQUESTS
OUTPUT-REQUESTS command.

jobname

the jobname of the request,
the

first

six

characters

either

of the

or
request,
first filename in the
a
to
supplied
you
argument
the

the
making
when
switch
/JOBNAME
This is the name
original request.
"Job
heading
the
appearing under
Name" in the list of requests shown
BATCH-REQUESTS
INFORMATION
by the
OUTPUT~REQUESTS
INFORMATION
or
command.

211

MODIFY (Cont.)

/JOBNAME: jobname

switch

showing

request

the

jobname

modify.

You

can

the

specify

a particular
jobname
when
making
the
original request.
See Special
Cases - /JOBNAME Switch, below.
/SEQUENCE :sequence

number

switch showing the sequence
number
of
the request to modify.
You can
specify
a
particular
sequence
number

when

making

the

original

request.

Use

an
asterisk
(*)
as
requests in the specified

/switches

identifier

modify

Summary

MODIFY

Switch

Command

this

parameter)

Switches

Applicable
and/or

Queues

time

All
All

/BEGIN:n
/CARDS:n
/COPIES:n
/DELETE

BATCH
Output

/DEPENDENCY-COUNT:n
/DESTINATION-NODE:node
/FEET:n

BATCH
All
BATCH
PRINT

COBOL

/FILE:ELEVEN

FORTRAN

name

Output
Output

/HEADER
/JOBNAME: jobname
/LIMIT:n

Output
All
PRINT

/LOWERCASE

/MODE :output mode
/NOHEADER
/NOTE:12-character

Output
Output
Output

message

ALWAYS

/OUTPUT

BATCH

name::

ASCII

/FORMS:forms
/GENERIC

all

are
keywords,
chosen
from
the
below, specifying the parameter you
to change (and,
where
applicable,
new value

/AFTER:date

BATCH

ERRORS

BATCH

NOLOG

/PAGES :n
/PRIORITY:n
/PROCESSING~NODE:node
/REPORT:title

BATCH

BATCH
All

name

BATCH

/RESTARTABLE: YES

BATCH

212

your

queue,

list
want
the

MODIFY (Cont.)

Applicable Queues

Switch

All

/SEQUENCE:n

SINGLE

/SPACING:DOUBLE
TRIPLE

/TIME:hh:mm:ss
@

BATCH

/UNIQUE:1 or YES
/UNIT:octal number

/UPPERCASE

/USER:user name
MODIFY Command

and/or

day of week
and/or time

time,

All

Queues

All

(or TODAY)

Output

Switches

Applicable

/AFTER:date

All

BATCH

/TPLOT:n

ensures that the request
not be processed
will

revised
until after the
time
and/or
date
NOV-12-79,
specified.
and

18:00

illustrate

two

this
to
arguments
give
you
If
switch.
time,
and
date
both
a
with
them
separate
given
When
space.
time may be
the
alone,
sign
preceded by a plus
(+),

which

will

delay

the
by
processing
indicated length of time
from

the

present.

can
you
Alternatively,
day of the week
a
give
TODAY
(e.g., MONDAY) or
the
then
argument;
as
printed
job will not be
beginning of
the
until
1f
day.
the following
you follow this argument
a
and
with a plus sign
will be
Jjob
the
time,
this
further delayed by
amount.

213

MODIFY (Cont.)

/BEGIN:n

all

gives the
decimal
1line
number
of
the
control
file at which processing
is to begin (for BATCH),
or

the
decimal
page
number
of
the
flle at
which the output
1is
to
begin
(for
CARDS,
PAPER-TAPE,

PLOT,

and

PRINT)

/CARDS :n

BATCH

specifies

number
the job

the
decimal
of spooled cards
1is
allowed
to

punch

/COPIES:n

Output

/DELETE

/DEPENDENCY-COUNT : n

All

BATCH

tells how many copies
the file to produce

deletes the
processing.
/PRESERVE,

file
after
Opposite of

sets
the
dependency

request's
count to the

new

value

This

switch
can
also
be
followed
by
a
signed
value,
i.e.,
+n or -n,
which will
increase
or
decrease
the
o0ld value
by the specified amount.
A
batch
request is not

processed
until
dependency
count
See the TOPS-10/28
Reference
Manual
more
1information
dependency counts,

its
1is @,
Batch
for

about

/DESTINATION-NODE:node~name
All

specifies
the
node
on
whose
1line
printer the
log file of
your
batch
job
is
to
be
printed
(for BATCH), or the node
on whose line printer or
other output device your
request
is
to
be
processed

(CARDS,

PAPER-TAPE,

PRINT).

/FEET:n

BATCH

and

colons

(::)

following
the
are optional.

node

specifies

the
of

decimal
feet
of

spooled paper
job is allowed

tape
the
to punch

number

214

Two

PLOT,

name

MODIFY (Cont.)

ASCII

COBOL
/FILE: ELEVEN
FORTRAN

specifies that the

file

text,
consists of ASCII
or COBOL SIXBIT text; or
four
contains
(ELEVEN)

bytes in each
eight-bit
is
or
word;
36-bit
ASCII

FORTRAN

where column 1

text,

each

line is interpreted as a
control
carriage
character.

/FORMS:forms

Output

name

specifies,

six

1in

characters,

fewer

new

the
(determining
forms
of banner, header,
size

sections;
traliler
and
paper color, width,
the
vertical
weight;
and
format, carriage control
of
number
the
tape,
steps per inch,
plotter
the
with
use
etc.) to
job

Output

/GENERIC

allows the output to

produced

be
any

Use
device,
available
argument
with
along
the
cancel
to
PRINT
/LOWERCASE or /UPPERCASE
PLOT,
with
or
switch,
or
CARDS,
PRINT,
PAPER-TAPE to cancel the
JUNIT switch.

/HEADER

AME
: jobname
/JOBN

Output

section
causes a header
Jjobname
the
containing
printed,
to be plotted,
the
before
punched
or
file itself is produced

All

the
change
not
does
specifies
but
jobname,
modify.
to
job
which
in
jobname
as
Same
"identifier"TM

Output

/LIMIT:n

argument.

places a new limit of
cards,

feet,

pages on

the output of the job

/LOWERCASE

file
specifies that the
be produced on a
to
is
of
line printer capable
lowercase
printing
characters

215

MODIFY (Cont.)

ASCII

BCD

/MODE
: BINARY

CARDS

designates

IMAGE

punching
cards.
switch

the

the
See
in

command
details.

mode

file
the
the

for
onto
/MODE
PUNCH

description

for

ASCII

BINARY

/MODE
: IMAGE

PAPER-TAPE

IMAGE-BINARY

designates

the mode
the
file

punching

for
onto

paper

tape.

See

the

/MODE

switch

the

PUNCH

command

description

for

details.

ASCII

/MODE:BINARY

PLOT

designates the mode
plotting the file.
the
/MODE switch in

IMAGE

PLOT

command

for

details.

for
See
the

description

ARROW

ASCII

/MODE: OCTAL

designates the mode
printing the file.
the
/MODE switch in

SUPPRESS

/NOCHEADER

Output

for
See

the

command

description

for

prevents

details.
header

section
containing
the
jobname
from
being
produced before the file
is produced.
/NOTE :message

Output

labels
the
header
section of output, i.e.,
the
section
displaying

the

jobname,

message
up
to

The

or
12

contains
punctuation

of
characters.

message

enclosed
quotation

with

notation

must

in
marks

double
1if
it

spaces
or
characters.

ALWAYS

/OUTPUT
: ERRORS

BATCH

NOLOG

says

whether

you

want

the

1log
file
to
be
printed
always, or only
in the case of unhandled

errors

occurring

within

the job, or
never.
matter
which option
choose, the log file
always created.
216

No
you
Iis

MODIFY (Cont.)

decimal
the
specifies
spooled line
of
number
printer pages the job is
allowed to print

BATCH

/PAGES:n

All

/PRESERVE

it
saves the file after
Opposite
processed.
is

All

/PRIORITY:n

/DELETE.

assigns a new
reflecting

the

of the request.,
from
be
must
larger
with
receiving

number

urgency

n
This
1 to 63,
numbers
earlier

treatment.

/PROCESSING-NODE:node name::

host
IBM
specifies the
on whose CPU the
system
be
to
JCL batch job is

BATCH

The node name must
run.
fewer
or
six
of
be

must be
and
characters
colons
two
followed by
(s2).

and
files
your
scans
those
only
processes
first
whose
lines
characters are the title
title
This
you give.
12
to
up
contain
can
(including
characters
the quotation marks that
title
the
must enclose
it contalins spaces).
if
The switch is used along
report
COBOL
the
with

/REPORT:title

writer.

/RESTARTABLE: YES

the
whether
specifies
started
be
should
job

BATCH

1if
again
crashes and

All

/SEQUENCE:n

217

system
the
restarts.

the
change
not
does
of the
number
sequence
job but rather specifies
modify.
to
job
which
Giving this switch is an
alternative to supplying
the
as
ID
request
a
identifier when
request
Jjobs
several
have
you
Jjobname
same
the
with
the
(if you supply only
to identify the
jobname
command
job, the MODIFY
affects all of them).

MODIFY (Cont.)

DOUBLE

/SPACING: SINGLE

determines

TRIPLE

between

/TIME:hh:mm:ss

BATCH

the

printed

revises

the

spacing
lines

1limit

for

the
maximum
amount
of
CPU
time
available
to
the job; given in hours,
minutes, and seconds.

/TPLOT:n

BATCH

/UNIQUE:YES or 1

limits to n the
maximum
number
of
minutes
of
spooled
plotter
time
allowed for the job

BATCH

changes

your

declaration,
1f
two or
more jobs are
submitted
from
the same connected

directory,
must

whether

run

they

separate

times
/UNIT:octal

number

Output

directs

your

the
1line
specified

request

printer
octal

to
the
unit

number
/UPPERCASE

specifies

that

the

file

is
to
be produced on a
line printer
that
uses
uppercase
characters
only
/USER:user

name

PRINT,

BATCH

specifies

the

user

request
modified;

is
for

to
be
privileged

users

whose

only.

Characteristics

MODIFY

Effective

Only

Before

Processing

The MODIFY command affects a batch or
output
request
only
before
processing
has
begun.
After processing has begun,
you can only cancel the request with the CANCEL command, and
then make a new request.

218

MODIFY (Cont.)

Hints

Using

the /DEPENDENCY-COUNT Switch

You can use the
order

which

/DEPENDENCY-COUNT
your

switch

specify

batch
jobs
are processed.
but the first job to
some

the

Set the
positive

dependency count of all
value
when
vyou submit them, and include MODIFY commands in
each job's control file to bring the next
Jjob's
dependency
count to # at the appropriate time.
See Example 4.

Special

Cases

/JOBNAME

Switch

In the singular case when you want to modify
several
queue
same
jobname using only one command, and
the
of
requests
that jobname is purely numerical (e.g., 5045), you must
use

the /JOBNAME:jobname switch as second argument to the MODIFY
command.
Do not also give the request ID or
Jjobname
as
a
command argument if you give the /JOBNAME:jobname switch.

Commands

for

CANCEL

removing

batch

and

output

requests

INFORMATION

for

BATCH-REQUESTS

examining

batch

INFORMATION

for

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

examining

for

placing

output

for

the

entries

the

queues

output
PLOT

entries

queue

requests

in a

requests

placing

printer

output

1line

queue

for placing requests
punch
or paper tape

PUNCH

plotter

queue

in
a
card
punch output

queue

for

SUBMIT

placing

input

219

queue

requests

the batch

MODIFY (Cont.)

Examples

Modify a batch
more quickly.
@MODIFY

Job

BATCH

request

ARTIFI

@MODIFY

ARTIFI)

to make

one

PHIAL

job

@INFORMATION

(of

jobname

/NOTE:"DUE:

several

having

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

Printer Queue:
Job Name
Req#

PHIAL)

include

11/4"

the

same

jobname.

/USER

Limit

User

PRTSK

226

LATTA

/After:

8-Nov-84

17:00

PRTSK

236

LATTA /After:

8-Nov-84

17:00

PRTSK

237

LATTA

8-Nov-84

17:00

PRTSK
TESTF1

238
219

27
54

LATTA /After: 8-Nov-84
LATTA /Forms:NARROW

17:00

There

are

@MODIFY

Job

start

/PRIORITY:63

Job modified]

Modify

jobname

modified]

Modify a print request
on the header page.

(of

/After:

/After:8-Nov-84 17:00
jobs in the queue (none

PRINT 237
modified]

/AFTER:18:00

220

progress)

note

MODIFY (Cont.)

files.
Use the TYPE command to examine some of your control
use of the MODIFY command within these files to
the
(Notice
in a certain order when
ensure that they are processed
Submit these three control files and
submitted together.)

verify their placement in the batch input queue.
@TYPE ARVM%.CTL
2
ARVM1.CTL.

@RUN TESTF1
@PRINT TESTF1l.RSM

@MODIFY BATCH ARVM2 /DEPENDENCY-COUNT:#
ARVM2,CTL.2

@RUN TESTF2
@PRINT TESTF2.RSM

@MODIFY BATCH ARVM3 /DEPENDENCY-COUNT:@
ARVM3.CTL.2

@RUN TESTF3

@PRINT TESTF3.RSM
@PRINT SUMJOB.RSM
@SUBMIT /AFTER:17:08 ARVM1

[Batch job ARVMI queued, request—ID 24¢, limit #:05:00]

@SUBMIT /DEPENDENCY-COUNT:1 ARVM2

[Batch job ARVM2 queued, request-ID 241, limit 0:05:00]

@SUBMIT /DEPENDENCY-COUNT:1 ARVM3

[Batch job ARVM3 queued, request-ID 242, limit 0:05:00]

@INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS /ALL/USER
Batch

Queue:

Job Name

ARVM1

ARVM2
ARVM3

Reg#

User

Run Time

LATTA /After: 8-Nov-84 17:00
@Q@0:95:00
240
/Assist:Yes /Seq:1804
/Unig:Yes /Restart:No

241

@0:05:00

LATTA /Dep:l

/Uniq:Yes

/Restart:No

242

@@:30:00

LATTA /Dep:l

/Unig:Yes

/Restart:No

/Assist:Yes

/Seq:1805

/Assist:Yes

/Seq:1806

There are 3 jobs in the queue

221

(none in progress)

MOUNT

Requests

that

available

for

specified file
your job's use.

structure

magnetic

tape

set

made

Format

@MOUNT medium

(NAME)

/switch(es)

dev:

where

medium

one

the

STRUCTURE

following:

for

mounting

structures
TAPE

for

file

(disk

mounting

packs)
magnetic

tapes

dev:

is either the
structure
identification
(or
alias),
or
the tape setname.
The
colon after the device name is optional.

/switches

Summary

are

MOUNT

keywords,

chosen

below,

1indicating

command

options

Command

Switches

(defaults

from

the

your

choice

boldface)

list

MOUNT

/CHECK-SETNAME
200
556

800
/DENSITY:1600
6250
SYSTEM-DEFAULT

7-TRACK
/DRIVE-TAPE: 9-TRACK
ANSI

BYPASS

/LABEL-TYPE:EBCDIC
TOPS-20

UNLABELED

/NEW
/NOUNLOAD
/NOWAIT

/OPERATOR
/PROTECTION:octal
/READ-ONLY

protection

code

Default
Default

222

code

- 770000
unless /NEW or
/SCRATCH specified

MOUNT (Cont.)

/REMARK:119-character

remark

/SCRATCH
NUMBER number

Default

/START:VOLID volid

/STRUCTURE-ID:structure
/VOLIDS:1ist of volids

number

identification
Default -

/WRITE-ENABLED

if /NEW or /SCRATCH
specified

the
with either
useful
The switches /NOWAIT and /REMARK are
medium, while /STRUCTURE-ID is for STRUCTURE
TAPE
or
STRUCTURE
only; the other switches are for TAPE only.
MOUNT Command

/CHECK-SETNAME

200
556
800
/DENSITY:1600
6250
SYSTEM-DEFAULT

Switches

the
of
setname
the
ensures that
matches the setname
tapes
mounted
argument
you specify as the "dev:"
the MOUNT command; otherwise an
to
For
generated.
be
will
error
labeled tapes only.

bits per
specifies the density, in
to
at which the tape set is
inch,
Densities 200
written.
be read or
tapes
unlabeled
for
are
and 556
one of the
SYSTEM-DEFAULT,
only.

1600),

1is

drive
of
type
the
specifies
to
1is
set
tape
the
which
must
tapes
Labeled
mounted.

on
be
be

values

shown

established

(usually

system

start-up

time.
7-TRACK

/DRIVE-TYPE: 9-TRACK

‘mounted on 9-track drives.
ANSI

BYPASS
E
: EBCDIC
/LABEL-TYP
TOPS--20
UNLABELED

write
tells the system to read and
the
to
according
set
tape
the
ANSI;
standard:
1label
specified

TYPES (IN READ-ONLY
1IBM
EBCDIC
MODE); TOPS-28 - a superset of ANSI
in TOPS~-20 systems; UNLABELED
used
BYPASS
- for unlabeled tapes only.
only) lets
users
privileged
(for
tape,
any
write
and
read
you
unlabeled, without any
or
labeled
label

223

processing.

MOUNT (Cont.)

/NEW

tells
the
system
that
you
are
creating
a
new
file
set
on
an
existing tape set, whose setname is
then
changed
to
be
the name you
specify as the
dev:
argument
to
the
MOUNT
command.
(If the tape
set
has
more
than
one
volume,
remember
to
specify
their volids
using
the
/VOLIDS
or
/OPERATOR
switch.)
The
/CHECK-SETNAME
and
/READ-ONLY

present,
assumed.
switch if

switches

are

ignored

and
/WRITE-ENABLED
|is
Do not
give
the
/START
you give /NEW.

/NOUNLOAD

asks the system
not
to
unload
a
volume (reel) of tape from its tape
drive when the drive is released by
a
volume switch (change of volumes
required
by
a
read
or
write
operation)
or
DISMOUNT
command.
Use
this
switch
to
facilitate
processing
when
sufficient drives
are available.

/NOWAIT

tells the
system
to
return
your
terminal
to
TOPS-20 command level
as
soon
as
vyou
give
the
MOUNT
command,
and
to send a message to
your terminal when the request
has
been
processed.
Otherwise,
your
terminal waits for the message.

/OPERATOR

asks the operator to specify to the
system
the
volids of the tape set
you wish to mount.
Do not
wuse
if
you have given the /VOLIDS switch.

/PROTECTION:code

specifies
a
6-digit
cctal
protection
code for new volumes of
tape
written
during
the
current
mount

request.
has full access
the
first
two
interpreted
as

The
owner always
to
his
tapes,
so
digits
are always
"77";
also,
user

groups and directory groups have no
effect
on
tape
access,
so
the
middle
two
digits
are
always
interpreted
as
"0g@".
Therefore,
although
six
digits
can
be
specified, only the last two digits
affect the tape's protection code.

224

MOUNT (Cont.)

(If you specify
only
two
digits,
these
will be used as the last two
digits
of
the
protection
code.)
two digits should be the sum
These
the
of the values corresponding to
of access you want to allow,
modes
chosen from the following list:
490 - read files in the file set

19 - overwrite or
in

@4
For
only.

/READ-ONLY

the

- append
the

tapes

file

files to

file

modify

the end

set

1label-type

Default code -

files

set

TOPS-20

770000

the
1in
volumes
all
ensures that
be mounted without
will
set
tape
accidental
write rings, to prevent
erasures

or
/NEW
Default except when
/SCRATCH is specified

/REMARK:"remark"”

the
to
sends the specified remark
notified of
1is
he
when
operator
of
text
The
your mount request.
in
enclosed
be
must
remark
the
quotation marks (" ") and can be up
8@-character lines long
three,
to
(including the MOUNT command line).
while the entire remark
that
Note
operator's
the
on
displayed
is
1line
first
the
only
terminal,
the
in
appears
MOUNT-REQUESTS display.

INFORMATION

be
For structures, the remark will
only if the structure must be
sent
put on line or
physically
mounted
to satisfy your mount reduest.

/SCRATCH

the
that
except
/NEW,
as
same
in the file set you create
volumes
pool of
the
from
drawn
will be
tapes (tapes not presently
scratch
owned by a particular user), rather
Use
than from volumes you specify.
file
new
a
this switch to create
when you are not supplying the
set
volumes of tape to be used.

225

MOUNT (Cont.)

NUMBER

number

/START:VOLID volid

tells
the
system
which
volume
(reel)
of tape to mount first when
satisfying your request.
(You must
also
give
the
/VOLIDS
switch,
specifying the group of volumes you
will
be
using.)
Use
the
NUMBER
argument to give the order of
this
volume
within
the
group (e.g., 1
for first, 2 for second),
or
give
the
VOLID
argument
to repeat the
volid explicitly.
You can use this
switch
to
save
time
and expense
when you know which volume you will
be using first.
Default

/STRUCTURE-ID:structure
identification

/VOLIDS:volid,

/WRITE-ENABLED

volid,...

NUMBER

gives the name of the structure
as
recorded
in the disk(s); used when
you gave an
alias
different
from
the
structure
identification
as
argument
"dev:",
above,
See
Hints - Using
the
/STRUCTURE-ID
Switch,
below.
For
privileged
users only.
specifies
the
volids
(volume
identifiers) of the volumes (reels)
of tape you want to access.
These
must
be
consecutive
volumes,
usually of the tape
set
specified
as the "dev:" argument to the MOUNT
command.
Although
you
need
not
specify
every
volume
in the set,
any volume not specified
will
not
be
accessible.
Do
not
use this
switch
1f
vyou
have
given
the
/OPERATOR
switch,
See
also
Characteristics - Using the /VOLIDS
Switch, below.
ensures that
tape set will

rings

Default

226

all
volumes
in
the
be mounted with write
when /NEW or
is specified

/SCRATCH

MOUNT (Cont.)

Characteristics

Action of
If

MOUNT

the

STRUCTURE Command

Structure

Has

Already

Been

Mounted

If the structure for which you give the
MOUNT
command
is
currently mounted, the system simply increases by 1
the mount count, i.e., the number
of
users
who
have
given
the
MOUNT
but not the DISMOUNT command for the
structure, and returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command

level.
its
If

the

A structure

mount

count

Structure

Has

not ordinarily dismounted

until

Not

Yet

Been

Mounted

If the structure for which you give the
MOUNT
command
is
not
<currently
mounted,
your request stays in the
mount request queue until
it
1is
acted
upon
by
the
operator or until you cancel the request.
Setnames

(File

Set

Identifiers)

The setname, or file set identifier of a set
of
tapes,
1is
part
of
the
1label information written into each volume of
the set.
It is rewritten every time the
/NEW
or
/SCRATCH
switch
1is included in a MOUNT command.
The "dev:" argument
of the MOUNT command becomes the setname in this
case.
If
you add volumes to an existing tape set, the system uses the
setname of
Using

the

old

volumes

the /CHECK-SETNAME

the

setname of

the

new ones.

Switch

If you give the MOUNT command to use an
existing
file
set
(i.e.,
you
do
not
specify the /NEW or /SCRATCH
switch), you can glve the /CHECK-SETNAME switch
to
be
sure
that the setname written on the tapes matches the
setname you specify as the "dev:" argument to the MOUNT
command.
However,
because more than one set of tapes
can have the same setname,
the
/CHECK-SETNAME
switch
does
not
ensure
that
the
correct
tape set will be
mounted.
For
information
about
ensuring
that
the
correct
tapes are mounted, see Characteristics - Using
the

Volids

(Volume

/VOLIDS

Switch,

below.

Identifiers)

The volid, or
volume
identifier
of
a
volume
(reel)
of
labeled
tape, is part of the label information written into
each volume of tape.
It
is
written
only
once,
by
the
operator
during the tape's initialization procedure, and is
not changed during the life of the tape.
(You
should
also
affix
a
paper label displaying the volid onto each reel of
tape.) You can get a list of volids for previously specified
or
newly
written volumes in any mounted tape set by giving
the INFORMATION VOLUMES command for that set.

227

MOUNT (Cont.)

Using

the

/VOLIDS

Switch

If you give
the
MOUNT
command
to
use
an
existing
multi-volume
tape
set
(i.e.,
you do not specify the
/SCRATCH switch), you can give the volid of each volume
you

want

use

The system
ensures
labeled
tape
will

you use

the

argument

that
the
be mounted

/VOLIDS

switch

the

/VOLIDS

correct
for your

specify

switch.

volumes
of
job as long

them.

(If

a
as

the

tape
set does not consist of labeled tapes, the system
does not ensure that the correct
tapes
are
mounted.)
The
volids must represent consecutive volumes and must
be specified in the order written (oldest first).
Note
that
in
general
you
cannot
rely
on
any
apparent
alphanumerical order when
specifying
the
wvolids
but
must
maintain your own list of the volids in each tape
set.
(See Hints - Keeping Track of Volids, below.) You
need not specify every volid in the tape set,
but any
volume

not

current

specified

MOUNT

Using

the

Single-volume
Using

the
You

use

not

See

/OPERATOR

Switch,

Tape

below.

/OPERATOR
can

will

command.

Sets,

accessible
also

and

through

the

Characteristics

Special

Cases

Switch

the

/OPERATOR

switch

instead

the

/VOLIDS

switch
when
asking the system to mount a multi-volume
set of tapes.
The /OPERATOR switch sends a message
to
the
operator
asking
him to specify the volid of each
volume
himself.
You
must
be
sure
to
supply
the

operator
with
a
1list
specify before giving a
/OPERATOR switch.

of
the volids you want him to
MOUNT command that contains the

Hints

Checking

Whether

Operator

Present

You can give
out
whether
your
mount

the INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS command
to
find
the
operator is in attendance and can process
request.
Even
1if
the
operator
1is
not
in

attendance,

your

deals

with

request

some

way.

228

remains

valid

until

returns

and

MOUNT (Cont.)

Using

the /STRUCTURE-ID Switch

The /STRUCTURE-ID
switch
(available
only
to
wusers
with
enabled
Wheel
or
Operator capabilities) gives the name of
the structure as recorded in the disk(s)
of
the
structure
itself,
where
it is used by the system for identification.
Be sure that the structure identification
1is
also
written

with
a
felt-tip
marker
on the upper surface of each disk
pack, and on a gummed label on the pack cover.
Unless
you
give
this
switch, the system mounts the structure with its
structure identification as alias.
(The alias is
the
name
you use when specifying the structure in file specifications

and commands;
the
INFORMATION
STRUCTURE
and
INFORMATION
AVAILABLE
DEVICES
commands list structures by alias only.)
The /STRUCTURE-ID switch allows an enabled Wheel or Operator
to
mount
a
structure
under a name different from the one

recorded in the structure.
Use this switch for
mounting
a
structure
whose structure identification is the same as the
alias of a currently mounted structure.
In such cases
give
the
MOUNT
STRUCTURE
command
with any unique alias as the
"dev:" argument, and specify
the
structure
identification
with
the
/STRUCTURE-~ID
switch.
In
subsequent
file
specifications and commands referring to the structure,
use
the

alias

Dummy "dev:"

If you

runnings

only.

Arguments

want

for Mounting

use

Tapes

different

single program,

tape

sets

you can refer

successive
those

tape

sets as a logical name in the program, and use this
logical
name
as
the
"dev:"
argument
of
your MOUNT command when
mounting tapes.
As long as you also specify
the
wvolid
of
each
volume
of
tape
with
the /VOLIDS switch (or use the
/OPERATOR switch to ask the operator to do so), you need not
give
the
actual
setname
of
the
tape
set as the "dev:"
argument to the MOUNT command.
The
system
considers
the
"dev:"
argument
you supply to be a logical name defined as
the mounted tape set.
Therefore, your
the tape set using this logical name.

Keeping

Track of

program

can

access

Volids

Unless your site has a tape cataloging
facility,
you
must
keep
vyour
own
record
of
the volids in each of your tape
sets.
After creating a file set on a new tape set, i.e, one
not previously owned by you (by giving the MOUNT command and
including
the
/SCRATCH
switch),
you
should
give
the
INFORMATION
VOLUMES
command
for the set before giving the
DISMOUNT command.
The system will
respond
by
printing
a
list
at
your
terminal of the volids of all volumes in the
then
Similarly, if you mount an old tape set and
tape set.
INFORMATION
give
should
you
operations,
write
perform
VOLUMES before giving DISMOUNT to learn the
volids
of
any
Keep an ordered list of these
set.
the
to
added
volumes
volids in
a
disk
file
in
your
directory,
for
use . in
subsequent MOUNT commands when you give the /VOLIDS switch.

229

MOUNT (Cont.)

Special

Cases

Single-volume
If the
volume
switch
"dev:"

Structures

Tape

Sets

tape set you want
to
mount
consists
of
a
single
of
tape, you need not give the /VOLIDS or /OPERATOR
to specify its volid.
You can give the volid as
the
argument to the MOUNT command.

Unavailable

for

Mounting

If the operator has
given
the
OPR
program
command,
SET
STRUCTURE
UNAVAILABLE for a specified structure, the system
sends an error
message
including
the
phrase,
"Structure
unavailable
for
mounting"”
1iIn response to subsequent MOUNT
commands for the structure.

Restrictions

Using

SET
The
are

TAPE

Commands

TOPS-2@ SET
applicable

Warnings -

TAPE
to

DENSITY and SET
unlabeled
tapes

/DENSITY Switch

Has

TAPE
only

Limited

Tapes,
below).
The
SET
TAPE
RECORD-LENGTH commands are applicable

PARITY
(but

Effect

for

commands
see
also
Unlabeled
SET
TAPE

FORMAT
and
to
both
1labeled

and

unlabeled
tapes,
but
to
labeled
tapes
only if they are
mounted using the
/LABEL-TYPE:ANSI
or
/LABEL-TYPE:TOPS-20
switch.
In addition, the files that you read from or write
to such a labeled tape must be in 36-bit
format,
and
they
must
not
have
the
;;FORMAT
attribute
as
part
of their
specification.

Warnings

POP

Command

Cancels

Unsatisfied

Mount

Requests

If you have
TOPS-2@ and

given a PUSH command to obtain a
new
level
of
then give a MOUNT command within that new level,
a subsequent POP command will
cancel
your
mount
request.
However,
1if the specified structure or tape set has already
been mounted,
it
will
remain
mounted
despite
vyour
POP
command.

/DENSITY

Switch

Has

Limited

Effect

The /DENSITY switch, when
unlabeled
tape,
ensures

for

given
only

Unlabeled

in a MOUNT
that
your

Tapes
command
tape set

for
will

an
be

mounted on a drive that supports the specified density.
It
does not ensure that the tape set will be read or written at
this density.
To specify the
density
at
which
unlabeled
tapes

are

read

and

command.

230

written,

give

the

SET

TAPE

DENSITY

MOUNT (Cont.)

Effect

Terminal

The

MOUNT

TOPS-20

switch,

command with the /NOWAIT switch, leaves
vyour
terminal
command
level.
If
you have not given the /NOWAIT
your terminal waits until the system has
processed
your

request, or to return to
not cancel your request.

TOPS-200

command

level.

This

CTRL/C does

Commands

for withdrawing mount requests

CANCEL

before
DISMOUNT

they

for
giving
particular
drive

INFORMATION

AVAILABLE

DEVICES

for
of

are

processed.

wup
tape

finding out
structures

access

drive

disk

just the names
available
for

mounting
(these
are
after
DSK
and PS, and
the line printers (LPT,

listed
before
LPT@,

etc.))
INFORMATION

INFORMATION

for
finding
out
information
about
pending
mount requests
for structures and tape
sets,
and
about
currently
mounted

MOUNT-REQUESTS

STRUCTURE

tape

sets

for

finding

about

out

information

currently

mounted

structures

INFORMATION

for

VOLUMES

finding

out

the volids

all mounted volumes (including
newly created
volumes)
of
a
tape

SET

TAPE

set

for
establishing
defaults
for
tape
format,
parity,
and

commands

length.

231

job=-wide
density,
record

MOUNT (Cont.)

Examples

(it is already physically mounted).

Mount a structure

@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: mounted

Mount a structure that is not yet physically mounted.
After
CTRL/Cs to return to TOPS-20
give
command,
the
completing
command

level.

@MOUNT STRUCTURE

PYBL:

[Mount Request PYBL Queued, Request-ID 205]
[MOUNT request remaining in queue]

“C

Mount a

command

structure,
level

and

@MOUNT STRUCTURE

then give CTRL/Cs

cancel

the mount

PYBL:

return

request.

[Mount Request PYBL Queued, Request-ID 136]
[MOUNT request remaining in queue]

“C

@CANCEL MOUNT 136
[1

mount

request

canceled]

232

TOPS-20

MOUNT (Cont.)

Find out what structures are available
for
mounting
(these
are
listed
after
DSK and PS and before the line printers),
and mount one of these.
@INFORMATION

AVAILABLE

Devices

available

DSK,

LANG,

PS,

LPT1,

CDR,

PTY23-61,

TYM,

CDP,
NUL,

DEVICES

this

job:

MISC,

PCDP@,
PLT,

SNARK,

FE@,

PLT@,

REL4,

FE4-15,

DCN,

that

new tape

tapes,
and
copy
tape set, find out

set

LPT®

SRV

Devices assigned to/opened by this
@MOUNT STRUCTURE REL4: /NOWAIT
Structure REL4: mounted
Ask

LPT,

PTY7-10

job:

c¢reated

TTY220

for

you

from

scratch

some
files to it.
Before dismounting the
the volids of the tape
volumes
you
were

assigned.

@MOUNT TAPE LAT: /SCRATCH/LABEL~-TYPE:TOPS-20
[Mount Request LAT Queued, Request-ID 104
[Tape set LAT, volume LAT mounted]
[LAT: defined as MT3:]

LAT:

@COPY DN2@A-11,SYS
DN2@A-11A.SYS.1
DN2@A-11B.SY¥S.1l
DN2¢A-11C.SY¥S.1

=> MT3:DN2@A-11A.SYS.131871
=> MT3:DN2@#A~11B.S¥S.131871
=> MT3:DN20A-11C.SY¥S.131071

@INFORMATION VOLUMES LAT:
Volumes of tape set LAT: @1P02,00L16
@DISMOUNT TAPE LAT:

[Tape dismounted, logical

name

LAT:

[OK]
[OK]
[OK]

deleted]

Find out if any tape drives can be used
without
giving
the
MOUNT
command
(any
such
drives will be of the form MTAn).
Assign one of these and use the PLEASE
program
to
ask
the
operator
to
mount your (unlabeled) tape on this drive.
Set
the necessary tape parameters, position the tape, and copy
a
file
from
tape
to
the
1line
printer.
Then
give up the
resources you have been using.
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE

Devices
DSK,
CDR,

available

DEVICES

this

job:

PS, LANG, TYM, MISC, SNARK, REL4, MTAS5,
CDP, PCDP@, FE@, FE4-15, PTY23-61, NUL,

PLT@,

DCN,

LPT,
PLT

LPT@,

LPT1

SRV

Devices

assigned

@ASSIGN

MTAS:

to/opened

by this

job:

TTY220

@PLEASE

Enter text, terminate with CTRL/Z to
or ESCape to send message and exit

wait

PLEASE

READ-ONLY

MOUNT MY

TAPE

NAMED

UNLBLD

WHICH I HAVE ASSIGNED TO MY JOB.
THAT

SUPPORTS

TAPE

DENSITIES

for

response,
MODE

MTAS:,

MTAS5: IS A 7-TRACK DRIVE

8¢@

BPI,

CORRECT?

[PLSOPN Operator at GIDNEY has been notified at 14:34:26]

@SET TAPE

DENSITY 808

@SET TAPE RECORD-LENGTH 128

@REWIND MTAG:
@SKIP MTAS5: 4 FILES
@COPY

MTAS:

MTAS5:

LPT:

[OK]

@QUNLOAD MTAS:
@DEASSIGN

MTAS:

233

MOUNT (Cont.)

Perform the same task using the same volume of tape as in
previous
example
by using the MOUNT command.
Note that
still cannot specify a particular tape file by name when
tape is an unlabeled tape.
@MOUNT

TAPE

UNLBLD:

/LABEL-TYPE:UNLABELED/DENSITY:800/DR -

ITVE-TYPE: 7-TRACK

[Mount Request UNLBLD Queued, Request-ID
[Tape set UNLBLD, volume UNLBLD mounted]
[UNLBLD: defined as MT3:]
@QINFORMATION

Tape/Disk
Volume

There

MTA4

Tape
Request in

128]

MOUNT-REQUESTS/USER

Mount Queue:
Status
Type

UNLBLD

the
you
the

Write

Req

Locked
the Queue

Name

UNLBLD

Req#

Job#

User

128

LATTA

@QREWIND UNLBLD:
@SKIP UNLBLD: 4 FILES
@COPY UNLBLD: LPT:
MT3:..4

LPT:

@DISMOUNT TAPE

[OK]

UNLBLD:

[Tape dismounted, loglcal

Mount

labeled

tape

name UNLBLD:

containing

the

deleted]

same

files

1in

the

previous
two examples, and perform the same task.
Note that
you need not specify tape parameters in this
MOUNT
command,
as this information is present in the tape labels and is read
automatically.
Also, the system
ensures
that
the
correct
volume

file

tape

by name

when

1is

used.

using

Finally,

labeled

you

can

specify

the

tape

tapes.

@MOUNT

TAPE LBLD: /LABEL-TYPE:ANSI/VOLIDS:@@115
[Mount Request LBLD Queued, Request-ID 133]
[Tape set LBLD, volume @0115 mounted]
[LBLD: defined as MT3:]
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS/USER

Tape/Disk
Volume

Mount Queue:
Status
Type

g9115

There

MTAQ

Tape

Request

QREWIND LBLD:
@COPY LBLD:COMPR.BRN
MT3:COMPR.BRN.13187

@DISMOUNT TAPE
[Tape

the

Write

Req

Name

Locked

LBLD

Req#

Job#

133

Queue

LPT:
=>

LPT:COMPR

[OK]

LBLD:

dismounted,

logical

name

234

LBLD:

deleted]

User
LATTA

MOUNT (Cont.)

Mount

two-volume

simplify
with new

volume
files.

INFORMATION

and

device

have

been

@MOUNT

set

(using

the

commands

you

proceed,

assignments

and

determine

LAT:

@INFORMATION

Tape/Disk

Mount
Status

verify

whether

logical

new

Type

DSK,

PS,

LPT,

LANG,

LPT@O,

LPT1,

NUL,

PLT,

SNARK,

PLT@,

DCN,

assigned

@INFORMATION

Write

Req

NTWORK,

CDP,

Req#

Job#

LAT

REL4,

PCDPQ,

Name

MISC,

PACKAG,

FE@,

FE2-15,

job:

MT@,

LAT:

MT@:

DSK:,SY¥YS:

MTAS

PTY13-61

SRV

to/opened

this

TTY217

LAT:

PS:<HELP>ACCT20.HLP.1l

MT@:ACCT20.HLP.131871

[OK]

PS: <HELP>ACCTPR.HLP.1

MT@:ACCTPR.HLP.131871

([OK]

PS: <HELP>WAIT.HLP.2
PS: <HELP>WATCH.HLP.6

Tape/Disk

DBL@2
There

MTO:WAIT.HLP.131871

MOUNT-REQUESTS

MTA3
1 Request

[OK]

/USER

Write

Tape
Enabled
in the Queue

VOLUMES

[OK]

MT@:WATCH.HLP,.131071

Mount Queue:
Status
Type

@INFORMATION

LATTA

/ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET

HLP:.HLP

@INFORMATION

User

LOGICAL-NAMES JOB

SY¥S:

LAT:

19]

Queue:

mTQ,

Volume

name

volumes

/USER

DBLO1
MTA1l
Tape
Enabled
There is 1 Request in the Queue
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
Devices available to this job:

@COPY

/WRITE-ENABLED/NOUNLOAD/NOWAIT/VOL-

MOUNT-REQUESTS

Volume

@GREWIND

switch

existing files
Give
wvarious

DBL@2

[Mount Request LAT Queued, Request-ID
[Tape set LAT, volume DBL@l mounted]
[LAT: defined as MT@:]

Devices

NOUNLOAD

written.

TAPE

IDS:DBL@1,

tape

<changes)
and
overwrite any
Then rewind
the
tape
set.

Req

Name

LAT

Req#

Job#

Req#

Job#

User
LATTA

LAT:

Volumes of tape set LAT: DBL@1,DBL@2
@REWIND LAT: /ENTIRE-VOLUME~SET
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS /USER

Tape/Disk
Volume
DBL@1

There

Mount Queue:
Status
Type
MTAl

Tape

Request

the

Write

Req

Enabled

LAT

Queue

235

Name

User
LATTA

MOUNT (Cont.)

10.

(For privileged users only.)
Enable
your
capabilities
and
then give the PUSH command to OPR.
program,
OPR
the
call
allows
but
1level,
(This action puts you at TOPS-2@ command
OPR messages caused by your TOPS-20
the
see
to
also
you
previous
the
operations of
write
the
Repeat
commands.)
tape set and exit from the OPR
the
then dismount
example,
in
the /NOUNLOAD switch
Notice that, because of
program.
your

original

command, both volumes of your

MOUNT

remain mounted on their drives.

tape set

Therefore, you can mount the

tapes again without operator assistance.
@ENABLE

$SOPR
OPR>PUSH
TOPS-28 Command processor 6(7)
QREWIND LAT: /ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET
@COPY HLP:. LAT:

PS:<HELP>ACCT20.HLP.1 => MT@:ACCT2¢.HLP.131871
PS: <HELP>ACCTPR.HLP.1 => MT@:ACCTPR,HLP.131071

[OK]
[OK]

PS: <HELP>CHKPNT.HLP.1l => MT@:CHKPNT,HLP.131071
15:11:55
-~Tape Drive Released By User-MTAl: Volume DBL@l Remaining mounted
15:11:57

on drive

--MTA3: Given to Request 19-Volume DBL@2 now in use by
User LATTA, Job 7, Terminal 217

[OK]
PS: <HELP>COBDDT.HLP.6 => MT@:COBDDT.HLP.131071

[OK]

PS: <HELP>WAIT.HLP.2 => MT@:WAIT.HLP.131871 [OK]
PS: <HELP>WATCH.HLP.6 => MT@:WATCH.HLP,131071 [OK]

@INFORMATION VOLUMES LAT:
Volumes of tape set LAT: DBL@1,DBL@2
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS /USER
Tape/Disk

Volume
DBL@2
There

@REWIND

15:14:51

Mount

Status

Queue:

Type

Write

MTA3
Tape
Enabled
1 Request in the Queue
LAT:

Req Name
LAT

Reqg#

Job#

User
LATTA

/ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET

~-Tape Drive Released By User-MTA3: Volume DBL@#2 Remaining mounted on drive

--MTAl:

Volume

User

Given
To Request

DBL@l

LATTA,

236

now

Job 7,

use by

19--

Terminal

217

MOUNT (Cont.)

@QISMOUNT TAPE LAT:
[Tape dismounted, logical

name LAT: deleted]
--Tape Drive Released By User-MTAl: Volume DBL@1l Remaining mounted

15:15:21

drive

QPOP
OPR>EXIT

SDISABLE
1ll.

Mount the same
the
operator
to help you.
@MOUNT
[Mount

tape set as in the previous
to specify the volids.
Use

TAPE LAT: /WRITE-ENABLED/NOUNLOAD/NOWAIT/OPERATOR
Request LAT Queued, Request-~ID 197]

@PLEASE

Enter text, terminate with CTRL/Z to
or ESCape to send message and exit
PLEASE

ENTER

REQUEST 197.

THE

LIBRARY

CATALOG.

Operator

@INFORMATION
Tape/Disk
Volume
DBLA1

VOLIDS

TAPE

wait

SET

for

LAT:

THEY ARE RECORDED IN YOUR TAPE

|PLSOPN

There

examples, but
ask
the PLEASE program

response,

FOR

THANKS.

GIDNEY has

MOUNT-REQUESTS

Mount Queue:
Status
Type
Waiting

Tape

Request

been

Write
Enabled

the

Queue

237

notified

14:34:26]}

Req#

Job#

197

/USER

Req Name
LAT

User
LATTA

PERUSE

Allows

you

read

file

using

read-only

editor

commands.

Format

@PERUSE

(FILE)

/switch(es)

filespec

where

/switch(es)

are keywords which apply to the
descriptions of these switches,
EDIT commands in this manual.

filespec

the

name

Default

the

file

you want

the
1last
associated
CREATE,

during

EDIT editor.
For
see the /CREATE or

read

file
specification
switches
you gave

EDIT,

the

current

and
in a

PERUSE

command

terminal

session

Characteristics

The

PERUSE

command

runs

the

EDIT

system

program

read-only

mode.
(However,
see Special Cases - Using an Editor Other than
EDIT, below.) PERUSE is actually the same as the
EDIT
/READONLY
command.
In
EDIT
/READONLY mode you can use only EDIT program
switches and commands that do not modify the file.

Hints

Avoid

Accidental

File

Modification

Use PERUSE when
it
1is
accidentally modifying a

PERUSE

Line

important
file.

avoid

the

risk

SWITCH. INI

Add a line to your SWITCH.INI
command.
(See Example 3.)

Special

file

for

use

with

the

PERUSE

Cases

Using

Editor

Other

than

EDIT

The

CREATE, EDIT and PERUSE commands in this
manual
assume
that
these
commands call on the program EDIT.
If your job
uses another editing program, for example, EDT, the switches
and examples shown here will not be applicable.

238

PERUSE (Cont.)

The

Editor

used

by the

CREATE,

EDIT and

PERUSE

commands

specified by the logical name EDITOR:.
You can find out the
name of this program
by
giving
the
command,
INFORMATION
LOGICAL-NAMES
EDITOR:.
The
job-wide
definition (if any)
will be given first, followed by the system-wide definition;
the
job-wide
definition
prevails
1f
both exist.
If the
definition of EDITOR:
1is SYS:EDIT.EXE, the CREATE, EDIT and
PERUSE
commands
will function as described in this manual.
Otherwise, you must
consult
the
appropriate
manual
(for
example, the EDT20 Reference Manual) for information.

Restrictions

Listing

Available

EDIT

Read-Only

Switches

and

Commands

Many of the EDIT switches and commands that are displayed in
response
to
a
?
modify the file and do not function with
PERUSE.
If you give a file-modifying switch, the switch
is
ignored
but
no
error message is displayed.
If you give a
file-modifying
EDIT
command,
you
receive
the
message
$ILLEGAL

Effect

The

For

further

the

EDIT

information on

Reference

these

switches

and

commands

see

unkept

forks

from

memory,

then

existing

files

Manual.

Memory

PERUSE

loads

COMMAND.

your

command

edit

clears

any

program.

Commands

CREATE

for

creating

new

files

for

getting

lists

EDIT

for

modifying

TYPE

for

printing

DIRECTORY-class

commands

239

files
files

your

terminal

PERUSE (Cont.)

Examples

PERUSE

@PERUSE
Read:
*p

file

FILEX,.FOR

FILEX.FOR.1

§0l10@4

ITHIS

PERUSE

file,

FILEX.FOR

ten

@PERUSE /PLINES:1¢
FIND.BAS

lines

time,

and

begin

line

1¢0.

FIND.BAS

Read:

*p 100

00100
00200

60300
00400
20500

po600
po700
po80Y
28900
01000

!
FOR

ADD ROUTINE
@ TO 44090

IF X$(X) = "XXX" THEN GOTO
NEXT X
PRINT STRINGS$ (10,10);"FILE
PRINT E$ \LINPUT"ENTER THE
IF M$ <> "" THEN LET X$(X)
PRINT E$ \LINPUT"ENTER THE

2050
FULL"\SLEEP

4\GOTO

NAME ";M$
= M$ ELSE GOTO
NUMBER ";0$
IF 0$ <> "" THEN LET Y$(X) = 0% ELSE GOTO
PRINT E$\INPUT"MORE NAMES TO ENTER ";D$

240

199

PLOT

Places

requests

plotter

output

queue.

Format

@PLOT

(FILES)

/ switch(es)

filespec/switch(es),
...

where

are
keywords,
chosen
from
the
list
below,
indicating
your
choice
of PLOT command options.
These switches are of two kinds:
job switches and
file switches.

switches

Job switches apply to all files specified
in
the
command, ho matter where you give the switches.
File switches have different effects depending
on
their
positions
in
the
command
1line:
placed
before all files
in
the
command,
they
act
as
defaults
for
all; otherwise they affect only the
nearest preceding file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches

is the specification of a file you wish
You
can
use
wildcard
characters
(%
specify more than one file.,

filespec

means that,

arguments of

Summary of

PLO T

Command

after
the

form

Switches

comma,

(defaults

Job

you

already shown

can

to
and

plot.
*) to

give

in boldface)

Switches

(affecting
the entire command)
/ACCOUNT:accoun t

Default

account - your

current

account

/AFTER:date and /or time
/DESTINATION-NO DE:node name
/FORMS:forms na me
/GENERIC
/JOBNAME: 6-char acter name

Default

/LIMIT:n

Default

calculated
of files

Default

/NOTE:l2-charac ter

forms

Default name - first

six

characters of first
filename in request

message

YES

/NOTIFY:NO
/PRIORITY:n

name - NORMAL

/SEQUENCE:n
/UNIT:octal num ber
/USER:user name

241

from

length

PLOT (Cont.)

File Switches
(affecting only the nearest preceding file,
unless placed before all filespecs)

/COPIES:n
/DELETE
/HEADER

Default
Default

n for

1
files

type

.LST

ASCII

/MODE :BINARY
IMAGE

/NOHEADER
/PRESERVE

Default

PLOT

Command

for

all

files

type

.LST

those

Switches

Job Switches
(affecting the entire

/ACCOUNT:account

except

command)

specifies
the
account
of
39
or
fewer characters to charge for your
plotting
request.
This
account
must be valid for your user name.
Default account - your current
account,

Check with
INFORMATION

JOB~-STATUS.

/AFTER:date

and/or

day of

week

and/or

time

time,
(or

TODAY)

ensures
that
the job
will not be
plotted
until
after
the
date
and/or
time
specified.
NOV-12-79
and
18:00 illustrate two arguments
to
this
switch.
If you give both
date and time, separate them with a
space.
When given alone, the time
may be preceded by a plus sign (+),

which

will delay processing

indicated

length of

time

by the

from

the

present,

Alternatively, you can give
a
day
of the week (e.g., MONDAY) or TODAY
as argument; then the job will
not
be
plotted
until the beginning of
the following day.
If
you
follow
this
argument with a plus sign and
a time, the
job
will
be
further
delayed by this amount.

/DESTINATION-=-NODE :node-name

specifies the remote node on
whose
plotter
your
request
1is
to
be
satisfied.
Two
colons
(::)
following
the
node
name
are
optional.
242

PLOT (Cont.)

/FORMS: forms

name

specifies,
in
six
or
fewer
characters,
the forms (determining
the size
of
banner,
header,
and
trailer
sections; the paper color,
width, and weight;
the
number
of
plotter steps per inch, location of
the origin for plotted data,
etc.)
to use for the plotting job.
Using

this switch
may
delay
processing
until
the
operator
can mount the
proper
forms.
Note
that
your
installation
may
provide
a
different default argument to
this
switch.
Default

forms

name

NORMAL

/GENERIC

allows any plotter to be
wused
for
filling
the
request;
use
this
switch to override a previous /UNIT
switch.
Default

/JOBNAME :name

assigns a name
(of
six
or
fewer
characters) to the plotting job
Default name - first
six
characters
of
first filename
in

the

request

/LIMIT:n

places a
1limit
of
n
minutes
of
plotter
time
on the output of the
plotting job
Default limits,
usually
adequate, are computed
from
the
size of the
files you want plotted

/NOTE :message

labels
the
header
section
of
output,
i.e.,
the
section
displaying
the
Jjobname,
with
a
message
or
notation
of
up to 12
characters.
The
message
Must
be
enclosed
in double quotation marks
if
it
contains
spaces
or
non-alphanumeric characters.

YES
/NOTIFY:NO

tells the system whether to send
a
message
to
your terminal when the
request has been satisfied

243

Default

argument

Default

argument (if switch
given) - YES

- NO

PLOT (Cont.)

/PRIORITY:n

assigns a number n, reflecting
the
urgency
of the plot request.
This
n must be from 1 to 63, with larger
numbers
receiving
earlier
treatment.
Note
that
for
non-privileged
users
the
maximum
priority that can be
specified
is
lower
(usually
20), and that your
installation
may
provide
a
different
value
both
for
this
max imum
and
for
the
default
priority.
Default n - 10

/SEQUENCE:n

specifies sequence number n for
printing request, which you can
when
modifying
or
canceling

the
use
the

request

/UNIT:octal

/USER:user

directs your request to the
of the specified octal unit

number

plotter
number

specifies the user who is to be
owner
of
the
plot
request.
privileged users only.

name

File

(affecting only the
unless placed before

the
For

Switches

nearest preceding file,
all file specifications)

/BEGIN:n

starts the plotting
the file
Default n - @

/COPIES:n

requests that n copies of the
file
be
plotted; n must be less than or
equal

to 62.
Default

page

/DELETE

deletes the file after plotting
Default for files of type .LST

/HEADER

causes a header section
containing
the
jobname
to be produced before
the file itself is plotted
Default

ASCII

/MODE
: BINARY
IMAGE

designates the
mode
for
©plotting
the file.
ASCII treats
each
word
of
a
disk
file as five seven-bit
bytes, and truncates each
byte
to
six
bits
before
plotting
it.
BINARY

treats

each

word

six

six-bit
bytes,
each
of
which is
plotted
without
modification.
IMAGE is the same as BINARY.

244

PLOT (Cont.)

/NOHEADER

prevents the production of
section before the file

/PRESERVE

saves

the file after
Default for all
those

header

plotting
files
except
type

.LST

Output

Jobname,

Request

ID,

Limit,

Number

Input

Files

soon as you complete a valid
PLOT
command,
the
system
responds by printing, on your terminal, the jobname, request
ID number, the limit
in minutes of plotter time assigned
to
the request, and the number of input files in the request.

Characteristics

Ordinary

Operation - No

For most
series

Switch

purposes

Defaults

Switches

you can use

filespecs

Set by

the

for

arguments.

System

Manager

PLOT command with

Jjust

The defaults shown in the list of switches are
correct
for
most
wuser
sites.
However, your system manager can change
some of those default settings.
The switches most
commonly
affected
are:
/FORMS,
/HEADER and /NOHEADER, /LIMIT, and
/PRIORITY.

Hints

Using

SET

DEFAULT

PLOT

If there are switches that you always or usually supply when
using
PLOT,
give the SET DEFAULT PLOT command to establish
them as defaults (at the current TOPS-20 command level)
for
the
remainder
of your terminal session.
The switches will
then behave as if you had
typed
them
directly
after
the
command
hame.
You
can
supersede
any
of
these default
switches by actually
supplying
the
switch,
with
another
value, when you give the PLOT command.
Put SET DEFAULT PLOT
into a file
of
specification
COMAND.CMD
in
your
1log-in
directory if you want these default switches to be in effect
for all levels of future terminal sessions as well.

245

PLOT (Cont.)

Special

Cases

/SPOOLED-OUTPUT

Switch

You can give the special switch,
/SPOOLED-OUTPUT,
as
sole
argument
to
the
PLOT
command.
This
causes any spooled
output accumulated so far during your terminal session to be
placed
in
a
plotter
queue
iIimmediately,
rather
than at
log-out time.
The /SPOOLED-OUTPUT switch is useful only
|{f
the
SET
SPOOLED-OUTPUT
DEFERRED
command
1is
1in
effect.
Programs that you
run
(especially
FORTRAN
programs)
may
create

spooled

output

directly by giving

the

for

the

plotter,

command,

COPY

you

can

create

PLT:.

Commands

CANCEL

INFORMATION

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

for

withdrawing

for

examining

output

MODIFY

SET

filespec

for

DEFAULT

PLOT

requests

the

queues

changing

PLOT

before

processing

for

establishing

switches
commands.

for

has

requests

begun
default

subsequent

PLOT

Examples

Plot

file,

@PLOT CNTR.MED
[Plotter job CNTR queued,

request-ID

91,

limit

Send all files having a four-character file
type
ending
"CTH"
to
the plotter.
Assign a jobname to the request,
ensure they are not plotted until tomorrow.
Check
for
request in the output queues, and then cancel it.
@PLOT :;CTH /JOBNAME
: HATCH/AFTER: TODAY

[Job HATCH Queued, Request-ID
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS
Plotter Queue:
Name
Req#

Job

CNTR

HATCH
There are
Q@CANCEL

Job

Limit

Files]

User

94
jobs

3
ASHLEY
the queue

94,

LAUDERDALE

PLOT gi

canceled]

246

/After:21-Jul-79 00:00
(none in progress)

in
and

the

POP

1level

Terminates the current

TOPS-24

and

returns

you

its

process.

superior

Format

@POP

(COMMAND LEVEL)

Characterlistics

POP the

Opposite of

PUSH

You can do one and only one POP command for

every

too many POP commands will cause an
Giving
PUSH command.
error message to be printed on your terminal.

Job Parameters Affected by POP

As soon as you complete a valid POP command at
TOPS-208, you give up the copy of memory for
TOPS-2@ and any program Yyou were running.
(e.g., default
established at that level
LOAD-class and EDIT-class commands, defaults

some level of
that level of
Any defaults
filespecs for
specified by

If POP returns
SET DEFAULT commands) are cancelled as well.
these parameters
all
you to a higher 1level of TOPS-20¢,
revert to any values established at that higher level.

Special

Cases

Returning to Other Programs With POP

The POP command usually returns you to the level of

TOPS-20

But a
from which you gave a previous PUSH command.
system programs, e.g., PTYCON and OPR, also allow you

give

PUSH

command to

this

get

a new level of TOPS-28.

1level

TOPS-2f#

returns

Giving the
you

few
to

POP

that

program,.

Effect on Memory and Terminal

The POP command clears memory, terminates the current level of
TOPS-28, and returns Yyour terminal to the previous TOPS-24
Memory for the
command level (but see Special Cases, above).
previous TOPS-2¢ command level is not affected by this action.
Related

Commands

CONTINUE

for resuming execution of a program in memory

PUSH

for obtaining a new level of TOPS-20

247

POP (Cont.)

Examples

Give

the

TOPS-20

POP command
command

return

processor

higher

1level

the

CONTINUE

STAY

(EXEC),

ePOP
Run

program

command

and

halt

resume

its

with

CTRL/Cs.

execution,

and

Give
then

a
the

PUSH

command

for a new level of TOPS-24.
Run
another
program
at
lower
1level, then use the POP command to return to the
level; in this case you return
before
receiving
the

message

the

first

program.

DMN

@RUN
“C

@CONTINUE /STAY
@PUSH

TOPS~-2f

Command

@RUN TESTF1
THIS

CPU

time:

EXIT

processor

6.1(7)

TEST.

0.03

Elapsed

time:

ePoP

EXIT

248

9:72

this
first
final

Places requests in a line printer output queue,
Format

@PRINT (FILES) /switch(es)

filespec/switch(es),...

where

switches

are keywords, chosen from the list below, indicating
These
of PRINT command options.
choice
your
file
job switches and
switches are of two kinds:
switches.

in
files specified
Job switches apply to all
command, no matter where you give the switches.

the

File switches have different effects depending on
placed before
positions in the command file:
their
for
all files in the command, they act as defaults
nearest
the
affect only
they
otherwise
all;
preceding

file.

Defaults are shown in the list of switches

filespec

is the specification of a file you wish to print.
You can use wildcard characters (% and *) to specify
file.

more than one
[

means

after

that,

Yyou

comma,

arguments of the form already shown

can

give

summary of PRINT Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
Job

(affecting

Switches

the entire command)

/ACCOUNT:account
/AFTER:date and/or time
/DESTINATION-NODE:node name

Default account - your

current

account

/FORMS: forms name

Default forms name - NORMAL

/JOBNAME: 6~character name

Default name - first

/LIMIT:n

Default n - calculated from length

/GENERIC

/LOWERCASE

/NOTE: 1l2-character message
YES
/NOTIFY:NO
/PRIORITY:n
/SEQUENCE:n

/UNIT:octal
/UPPERCASE
/USER:user

six

characters of first
filename in request

Default n - 148
number
name
249

files

PRINT (Cont.)

(affecting
unless

File Switches
only the nearest preceding file,
placed before all filespecs)

/BEGIN:n
/COPIES:n
/DELETE

Default
Default
Default

n n for

Default

for

¢
1
files

type

.LST

ASCII

COBOL

/FILE:ELEVEN
FORTRAN

files

type

.DAT

except

those

specifies the account of 39 or
characters
to
charge
for
printing request.
This account
be valid for your user name.

fewer
your
must

only

/HEADER
ARROW

ASCII

/MODE: OCTAL
SUPPRESS

/NOHEADER
/PRESERVE

Default

/REPORT:12-character

for all
of type

files
.LST

title

SINGLE

/SPACING:DOUBLE
TRIPLE
PRINT

Command

Switches

Job Switches
(affecting the entire

/ACCOUNT:account

command)

Default

account

your
account

current
(check

with
INFORMATION

JOB-STATUS)

/AFTER:date

and/or

time,

day
of
week
and/or time

(or

TODAY)
ensures that
the
Jjob
will
not
be
printed
until
after the date and/or
time specified.
NOV-12-79 and
18:00
illustrate
two
arguments
to
this
switch.
1If you give
both
date
and
time,
separate
them
with
a space.
When given
preceded

will

alone,
by

the
plus

time
sign

delay
processing
indicated
1length
of
time

present.

250

may

(+),

which

from

the
the

PRINT (Cont.)

Alternatively, you can give a day of
(such as, MONDAY) or TODAY
week
the
as argument; then the job will not be
the beginning of the
until
printed
follow this
you
If
following day.
argument with a plus sign and a time,
by
delayed
further
the job will be
this

/DESTINATION~NODE:node-name

amount.

station on
specifies the IBM remote
whose line printer your request is to
(2:2)
colons
Two
printed.
be
following the node name are optional.
either
to
switch
this
You can use
or
node
remote
a
to
output
send
redirect it from a remote node.

/FORMS:forms

name

fewer
or
six
in
specifies,
(determining
forms
the
characters,
and
header,
of banner,
the number
color,
paper
the
pages;
trailer
format,
vertical
width, and weight;
tape, etc.) to use
control
carriage

this
Using
for the printing Jjob.
switch may delay processing until the
forms.
operator can mount the proper

installation may
your
that
Note
argument
provide a different default
to

/GENERIC

this switch.
Default forms name - NORMAL

or
upper
allows any printer, either
lowercase, and of any unit number, to
request.
the
be used for satisfying
a
override
to
switch
this
Use
or
/LOWERCASE,
previous /UPPERCASE,

/UNIT switch.
Default
: name
/JOBNAME

fewer
or
six
(of
name
a
assigns
characters) to the printing job
six
Default name - first

of
characters
first filename in
the

JLIMIT:n

request

pages
of n
places a limit
output of the printing job
Default limits,

the

usually
computed
are
adequate,
the
of
size
the
from
files you want printed

/LOWERCASE

a
to
directs the job
both
print
can
that
lowercase characters

251

printer
1line
uppercase and

PRINT (Cont.)

/NOTE :message

labels

the
header
page
of
output,
i.e.,
the
page
displaying
the
jobname, with a message
or
notation
of
up to 12 characters.
The message
must be enclosed in double
quotation

YES
/NOTIFY:NO

marks
if
it
non—-alphanumeric

contains
spaces
characters.

tells

whether

the

message

system
to

your

terminal

send

when

the

switch

1is

request has been satisfied
Default argument - NO
Default

argument

given)
/PRIORITY:n

assigns

number

urgency

the

must

from

numbers
Note

n,
to

receiving

that

reflecting

for

(if

- YES

request.

63,

n
larger

with

earlier

the

This

treatment.

non-privileged

users

the
maximum
priority
that
can
be
specified is lower (usually 2#),
and
that
your installation may provide a
different value both for this maximum
and for the default priority.
The
by
“has

/SEQUENCE:n

system acknowledges
this
switch
displaying
the message [Priority
been modified]
Default n - 1¢

specifies sequence number n
for
printing
request,
which you can
when
modifying
or
canceling

the
use
the

request

/UNIT:octal

number

directs
printer

your
request
to
of
the specified

number
/UPPERCASE

directs
that

/USER:user

name

the

uses

specifies
owner

privileged

252

job

only

the

1line

uppercase

user

the

users

who

only.

the
octal

1line
unit

printer

characters

request.

the
For

PRINT (Cont.)

File

Switches

(affecting only the nearest preceding file,
unless placed before all file specifications)
/BEGIN:n

/COPIES:n

file

ASCII

COBOL

/FILE:ELEVEN
FORTRAN

Default n -

requests that n copies of the file be
printed; n must be less than or equal
to

/DELETE

62.

Default n -

deletes the

file after printing

specifies

that the file consists

(ELEVEN)
in
bytes

four
contains
36-bit
each

Default

ASCII text,

for

files of type

or COBOL SIXBIT

.LST

text;

eight-bit
word - for

tape punch only; or
paper
emulating
is FORTRAN ASCII text, where column 1
as a
interpreted
1is
1line
each
of
carriage control

character.

Default - ASCII

files

for

(except

type

for which the

/HEADER

the

starts the printing at page n of

.DAT,

default

FORTRAN)

the
containing
pages
causes header
jobname to be printed before the file
itself
Default

ARROW
ASCII

: OCTAL
/MODE
SUPPRESS

for printing the
designates the mode
file
the
prints
ARROW
file.
each control
but denotes
literally;
the
character by an up-arrow (") and
except for the following,
character,
(that
which are reproduced literally
is,

the

control

normal
their
1line
return,

characters perform

carriage
actions):
horizontal tab,
feed,

vertical tab, form feed, "P, “Q,

"R,

ASCII prints the file
°“T.
and
“s,
or
omissions
without
literally,
except for the escape
substitutions,
represented
1is
character ("[) which
as a dollar

253

sign.,

PRINT (Cont.)

OCTAL

prints

unsigned
128 words

each

word

the

file

octal integers; 3 groups of
(8 rows of 16 columns each)

appear

page.

SUPPRESS

standard

1line

prints

printer

the

without
vertical
CTRL/L,
CTRL/T)

file

any blank lines, causing all
format
characters
(CTRL/K,
CTRL/Q,
CTRL/R, CTRL/S, and
to
be
converted
to
CRLFs
(carriage return/linefeeds), and then

interpreting multiple occurrences

CRLFs

/NOHEADER

single CRLF.
Default - ARROW

prevents

before
/PRESERVE

saves

the

printing

header

the file after printing
Default for
all
files

scans

Yyour

those

1lines

are

type

and

whose

title
contain

(including

files

the

may

you

give.

the

SINGLE
/SPACING:DOUBLE

COBOL

quotation

determines

TRIPLE

the

report

title
characters

marks
it

that

contains

wused

along

writer.

spacing

between

lines

the

system

jobname,

request

printout

Default

only

characters
This

enclose the title if
spaces).
The switch
1s

the

except

.LST

prints

first

must

with

pages

file

those
/REPORT:title

SINGLE

Output

Jobname,
As

Request
soon

responds
ID

you

number,

request,

Limit,

1D,

complete

printing,
the

and

Number of

limit

the

on
in

number

valid
your

pages
of

Files
PRINT

terminal,
of

files

command,
the

output
in

the

assigned

the

request,

Characteristics

Ordinary
For

Operation most

series

purposes

Switches
you

filespecs

can

for

use

the

arguments.

254

command

with

just

PRINT (Cont.)

Defaults

Switch

System Manager

Set by

The defaults shown in the list of switches are

most

However,

sites.

wuser

some of those default settings.
are:

affected

/FORMS,

correct

for.

your system manager can change

The switches most

/HEADER and /NOHEADER,

commonly

/LIMIT,

and

/PRIORITY,

Hints

Using

SET

DEFAULT

If there are switches that you always or usually supply when
using PRINT, give the SET DEFAULT PRINT command to establish
for
them as defaults (at the current TOPS-20 command level)
The switches will
the remainder of your terminal session.

the
after
directly
them
typed
these default
of
any
supersede
another
with
switch,
the
supplying
switches by actually
Put SET DEFAULT
the PRINT command.
give
you
when
value,
then behave as

if you had
You

name.

command

PRINT into a file of specification COMAND.CMD in your log-in
directory if you want these default switches to be in effect
for all levels of future terminal sessions as well.
Special

Cases

/SPOOLED~-OUTPUT Switch

/SPOOLED-OUTPUT,

You can give the special switch,
argument

the

command.

This causes

sole

any spooled

output accumulated so far during your terminal session to be
a line printer queue immediately, rather than at
in
placed
The /SPOOLED-OUTPUT switch is useful only Iif
log-out time.
effect.
in
1is
DEFERRED command
SET SPOOLED-OUTPUT
the

may
programs)
FORTRAN
(especially
run
Programs that you
spooled output for the printer, or you can create it
create
the
giving
by
(e.g.,
directly by writing to device LPT:
command.
CREF
a
giving
or
LPT:),
filespec
command, COPY

Commands

for withdrawing

CANCEL

INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS

DEFAULT

examining

requests

the

queues

requests
PRINT
changing
for
before processing has begun

MODIFY

SET

for

output

for establishing default switches
for subsequent PRINT commands

PRINT (Cont.)

Examples

two

your

files.

@PRINT 4-UPED. TXT, CMPTN, TXT
[Printer job 4-UPED queued, request

302,

Print three files, assigning a jobname and
header
page; postpone the printing.
Make
the files, and double-space another one.

limit
a

‘
200,

note
copies

2 files])
for
the
of one of

@PRINT /JOBNAME :COMFIL/NOTE:CONFIDENTIAL/AFTER:12-DEC-85

FOO

.CTL,

[Printer

HOLMAX.CTL/COPIEG:4,

job

@INFORMATION

COMFIL

Printer Queue:
Job Name
Reqgf#
COMFIL

There

queued,

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

first

file,

and

@PRINT /JOBNAME RUSH

@INFORMATION

by
assigning
a
first five pages.
of the second.

Printer Queue:
Name
Reg#

Started
COMFIL

15:00:11,

306

are

jobs

files]

0:00

high
priority
and
Print 10 copies of

the

#312,

limit

27,

files]

User
LATTA
printed
LATTA

/Note:CONFIDENTIAL
There

/USER/ALL

Limit

312
/Seq:1870

27,

/PRIORITY: 60 /NOHEADER/BEGIN:5/COPIES:]1

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

Job

RUSH

limit

User

@ RFM,. CTL, HOLMAX.CTL/COPIES: 18
[Printer job RUSH queued, request
[Priority has been modified]

#3006,

/USER/ALL

Limlt

Print a job in a hurry,
skipping the header and
the

request

306
27
LATTA
/After:12-Dec-85
/Note :CONFIDENTIAL
/Seq:1865
1 job in the queue (none in progress)

INSIDE.RNO/SPACING:DOUBLE
—

Unit: fl

/Prio 20
pages

/After:12-Dec-79

/Seq:1865
queue (1 in progress)

256

@:00

PUNCH

Places requests in a card punch or paper tape punch output queue.
Format

@PUNCH (ONTO) medium (FILES) /switch(es) filespec/switch(es) ,ee.
where

is the name of the medium on which you
It can be either
punch your file(s).

medium

want

CARDS
or

PAPER-TAPE

below,
list
the
are keywords, chosen from
indicating your choice of PUNCH command options.
These switches are of two kinds: Jjob switches and

switches

file

switches.

Job switches apply to all files specified in the
command, no matter where you give the switches.
File switches have different effects depending on
placed
their positions in the command 1line:
before all files in the command, they act as

for

defaults

all; otherwise they affect only the

nearest preceding file.

Defaults are shown in the list of switches

is the specification of a file you wish to punch.
You can use wildcard characters (% and *) to

filespec

specify more than one file.
g

means that, after

You

comma,

arguments of the form already shown

can

give

Summary of PUNCH Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
Job

Switches

(affecting the entire command)
Default account - your current

/ACCOUNT:account

account

/AFTER:date and/or time
/DESTINATION~-NODE :node-name
/FORMS:forms
/GENERIC

Default forms name - NORMAL

name

/JOBNAME: 6-character name

Default - first six characters

/LIMIT:n

Default

n - calculated

/METERS:n (PAPER-TAPE only)

Default

n - calculated

of first filename in

257

request

from

length of

files

length of

files

from

PUNCH (Cont.)

/NOTE:l2-character

message

YES

/NOTIFY:NO
/PRIORITY:n
/SEQUENCE:n
/UNIT:octal number
/USER:user name

Default

File

(affecting

Switches
the nearest preceding file,
placed before all filespecs)

only

unless

/COPIES:n

Default

/DELETE

/HEADER

Default

n for

1
files

Default

for

all

type

.LST

ASCII
BCD

/MODE : BINARY

(CARDS

only)

IMAGE
ASCII
BINARY

/MODE: IMAGE

(PAPER-TAPE

only)

IMAGE-BINARY

/NOHEADER
/PRESERVE

files

those

/ACCOUNT:account

specifies

the

characters

request.

to
This

your

name.

user

except
type .LST

account

Default

of
39
or
fewer
charge for your punching
account must be valid for

account -

your

current

account

with

(check

INFORMATION

JOB-STATUS)

/AFTER:date

and/or

time

day
of
week
and/or time

(or

or
TODAY)

ensures

that

the

until
after
specified.
illustrate two

job

will

not

the
date
NOV--12-79
arguments to

punched

and/or
time
and
18:00
this switech.

If you give both date and time, separate
them
with
a
space.
When given alone,
the time may be preceded by a plus
sign
(+),

which

indicated
present.

258

will

delay

1length

processing

time

from

the

PUNCH (Cont.)

Alternatively, you can give a day of
week
(e.g.,
MONDAY)
or
TODAY
argument;
then
the
Jjob
will
not
punched
until
the
beginning
of

the
as
be
the

following
day.
If
you
follow
this
argument
with
a
plus sign and a time,
the job will be further delayed by
this
amount,

/DESTINATION--NODE :node—name

specifies the IBM remote node
on
whose
card
punch
or
paper
tape
punch your
request is to be satisfied.
Two
colons
(2:2)
following
the
node
name
are
optional.
/FORMS:forms

name

specifies, in six or
fewer
characters,
the
forms
(determining
the weight and
color of card or paper stock,
the
size
of banner, header, and trailer sections,

etc.,)
Using

to
use
for
the
punching
job.
this
switch may delay processing

until

forms.

the operator can mount

Note

that your

the

proper

installation may

provide a different default argument
this switch.
Default forms name - NORMAL
/GENERIC

allows

any

card

punch

paper

tape

punch
to
be
used
for
satisfying the
request; use this switch to
override
a
previous /UNIT switch.
Default

: name
/JOBNAME

assigns
a
name
(of
six
or
fewer
characters) to the punching job
Default name - first six characters
filename
first
of
in

/LIMIT:n

the

request

places a limit of n cards (or n
paper
tape)
on
the
output

punching job
Default

limits,
usually
are
calculated
size of the files
punched

feet
of
of
the
adequate,
from
the
you
want

/METERS:n

places a limit of n meters on the output
of the punching job (PAPER-TAPE only)

/NOTE:message

labels the
header
section
of
output,
i.e.,
the
section
displaying
the
jobname, with a message or
notation
of
up
to
12 characters.
The message must

be enclosed in double quotation marks if
it
contains
spaces or non—-alphanumeric
characters.

259

PUNCH (Cont.)

YES

/NOTIFY:NO

tells
the
system
whether
to
send
a
message
to
your
terminal
when
the
request has been satisfied
Default argument - NO
Default

/PRIORITY:n

/SEQUENCE:n

number

directs

your

name

(affecting
unless

/HEADER

switch

request

File Switches
only the nearest

placed

before

all

users

who

1is
to
be
request.

the
For

file,

copies of
the
be less than or
-

header

file
equal

be
to

after

punching.

.LST

section

jobname
to
be
punched
itself is produced

260

punch

specified

specifications)

that n
n must

Default

card
the

the
when

only.

deletes
the
file
Opposite of /PRESERVE.
Default for files
causes

the
of

punch

preceding

file

requests
punched;
62,

tape
punch
number

Default

/DELETE

specifies the user
owher
of
the

privileged

/COPIES:n

(if
YES

specifies
sequence
number
n
for
punch
request,
which
you can use
modifying or canceling the request

or
paper
octal unit

/USER:user

assigns
a
number
n,
reflecting
the
urgency
of
the
punch request.
This n
must from 1 to 63, with
1larger
numbers
receiving
earlier treatment.
Note that
for
non-privileged
users
the
maximum
priority
that can be specified is lower
(usually 20), and that your installation
may
provide
a different value both for
this
maximum
and
for
the
default
priority.
Default

/UNIT:octal

argument
given)

type

containing

before

the

file

PUNCH (Cont.)

ASCII
BCD

/MODE
: BINARY

(CARDS only)

IMAGE

designates the
mode
for
punching
the
file onto cards.
ASCII treats each word
of a disk file as five
seven-bit
bytes
and punches each byte into one column of
the card, using
the
ASCII
translation
Hollerith
1into
conversion
for
table
code.

BCD

the

same as ASCII,

except

that
1t uses the 626 translation table.
BINARY treats each group of 26 words
as
78
12-bit
bytes
and punches each byte
into one column of the card, from column
3
through
column 808; column 1 contains
the octal word count in rows 12
through
3 and rows 7 and 9 punched, while column
2 contains
a
12-bit
folded
checksum,
IMAGE
treats
each group of 27 words as
81 12-bit bytes and
punches
each
byte
into
one
column
of the card, ignoring
the

eighty-first byte.

ASCII
BINARY

/MODE : IMAGE

(PAPER~-TAPE only)

IMAGE-BINARY

the
punching
for
mode
designates the
ASCII treats each
file onto paper tape.
seven-bit
five
as
word of a disk file
an even parity bit for each
plus
bytes
one
into
byte
each
byte, and punches
tape; if a vertical or
paper
of
frame
is
it
punched,
is
tab
horizontal
followed by a rubout character, and if a
by
followed
formfeed is punched, it is
BINARY treats each
null characters.
16
word
control
1
as
words
group of 33
followed by 32 words of data, where each
word (both control and data) consists of
byte
each
six 6-bit bytes, and punches
after
tape
paper
of
frame
one
into
byte; the
the
to
(octal)
2008
adding
folded
a
of
<consists
word
control
the left half and the data
1in
checksum
IMAGE
half.
right
the
word count in
word of a disk file as one
each
treats
and
=zeroes,
28
8-bit byte followed by
frame of
one
into
byte
each
punches

each
treats
BINARY
IMAGE
paper tape.
bytes, and punches
6-bit
six
as
word
tape
paper
each byte into one frame of
after adding 200 (octal) to each byte.

/NOHEADER

/PRESERVE

punching
the
prevents
section before the file

saves the
of

file after punching.

/DELETE.

Default

261

for

all

files

header

Opposite

PUNCH (Cont.)

Output

Jobname,

Request

ID,

Limit,

Number

Input

Files

soon as you complete a valid PUNCH
command,
the
system
responds by printing, on your terminal, the jobname, request
ID number, the output limit in number of cards
or
feet
of

paper
files

tape assigned to
in the request,

the

request,

and

the

number

input

with

just

Characteristics

Ordinary
For

Operation - No
most

purposes

the medium

Switch

Defaults

and

Set

Switches
you

can

series

System

The

defaults

shown

most

user

sites,

use

the

PUNCH

filespecs

command

for

arguments.

Managers

the

list

However,

switches

are
correct
for
system manager can change
The switches most
commonly

your

some of those default settings.
affected
are:
/FORMS,
/HEADER
/PRIORITY.

and

/NOHEADER,

/LIMIT,

and

Hints

Using

the

SET

DEFAULT Commands

If there are switches that you
using
PUNCH,
give
the
SET
PAPER-TAPE

current

command

TOPS-20

terminal session.
had
typed
them
supersede

supplying

any

the
PUNCH command.
specification

establish

command

always or usually supply when
DEFAULT
CARDS or SET DEFAULT
them

level)

for

defaults

the

remainder

The switches will then behave as
directly
after the command name.

(at

the

your

if
You

you
can

of
these
default
switches
by
actually
switch, with another value, when you give the
Put SET DEFAULT
commands
into
a
file
of
COMAND.CMD
in
your
1log-in directory if you

want these default
of future terminal

switches
sessions

262

to
as

in
well.

effect

for

all

levels

PUNCH (Cont.)

Special

Cases

/SPOOLED-OUTPUT Switch

You can give the special switch,
/SPOOLED-OUTPUT,
as
sole
argument
to
the
PUNCH
CARDS or PUNCH PAPER-TAPE command.
This causes any spooled output
accumulated
so
far
during
your
terminal session to be placed in a card punch or paper
tape punch queue immediately, rather than at
1log—-out
time.
The
/SPOOLED-OUTPUT
switch
1s
wuseful
only
if
the
SET
SPOOLED-OUTPUT DEFERRED command is in effect.
Programs that
you
run
(especially
FORTRAN
programs) may create spooled

paper tape punch or card punch output.

Or you can create

directly
by giving the command, COPY filespec PTP:, or COPY
filespec CDP:, respectively, or by giving a CREF command.

Commands

CANCEL

CARDS

PAPER-TAPE

INFORMATION

for withdrawing

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

for

examining

PUNCH requests
requests

the

output

queues

MODIFY

CARDS

PAPER-TAPE

SET DEFAULT

for

changing

processing

CARDS

PAPER-TAPE for

PUNCH

has begun

establishing

subsequent

requests

default

PUNCH commands

before

switches

for

Examples

Punch a

file onto

@PUNCH CARDS

cards.

ESTMT.DAT

[Card-Punch job ESTMT queued,

Punch a

@PUNCH

file onto

paper

request-ID 146,

limit 30]

request-ID 12,

limit 55]

tape.

PAPER-TAPE REAUMUR.LNS

[Papertape job REAUMU queued,

Punch three files onto paper tape,
specifying
a
particular
paper tape punch for two of them and allowing the third to be
punched on any available device.
@PUNCH PAPER-TAPE /UNIT:2

INDX,LTG,

BENNETT.
TXT

[Papertape job INDX queued,

263

PON.LG4/GENERIC,

request-ID 149,

limit

110,

3 files]

PUNCH (Cont.)

Punch a file onto paper tape, specifying
that
the
job
not
begin
for
an
hour.
Check for your requests in the output
queues, then cancel both of your paper tape requests.
@PUNCH

PAPER-TAPE

[Papertape

job

@INFORMATION

FORUM.APR

FORUM

Papertape

Queue:

Name

Reqg#

Limit

INDX

149

116

159
2 jobs

Card-Punch

Job

Name

ESTMT
There is

15@,

limit

19]

User
SCARNY

19
SCARNY
in the queue

/After:20-Jul-79 16:20
(none in progress)

Queue:

Reqg#

request-ID

OUTPUT-REQUESTS/USER

Job

FORUM
There are

/AFTER:+1:00

queued,

146
job

Limit

30
the

User
SCARNY
queue (none

@CANCEL PAPER-TAPE :
[2 Jobs canceled]

264

progress)

PUSH

Creates

the

PUSH

new level
command.

TOPS-20

inferior

the

one

from

which

you give

Format

@PUSH

(COMMAND LEVEL)

Characteristics

New

Level

TOPS-20

The

PUSH command creates an inferior level
of
the
TOPS-20
command
processor
(EXEC).
The system's SYSTEM:COMAND,CMD
file and your login directory's COMAND.CMD file are executed
again,
you have a fresh copy of memory and can begin giving
commands as if you had just logged
in.
However,
job-wide
parameters (for example, connected and accessed directories,
logical name definitions, most
parameters
altered
by
SET
commands)
are
unaffected
by
the
PUSH command and retain
their values.

Hints

Creating
You
an

Different

Copy of

EXEC

can use the PUSH command
EXEC
of
your
choice.

defined

by the

DEFINE

command

with

the

system

name of

logical

define

the

to create
Normally,

EXEC

name,

job

an inferior level
of
PUSH creates the EXEC

DEFAULT-EXEC:.

logical

you want

name,

create

Use

the

DEFAULT-EXEC:,

each

time

you

PUSH.

Note
that
many
TOPS-20
programs
have
their
own
PUSH
commands.
However,
only
the
EXEC
and OPR PUSH commands
refer to the job's definition of DEFAULT-EXEC:.

Using

CONTINUE

STAY With

PUSH

You can use the PUSH command to run two programs at once
or
to do other work that requires more than one copy of memory.
Simply
wuse
the
CONTINUE
/STAY
or
CONTINUE
/BACKGROUND
command to continue execution of your current program before
using PUSH.
After PUSH
you
can
run
another
program
or

otherwise
alter
memory
without
affecting
memory for the
first program.
See Example 2.
But see also Warning, below.

265

PUSH (Cont.)

Use of

Multiforking

Instead of

PUSH

The PUSH command allows you to run several programs at
once
by
running
the
programs
at
different
EXEC levels.
The
EXEC's multiforking
feature
allows
you
+to
run
multiple
programs at the same EXEC level.,
Working from a single EXEC
makes multiprogramming easier to monitor
and
manage.
For
information
on
multiforking
see
the
KEEP command or the
TOPS-20 User's Guide.

Restrictions

Number

Successive

PUSH commands

You can give as many pairs

PUSH

and

POP

commands

necessary
to complete your task,
Although there is a limit
to the number of times you
can
give
PUSH without
giving
intervening
POP
commands,
this
1limit
is
1large
enough

(approximately 24, although smaller
for
a
heavily
1loaded
system) not to interfere with most applications.
There is a
smaller limit (usually 5) on the number of
EXECs
that
can

give

Use

Queue-class

the

superior

Invalid

commands.,

INFORMATION
EXEC

levels

Definition of

SUPERIOR
you

have

command

created.

1learn

how

many

DEFAULT-EXEC:

If you define DEFAULT-EXEC:
with the name of a
nonexistent
EXEC,
(if,
for
example, you make a spelling error in your
DEFINE
command),
the
PUSH
command
ignores
the
job's
definition of DEFAULT-EXEC:
and creates the EXEC defined by
the

Withheld

system definition.

Log-out

Capability

You can usually log out from a lower level of
TOPS-2¢
than
the
one
to
which
you
1logged
in.
By
doing
so,
you
simultaneously conclude all processes of your job.
However,
if a program
(e.g., PTYCON)
has initialized a level of the
TOPS-20
command
processor
but
has
withheld
log=-out
capability
from it, you must use the POP command, followed,
if necessary, by a program command to exit from the
program
and
return to a higher level of TOPS-20, before you can log
out.

266

PUSH (Cont.)

Warning

Competition Between

Processes

If you have two programs running at once after using
CONTINUE /STAY or CONTINUE /BACKGROUND and PUSH commands
(see Hints, above) they may try to access the same flles at
TOPS-20 commands given at the lower
Or,
the same time.
level may be intercepted by a program running at the higher

For a discussion of these possibilities, see the
level.,
Restrictions section of the CONTINUE command description.

Effect on Memory and Terminal

The PUSH command preserves your present memory, gives you a fresh
copy of memory, and leaves your terminal at a new TOPS~20 command
level.

Commands

CONTINUE /STAY

INFORMATION SUPERIOR

for beginning

EXEC

number

program

superior

levels.

TOPS-20

Examples

Give the

PUSH command

for displaying the
for returning to

POP

execution

before giving the

PUSH command.

@PUSH

TOPS-20 Command processor 6.1(7)

267

1level

PUSH (Cont.)

Run

a program, and give a CTRL/C to return to TOPS-20 command
level.
Give
a
CONTINUE
/STAY
command
to
resume
this
program's execution, and then a PUSH command for a
new
copy
of
the TOPS-20 command language.
Repeat this process twice;

now you have three programs running at once.
In
the
1lowest
(fourth)
1level
of
your
Jjob, begin editing a file.
(Note:
when running more than one program in this way, be sure
that
they
do
not
wuse
the
same compiler or the same data base;

otherwise,
situations

competition among
to develop.)

@RUN TESTF1
°c
@Q@CONTINUE /STAY
@PUSH
TOPS-28

@RUN

Command

them

processor

6.1(7)

processor

6.1(7)

processor

6.1(7)

could

cause

unpredictable

DMN

A‘C"—""—‘_

@CONTINUE /STAY
@PUSH

TOPS-20

@RUN
“C

Command

PRODUK

@CONTINUE /STAY
@PUSH
TOPS~-20

Command

QEDIT ARTIFI,CTL
Define
1logical
name
DEFAULT-EXEC:
with
specialized EXEC.,
Then, run that EXEC with
@DEFINE

DEFAULT-EXEC:

SYSTEM:EXTENDED-EXEC.EXE,7

@PUSH

TOPS-28

Command

the
name
of
a
the PUSH command.

processor

268

6.1(6530)

Places an executable system program in memory and starts it.
Format

filespec /switch

(PROGRAM)

where

filespec

the

specification

file

any

executable

program

Default dev:<directory> - SY¥S:
Default

.EXE

/USE-SECTION:n

/switch

.typ -

37
to
@
specifies the memory section (from
You
in which your program is to run.
octal)
can
can use this switch only if your program
be contained in one section.

Characteristics

Need

for

R Command

Although in most cases you can run system programs by simply
program name in place of an EXEC command, the R
the
typing
command is necessary for running a program whose name is the
an abbreviation for an EXEC
or
command
EXEC
an
as
same
program
system
a
has
For example, if your site
command.
to
order
in
command
R
the
with
run
be
must
it
CONNECT,
named
If you have
distinguish it from the EXEC's CONNECT command.
a system program named GE, it must be run with the R command
GET
the
for
abbreviation
the GE
to distinguish it from
command.

Cancels the

Ephemeral Attribute

system
by the
ephemeral
If a system program has been set
manager or, you have given a SET PROGRAM EPHEMERAL command,
the
attribute by running
ephemeral
the
you can cancel
R command instead of typing the program
the
program with
'

name as an EXEC command.

For more information on the
ERUN

command.

269

ephemeral

attribute,

see

the

R (Cont.)

Hints

Defining

SY¥S:

If you redefine logical name SYS:
to be different from
the
system-wide
definition,
you
should
include
in the
8SY¥S:
search list if you want to use the R command to
run
system
programs.
For
further
information,
refer to the section

entitled,
command

Effect

"Redefining

Logical

Names,"

the

forks,

places

memory

DEFINE

Memory

The R command clears
starts the specified

System

description.

any

unkept

program.

and

Commands

INFORMATION

LOGICAL-NAMES

for

examining

the

definiti on

SYS:
RUN

for

running

executable

user

programs

Examples

Run

the

FILCOM

system

program.

@R FILCOM
%*

Find

out

SYS:.

what

Run

one

APL
of

programs
them.

@DIRECTORY SYS:*APL* ,EXE
PS:<FIELD-IMAGE>
APL.EXE,1
APLSF.EXE.
1l

MAPLFL.EXE.
1l

Total

files

@R APL.EXE

279

are

available

1in

1logical

nhame

RECEIVE
Notifies the system that
links,

advice,

you

user messages,

are

and

communication

willing

system messages.

Format

QRECEIVE

argument

is a keyword, chosen

willing

RECEIVE

1list

the

from

communication

below,

you are

Command

Arguments

communication

and

assistance

both

allows

ADVICE

kind

the

naming

by another user's ADVISE or

links

initiated

allows

communication

TALK command

another

SYSTEM-MESSAGES

established

messages

user's

SEND

and

allows notices of new mail

users sent by the operator or

interest to all

privileged

other

USER-MESSAGES

1links

user's TALK command

users

allows messages sent by another
command

Default - LINKS,

SYSTEM-MESSAGES,

and

USER-MESSAGES

Hint

Typing

RECEIVE During

Attempted

TALK

another
If your terminal has been set to refuse 1links and
talk to you by using the TALK command, both
to
tries
user
(ringing
terminals will give a series of CTRL/G signals
If you give
bells or beeps) indicating the refused attempt.
the RECEIVE LINKS command before these signals are finished,
the TALK command will

succeed.

Commands

sending

commands

another

ADVISE

for

INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE

for examining your current terminal

REFUSE

user's

job

settings

for refusing

advice,

messages

271

and

communication
system

and

1links,

user

RECEIVE (Cont.)

SEND

for

sending

user's
TALK

for

INHIBIT

for

message

1linking

another
TERMINAL

another

terminal
your

user's

refusing

all

communication
advice,
system
messages,

and

terminal

terminal
types

terminal

including
messages,

notices

links,
user

new mail.

Examples

Give the RECEIVE
other users.

command

communication

1links

from

LINKS

@RECEIVE

Set your terminal to receive links, at the request (sent
via
the
MAIL
program, not shown here) of another user.
Begin a
communication session with this user, during which
you
give
the
RECEIVE ADVICE command also, to allow a demonstration of
the UDP program.
Afterwards,
set
your
terminal
again
to
refuse advice.

@QRECEIVE
@
LINK

FROM

@; THANKS,

RENQUIST,

BUT

TTY

127

YOU LET ME DO AN "ADVISE®"

@;HOW

TO RUN THE PROGRAM BY ACTUALLY
@;SURE, I'LL FIX MY SETTING.

DOING

I CAN SHOW YOU
IT.

OKAY?

QRECEIVE ADVICE
@ADVISE LATTA
Escape

character

LATTA,

MISC:<LATTA>

<CTRL>E,
Job

type

<CTRL>"?

for

EXEC

[Advising]
UDP

UDP>LIST/DOCUMENTATION: /CREATED-SINCE:1~-1-78
UDP>EXIT

@;YOU'LL

GET A

@;DO

SEE

YOU

@;YES,

THANKS.

[Advice

PRINTED

HOW

DID

LISTING
IT?

GOODBYE,

terminated]

@QREFUSE ADVICE

272

TOMORROW.

@:0

help

REENTER

Starts

the

current

fork

its

alternate

entry point.

Format

@REENTER

(PROGRAM)

Characteristics

Using

REENTER
The REENTER command
starts
your
program
at
specified
by the second word in the program's
For most
Usually
the same

to
or

the
address
entry vector.

programs this address is contained in location 124,
the REENTER and START commands start the program at
point, but another re-entry point can
be
provided

avoid
to use

initialization
the program in

procedures,
a different

perform
way.

error

recovery,

Hints

Further

Information

For more information about entry vectors,
Monitor Calls Reference Manual.

see

the

TOPS-20

Commands

GET

for

placing

executable

LOAD

for

START

for entering a program at its normal entry point

source

program

object

memory

program

into

memory

Examples

Give

the

REENTER

command

for

your

current

program.

@REENTER

Begin running a program, then give a
obtain
a
file.
Resume
execution
alternate entry point.

CTRL/C to
of
the

@R DUMPER

DUMPER>TMC
@ACCESS

PS:<P.SPECCINI>

Password:

@COPY PS:<P.SPECCINI>USR.FIL

PS:<P.SPECCINI>USR.FIL.1 *=> USR.FIL.1

@END-ACCESS

@REENTER

PS:<P.SPECCINI>

DUMPER>

273

[OK])

leave
it
program at

and
the

REFUSE
Notifies the system that you are not willing to
links,

advice,

user messages,

and

system messages.

communication

Format

@REFUSE argument
where

from

is a keyword, chosen

argument

naming

the

willing

REFUSE

prevents

assistance

LINKS

prevents both

user's ADVISE command

from

initiated

assistance

being

user's ADVICE or

another

and

established

TALK command

communication
by

another

prevents notices of new mail and messages

general
monitor

interest
or
by

privileged

USER-MESSAGES

below,

Arguments

ADVICE

SYSTEM-MESSAGES

1list

Command

links

the

kind of communication you are not

users

sent
to
all users by the
the
operator
or
other

prevents messages sent by another user's SEND
command
Default - ADVICE

and

LINKS

Hints

Refusing

All

Communication

Users
with
Wheel
or
Operator
capabilities
enabled
can
ADVISE,
SEND,
and
TALK
to
terminals
that
have refused
advice, user-messages, and links.
To
refuse
messages
and
links

from

privileged

users,

wuse

the

TERMINAL

INHIBIT

command.

Typing

RECEIVE During

Attempted

TALK

If your terminal has been set to refuse
1links
and
another
user
tries
to
talk to you by using the TALK command, both
terminals will give a
series
of
CTRL/G
signals
(ringing
bells or beeps) indicating the refused attempt.
If you give
the RECEIVE LINKS command before these signals are finished,
the

TALK command will

succeed.

274

REFUSE (Cont.)

Safegquarding

Terminal

Output

If you want your terminal to

1long

file,

without

TERMINAL INHIBIT command to prevent
the
use
interference,
use
Be sure to
being received.
from
message
of
all classes

the

TERMINAL

INHIBIT command afterwards to restore the

previous condition of your terminal.
Special

Cases

Implicit Refusal of Advice

If you give the REFUSE LINKS command, your terminal will

INFORMATION
the
However,
advice also.
refuse
to
set
unless
TERMINAL-MODE command may not display this setting
you give an explicit REFUSE ADVICE command as well.
Privileged Disregard of REFUSE

give

A user with enabled Wheel or Operator capabilities can
the TALK or ADVISE command for any job.

Commands

for

ADVISE

sending

user's

INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE

job

another

commands

for examining your current terminal

settings

for receiving communication

RECEIVE

and

system

for sending a

message

advice,

and

1links,

user

messages

SEND

user's terminal

for

TALK

1linking

another

TERMINAL INHIBIT

your

terminal

user's terminal

for refusing all types of

communication
advice,

another

including

system

terminal

links,

messages,

user

messages, and notices of new mail.
Examples

Use the REFUSE command to prevent other users

your

job.

@REFUSE ADVICE

275

from

advising

REFUSE (Cont.)

Receive

communication

command.

Confer

refuse

with

classes

LINK

all

FROM

RENQUIST,

link
him

formed

briefly,

message

TTY

over

another

user's

TALK

then

set

your

which

you

terminal

have

control.

127

@!HELLO DAVID. CAN YOU HELP ME WITH EDIT?
@!1SORRY, PLEASE BREAK.
I'M EXPECTING PRINTOUT AND THIS

@IWILL INTERFERE.

WILL GET IN TOUCH LATER.

@TOKAY

@BREAK

—

———

C——

i e

w—

@REFUSE

LINKS

@REFUSE SYSTEM-MESSAGES
@REFUSE USER-MESSAGES
As

alternative

previous
command

example,
refuses

@TERMINAL

all

giving

three

REFUSE

give

the

types

TERMINAL

messages.

INHIBIT

276

commands

INHIBIT command.

the

This

REMARK
Tells the system to regard the terminal input that follows as

comment

Only.

Format

@REMARK

(MODE)

Type remark.

End with CTRL/Z.

Characteristics

Ending

Remarks

Until you give a CTRL/Z, the system merely displays what you
type, instead of trying to interpret it as commands.
Hints

Useful During TALK or ADVISE Session

If you have already established contact with another user by
a TALK or ADVISE command before giving REMARK, his terminal
will also display what you type. Give the REMARK command
before sending 1lengthy comments or demonstrating commands
that you don't want to take effect.

Commands

ADVISE

for sending commands to another user's job

TALK

for sending comments to another user

277

REMARK (Cont.)

Examples

Give

the

REMARK command.

@REMARK
Type

remark.

End

with

CTRL/Z.

Receive

a communication

REMARK

command

end

the

link

speak

from

with

him.

another
Give

user.
a

CTRL/Z

THIS

A.M.?

remarks.

@
LINK

FROM

@;WHERE

P.SPECCINI,

ARE

THE

NOTES

TTY

127

FROM

THE

@REMARK
Type
HI,

remark.
PAUL.

End

with

THEY'RE

LAB

DEMO

CTRL/Z.
THE LAB'S

LIBRARY AREA.

THAT'S CHEM:<P-CHEM. 2¢,NOTES>,

IDON'T KNOW

THE

WITH A

TITLE BUT

LOOK AT THE

TDIRECTORY COMMAND.
;YES,

THANKS.

OKAY?

DATES

BYE

@BREAK

"~z

278

Give

the

afterwards

RENAME

Changes

th e

hame of a file.

Format

@RENAME (EXISTING FILE) old filespec(s)

(TO BE) new filespec

where

old

is a single file specification, or

£ ilespec(s)

by wildcard characters
new

series

them separated by commas and/or indicated
(% and *)

is the new specification under which you want
to store the file(s); the new specification

f ilespec

must

the

same

include an asterisk (*)

one old

filespec.

structure;

you

may

if you gave more than

Default new filespec - old filespec, but
a generation number higher
with
by 1 than the highest existing
generation number

Output

Status of Flles

If you use recognition on the new

system
Filel!,

prints

101d

to describe

Confi rmation of

file

specification,

the

and

new

Generation!, !New Generation!, or |New

its status.

Action

As each file is renamed, the system prints its old

specification, and the word [Superseding] if it is replacing
The delay
previous contents, and finally the word [OK].
it took to
long
how
s
indicate
[OK]
before you see this
rename the

file.

Characteri stics

279

RENAME (Cont.)

Hints

Specifying

New Account

You can
account

and

Protection

Number

specify

the new file's
protection
number
and
the
which its storage fees will be charged.
Follow
the new filespec with a
semicolon
(;)
and
the
1letter
P
before
giving
a
new 6-digit protection number, and with a
to

semicolon and the letter A
before
giving
a
new
account,
Ordinarily
these
values
are
set
to
the
default
file
protection
and
current
account.
However,
non-default
protection numbers will be maintained for higher generations
of existing files,
unless
you
specify
otherwise
in
the
RENAME

RENAME

command

Faster

For

Than

moving

that

COPY

set

creates

for

that

higher

Transferring

files

from

one

generation.

Files

directory

another

with

the

the
same structure, the RENAME command is a faster and more
efficient means than COPY,
This
1is
because
RENAME
only
changes
the
file
specifications;
1t
does
not
copy the
contents

RENAME

the

files.

command

transfer

1leaves

with

the

original
copies
coples are often

Also,

file

only

one

set

COPY

command

transfer
of

1leaves

files,

two

while

sets:

and
the destination copies.
The
unnecessary and must be deleted.

the

original

Restrictions

Renaming

Between

You

cannot

must

use

Structures
rename

file

from

the

COPY

command

new

structure,

then

the

old

structure.

Renaming
You

Open

cannot

Mapped
rename

First
give
this is the
Renaming
You

Archived
can

one

structure

reproduce

DELETE

command

another,
contents on
remove it from

its

but

the
the

Files
a

file

that

the RESET command,
case.

open

POP

mapped

followed

into

memory.

RESET,

the

Files

rename

archived

file

specifying

first
(or
o0ld) argument of a RENAME command.
It will then
have the second (or new) argument as its
specification
and
will
remain an archived file.
However, you cannot give the
specification of an archived file as the second argument
of

RENAME

command,

this

would

replace

the

file's

contents.

If you attempt to do so, the file you specify as
the
argument
will
be
renamed to a generation higher by
the
highest
existing
generation
of
the
archived
leaving the archived file intact.

289

first
than
file,

RENAME (Cont.)

Warning

Replacing Previous Contents of Files

(including
1into a specification
file
you rename a
If
previous
the
that already exists,
number)
generation
cannot be
and
replaced
are
new file
contents of the
But see Restrictions - Renaming Archived Files,
recovered.
above.

Commands

COPY

for making

coples of files

Examples

Rename

file.

@RENAME ATM-50,SPC ATM-50.PRL

Use a wildcard character to rename all files of a given name.
@RENAME ATM-50.* 1-ATM-50.*
ATM-50.BAK.1 => 1-ATM-50.BAK.1l
ATM-5@0.PRL.,1 => 1-ATM-50.PRL.1
3.

[OK]
[OK]

Access another user directory and transfer to
renamed

in Example

@ACCESS

<ORBEN>

Password:

QRENAME

1-ATM-50.%*

<ORBEN>

1<-ATM-50.BAK.1 => <ORBEN>1-ATM-5@0.BAK.1
1-ATM-5@0.PRL.1 => <ORBEN>1-ATM-50.PRL.1

QEND-~-ACCESS

<ORBEN>

281

[OK]
[OK]

the

files

RESET

Clears

memory of

the

specified

forks.

Format

@RESET

(FORK)

argument

where
argument

one

the

following:

Fork
Fork

*
«

name
number

for all forks
(period)
for
fork

Default -

all

the

unkept

current

forks

Characteristics

Action of
In

RESET

addition

command

specified

the

simultaneously
forks.

Effect

The

clearing

RESET

closes

memory

all

forks

for

files,

and

terminates

specified
and

their

inferior

the

specified

forks,

unmapped,

forks.

RESET

fork's

the

opened

also

inferior

Memory

RESET

command

clears

the

specified

forks

from memory.

Commands

INFORMATION

FILE-STATUS

for

determining

currently
INFORMATION
CONTINUE,

MEMORY-USAGE

FORK,

FREEZE

INFORMATION,

FORK-STATUS,

INFORMATION

PROGRAM-STATUS,

KEEP,

SET

the

mapped

RESET,

SET

NAME,

PROGRAM,

and

UNKEEP

for

determining

other

282

which

files

are

open
contents

multiforking-class

memory

commands

RESET (Cont.)

Examples

Give the RESET command

to clear all

unkept forks from memory.

@RESET
Clear all

forks,

including kept forks,

from memory.

@RESET *
Then,
Display the fork status with INFORMATION FORK-STATUS.
Redisplay the fork status
clear the SORTER fork from memory.
to

check the

result,

@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS

EDT

(1):

=> PASCAL

SORTER

Kept,

"C from IO wait at 413773,

0:00:00.90

(2): Kept, Background, Running at 324004,
(3):

HALT at 490370,

0:00:00.6

0:00:00.8

@RESET 3

@INFORMATION EORK—STATUS

EDT (1): Kept, 'C from IO wait at 413773, 0:00:00.0
PASCAL (2): Kept, Background, Running 453004, 0:00:01.3

283

RETRIEVE

Returns

off-line

file

(magnetic

tape

copy

file)

disk.

Format

@RETRIEVE

(FILES)

filespec,...

filespec

where

is the specification of any
off-1line
file
(archived
or not, visible or invisible) to
which you
have
access;
you
may
include
wildcard characters (% and *).
means

7000

that,

after

arguments

comma,

you

form

already

the

can

give

shown

Output

Acknowledgment
As

soon

responds

Request

you

complete

printing,

each
off-line
file
followed by [OK].
Notice

Retrieval

Depending

Sent

the

valid

your

for

RETRIEVE

terminal,

which

you

command,

the system
specification of

the

requested

retrieval,

Requestor

procedures

frequently

your

site,

when

the

files

for

which
you
have
requested
retrieval have been restored to
their directory on disk, you may receive a mail message that
contains
the
names of each retrieved file.
Remember that,

depending

how

requests,

this

message

days

your

request.

after

may

site

not

processes
sent

until

retrieval

one

Characteristics

Invisibility of

Retrieved

Files

you retrieve Invisible files, they will
(whether
archived
or
not) when restored

SET

FILE

Until

VISIBLE

you

command

so,

they

remain
invisible
to disk.
Use the

make

invisible

will

inaccessible

commands.

284

files

most

visible.

TOPS-28

RETRIEVE (Cont.)

Hints

Using Retrieved Archived Files

As long as a retrieved archived file

inspect

wusing

TYPE

the

wvisible,

you

can

or PRINT command, or list its

However, you

specifications using DIRECTORY-class commands.

(for example, by using
cannot add to it or change it
To make changes to a copy of a retrieved archived
APPEND).

to copy it to a new
first use the COPY command
file,
If you wish, you can then request archival
specification.
for this new file (using the ARCHIVE command) and delete the

old

(using

one

the

DELETE

command

with

the

ARCHIVED

You can return an (unchanged) on-line archived
subcommand).
file to off-line status by using the DELETE command with the
or withdraw archive status from
CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand,
the file (i.e., make it an ordinary disk file) by using the
DISCARD command.

Using Retrieved Non-archived Files

As long as a retrieved non-archived file is visible, you can

use TOPS-280 commands with it as with any other disk file.
The only difference is that after any command that has
tape copy of the file is no longer
the
file,
changed the
This means that you cannot give the DELETE command
valid.
return the file to
to
with the CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand
off-line

Special

status.

Cases

Implied

Retrieval

Requests

If your system has enabled the "automatic retrieval-wait"
feature (give the INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS command to find
is
out whether it has), and the SET RETRIEVAL-WAIT command
in

effect for your job, any command that attempts to use an

off-1line file will create an automatic retrieval request for

Under these conditions, commands such as TYPE or
that file.
not be
files will
COPY for which vyou specify off-line

executed until those files are retrieved.
requests are most useful

in batch jobs.

1Implied retrieval

Commands

ARCHIVE

for

requesting

archival

for

canceling

retrieval

of specified

CANCEL RETRIEVE

requests
filled

285

files

before

they are

RETRIEVE (Cont.)

DELETE

(with

CONTENTS-ONLY

subcommand)

for

deleting

contents

retrieved
files
DIRECTORY

(with

OFFLINE

subcommand)

for

the

disk

only

(i.e.,

listing

specifications

off-line
DIRECTORY

(with

OFFLINE

and

INVISIBLE

on-line)

the

visible

files

subcommands)

for
listing
specifications
invisible off-line
DIRECTORY

(with

TIMES

TAPE-WRITE

the
of
files

subcommand)

for finding out the write
date
of the tape copy of
files
DISCARD

for

giving

copy of
INFORMATION

RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS

for

the

retrieved

finding

status

out

tape

files
the

retrieval

requests

Examples

Retrieve

off-line

file.

@RETRIEVE BRCHIVE.TXT
BRCHIVE.TXT.1
Attempt

[OK]

use

file.

Upon

discovering

that

off-line,

retrieve
the
file,
When
it
has
been
restored
to
directory, discard the tape copy of the file, and
then
it printed on your terminal.

@TYPE FILBRK.HLP

?File Is off-1ine:

@RETRIEVE

FILBRK.HLP.1

FILBRK.HLP

FILBRK.HLP.1

[OK]

@DISCARD FILBRK.HLP
FILBRK. HLP,1

[OK]

@TYPE

FILBRK.HLP

ITHIS

JUST A

TEXT

FILE

TESTER.

286

your
have

RETRIEVE (Cont.)

Get a listing of your archived files.
Retrieve one
that
off line, examine it, and return it to off-line status.
@DIRECTORY,

@@ARCHIVE
ee

MISC: <GOLDEN>

ARCHEK.FIL.1
ARCHIVE,ALSO.1;OFFLINE
«NOT,. 1;OFFLINE
.TOO. 1;OFFLINE
MOOBE,.TXT.1;OFFLINE
TESTY.BBN.1,2

Total

files

@RETRIEV@ EBCHIVE:TXT

BRCHIVE, TXT. 1

[OK]

@TYPE BRCHIVE,TXT
1A TEXT FILE TESTER
@DELETE

BRCHIVE, TXT,

@@CONTENTS-ONLY
@ea

MISC:<GOLDEN>BRCHIVE,TXT.1l [OK]
MISC: <GOLDEN> [l page freed]

287

|is

RENAME (Cont.)

Get
the
and
the

an inclusive listing of your
off-line
files,
1including
date the tape copy was written.
Retrieve three of them,
check the requests in the retrieval queue.
Cancel ocne of
requests.

@DIRECTORY,

@@OFFLINE

@@TIMES
@a

TAPE-WRITE

MISC:<GOLDEN>

Tape-write
ARCHIVE.ALSO.1;OFFLINE

«NOT,.1;OFFLINE

8-Jun-85

DUMPER.MAC,1;O0FFLINE

07:59:08

07:59:09

7-Mar-85

@#5:19:10

PRODUK.EXE. 4;OFFLINE

7-Mar-85

@5:19:13

SQUARE.EXE.1;OFFLINE

7-Mar-85

05:19:14

Total

files

@DIRECTORY,
@QOFFLINE
@@INVISIBLE
@@TIMES TAPE-WRITE
Qe
MISC:<GOLDEN>

Tape-write
ARCHIVE.TOO.1;OFFLINE
BRCHIVE.TXT. l1;OFFLINE

8-Jun-79

07:59:10

27-Jun-79

ERCHIVE.TXT.1;O0OFFLINE

8-Jun-79

04:04:58
#7:59:11

FRCHIVE.TXT.1;OFFLINE

12~-Jul-79

03:23:03

MOOBE.TXT.1;OFFLINE

Total

@RETRIEVE

8-Jun-79

£67:59:12

files

PRODUK.EXE,

PRODUK.EXE.4

FRCHIVE.TXT,

MOOBE,TXT

[OK]

FRCHIVE.TXT.1l

MOOBE. TXT.1l

[OK]
[OK]

@INFORMATION RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS
Retrieval Queue:
Name
Reg#
Tape

Tape

User

MOOBE

587

5329

5520

GOLDEN

PRODUK

505

5538

5583

GOLDEN

FOOBAR

497

5845

5856

TOMCZAK

EE155

442

6279

5883

WRIGHT
GOLDEN

BRCHIV

504

5543

7138

FRCHIV

506

7138

7559

There

are

jobs

@CANCEL RETRIEVE
[1 Job canceled]

the

queue

5¢7

288

GOLDEN

(none

progress)

REWIND

Returns

beginning

magnetic
of

the

tape

first

its

1load

point

(logical

beginning,

the

file).

Format

@QREWIND

(DEVICE)

dev:

/switch

where

dev:

is the name of the tape set or magnetic tape drive
The colon after the
rewind.
to
want
you
that

device name

/switch

is optional.

is one of the

following:

/CURRENT-VOLUME-ONLY

rewinds tape set to
beginning
of currently mounted volume

/ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET

rewinds tape set to

beginning

of first volume
Default - ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET

Note:

these switches can be used only for
devices
of
the
form
MTn:,
not
MTAn:.

Restrictions

REWIND with

Open

Files

If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program
that
has
and you then give the REWIND
set
tape
magnetic
a
opened
command for that tape set, the system will first ask if
you
want
to
close
the
associated
file.
You must do so for
REWIND to succeed, but will probably be unable
to
continue
the
program
from
that
point because the file will now be
closed.

Commands

BACKSPACE
DIRECTORY

for moving a magnetic

number of

UNLOAD

tape

backward

records

specified

(when
used
with
a
magnetic
tape
device)
for
tape set, printing a directory of its
a
rewinding
files,

SKIP

files or

and

again

for moving a

number

rewinding

maghetic

files or

the

tape

records

tape

set

forward

for rewinding a magnetic tape completely

source

reel

289

specified

onto

the

REWIND (Cont.)

Examples

Rewind

your

magnetic

tape.

@REWIND DAY:
Mount a tape, and prepare to copy files onto
it.
(Use
the
REWIND
command
to be sure you are at the beginning.)
After
copying the files,
rewind
the
tape
and
(using
the
COPY
command)
read
the first one.
Then give TOPS~20 commands to
free the resources you have been using.

@MOUNT TAPE
[Mount

[Tape
[DAY:

DAY:

Request

DAY

Queued,

set DAY, volume DAY
defined as MT@:]

Request-ID

183]

mounted]

@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure

SNARK:

@ACCESS

SNARK:

@REWIND

DAY:

mounted

@COPY SNARK:FIL-1,TAP

DAY:

SNARK:FIL-1.TAP.1l
=> MT@:FIL-1

@COPY §§ARK:FIL-2.TAP
SNARK:FIL-2,TAP,1 =>
@COPY SNARK:FIL-3,TAP
SNARK:FIL-3.TAP.l1l =>

DAY:
MT@:FIL-2
DAY:
MT@:FIL-3

[OK]

[OK]
[OK]

@REWIND DAY:
@COPY DAY: TTY:
MT@:

TTY:

ITHIS

THE

FIRST

FILE.!

@DISMOUNT TAPE DAY:
[Tape dismounted, logical
@END-ACCESS SNARK:

name

@DISMOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:

Structure

SNARK:

dismounted

290

DAY:

deleted]

RUN

Places an executable program in memory and starts it.
Format

@RUN

(PROGRAM)

filespec /switch

where

filespec

Default dev:<dir>
.typ -

Default

executable

any

specification

file

the

program

- DSK:

.EXE

is /USE-SECTION:n

/switch

(from
your

specifies the memory section

octal)
37
to
]
program is to
run.
only
switch
this

can be contained

which

You

use

can

your

program

in one section.

Characteristics

Efficiency of

RUN

The RUN command does the work of the pair

and

faster

START,

executing programs than EXECUTE,

Therefore

files and

you

commands

GET

and less expensive means of

than

LOAD

and

START.

should store frequently-run programs in .EXE

run them with this command.

Hints

Alternative

RUN command

a
for
looks
When you type only a program hame, the system
When you precede the program name
system program.
matching
in
program
the
with the RUN command, the system looks for

your connected directory.

The RUN command can be eliminated

by typing

the directory name with the program

connected

directory:

two

commands

for

example,

name.

These

each run SORTER located in the

Q@RUN SORTER,. EXE

EXE
@<SMITH>SORTER.

Effect on Memory and Terminal

The RUN command clears any unkept

forks,

places

the

specified

in memory, starts it and leaves your terminal at command
am
level in the program (if any), or at TOPS-2f command level.

progr

291

RUN (Cont.)

Commands

EXECUTE

for

running

source

GET

for

placing

for

running

executable

SAVE

for

saving

START

for

starting

object

executable

program
the

programs

program

programs

stored

executable

program

in memory

currently

(.EXE)

SY¥S:

format

in memory

Examples

Run

one

your

executable

programs.

@RUN TESTFl.EXE
2.

Mount

structure

structure,

Run

and

one

access

his

@MOUNT STRUCTURE

SNARK:

Structure

mounted

QACCESS

SNARK:

SNARK:<ELDRIDGE>

Password:

@RUN SNARK:<ELDRIDGE>FT.EXE

292

user's

programs.

directory

the

SAVE

Stores

copy of memory

executable

file.

Format

@SAVE

(ON FILE)

filespec

(PAGES FROM)

locl

(TO)

loc2,

loc3

loc4,

...

where

filespec

is the
store

file specification under which

the program
Default filespec

locl loc2,

are pairs

cos

save

loc3

loc4,

that

of octal

specify the

Default

program

numbers

span(s)

1locl

you

want

name,EXE

or symbolic expressions

of memory pages you want

1loc2 - all
assigned
pages
of
to the highest
@
from
memory
page
number
of
the
highest
existing section

Output

Status

Files

If you use recognition of the file specification, the system
prints 101d Generation!, !New Generation!, or I!New File!, to
indicate its status on disk, or 10K!
1if saved on a non-disk
device.

Hints

Saving

Programs

Before

Running

Them

When you load a source or
object
program
using
the
LOAD
Then you can
command, save it using SAVE before running it.
run it in the future using RUN,
without
first
loading
it
using
a
LOAD-class command.
This is also true if you save

the program after running

post-run
More

it, but

will

then

1in

state.

Information

For more

Monitor

information about

Calls

Reference

saved

Manual.

files,

see

the

TOPS-20

Restriction

Saving

Execute-only Compiler

illegal

command
use

use

the SAVE command

for an execute-only compiler.

LINK with the

LOAD command

293

and

after

using

the

An alternative

the /SAVE switch.

LOAD

is to

SAVE (Cont.)

C ommands

GET

for

putting

saved

LOAD

for

putting

source or object

RUN

for

running

saved

STAR T

for

starting

the

file

into memory
file

into memory

program

in memory

Examples

Save

the

program

@SAVE

TESTFl1.EXE.6

currently

in memory.

Saved

Mount a magnetic tape in write-enabled
mode.
Use
command
to
put an executable program into memory,
it (specifying a new filename) on tape and on disk.
start the program, which is still in memory.

@MOUNT TAPE LAT:/WRITE-ENABLED
[Mount request LAT: queued, request-ID 415]
[Tape set LAT, volume LAT mounted]
[LAT: defined as MT2:]
@GET TESTF1

@SAVE LAT:TAP, EXE
MT2: TAP.EXE

@SAVE

TAP.EXE.l1l

Saved

@START
THIS

CPU

time:

TEST,

#.04

Elapsed

time:

294

0.17

the
GET
then save
Finally,

SEND

Sends a message

immediately to

another

user's terminal.

Format

@SEND

(TO)

argument message-—text

where

argument

is one of the

following:

(The asterisk argument
privileges.)

message

user

name

a terminal line number
an asterisk
(*) [for
all
terminals]
requires
Wheel
or
Operator

is a message of up to six lines of text followed

a carriage

return.

Characteristics
Multiple-line

Messages

SEND allows you to send multiple-line messages
with
wup
to
six
8@P-character
1lines of text.
Type the message past the
end of the first line and onto the next line without
typing
RETURN.
SEND will reorganize your message on the receiver's
terminal so that words broken across two lines appear on the
same

Refus ed

line.

SEND

You cannot contact a user with SEND if his terminal
is
set
to
refuse messages with the REFUSE USER-MESSAGES command or
the TERMINAL INHIBIT command.
Normally, if you
attempt
to
SEND
to
a
user
who has refused user messages, the system
prints the message ?User is refusing messages and/or links.
However, a user with Wheel or Operator capabilities enabled,
can
SEND
messages
to
users
who
have
given
a
REFUSE
USER-MESSAGES command, but not the TERMINAL INHIBIT command.

Findi ng

the

find

Receiver's

message,
name

Line Number

the

terminal

argument,

give

the

line number

for

the

receiver of a

SEND

SYSTAT command with the receiver's user

295

SEND (Cont.)

Sending

Terminal

Bells

To get the attention of the user at the receiving
terminal,
type
a
few
CTRL/Gs
1in
your message.
This will ring the
terminal bell on the receiving terminal.

SEND

Batch

Job

You can place
messages
to

batch
batch

job.
job

SEND
your

commands in a
terminal
on

Since your
and
your

batch control file to
send
the condition of a running

wusername
1s
associated
timesharing
Jjob, use the

with
vyour
line number

argument.

SEND

Alternative

Mail

The SEND command can
message
with one of
SEND

can

used as an alternative to sending
a
the mail programs.
For short messages,

convenient

and

faster

program.,
For
wurgent
messages,
a
immediately by the receiver, unlike a
can be read at the user's leisure.

Special

use

SEND
mail

than

mail

message
1is read
message,
which

Cases

User

Has

Than

One

Job

If you attempt to SEND a message to a user who is
1logged-in
on
more
than one terminal, the system responds with a list
of the user's terminal line numbers and the
programs
being
run
at
each
terminal.
Type your choice of terminal line

number

(if

available,

one

running

the

EXEC)

after

the

TTY:

prompt.

Commands

ADVISE

for

RECEIVE

REFUSE

sending

commands

another

user's

job

USER-MESSAGES

for

receiving

for

refusing

for

telling

another

user's

SEND message

USER-MESSAGES

REMARK

terminal

TERMINAL

INHIBIT

for

the

input

for linking
terminal

TALK

another

your

refusing

communication
messages,

user

notices

296

user's

system

SEND message
to

regard

your

comment only
terminal

all

including

types

links,

messages,

another

user's

terminal

advice,

alerts,

and

system
mail

SEND (Cont.)

Examples

Send

a message with

@SEND

141

PAUL,

the

DO YOU

SEND command.
HAVE

THE

TCO TAPE?

Send a multiple-line message.
Type the message past the
end
of
the line and onto the next.
Press RETURN only at the end
of

the message.,

@SEND ASMITH AL,

I CAN'T MAKE THE NORTH PROJECT MEETING;

HERMAN JUSTCALLED A STAFF MEETING.,
T

—

———————.

Enable your Wheel
to

all

—

G ————

————

I'LL WRITE MYENGINE

Sa———

S ——————

Operator privileges and

Wv—

send

message

users.

@ENABLE

$SEND : THE LETTER QUALITY PRINTER E§.22

From

NELSON on

line

127:

[THE LETTER QUALITY PRINTER
SDISABLE
@

UP]

Place SEND commands in your batch control

progress of

your batch job.

@IF

@SEND

(ERROR)

14915

@SEND

122

122 Error

PROJEC batch

file to monitor the

PROJEC batch

job

run

almost done

Send a message to a user who has two jobs
on
two
different
terminals.
Send the message to the terminal that is running
the

EXEC.

@SEND JOHNSON Ready for lunch?
TTY26, running EXEC
TTY4, running PASCAL

TTY:

297

SET

Sets or
file, a

modifies various characteristics
device, or some other entity.

your

job,

directory,

Format

@SET argument(s)

setting(s)

where
argument

is a
your

setting

is a
word
or
meaning of most

Summary

ACCOUNT

SET

keyword, chosen from the list
choice of SET command options

Command

account

ADDRESS-BREAK

number,
required
SET commands

Arguments

(defaults

remark

octal

@@AFTER n

symbolic

Default n -

@QALL

memory

address,

Q@EXECUTE
@@NONE
Q@READ
Q@WRITE

ALERT date/time message
AUTOMATIC
CARD-READER-INPUT-SET
CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY

CARDS

name

input

file

type

/switch(es)

COMPILE-SWITCHES

PAPER-TAPE
DEFAULT | PLOT

/switch(es)

SUBMIT

/switch(es)

ALLOW

TAKE |DISALLOW

set

.ECHO
NO

ECHO

298

/switch(es)

below,

indicating

complete

boldface)

the

SET (Cont.)

FACCOUNT—DEFAULT dev:<directory> account
password

ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES

FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT dev:<directory>
password
Default code ~ 7777080

octal

code

DIRECTORY GENERATION--RETENTION-COUNT-DEFAULT dev:<directory>
password

Default

DIRECTORY

NO ARCHIVE~-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES

OFFLINE-EXPIRATION~-DEFAULT dev:<directory>date or +n
Default n - 90
ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT dev:<directory>date or +n
Default n - 60
PASSWORD dev:<directory>
old password
new

password

new

password

PROTECTION dev:<directory>

octal

protection

code

password

—

Default

ENTRY~-VECTOR

code

77770880

octal or symboli{] octal or symbolic length

memory

location

Default

between

length

ACCOUNT
filespecs account
EPHEMERAL filespecs
EXPIRED filespecs
GENERATION-RETENTION-~COUNT

and

777

filespecs

Default

INVISIBLE

EPHEMERAL

filespecs

|PROHIBIT filespecs
RESIST filespecs
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION filespecs

FILE

ONLINE-EXPIRATION filespecs
PROHIBIT filespecs
PROTECTION filespecs
octal

RESIST

Default code filespecs

date

protection code
777700

| VISIBLE

HOST node-name:: | /CTERM
/NRT
LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD

LOCATION node-name
MAIL-WATCH

NAME

user-name

Default

node-name - your

message-count

fork-name

299

host

node

n -

SET (Cont.)

ADDRESS~-BREAK
ALERT
AUTOMATIC
CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY

[ CARDS

COMPILE-SWITCHES

file

type

PAPER-TAPE
DEFAULT | PLOT
PRINT

SUBMIT
_?AKE

LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD

MAIL-WATCH

user-name

RETRIEVAL-WAIT
TIME-LIMIT
<RET>

TRAP | FILE-OPENINGS

JSYS|

/ALL
/DEFINED
/UNDEFINED
name

number
UUO-SIMULATION

rCOPY--ON-WRITE
EXECUTE

COPY-ON-WRITE

PAGE-ACCESS

octal

page

numbers

NO|{WRITE
NONEXISTENT

READ
WRITE

[ EPHEMERAL

CONTINUE

PROGRAM

fork-name

KEEP | REENTER

START

NO-EPHEMERAL
| NONE

RETRIEVAL-WAIT

SESSION-REMARK

remark

SPOOLED-OUTPUT [;E

IMMEDIATE
FERRED

STATUS-WATCH,

@Q@INTERRUPT
@eNo
@@PAGES
@@TOPS-10-PAGES

300

characters

SET (Cont.)

[ 200
556

DENSITY

800

1690
6250
| SYSTEM-DEFAULT

[ ANSI-ASCII
CORE-DUMP

TAPE

HIGH-DENSITY
INDUS TRY~-COMPATIBLE

FORMAT

SIXBIT

SYSTEM-DEFAULT

rEVEN

PARITY

oDD

RECORD-LENGTH

TERMINAL

feature

bytes

Default

512

type

TIME--LIMIT n

[ FILE-OPENINGS

/ALL
/DEFINED

JSYS | /UNDEFINED
name

—

|_number

<RET>
TRAP|

NO|FILE-OPENINGS

/ALL
/DEFINED

JSYS | /UNDEFINED
name

number
|PROCEED

PROCEED
TYPEOUT MODE

NUMERIC

| SYMBOLIC
UUO

SIMULATION

SET

ACCOUNT

account

Command

Arguments

remark

begins charging
the
specified
account
for
the
remainder
of
your
current
terminal session or un til
you
use
the
command
again.
You
must
supply
an
alphanumeric account n ame of 39 or fewer
characters
wvalid
for
your
user name.
Then you can type
an
optional
session
remark,
also of 39 or fewer characters,
to be inserted in syst em accounting data
for
your
current
terminal
session.
Check your current acc ount
and
session
remark with INFORMATION JOB-STATUS.

301

SET (Cont.)

ADDRESS-BREAK

octal

symbolic

memory

location,

Q@AFTER n

be
on

your terminal
when the memory
location
you
specify
is
referenced
for
the
indicated
operation - execute,
read,
write, or any of these (ALL).
With
the

Q@ALL

@@EXECUTE
Q@NONE
@@READ

AFTER

@QWRITE

times it must be referenced
before
the
address
break
occurs;
with
NONE
vyou
cancel address breaks for the
specified

subcommand

location,

you determine

just

with

how

the

many

SET

ADDRESS-BREAK

command.

Each

ADDRESS-BREAK

command

cancels

any

Check

your

address

current

break.

address

break

with

SET

INFORMATION

ADDRESS~-BREAK.

Default

subcommands

ALL,

and

AFTER

date and
hh :mm

hh:mm

ALERT | +hh:mm

message

day-of-week and +hh:mm
TODAY and +hh:mm
causes the system
bell
andtype
a

date
time

and
of

(+),

used

to ring your
1line
at the

terminal
specified

time.
This line
contains
day and your message.
The
with

arguments,

the

adds

day-of-week

the

time

you

the
sign

and TODAY
specify to

the beginning of the
day
(90:00:00
midnight).
For example, the command

or
SET

ALERT

alert

for

time

THURSDAY

+10:00

sets

Thursday
plus sign
argument,

at 10:00 A.M,
If you omit the
after a day-of-week
or
TODAY
the
time
1is
interpreted as

part

the

argument
or

TODAY

the
For

message.

used

When

without

argument,

the

plus

day-of-week
sign

adds

specified time to the current time.
example, the command SET ALERT +1:00

sets

the

an alert

command

for

one

hour

from

the

time

is given.

If
the
SET
AUTOMATIC
command
1is
1in
effect,
this
message is sent no matter
what you are
doing
at
your
terminal.
Otherwise,
you
are
alerted
only when
your terminal is about to type a TOPS-20

prompt

@).

Alert

settings

are

erased when you log out.
Therefore, you
should
enter
this
command
in
your
COMAND.CMD
file
if
you
want
to
be

alerted
regular
command
to

in
the
distant future
basis. Check the setting
with

Example

302

INFORMATION ALERTS.

or
of

on a
this
Refer

SET (Cont.)

AUTOMATIC

allows you to be notified by the
system
(as
a
result
of
a
SET
ALERT or SET
MAIL-WATCH command) whether or not
your
job
is at TOPS-2¢ command level.,
Every
five minutes, the system checks
to
see

if
you
should
be
notified.
It
is
recommended that you enter this
command
in the LOGIN.CMD file to ensure coverage
from the time you log
in.
Check
with
INFORMATION

ALERTS

INFORMATION

COMMAND-LEVEL.,

CARD-READER-INPUT-SET

name of input set
n
is used by the batch system to associate
the
indicated
set
of
punch
cards,
beginning
with
deck
n,
with
system
device CDR:

CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY

allows
any
program
executed
at
the
current
command
level to handle CTRL/C
interrupts itself.
You cannot use
this
command
in
a
batch
job.
Check
the
current
setting
with
INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS.,

Default

CARDS /switch(es)
COMPILE-SWITCHES file-type /switch(es)
PAPER~TAPE /switch(es)
PLOT /switch(es)
PRINT /switch(es)
EPHEMERAL
DEFAULT

PROGRAM

| KEEP argument
NO-EPHEMERAL
NONE

SUBMIT /switch(es)
ALLOW
DISALLOW

TAKE |ECHO

NO ECHO

sets up,

as default global arguments to

the command selected, the arguments
you
specify.
CARDS
refers
to
the
PUNCH
CARDS command, COMPILE- SWITCHES to
all
the
LOAD-class commands, and PAPER-TAPE
to the PUNCH PAPER TAPE command.
These
arguments
are
any
switch
or
keyword
valid for the given command.
For COMPILE-SWITCHES, you
must
specify
the
type
of file you want the switches
applied to
by
preceding
the
switches
with
one of the following:
a file type
(excluding the
period),
a
period
for
file
specifications
with
a
null
extension, or an asterisk
(*)
for
all
file types.
Check current settings with
INFORMATION

303

DEFAULTS.

SET (Cont.)

DIRECTORY ACCOUNT-DEFAULT dev:<directory>

default account

PASSWORD:password

sets
the
account
of
39
or
fewer
characters
to
charge for your terminal
session whenever
you
1log
in
to
this
directory without specifying an account.
Check with INFORMATION DIRECTORY.
DIRECTORY ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES dev:<directory>
causes on-line files that
have
to
be
automatically
archived.
with INFORMATION DIRECTORY.
DIRECTORY

FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT dev:<directory>

octal

expired
Check

code

PASSWORD: password

sets a default protection code governing
access
to files subsequently created in
the directory.
See description of
FILE
PROTECTION
argument for a list of valid
protection
codes.
Check
with
INFORMATION

Default

DIRECTORY.

code

777700

DIRECTORY GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT-DEFAULT dev:<directory>

PASSWORD:password

prescribes for the directory
a
default
value
for
the number of generations of
subsequently-created
files
to
save.
Check with INFORMATION DIRECTORY.
Default n - 1
DIRECTORY

NO ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES

prevents on-line files that have expired
from being automatically archived
Default

DIRECTORY

OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT dev:<directory> date or +n
sets the tape expiration date for
files
that
are
to
go
off
1line
because of
archiving or migration.
If you
specify
"+n", the expiration date is n days from
the date the files were moved off line.
Default n - 99

304

SET (Cont.)

DIRECTORY ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT dev:<directory> date or +n
sets the disk expiration date for
files
that are to be created in the directory.
If you specify "+n", the expiration date
is n days

from the creation date.

Default n

DIRECTORY PASSWORD dev:<directory>
01d password:old password
New password:new password
Retype new password:new password

allows you to change the password of the
can
password
The
named.
directory

consist

wup

alphanumeric

including hyphens.

characters,

DIRECTORY PROTECTION dev:<directory> octal protection code
Password:password

a
directory
the
for
establishes
(by
constructed
code
protection
below.
shown
addition) from the values
Check

full

with

INFORMATION DIRECTORY,

access to the directory

expunging
(including
the directory
in
files
with the file protection of
consistent
files),

to
access
individual

connect to the directory without giving a password, undelete
files, expunge the entire directory, and change times, dates
1is
access
All other
and accounting information for files.
governed by the file protection of each file,

g4
00

the

files

create files in the directory
no access to the directory
Default code ~ 777700

for
Guide
See the TOPS-20 User's
information about protection codes.

ENTRY-VECTOR

octal or symbolic

memory location

octal or symbolic length

from 1 to 777
lets you change the entry vector of
the
Check the current
memory.
in
program
setting with INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE.
Default

FILE ACCOUNT

filespecs

account

length -

specifies
the
account
to
charge
for
Check with
of the files named.
storage
the DIRECTORY command
and
the
ACCOUNT
subcommand.

3085

SET (Cont.)

FILE

EPHEMERAL

filespec

assigns

system

ephemeral

program,

attribute

The

program

placed

in an
it by

ephemeral fork only when
you
run
typing just the program name as an

EXEC

command.

system

Running

with

the

program

ephemeral
R

command

cancels the ephemeral attribute.
For
a
description
of
an
ephemeral fork, see
the ERUN command, Characteristics of
an
Ephemeral Fork.

Wheel
or
Operator
privileges
are
required
to
set
a
system
program
ephemeral.
Refer
to
Example
11
for
setting
a
system
program
ephemeral.
Refer

Example

programs

for

typing

running

only

your

the

own

program

name.

FILE

EXPIRED

filespecs

establishes today as the expiration date
for
the specified on-line files.
Check
with the DIRECTORY command and the DATES
ONLINE~-EXPIRATION subcommand.
FILE

GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT

filespecs

tells the system how many generations of
the specified files to save.
Check with
the
DIRECTORY
command
and
the
GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT subcommand.
Default n - 1
FILE

INVISIBLE

fillespecs

makes

the

most

Check

specified

programs

with

INVISIBLE

FILE

EPHEMERAL

the

file

and

inaccessible

TOPS-20

commands.

DIRECTORY command

and

the

subcommand.

filespec

removes
system

the

ephemeral

program.

privileges
system

are

attribute
Wheel

required

from

Operator

alter

program.

You

can cancel the
ephemeral
attribute
for
your
copy of a system program with
the SET PROGRAM NO~EPHEMERAL command or,
by
running
the
program
with
the
R
command instead
of
simply
typing
the
system

FILE

PROHIBIT

program

name

command.

filespecs

allows

the

specified
disk space
users

command

system

only.

and

subcommand.
Default

306

migrate

file
to
off-line
becomes low.
For
Check

the

with

the

storage

the

privileged
DIRECTORY

PROHIBIT-MIGRATION

SET (Cont.)

FILE NO RESIST filespecs

FILE
SET
the
of
effect
the
cancels
This switch allows the
RESIST command.
to
files
specified
system to move the

hesitating.
without
storage
off-line
Check with the DIRECTORY command and the
RESIST-MIGRATION subcommand.
Default

FILE OFFLINE-EXPIRATION filespecs date or +n
when
specifies

an
of
contents
the
from
expunged
can be
file
off-line
"+n%,
If you specify
off-line storage.
date is n days from the
expiration
the
Check with
date it was moved off line.
DATES
the
and
command
DIRECTORY
the
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION subcommand.

FILE ONLINE-EXPIRATION filespecs date or +n

disk
the
establishes the date on which
files will
the specified
of
contents
the
"+n",
specify
you
If
expire.
the
from
n days
1is
expiration date
current date.
the
command

DIRECTORY
Check with the
ONLINE-EXPIRATION
DATES

subcommand.

FILE

PROHIBIT filespecs

the
For
(Nonprivileged
only.
privileged users
users should refer to the description of
also
See
the SET FILE RESIST command.
Hints - Alternative to SET FILE PROHIBIT
Check
for Non—-privileged Users, below.)
the
and
DIRECTORY command
the
with

migrate
to
tells the system never
specified file to off-line storage.

PROHIBIT-MIGRATION subcommand.

FILE PROTECTION filespecs octal protection code

a
files,
specified
the
for
sets,
(by
constructed
code
protection
shown
values
octal
addition) from the
Check with the DIRECTORY command
below.
and

the PROTECTION subcommand.

full access to the file
read the file
write and delete the file

execute the program contained in the file

append

to the

file

access the file using wildcarded file specifications
no access to

the

file

See the TOPS-20 User's Guide for

Default code - 777700

codes.

397

information

about

protection

SET (Cont.)

FILE

RESIST

filespecs

offers
nonprivileged
users
limited
protection
against
migration.
The
specified files will be forced
off-line
only
when
absolutely necessary.
Check
with
the
DIRECTORY
command
and
the
RESIST-MIGRATION

FILE

VISIBLE

subcommand.

filespecs

makes

the

speciflied file
accessible
to
programs
and
TOPS-20
commands.
with the DIRECTORY command and the

all
Check

INVISIBLE

subcommand.
Default

HOST

Due

the

number

HOST

command,

from

the

command

of
is

options

described

SET command.
description

See

the

SET

separately

SET

following

HOST

the

SET

command.
LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD

instructs
terminal
causes

the system
input
made

prompt.

error

Check

to
disregard
after a line

and

the

before

the

setting

for

all
that
next

your

current

level
of
TOPS-20
INFORMATION COMMAND-LEVEL,

LOCATION

node-name::

causes

all

output

sent

the

station.

Two

node

are

name

nodes
your
your

——
——
——
—
e
D
D ——
o
D

colons

(::)

with
current setting (if
host
node
[log-in

IBM

remote

following

the

available

and

different
node])

check
from
with

JOB-STATUS.

Default
user-name

request

specified

optional.
Check
INFORMATION DECNET,

INFORMATION

MAIL-WATCH

device

with

node-~name - your

host

node

message-count

checks the MAIL file for
the
specified
user
immediately and every five minutes
thereafter
whenever
your
terminal
is
about to type a TOPS-28 prompt (@ or $),
and sends a message notifying
you
that
the
user
has
new
mail
1f
this file
contains unread mail.
If
you
specify
your

own

user-name,

you

receive

message

the

[You have mail from USER-NAME at
P0:00:00].
If
you specify a user-name
other than your
own,
vyou
receive
the

message

[RECEIVER-USER-NAME

has

malil

from SENDER-USER-NAME at 0¢:00:90].
You
must
have
read access to the specified
user's mail file.

308

SET (Cont.)

the
sets
argument
count
The message
notified of
are
you
times
of
number
AUTOMATIC
SET
the
If
mail.
unread
effect, this message is
in
is
command
at
doing
are
you
sent no matter what
The maximum number of
terminal.
your
five.
1is
users that you can MAIL-WATCH
Refer

Example 10.
user—name - your user-name
Default message-count - 1000
Default

NAME

fork-name

the
with
fork
current
the
renames
Select the
specified alphanumeric name.
command.
FORK
the
with
fork
current
Check with

INFORMATION FORK-STATUS.

If you give a fork the name of a program

in a SET PROGRAM command, the
specified
attributes
the
receive
will
fork
PROGRAM command.
SET
the
in
assigned
glven
you have
suppose
example,
For
these

two commands:

SET PROGRAM COMPUTE KEEP CONTINUE
SET PROGRAM SQUARE EPHEMERAL

If only COMPUTE is

memory

and

Yyou

name it SQUARE, the fork will assume the

PROGRAM
SET
the
attributes defined in
and become an ephemeral
command
SQUARE
with
this
1indicates
The system
fork.
attributes of
[Assuming
message
the
SQUARE].

you
If
A fork must have a unique name.,
fork with the same
a
name
to
attempt
name as another fork, the system appends
For example,
to the new name.
digit
a
if you attempted to name two forks EDIT,
the second fork would be named EDIT@.
NO ALERT date/time

removes settings that

were

established

You can
command.
ALERT
SET
the
with
same
the
in
time
and
date
specify
ALERT.
SET
with
as
formats
or
BEFORE
enter
Additionally, you can
and time to indicate a
date
the
AFTER

be
to
are
time period in which alerts
you specify no date or
If
suppressed.,
are
settings
alert
time argument, all
are valid only for the
Alerts
erased.
erased
current terminal session and are
automatically when you log out.
Default

309

SET (Cont.)

AUTOMATIC
causes

(as

you

result

MAIL-WATCH

alerted

command)

the

SET

system

ALERT or

only

when

terminal

SET
your

is
about
to
type
a TOPS-20
prompt (@ or $).
Check with INFORMATION
ALERTS or INFORMATION COMMAND-LEVEL,

|
|

Default

CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY

removes the ability of programs
at
the
current level of TOPS-20 to prevent your
terminal from returning to
the
TOPS-20

command
CTRL/C;

i.e.,

return

you

setting
TOPS-20

for
with

processor

whenever
you type a
ensures that
CTRL/C
will
to

TOPS-20.

Check

the

your
current
level
of
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS.

CARDS

COMPILE-SWITCHES

file-type

PAPER-TAPE
PLOT

DEFAULT

EPHEMERAL
PROGRAM | KEEP
NO-EPHEMERAL
NONE

SUBMIT

nullifies
(established

all

default

with

command)

for the
COMPILE-SWITCHES

indicated
you

arguments
SET

DEFAULT

command.

must

For

specify

the

type of file for which you want to clear
the
switches with one of the following:
a file type (excluding
the
@period),
a
period
for
file
specifications with a
null extension, or an
*
to
clear
the
switches for all file types.
Check with
INFORMATION

LATE-~-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD

instructs

input

DEFAULTS.

the

made

system

after

sent

prompt.

your

current

accept
and

Check

setting

the

terminal

error message

terminal

level

INFORMATION

before

for

TOPS-20

is
the

your

with

COMMAND-LEVEL,

Default
NO

MAIL-WATCH

user-name

disables

periodic

checking

the

MAIL

file associated with the specified user.
The
notice
of
new
mail
is
still
displayed
at
1log-in
time and when you
receive mail, unless you have given
the

REFUSE

SYSTEM-MESSAGES

command.
status

REFUSE

LINKS

You

can

always

check

the

your

MAIL

file

any

time

giving the INFORMATION MAIL command.
Default user-name - your user-name
Default

319

SET (Cont.)

to
system
the
tells
your Jjob
if
message

RETRIEVAL-WAIT

an
send
attempts

error
to use

off-1line files.
Default

SET
the
of
effect
the
cancels
the
ing
disabl
,
d
comman
~-WATCH
STATUScharacter
or
character
interrupt
sequence that displays the status of all

STATUS-WATCH

open,

TIME-LIMIT

TRAP

pages.

mapped

removes any time limit set by a previous

You cannot use
SET TIME-LIMIT command.
this command in a batch job.

prevents any trapping that would have
occurred as the result of a SET TRAP
command.

Default

nullifies the effects of the SET TRAP
command, disabling the
FILE-OPENINGS
TOPS-2@# feature that causes you to be

TRAP FILE-OPENINGS

notified
file.

when a program tries to open a

Default

/ALL
/DEFINED
NO

TRAP JS5YS|

/UNDEFINED
name

the

nullifies the effects of

number

SET

TRAF

command, disabling the TOPS=-20
JSYS
feature that causes traps to occur when

a JSYS is executed.
Default

TRAP
NO

same as TRAP NO PROCEED.

PROCEED

disables

UUO-SIMULATION

monitor

the

that

feature

makes

the

TOPS5-20

it possible to use

the
programs originally written for
Check the
TOPS-10 operating system.
INFORMATION
with
setting
current
PROGRAM-STATUS.

PAGE-ACCESS range of octal page numbers
Sets the
programs
existing

type of access
type
for

of access allowed to
pages
specified
the

in memory.

COPY-ON-WRITE

provides programs with private copies of
the specified pages (13:17, 21 specifies
pages 13 through 17 and page 21, 6 pages
in all) of current memory whenever they
try to change (write to)

EXECUTE

them

allows programs accessing these pages to
they may
instructions
the
execute
contain
311

SET (Cont.)

COPY-ON-WRITE
NO

WRITE
prevents

programs

indicated

from

operation

performing

the

specified

pages

NONEXISTENT

removes
READ

Check

fork-name

pages

programs

indicated

pages of memory

the

from memory

examine

programs to change
the indicated pages

status

INFORMATION

PROGRAM

indicated

permits

permits
examine

WRITE

the

current

memory

the

well

pages

with

MEMORY-USAGE.

EPHEMERAL
tells the system to make
the
specified
fork
an
ephemeral
fork
when
it
is
loaded.
For
a
description
of
an
ephemeral
fork,
see
the ERUN command,
Characteristics of an Ephemeral Fork.

It is recommended
command
in
your
programs

that

ephemeral

forks.

that

you
enter
COMAND.CMD
file

you

commonly

Check

with

PROGRAM~STATUS.

this
for

place

INFORMATION

CONTINUE

PROGRAM

fork-name

KEEP|

REENTER
START

tells the system to make
the
specified
fork
a kept fork automatically when the
fork is loaded, or
immediately
if
the
fork
1s already loaded.
A kept fork is

not

reset

when

another

and

fork

1is

1loaded

1is
not
reset by the RESET command
unless the kept fork is explicitly named
or
the
asterisk
(*),
or
period
(.)
argument is specified.
The required KEEP attribute
establishes
where the program restarts when you type
the
fork
name
as
an
EXEC
command.

CONTINUE

begins

the

program

the

point

where
it
was
interrupted.
REENTER
begins
the
program
at
its
reentry
address (for most programs
the
reentry
address
is
the
same
as
the
start
address).
START begins the
program
at
its
start
address.
The system informs
you

when

the

fork

message

[Keeping

type

kept

the

fork

responds

[REENTERING],

312

with

“kept"TM

with

fork-name]l.

name,

the

When

the
you

system

[CONTINUING],

[STARTING].

SET (Cont.)

forks
keeps
This command automatically
typing the system
by
loaded
are
that
following
the
program name or one of
CSAVE, GET, R, RUN, and SAVE.
commands:

this
enter
It is recommended that you
for
file
COMAND.CMD
your
in
command
programs that you commonly place in kept
INFORMATION
with
Check
forks.
9.
Example
to
Refer
PROGRAM-STATUS.
CONTINUE
the
on
restriction
a
For
command
argument, refer to the CONTINUE
under
description
Restrictions:

PROGRAM fork-name NO-EPHEMERAL

disables
your

copy

Do Not
Continued Programs

Input.

for

Prompt

the

ephemeral
a

attribute

system program.

for

Note

program's
a
also cancel
that you can
the
by running
attribute
ephemeral
of
instead
program with the R command
It is
program name.
the
typing just
recommended that you enter this command
to
Refer
file.
COMAND.CMD
your
in
Example

PROGRAM fork-name NONE

13.

the
cancels the setting established for
PROGRAM
SET
the
with
fork
specified
kept
a
in
If the program is
command.
when the fork
used
address
the
fork,
name is given as a command is changed to
with
Check
address.
start
the
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS.,

RETRIEVAL-WAIT

is
tells the system that your Jjob
of
retrieval
for
wait
to
willing
then
is
Retrieval
files.
off-line

whenever you or a
implicitly
requested
access
to
attempts
run
you
program

off-line

files.

Use

INFORMATION

SYSTEM-STATUS to be sure that automatic
the
for
enabled
are
waits
retrieval
system before giving this command.

SESSION-REMARK remark

lets you insert a note or reminder of up
39 characters into system accounting
to
JOBINFORMATION
with
Check
data.
STATUS.

313

SET (Cont.)

IMMEDIATE
SPOOLED-OUTPUT | DEFERRED

directs

the

Processing
as

soon

them

system
your

you

wuntil

make

requests

PRINT,

processed

command

line

spooled

class
the

with

program

output

the

LPT:,
-

commands,
LPT
and

are

but

with

writes

files

(for

example,

plotter

CDP:).

/LIST

PLOT,

(these

that

device

defer

spooled

the

commands

punch

commands,

immediately),

printer

card

begin
requests

You make

not

PUNCH

output

them,

log-out.

output

always

either

spooled

The

switch

PLT:,
COPY

for

LOAD

the
CREF
command,
OUTPUT
subcommands

DIRECTORY-class

and
for

and SYSTAT commands
may
spooled
output
requests,
Check
INFORMATION SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION.

make
with

Default -

IMMEDIATE

STATUS-WATCH,

@@INTERRUPT
@@NOo

@Q@PAGES
@eTOPS-10

sets

displays

PAGES

Interrupt

the

non-execute

fork.
e

files

the
job
file
identifies
a
program

references

the

number.
file to the
the

the

file.

the

file

file
position
displayed in the

open,
current

JFN

The
job.

JFN
The

all

specification.

pages mapped

and
form

where

nn is
the
(mm)
is
the
displayed if file

uses

that

all

includes:

file

mapped

The display

user

character

status

process.
byte
size
"Byte nn(mm)""

byte
byte

pointer
and
size.
Not
position is zero.

file
size
displayed
in
the
form
"Page nn of mm" where nn is the page
being
read
and
mm
is
the
total
number
of
pages in the file.
If a
single number is
displayed,
as
1in
"Page nn", nn is the total number of
pages in
the
file.
For
example,
"Page
5
of
9" represents a 9-page
input file where page 5 is currently
being read.
"Page 11" represents an
output file where 11 pages have been

created.
not

Note

read

that

some

the

programs

input

sequentially.

The

mode

append)
opened.

314

access

for

which

(read,
the

write

file

has

and
been

SET (Cont.)

Although much of the
above
is
also
provided
by
the

information
INFORMATION
FILE-STATUS
and
INFORMATION
MEMORY
commands,
these
commands
can
only
display information while your
terminal
is
at
EXEC
command
level.
The
STATUS-WATCH
interrupt
character
functions
from
EXEC
or program level.
In
addition,
the
interrupt
character

displays the status of an executing EXEC
command (for example, COPY).
To

check the

program,

you

status

of pages mapped

must specify one of these

subcommands:
PAGES,
or
TOPS-10-PAGES.
The
interrupt character always displays
the
pages
opened
by
the
EXEC,
for
example
the
pages
opened
by
a
COPY
command.
When
an
EXEC
command
is
processing,
only
the
EXEC's pages are
checked.
If no command is in
progress,

the

address

fork's

current

checked.
If there is no
no checking takes place.

space

current

|is

fork,

For
efficiency
and
to
reduce
the
overhead
of
this command, a maximum of
512 pages (not including EXEC pages) are
checked
by
the
interrupt
character.
These pages do not have to be contiguous
or in the same section.,

SET
typing,
your
simplify
To
STATUS~-WATCH
accepts
subcommands
as
arguments on the command line.
INTERRUPT ""“x" is a required
subcommand
that
sets
a
control
character
or
character
sequence
that,
when
typed
during
program
or
EXEC
command
execution, displays the
status
of
all
files
opened
by the current fork.
Use
the FORK command to select
a
different
current

fork.

The interrupt character can be a
single
control
character
or
a
two-character
sequence enclosed in double quotes.
For
example,
"°"B",
"DF",
"“QW"
are valid
interrupt
characters.
Control
characters
that are already used by the
system,
such
as
CTRL/C
and
CTRL/T,
cannot be

redefined

See Appendix

D for

system control

315

by SET STATUS-WATCH.

1list

characters.

defined

SET (Cont.)

two-character

job-wide and
level.
defines

sequence

interrupt

can be

(for

example

with

sequence

supersedes

EXEC

the

your
Jjob
interrupt

the

SET

HOST

CTERM-SERVER),
the

SET

any EXEC

this

STATUS-WATCH

-sequence.
A single-character
applies only
to
the
current

level.

character

from

another program in
a
two-character

command

interrupt
interrupt

sequence

issued

Also,

not

INTERRUPT

the

echoed

disables

interrupt

the

terminal.
interrupt

characters.
PAGES

adds

the

specified

(nn)
or
range
of
pages
checked
by
character.
Multiple
pages

can

pages

specified

pages
with
commas.
100:40, 350 specifies
149 and page 354.
NO

PAGES

except

disables

pages

(n:m)
to the
interrupt

and

ranges

separating

For

example,

pages

checking

used

octal

pages
the

the

180

for

of
the

PAGE

through

all

pages

EXEC.

The total number of mapped pages checked
by
the
interrupt
character
(not
including EXEC pages) cannot exceed 512,
Generally, programs map pages within the
range

#:777.

TOPS-10-PAGES

adds

PAl@56

the
pages
used
TOPS-10
compatibility)

the

space

(for
address

interrupt character.
It

recommended

STATUS

See

command

Example

checked

that

you

your

COMAND.CMD

place

the

to
the

SET

file.

14,

200
TAPE

DENSITY

556
800
1609
6250
SYSTEM-DEFAULT

instructs the system to read

magnetic
indicated

tapes

for

density

SYSTEM-DEFAULT,

(usually

1600),

system

manager.

command

can

within

INFORMATION

(in

bits

one

and

Jjob

per

write
the

inch).

these

established

values

your

The value set by this
superseded
by
commands

program,

Check

TAPE-PARAMETERS,

Default -

316

your

SYSTEM-DEFAULT

with

SET (Cont.)

[ ANSI-ASCII

CORE-DUMP
HIGH-DENSITY

TAPE

FORMAT | INDUSTRY-COMPATIBLE
SIXBIT
L.

SYSTEM-DEFAULT

advises the system that

the

format

¢to

either
1is
tapes
processing
in
use
of
word
each
ANSI-ASCII, which stores
as five 7-bit bytes in five frames
data
which
CORE-DUMP,
of a 9-track type; or
data as a single
of
word
each
stores
9-track
36-bit byte in five frames of a
using the fifth frame;
partially
tape,
two
each
or HIGH-DENSITY, which stores
nine 8-bit bytes in
as
data
of
words
or
tape;
9-track
a
of
frames
nine
stores each
which
INDUSTRY-COMPATIBLE,
word of data as four 8-bit bytes in four
tape; or SIXBIT,
9-track
a
of
frames
six
as
which stores each word of data
1in six frames of a 7-track
bytes
6-bit
these
of
one
SYSTEM-DEFAULT,
tape.
1is chosen by your
CORE-DUMP),
(usually
See also Restrictions system manager.
Commands, in the MOUNT
TAPE
SET
Using
See
command description in this manual.
Reference
Calls
Monitor
TOPS-20
the
about
information
more
for
Manual
data modes for magnetic tapes.
hardware
Check with INFORMATION TAPE~PARAMETERS.,
Default - SYSTEM-DEFAULT

EVEN

TAPE

PARITY

assume
tells the system which parity to
tape
of
accuracy
the
verifying
when
INFORMATION
with
Check
records.

|[ODD

TAPE-PARAMETERS.,

Default - ODD

TAPE

size,
the
sets
record
physical

RECORD-~LENGTH n

1in bytes,
on a tape.

each
for
Check with

TAPE-PARAMETERS.
INFORMATION
applicable with labeled tapes.
Default n - 512

TERMINAL

feature or

same as
tells

TERMINAL command.

the

system

stop any program

is
command
This
fatal error message.
batch system to limit the
the
by
used
Display the time
runtime of batch jobs.
for your job with the SYSTAT
set
limit
subcommand.
LIMIT
the
and
command
time used by your job
CPU
Display the
INFORMATION
or
CTRL/T
with
PROGRAM~STATUS.

—

c—

——
S

printout when the given amount
terminal
has
of additional CPU time (in seconds)
you with a
inform
to
and
used,
been

——

TIME-LIMIT n

type

Not

317

SET (Cont.)

TRAP

FILE-OPENINGS

displays
attempts

a
message
to
open
a

INFORMATION

Example

when
any
program
file.
Check with

PROGRAM-STATUS.

Refer

/ALL
/DEFINED

TRAP JSYS| /UNDEFINED
name

number

displays
a
message
when
any
program
calls
a
TOPS-2¢
JSY¥YS.
You can cause
trapping to occur
for
all
JSYSs,
for
defined
JSYSs
only (JSYSs known to the
Monitor),
for
wundefined
JSY¥YSs
only
(JSYSs not known to the Monitor), or for
the JSYS(s) specified by name or number.
You can specify multiple JSYSs separated
by
commas.
Check
with
INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS.

Default

Refer

Example

/DEFINED
NOTE

The
SET
ineffective
programs
protection
reading and

TRAP
command
is
for
execute-only
(those
with
a
code
that prohibits
writing
the
file).

Attempts
after a

TRAP

FILE-OPENINGS

been

to
run
such programs
SET
TRAP
command
has
specified
will
result in

error

messages.

same

SET

TRAP.

same

SET

TRAP

FILE-OPENINGS.

same

SET

TRAP

JSYS.

F}ALL
TRAP

JSYS

/DEFINED
/UNDEFINED
name

number

TRAP NO PROCEED

directs
the
system
to
terminate
the
program
after
a trap has occurred as a
result of a
SET
TRAP
command.
Check
with
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS.
Refer
to

TRAP

PROCEED

Example

directs
after a
a

SET

the system to continue
trap has occurred as a
TRAP

INFORMATION

Default

318

command .

PROGRAM-STATUS.

a program
result of

Check

with

SET (Cont.)

TYPEOUT MODE [FUMERIC

SYMBOLIC

establishes the
mode
in
which
memory
addresses
and
contents are to be typed
on
your
terminal
in
response,
for
example,
to
a
CTRL/T or the commands:
INFORMATION
FORK-STATUS,
and EXAMINE,

typeout
1is
programs.

ADDRESS-BREAK,

INFORMATION
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS,
Note
that
only
NUMERIC

displayed
for
with
Check

execute-only
INFORMATION

PROGRAM-STATUS.

Default - NUMERIC

UUO-SIMULATION

allows the system
to
execute
programs
originally
written
for
the
TOPS-1¢
operating system, by calling the TOPS-1#
compatibility
package,
PA1050.EXE,
Check
the
current
setting
with
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS.
Default

Characteristics

Affect Only Current Terminal

The SET command,

Session

for

except

DIRECTORY

SET

and

SET

FILE,

applies
to
the
current terminal session only, and in most
cases only to the current level of TOPS-28 in that
session.
Therefore

put

SET

DEFAULT,

SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY,

SET

PROGRAM, and other SET commands into your COMAND,CMD file if
you
want them to be in effect every time you log in or give
the PUSH command.
Place commands that apply to any level of

TOPS-2@

in your

Hints

Using

SET

PAGE-ACCESS

A SET PAGE-ACCESS command can take several arguments on

same

line,

with

cumulative

effect;

contradictions

the

are

resolved
in
favor
of
the
1last
item
given.
So
SET
PAGE-ACCESS
6
EXECUTE
NO
COPY-ON-WRITE NO WRITE allows a
user to execute page 6 but not to change it; SET PAGE-ACCESS
7 NO WRITE WRITE allows changes to page 7.
To Make Modifiable Copies of Write-protected

Programs

Because the SAVE command preserves the write
files,

you

should

use

the

SET

want to

save a modifiable copy of a

protection

PAGE ACCESS WRITE or

PAGE-ACCESS COPY-ON-WRITE command before giving SAVE if

319

program.

SET

you

SET (Cont.)

Using

SET

TIME-LIMIT

Although the SET TIME-LIMIT command is
ordinarily
used
by
the
batch
system
to
1limit
the
runtime of jobs, you can
employ it as a timesharing user to give you
a
fatal
error
message
spent.

give

when
the
To find out

the

commands.

and

SET

you

Commands
SET

LIMIT

amount

this

time

and

the

approximate

Useful

for

time

Debugging

CPU

INFORMATION

The difference between
"Used" time reported by

the

tells

SYSTAT

specified

how much

time

you

has

have

been

left,

PROGRAM-STATUS

the
SYSTAT . LIMIT
time
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS

remaining.

Programs

ADDRESS-BREAK
SET ADDRESS-BREAK

purpose

shows

memory

address break
location
at

you

how

address

1is

occurs, a message
which
execution

often

and

for

referenced,

what

When

an
will
show
the
memory
of
your
program
will

resume.

SET

CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY,

SET

UUO-SIMULATION,

SET

PAGE-ACCESS

you

are

debugging

CONTROL~-C-CAPABILITY

program,

command

use

ensure

the

that

you

SET

can

use

CTRL/C to leave the program.
Test a program that traps
CTRL/Cs
by having it trap, say, CTRL/As instead during
debugging.
Also, setting NO
CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY,
NO
UUO-SIMULATION,

COPY~-ON-WRITE

show

(if
Alternative

Even
FILE

any)

PAGE-ACCESS

attempting

SET

FILE

you do

not

PROHIBIT

will

PROHIBIT

have

you

what

use

for

you

can

these

the

program

features.

privileges

still

WRITE

Non-privileged

sufficient

command,

part

Users

use

something

the
to

SET

delay

the removal of important files to off-line storage.
Create
a file named MIGRATION.ORDER in each directory for which you
wish to control migration.
The contents of this file should
be . the specifications of files that you want. to be migrated
first, when migration is performed.
You
may
use
wildcard
characters
(*
and
%)
to
specify more than one file.
To
protect

source

executable

programs,

programs

for

and

example,

binary

you

could

specify

files

be migrated

offers

1limited

that

first,

listing
"*.,EXE,
*,REL"TM
in
MIGRATION.ORDER.
To
protect
edited
files,
you
could
1list
"*.0*"
(this ensures that
unedited back-up files
produced
by
the
EDIT
program
be
migrated
before the edited versions).
Any files not listed
in MIGRATION.ORDER will be protected
from
migration
until
all
1listed
files
have been migrated.
Remember that, even
without being
1listed
in
MIGRATION.ORDER,
files
are
not
usually
migrated to off-line storage if they have been used
or changed within a period of time specified by your
system
manager.,

The SET FILE RESIST command also
against involuntary migration.

329

protection

SET (Cont.)

Restrictions

Using

SET Commands in Batch Jobs

1log-in
1in your
into a BATCH.CMD file
Put SET commands
(highest)
first
the
to
apply
to
them
want
you
1if
directory
into
level of TOPS-28 in batch jobs you submit; put them
if you want them to
log-in directory
your
in
COMAND.CMD
apply to all levels of TOPS-20 in both batch and interactlve
SET
you must not give
that
though,
Remember,
jobs.
SET
CONTROL~C-CAPABILITY, SET NO TIME-LIMIT, or
(or the ATTACH command) within any batch job.

Using

TIME-LIMIT

SET DIRECTORY Commands

You will be able to use the SET DIRECTORY commands only 1if
1is instructed at system start-up time to allow
your system
Otherwise, the system will send you error messages in
them.
response to SET DIRECTORY commands.

Examples
l.

Set the LATE-CLEAR-~TYPEAHEAD parameter for your job.
@SET LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD

Find out the placement of your

program

memory;

set

address break to occur at location 2412 when the instruction
Then give the
times.
it contains has been executed six
see the location and
to
INFORMATION ADDRESS-BREAK command

operation for which the current address break has been set.
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE

5. pages,

Entry vector loc 400010 len 254000
R, W, E
E
R, W,

Private
Private

B=-3
400

@SET ADDRESS-BREAK 2412,
@QAFTER 6

@EEXECUTE

ee
@INFORMATION ADDRESS-BREAK
Address break at 2412 on execute.
3.

file
Set defaults for PRINT command switches, then print a
immediately by explicitly supplying an /AFTER switch with an

early hour

argument.

@SET DEFAULT PRINT /LOWERCASE/AFTER:17:00
@PRINT /AFTER:+@ 4-UPED,TXT

[(Job 4-UPED Queued, Request—-ID 346,
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /USER
Printer

Queue:

Job Name

Reqg#

Limit

* 4-UPED

346

209

Started at

16:11:11,

Limit 204]

User

LATTA

printed 0 of

There is 1 Job in the Queue
321

200 pages

(1 in Progress)

On Unit:0

SET (Cont.)

Put

executable

program

into

memory

and

set

the

page

access

your

own

copy

of its first page to NO COPY-ON-WRITE; try to deposit a value
(32) in memory location 588 of the page (this
fails).
Then
set
1its
page
access
to
COPY-ON-WRITE
and try once more,
succeeding this
time.
Give
the
INFORMATION
MEMORY-USAGE
command

page

again.

Notice

memory;

TESTF1.EXE

your

that

you

now

have

1longer

connected

mapped

from

the

file

directory.

@GET TESTF1
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
l.

pages,

Entry vector

loc

TESTF1.,EXE.3

145

len

254090
CW,

@SET PAGE-ACCESS g NO COPY-ON-WRITE

@DEPOSIT 500 32

?Can't write that page
@SET PAGE-ACCESS @ COPY-ON-WRITE

€DEPOSIT
500 32
[Shared]

@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE

pages,

Entry vector

loc

Private

]
Learn
@SET

what

files

are

145
W,

opened

len

254900

when

you

edit

file.

TRAP

@QEDIT

FILE-OPENINGS
LOGIN,CMD

[Fork” EDIT opening
[Fork EDIT opening
Edit: LOGIN.CMD
33
,
[Fork EDIT opening
*EU

SWITCH.INI.3
LOGIN.CMD,33

for
for

reading]
reading]

EDIT-BUFFER.OUT.100842

for

writing]

[Fork EDIT opening EDIT-BUFFER.OUT.108842 for reading]
[Fork

EDIT opening

for

writing]

[LOGIN,CMD,
34]
Cause

Then

edit

and

causes

[fork
<ac

trap

a
a

"trap"

occur

whenever

file.
line

The
type

the

GTFDB

EDIT command
out

<location>/<jsys

the

name>

the
location
1is
in
in the SET TYPEOUT MODE

@SET

JSYS

TRAP

@EDIT LOGIN,CMD

1is

the

following

JSYS

format:

1-4:"

symbolic
command.

form

1if

424153000000]

vyou

GTFDB

[EDIT trap 3515/ GTFDB Ac's

1-4:

1909004

Ac's

1-4:

20321

2000011

[EDIT
Edit:

executed.

GTFDB

"Ac's

contents>]

Note that
specified

JSYS

invokes

trap 3562/ GTFDB
LOGIN.CMD.
42

*EU

[LOGIN,CMD,
43]

322

424153000000)

SET (Cont.)

Specify that program execution is to halt
whenever
a
GTFDB
JSYS
causes
a
trap.
Then
edit a file.
The EDIT command
invokes the GTFDB JSYS, causing a trap to occur, which causes
the EDIT process to immediately halt.

@SET
@SET

@EDIT

[EDIT

TRAP NO PROCEED
TRAP JSYS GTFDB

trap

3515/ GTFDB

Arrange for
Then verify

Ac's

the system to
that you will

1-4:

1000004

remind you of
be reminded.

@SET ALERT MONDAY +11:00:00 Turn

@SET AUTOMATIC

@INFORMATION ALERTS

—

time

20321

future

424153000000]
obligation.

card

Next alert at 8-Jun-84 16:55:00 - Almost time to go homel!
Other alerts set for:
11-Jun—-84 @8:55:08 - Project meeting at 9:00
14-Jun-84 11:00:00 - Turn in last week's time card by noon

Alerts

are

automatic

Set the CHANGE and RADIUS programs to be automatically placed
in
kept
forks when they are run.
Then give the INFORMATION
PROGRAM~STATUS
command
to
display
all
the
SET
PROGRAM
settings.
Finally,
run
the CHANGE program.
Note that the
message [Keeping CHANGE] indicates that the program is
being
loaded into a kept fork.
@§§I PROGRAM RADIUS
@SET PROGRAM CHANGE
@INFORMATION

(ABOUT)

KEEP CONTINUE
KEEP CONTINUE
PROGRAM

Used @:00:35 in #:24:09
TOPS-20: 0:00:00.8
SET UUO-SIMULATION (FOR
SET

TYPEOUT MODE

PROGRAM)

NUMERIC

SET

PROGRAM RAD KEEP (AND) CONTINUE (WHEN INVOKED AS A COMMAND)
SET PROGRAM CAN KEEP (AND) CONTINUE (WHEN INVOKED AS A COMMAND)
SET PROGRAM MS KEEP (AND) START (WHEN INVOKED AS A COMMAND)
SET PROGRAM DSRPLUS KEEP (AND) START (WHEN INVOKED AS A COMMAND)
=> MS (1): Kept, C from IO wait at 104062, 0:00:01.6
@RUN CAN
[Keeping CAN]
CAN>

10.

Arrange for the system to check for new
mail
in
your
MAIL
file
and
1in the MAIL file of user AI.GROUP,
Notice the two
messages indicating that you
and
AI.GROUP
have
new
mall.,
Then, cancel mail watching for user AI.GROUP.

QSET MAIL-WATCH

@SET MAIL-WATCH AI.GROUP

[You have mail from SMITH at 10:12:11)
[AI.GROUP has mail from NELSON at 10:12:14]

@SET NO MAIL-WATCH AI.GROUP

323

SET (Cont.)

11.

Use

the

DIRECTORY command

learn

the

name

the

directory

that
contains
a
system program.
Then enable your Wheel
Operator privileges and set the system file ephemeral.

@DIRECTORY SYS:ISPELL
RANDOM
: <UNSUPPORTED>

ISPELL.EXE,1
@ENABLE

$SET FILE EPHEMERAL RANDOM: <UNSUPPORTED>ISPELL,EXE
RANDOM: <UNSUPPORTED>ISPELL,
EXE.1

$DISABLE

[OK]

@
12,

Add one of your own
that
you
can
run
the program name.
@DEFINE

SYS:

directories
programs in

=> SYS5:,

to the definition of S¥S:
so
that directory by typing just

STUDENTS:<DBONIN.TOOLS>

Next, set ephemeral
a
file
1in
program
in
an
ephemeral
fork
Then
CTRL/C
from
the
program.
FORK-STATUS

has

been

command

and

note

@SET FILE

Give
the
ephemeral

the

INFORMATION
CHANGE

fork

EPHEMERAL CHANGE,EXE

@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS

13,

that

reset.

@CHANGE
CHANGE>"C
=> EDIT

this
directory.
Run
the
by typing the program name.

(1):

HALT at 6253,

Run an ephemeral system
ephemeral attribute.

@SET PROGRAM CHANGE
@CHANGE

0:00:00.6

program

and

disable

the

program's

NO-EPHEMERAL

CHANGE>
or

@R CHANGE
CHANGE
>

14.

Give
the
SET
STATUS-WATCH
command
with
the
INTERRUPT
subcommand
to
specify
CTRL/B
as
the interrupt character.
Then give the PAGES subcommand to specify the range of
pages
to
be
checked
by
the
interrupt
character.
Display both
settings with the LIST-PARAMETERS subcommand:
@SET

STATUS-WATCH,

@@INTERRUPT " BY
@@PAGES 9:777
@@LIST-PARAMETERS

Enabled

on ""B",

Checking

324

pages:

1-512

SET (Cont.)

Next run
CTRL/B.

the DSRPLUS program and check its
This
program
reads
the
input

creates the output

displayed

the

file MEMO.MEM.

terminal.

Note

status
by
typing
file MEMO.RNO and

that the

“B

1is

not

@DSRPLUS
DSRPLUS>MEMO.RNO

“B

Connected to BLAZE:<ROBBERTS>
6

PUBLIC:MEMO.RNO.1

[Page

1 of

Byte

128(36).

Read]

“B

Connected to BLAZE:<ROBBERTS>
7
6

MEMO.MEM.1
[Page
PUBLIC:MEMO.RNO.1

3. Byte 512(36). Read Write]
[Page 4 of 9. Byte 1280 (36).

Read]

“B

CTonnected to BLAZE:<ROBBERTS>
7
6

MEMO.MEM.1
[Page 8. Byte 3840 (36). Read Write]
PUBLIC:MEMO.RNO.1
[Page 8 of 9. Byte 3968(36).

Read]

DSRPLUS>

Now look at the above display.
The
first
time
CTRL/B
is
typed,
DSRPLUS
1is
reading
the first page of the nine page
input file MEMO.RNO.
The second CTRL/B shows that DSRPLUS is
reading
page
four
of
the input file and has created three
pages of the output file MEMO.MEM.
Nearing
1its
completion,
DSRPLUS
has
read
eight
of
the
nine
input pages and has
created an eight page output file.

325

SET HOST
Function

Connects

Format

terminal

another

system.

@SET
Format

your

HOST

node-~name::

/switch

(Omitting the node name
an interrupt sequence)
@SET HOST /switch
Two character interrupt
Node

name:

the

command

sequence

line

allows

(°\,<RET>):

you to

define

interrupt-sequence

node-name::

where
node-~name::

the

name

the

remote

host

that

you

to connect your terminal to.
Two colons
following the node name are optional.
/switch

is
an
service
remote

optional
wused
to

that
your

selects
terminal

the
to a

node.

Default -

interrupt-sequence

keyword
connect

want
(::)

/CTERM

1is the characters that switch control of
terminal
back
to
the local host.
You
prompted for an interrupt
sequence
only
you give the /CTERM switch.
Default - CTRL\,<RET>

the
are
|if

NOTE

This command description assumes you are connecting to
another
TOPS-20 system.
For information on accessing
other operating systems, see
the
DIGITAL
Networking
Pocket
Guide.
This command description also assumes
that you are establishing a connection with the
CTERM
program.

SET

/CTERM

HOST

Command

connects

your

running

the

processors

terminal

CTERM

must

(available

Switches

wunder

running

SET

HOST

again.

runs

the
Terminal)
.

the

logical

Default

326

the

remote

DECnet

separate

HOST command runs the
by
default.
If the
the
CTERM
protocol,

connection

communications

CTERM

the

Both

software

The

SET

program

node does not support
HOST
attempts
the

second

communications

name

Phase

1license).

communications

remote
SET

1In

node

program.

NRT:

attempt

however,

program

defined

(Network

Remote

/NRT

runs

the

the
NRT:
both

logical name NRT:
(Network Remote Terminal).
can be a system or job
1logical
name.
When
exist, the job definition takes precedence.,

communications

service

program

defined

Characteristics

Logging

into

the

Remote

Node

—

——

—

o——

—

——— S—

SET HOST (Cont.)

Path

Terminal

The SET
host to
through

Input

and

Output

HOST command passes terminal input through the local
the remote host.
Output from the remote host passes
the local host to your terminal.

Making

Series

Host

Connections

Once you have logged in to a remote node, you can give
EXEC
commands
and
run
programs just as you would on your local
node.
You can then establish a connection to another remote
node.
For
example,
if your local host is AURORA, you can

give the
BOSTON;

after

command SET HOST BOSTON
to
logging in to BOSTON,

SET

DENVER

HOST

connect

node

connect
to
the
node
can use the command

you

DENVER.

Returning

Your

Local

Host

D e

— T

" S— ——

— S

C— —

—

— —

—

— T

——

— —— W

— — —

—

— —

—

— —

—

Once your terminal is connected
to
the
remote
node,
the
system
responds
by identifying itself and prompting you to
log in.
You can then log in to the system.

To return
your
terminal
to
your
1local
host,
type
the
interrupt
sequence
to
temporarily break the connection to
the remote host.
Note that the
connection
to
the
remote
host
remains intact until you reset the CTERM program.
You
can reconnect your terminal to the remote host by giving the
CONTINUE

command.

When you log out of
the
remote
host,
the
connection
broken and you are returned to your local host.
If

you

have

interrupt
returns

you

established

character
to

your

defined
local

series

host.

your
For

first

connections,

SET

example,

HOST
your

|is

the

command
local

host
1is
AURORA
and you SET HOST to BOSTON, specifying the
CTRL\<RET> interrupt sequence to
return
to
AURORA.
Then
from
BOSTON
you
connect to DENVER.
Typing the CTRL\<RET>
interrupt to DENVER returns you to AURORA, not BOSTON.

327

SET HOST (Cont.)

Specifying

the

and

"K"L

are valid

interrupt

you specify only one

combination
For example,
sequences.

interrupt character,

the

of
KL

two
"KL,

second

character
1is "J.
For example if you specify only °N as
the interrupt sequence, the actual interrupt sequence is
“N~J.
F~J.

Sequence

The interrupt sequence
can
be
a
characters
or control characters.

K°L,
e

Interrupt

you

¢type

only

the

interrupt

sequence

Each
interrupt
character
must
be
different.,
For
example, "K”K is invalid, while "KK is a valid interrupt
sequence.,

Do not
type
a
comma
or
a
characters
as
it
will
be
character in the sequence.

The RETURN key can only be
sequence, “\<RET>.

The interrupt sequence cannot contain predefined TOPS-20
control
characters.
For
example,
1if
you attempt to
specify an interrupt sequence as "T"I, the "T will print
the
run
status
and
the
"I
will
print
a tab.
See
Appendix D in this manual for a list of TOPS-2¢
control
characters,

Controlling

Scrolling

on a

Remote

space
between
interpreted
as

used

interrupt
the second

the default

interrupt

Host

On your local host, <CTRL/S> and <CTRL/Q>
are
the
default
control
characters
that
pause
and
continue
scrolling.
Typing <CTRL/Q> continues scrolling whether scrolling paused
because
you
typed
<CTRL/S>
or
the
output
paused on an
end-of-page.
However,

CTERM

does

not

pass

these

characters

the

remote

host.
When
using
<CTRL/S>
and <CTRL/Q>, it is the local
host that actually controls scrolling.
Therefore if
output
from
the remote host has paused on an end-of-page, <CTRL/Q>
will not
continue
scrolling.
Other
pause
and
continue
characters
are
passed
to
the
remote
host.
You can use
<CTRL/A> to both pause and resume scrolling or you
can
use
the
TERMINAL
PAUSE command to assign any two characters of
your choosing to control scrolling.
For consistency, it
|is
recommended
that
you
define
the
same pause and continue
characters

your

local

and

remote

node.

Hints

Listing

Available Nodes

Use the INFORMATION DECNET command to
DECnet nodes accessible to your node.

328

display

the

names

SET HOST (Cont.)

I
I
I
I
I
|
I
I
|
[
|
I
|
|
I
I
!
|
I
I
|
I
I
I
I
|
|
I
I
I
I
l
|

|
l
|
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

Effect

The

Terminal

SET

After

in.

HOST command connects your terminal to the remote system.
the remote system's herald message is printed, you can log

Commands

for resuming a
with an escape

CONTINUE

connection
sequence.

for displaying the
from your node.

INFORMATION

DECNET

INFORMATION

JOB-STATUS

that

names of

was

nodes

for displaying the name of the host
other information about your job.
INFORMATION

LOGICAL-NAMES

broken

reachable

node

and

NRT:

for displaying the name of the communications
program run by /NRT.
SYSTAT

for displaying (in
the
ORIGIN
column)
the
name
of
the
1local
system
(the system you
connected to before connecting to the current
remote system).

Examples

Connect your terminal
and then login.

remote

TOPS-20

node

named

AURORA

@SET HOST AURORA
[Attempting a connection, connect OK, ]
[Remote host is a TOPS-20 system]
[TYPE "\ ,<RET> to return to node ROMAX]

AURORA - Claims Tracking System, TOPS-2@ Monitor 6.1(7)

@LOGIN RSMITH

Job
4 on TTY3l5 15-Nov-84 £#9:35:83, Last Login 15-Nov-84 £8:18:48

329

SET HOST (Cont.)

Give the INFORMATION DECNET
command
to
find
out
if
node
BOSTON
is
reachable from your host node.
Then give the SET
HOST command without typing the
node
name
on
the
command
line.
Omitting the node name causes the system to prompt you
for an interrupt sequence.
After typing your
own
interrupt
sequence,
the
system prompts you for the name of the remote
node,

@INFORMATION DECNET BOSTON
Node BOSTON is reachable

@SET HOST

Two character
Node

name:

interrupt sequence

("\,<RET>):

[Attempting a connection, connect OK,
[Remote host is a TOPS-20 system]
[TYPE "E,D to return to node AURORA]
BOSTON,

“ED

BOSTON

Engineering

Center,

]

TOPS-2@ Monitor

6.1(7)

Connect to a remote node named TEAL.
After
1logging
1in
and
doing
some work on TEAL, type the “\<RET> interrupt sequence
to

return

your

local

host.

@SET HOST TEAL

[Attempting a connection, connect OK, ]
[Remote host is a TOPS-20 system]
[TYPE “\,<RET> to return to node FLYWAY]
TEAL - Migratory Bird
@LOGIN

Banding,

LOWELL

TOPS-2# Monitor 6.1(7)

"\<RET>

(Interrupt

[Connection

Type

sequence not displayed

on terminal)

interrupted, back at node FLYWAY,

CONTINUE

resume connection]

After working on node FLYWAY, type the
CONTINUE
command
reconnect
your
terminal
to
node
TEAL,
Then
give
INFORMATION
JOB-STATUS
command
to
verify
that
you
connected

TEAL.,

QCONTINUE
@INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
Host

TEAL

Job 17,
Account

TTY4,
341

User

LOWELL,

330

REPORTS:<LOWELL>

to
the
are

SET HOST (Cont.)

Attempt a
attempts

connection using the
CTERM
program.
The
system
the
connection and finds that the remote node does

not

support

the

program defined

. @SET

CTERM.

then

NRT:

attempts

another

connection

using

HOST ROMAX

[Attempting a connection,
Connect failed -

Host

did

not accept

CTERM connection,

trying

NRT:

[Attempting a connection, connect OK]
[Remote host is a TOPS-2@ system]
[TYPE "P to return to node AURORA]
ROMAX

- Acme's

Timesharing

331

System,

TOPS-20 Monitor

6.1(7)

SKIP
Moves a magnetic tape set forward over a specified number of files
records,

end of the

the logical

tape

set.

Format

@SKIP

(DEVICE)

dev:

units

where

is the name of the tape set or magnetic tape drive that

dev:

you want to move

forward

want
you
is the number of flles or records over which
The colon after the device name is optional.
to skip.

is either FILES or RECORDS, where records are
sections
file; or LEOT, to skip to the logical end of the
a
of

units

tape set, which is the
next
point
on
the
having two adjacent EOF (end-of-file) marks.

tape

set

Default units - FILES

Restrictio ns

SKIP

With

Open

Files

If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program
that
has
opened
a
file in a magnetic tape set and you then give the
SKIP command for that tape set, the system will first ask if
you
want
to close the associated file.
You must do so for
SKIP to succeed, but you will probably be unable to continue
the
program
from
that
point because the file will now be
closed.

RECOR DS

Argument

Used

for

Unlabeled

Tapes

Only

You cannot use the RECORDS argument to the SKIP command when
using
a labeled tape, because read and write operations for
labeled tapes always move the tape to
the
beginning
of
a
file.

Warning

Skipping

Past

LEOT

(Unlabeled

Tapes Only)

If you specify too large a value for n in the
SKIP
command
line,
you can move past the logical end of tape (LEOT).
1In
this case, the operator may have to
intervene
before
your
tape
control
commands will have effect again.
You must be
sure how many files you have in the tape set if you use SKIP
n
rather
than
SKIP
LEOT.
This problem can occur for any
tapes mounted
on drives of the form MTAn:, or for
unlabeled
tapes mounted

on drives of the

332

form MTn:,

SKIP (Cont.)

Commands

UNLOAD

for rewinding
a
magnetic
tape
completely
onto
the
source
reel
(only
for tapes mounted on drives having
device names of the form MTAn:)

Examples

Skip over the next 2
(mounted on magnetic

@SKIP MT@P:

2 FILES

Skip over

the

@SKIP MTA@P:

files on the magnetic tape you are
tape drive MT@:
in this case).

two

records

unlabeled

using

tape.

2 RECORDS

Use
in

the MOUNT command to ask the operator to mount your
tape
write-enabled
mode,
then
copy 3 files to the tape from
your directory on structure SNARK:.
Use the
REWIND
command
to
go
back
to
the beginning, and the SKIP command to skip
over the first file.
Use the COPY command to have
the
next
file
(FIL-2)
printed
on
your terminal, then give the SKIP
command again to skip to the logical
end-of-tape.
You
are
skipping only one file, FIL-3, in this case.

@MOUNT TAPE DAY:/WRITE-ENABLED
[Mount Request DAY Queued, Request-ID
[Tape set DAY, Volume DAY mounted]
[DAY: defined as MT@:]
@REWIND

DAY:

@MOUNT STRUCTUEE SNARK:
Structure

SNARK:

mounted

@QACCESS SNARK:

@COPY §§ARK:E£L—1.TAP
SNARK:FIL-1.TAP.1l =>
@COPY §§ARK:FIL-2.TAP
SNARK:FIL-2,TAP.,l =>
QCOPY §§ARK:F£}-3.TAP
SNARK:FIL-3.TAP.1 =>
@REWIND DAY:

DAY:
MT@:FIL-1

[OK]

DAY:
MT@:FIL-2

[OK]

MT@:FIL-3

[OK]

DAY:

@SKIP DAY: 1
@QCOPY DAY:
T@:

JTHIS

TTY:

THE

SECOND

FILE.!

@SKIP DAY:LEOT

333

187]

START
Begins execution of the program

the current

fork.

Format

@START

(PROGRAM)

location/switch

where

location

the octal

the

program

or
to

symbolic

address

where

you

want

start

Default location - the
normal
starting
address,
that
1is, the first word in the
program's entry vector
is
a
keyword,
indicating your

/switch

chosen
from
the
list
below,
choice of START command options

START Command

Switches

keeps your
execution

terminal at TOPS-2§ command level and starts
of the program in a “background" fork.
When
the program attempts to do terminal input or output, it
halts
and
displays
the
message [FORK-NAME wants the

/BACKGROUND

TTY].

restores your

/NORMALLY

the

terminal

to command

level

(if any)

within

program
Default

keeps your terminal at TOPS-20 command
level.
Output
from
the
program
is
sent
to
the
terminal
and is
intermixed with whatever output is currently displayed.
When the program attempts to read from the terminal, it
can randomly intercept input intended for the
EXEC
or
another
program.
Therefore,
use
this
switch
with
programs that, once started,
do
not
request
further
terminal input.

/STAY

Characteristics
Starting

a Noncurrent

Fork

When you START a noncurrent
current

fork.

334

fork,

the

fork

becomes

your

START (Cont.)

Hints

Further

The

Information

START command

commands.,

For more

section named
User's Guide.

one

the

TOPS-20

Running

Multiple

Programs

For more information about entry vectors,
Monitor Calls Reference Manual.

Special

multiforking-class

information about multiforking,

see

the

TOPS-20

see

the

TOPS-20

Cases

Running

COBOL

Programs

Second

Time

Restrictions
Programs

Competing

for

Terminal

Input

If you use START /STAY to run
a
program
in
a
background
fork,
elther
at
the
current
or
at a lower EXEC command
level, (see Hints - Using PUSH to Get a New TOPS-20
Command
Level,
above),
the
program
can
request
input
from the
terminal while you are giving input to the EXEC
or
another
program,
This
input
can
be
randomly intercepted by the
background program when it requests terminal input.
Usually
though, the EXEC or the current program receives the input.
When
terminal
input
1is
intercepted
by
the
background
program, the program usually types input error messages.
To
give input to the program, stop the program
by
typing
two
CTRL/Cs
or
the
program's
exit
command.
Then,
1if
the
background program is at a higher EXEC command
1level,
give
POP
commands
to
return
to
the EXEC level that holds the
background program.
(POP terminates the
current
EXEC
and
erases
programs
in its memory.) Finally, give the CONTINUE
/NORMALLY command; this puts you at program command level so
that you can give the requested input.
Input is intercepted by
the
background
program
randomly.
Therefore,
you may have to type extra CTRL/Cs, program exit
commands, and POPs.
To reduce confusion about the direction
of
terminal
input,
it
1is
recommended that you use START
/STAY only when you plan to work at the current
EXEC
level
while
a
program
runs
in
a
background
fork.
Use START
/BACKGROUND when you plan to work at a lower EXEC
1level
or
at

another

program

command

level.

. C—

—m

—

. —

——

—

m—

D ——

S—

—— T

—

. c—

——

—

After running a program (with a RUN or EXECUTE
command,
or
with
a GET and START or LOAD and START combination) you can
usually run it again using START.
COBOL
programs
are
an
exception:
to run them again you must reload them.

When
a
program
started
with
START
BACKGROUND
requests
terminal
input,
it sends the message, [FORK-NAME wants the
TTY].
No input is taken by the background program until you
return to program command level with CONTINUE /NORMALLY.

335

START (Cont.)
No

I/O Control

with

Most programs
standard

Some

read and write data
and

input

however,

Programs

output

the

designators.

terminal
Some

through

programs

use different methods
of
communicating
with
the
when you use /BACKGROUND and /STAY to
and output from
a
background
fork,
input
and output behavior of programs with nonstandard

Therefore,
terminal,
control terminal input
the

designators
Execute-only

can

unpredictable.

Programs

Programs that are execute-only can only be started
normal starting address.

their

Commands

CONTINUE

for
resuming
execution
program in memory

FORK

for

FREEZE

for halting
fork
for

GET

changing

the
a

placing

current

program

halted

fork

executable

background

programs

memory

INFORMATION

FORK-STATUS

for displaying the number
of each fork in your job

KEEP

for giving

LOAD

for loading source
into memory

REENTER

for starting the program
its alternate entry point

SAVE

for saving
file

ERUN,

SET

RESET,

NAME,

SET

PROGRAM,

the

program

fork

loaded

Examples

Start

kept

the

status

object

programs

in
memory
(if any)

program

other multiforking-class
commands
performing related functions

UNKEEP

and

currently

@START

336

in memory.

JEXE

for

START (Cont.)

Put an executable
it again.

program

in memory

and

start

it.

Then

run

@GET TESTF1.EXE
@START
THIS

END

CPU

TIME:

TEST.

EXECUTION

#.84

ELAPSED TIME:

#.23

ELAPSED TIME:

0.02

EXIT

@START
THIS

END

CPU

TIME:

TEST.

EXECUTION

0.02

EXIT

Begin using the FILCOM program to compare two files.
Give
a
CTRL/C
to
halt
FILCOM,
then
a
CTRL/T
to
determine the
location where it was stopped.
Give the DDT command, and
do
some
work
within
the DDT program; leave DDT with a CTRL/Z,
returning to TOPS-28 command level.
Give the
START
command
to start FILCOM again, using as argument the address reported
by CTRL/T above.

@FILCOM
*TTY:=DUMPER.MAC,

BACKUP.MAC

*T 14:49:03 FILCOM “C from Running at 400543
in

9:84.39,

Load

2.44

§:01:33

Used 0:00:03.1 -

eDDT

DDT

4/
=z

PAT,..+361,,3066

@START 400543
No

differences

encountered

Place the CLOCK program (not DIGITAL
supported)
in
memory.
KEEP
the CLOCK program so that it will remain in memory when
you run other programs.
Then, start the CLOCK program in the
background.,
CLOCK
will
display
the
time every half hour
while you run other programs and EXEC commands.

@GET CLOCK.EXE
@KEEP

@START CLOCK.EXE /STAY
@

[11:30 AM]

337

SUBMIT

Enters

command

procedure

into

the

batch

job

queue.

Format

@SUBMIT

(BATCH JOB)

/switch(es)

filespec/switch(es),eces

where

switches

are keywords, chosen from the list below, indicating
your
choice
of
SUBMIT
command
options.
These
switches have different effects according
to
their
position
in
the
command
1line:
placed before all
files in the command, they act as defaults for
all;
otherwise
they
affect
only
the nearest preceding
file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches

filespec

is the specification of a batch
control
file
(see
the TOPS-20 User's Guide), containing batch commands
and the commands with which you would have done
the
job as a timesharing user instead of as a batch user
Default file type - .CTL

pove

means that after a comma you can give more arguments
(filespec and switches) of the form already shown

Summary

SUBMIT

Command

/ACCOUNT:account

Switches

(defaults

Default

account -

boldface)

your

current

account

/AFTER:date

and/or

time

YES

/ASSISTANCE:NO
APPEND

/BATCH-LOG: SUPERSEDE
SPOOL

/BEGIN:n
S
Default n - 0
/CARDS:n
Default n - 1000
/CONNECTED-DIRECTORY:dev:<directory>
:
/DELETE
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT :n
Default n - 0
/DESTINATION-NODE:node name
/FEET:n
,
Default n - 200
/JOBNAME: 6-character name
Default name -~ first six characters
of control filename
KEEP

/LOGDISPOSITION:
DELETE
/LOGNAME: filespec

Default

filespec -

control
filename,
type

338

.LOG

file

SUBMIT (Cont.)

YES

/NOTIFY:NO
ALWAYS

/OUTPUT: ERRORS
NOLOG

/PAGES:n
/PRIORITY:n
/PRESERVE
/PROCESSING-NODE:node
/READER

Default
Default

200
10

name

Default argument

/RESTARTABLE:YES

/SEQUENCE:n
/TAG: 6-character
/TIME:hh:mm:ss

n n -

label

(if switch is
given)

- YES

(if

switch

Default time limit
omitted)

Default hh:mm:ss

- 00:05:00

(if

switch

colon
without
given
argument) - 68 (minutes)
Default n - 200

/TPLOT:n
NO or

|is

/UNIQUE:YES or 1
/USER:user name

SUBMIT Command Switches

fewer
specifies the account of 39 or
charge for your batch
to
characters

/ACCOUNT:account

request.
for

your

This account must be

user

Default

valid

name.,

current
account - your
account (check
with
INFORMATION

JOB-STATUS)

/AFTER:date and/or
day of week
and/or time

time,

(or TODAY)

ensures

started

that

until

the

job

will

not

after the date and/or

and
NOV-12-79,
specified.
time
1illustrate two arguments to
18:00:09
date
both
If you give
this switch.
and time, separate them with a space.
be
may
time
the
When given alone,

with a plus sign (+), which
preceded
the
by
processing
delay
will
from the
time
of
1length
indicated
present.

339

SUBMIT (Cont.)

Alternatively, you may give a day
the
week
(e.g., MONDAY) or TODAY
argument;

then

the

batch

job

will

of
as
not

be started until the beginning of the
following day.
If
vyou
follow
this
argument with a plus sign and a time,

the

job will

this

amount.

further

delayed

whether
your
assistance of

Jjob
the

YES

/ASSISTANCE:NO

tells
will

the
system
require
the

operator

(e.g.,

mount

or magnhetic tape) when
Default - YES

structure

run

APPEND

/BATCH-LOG: SUPERSEDE
SPOOL

/BEGIN:n

tells
the system
either
to
append
the log file of the batch job to
any
existing
log
file of the same name,
or to write a new generation
of
the
log
file, or to send the log file to
the spool area only
Default - APPEND
starts

processing

the

control

file

line
n of the file.
Use this switch
for
a
control
file
that
can
fit
different
applications
depending on
where processing begins.
(See
also
the /TAG switch,)
Default n - @

/CARDS:n

limits
cards

the

maximum

be punched by
Default n - 1000

the

number

job

/CONNECTED-DIRECTORY:dev:<directory>
specifies

the

connected directory for
job.
For privileged users

the
batch
only.

/DELETE

tells

the

system
to
delete
file after the batch job
Opposite of /PRESERVE,

control

run.

/DEPENDENCY~COUNT:n

sets the
Because

job's dependency count to n.
a
batch
job
does
not get

processed

until

is
g,
assigning

you
it

count

and

command

the

3445

the

has

its

dependency

can
delay
a
positive
then

bring

proper time,
Default n -

using
the

count

a
job
by
dependency
the
to

MODIFY
6

SUBMIT (Cont.)

/DESTINATION~NODE :node-name

entry
Jjob
remote
specifies the IBM
station on whose line printer the log
be
to
1is
Jjob
batch
your
file of
colons (::) following
Two
printed.
the node name are optional.

of
number
maximum
the
limits to n
paper tape to be punched by
of
feet

/FEET:n

the job
Default n -

200

fewer

or
six
(of
name
a
assigns
characters) to the batch job
Default name - first

/JOBNAME :name

six

of
characters
control filename

KEEP

D DELETE
/LOGDISPOSITION:

delete
to
whether
tells the system
been
has
it
after
file
log
the
printed
Default - KEEP

/LOGNAME:filespec

specifies where to place the log file

of the batch job
Default dev:<directory> - your
at
directory
connected
of the SUBMIT
time
the
command

Default filename - control

filename

Default
YES

/NOTIFY:NO

type -

.LOG

a
send
to
tells the system whether
to your terminal /xp /NOTIFY
message
been
has
Jjob
switch when the batch
completed
Default argument - NO

Default argument

ALWAYS

: ERRORS
/OUTPUT
NOLOG

(if switch is
given)

YES

says whether you want the log file to
the
in
only
or
be printed always,
errors occurring
unhandled
of
case

matter
No
within the job, or never.
which option you choose, the log file
is

/PAGES:n

always

written.

Default -

ALWAYS

of
number
maximum
the
limits to n
printer output to be
1line
of
pages
printed by the job
Default n - 200

341

SUBMIT (Cont.)

/PRESERVE

tells the system not
to
delete
control
file after the batch job
run.
Opposite of /DELETE.
Default

the
has

I-28 /PRIORITY:n
assigns
a
decimal
number
n
to the job, reflecting the
urgency of the batch request.
This n
must

be
from
@
to 63, with larger
numbers receiving earlier
treatment.
The
system
acknowledges this switch
by displaying the
message
[Priority
has been modified].
Default n - 10

/PROCESSING-NODE:node

name::
specifies
the
1IBM
host
system
on
whose
CPU the JCL batch job is to be
run.
Two colons (::)
following
the
node name are optional.

/READER

tells the system
that
your
control
file
is
composed
of
card
images,
including
control
<cards,
on
disk.
For
details see the TOPS-10/20 Batch
Reference Manual.
NO

/RESTARTABLE:
YES

decides whether
the
job
should
be
started
again
if the system crashes
and is restarted
Default argument - NO
Default

/SEQUENCE:n

specifies
supplied
sequence

argument
given)

(if
switch
- YES

that n, instead of a
by the system, is to
number

the

number
be the

job

/TAG:label

starts processing the control file at
the
line
beginning
with
label::,
where label is an
alphanumeric
name
of six or fewer characters.
Use this
switch for a control
file
that
can
fit
different applications depending
on where processing begins.

/TIME:hh:mm:ss

limits the maximum amount of CPU time
available to the job; given in hours,
minutes, and seconds.
Default

Default

time

limit

hh:mm:ss

(if

given

switch

five minutes
switch

without

argument)

342

(if

omitted)

colon or
(minutes)

SUBMIT (Cont.)

minutes
plotter

of
plotter
time allowed

Default

/UNIQUE:YES

(or

number

time allowed
for the Jjob

for

maximum

the

limits to n

/TPLOT:n

200

when submitting multiple batch

(or 1)

tells
jobs

the

system whether to

concurrently

Jjobs,

run the

separate

must be
files
control
The
times.
submitted while connected to the same
control files can be
the
directory;
This
directory.
any
in
located
jobs
batch
to
applies
switch
multiple
or
submitted with a single
Refer to Example 5.
SUBMIT commands.
Default -

YES

specifies the user who is to

/USER:user name

of
owner
privileged

batch
the
users only.

request.

the
For

Output

Jobname,

Request ID, and Time Limit

system
the
As soon as you complete a valid SUBMIT command,
responds by printing, on your terminal, the jobname, request
you
file
Each control
Jjob.
the
ID, and time limit for
separate batch request, and is described on a
1is a
submit
separate

line.

Characteristics
Switch Defaults Set by System Manager

for
The defaults shown in the list of switches are correct
However, your system manager can change
sites.
wuser
most
effect
The changes go into
some of these default settings.
switches most commonly
The
installation.
system
during
/PRIORITY,
/PAGES,
/OUTPUT,
/CARDS, /FEET,
affected are:
/TIME,

and /TPLOT.

Disposition of

Log

Files

/BATCH-LOG,
switches
command
SUBMIT
three
The
control what happens to the
/OUTPUT,
and
/LOGDISPOSITION,
log

file of your batch job.

343

SUBMIT (Cont.)

Where

Written

The log file is always written as the job
runs,
either
to
the
batch
Jjob's
connected
directory,
or
to a directory
specified as argument to the
/LOGNAME
switch,
or
to
the
system's output spooling area (it is written to the spooling
area only if you give the /BATCH-LOG:SPOOL switch).
If
the
/DESTINATION-NODE switch is also given, the log file will be
written into a directory or spooling area at
the
specified
node.
Remember
that
a batch job's connected directory is
ordinarily defined to be your
connected
directory
at
the
time
of
the SUBMIT command; privileged users may specify a
batch
job's
connected
directory
by
using
the
/CONNECTED-DIRECTORY switch.,
How Written,

When

Printed

The
/BATCH-LOG
switch's
APPEND
and
SUPERSEDE
arguments
describe
the manner in which the log file is to be written:
either it is appended to any existing file of the same
name
(usually produced by a previous running of the batch job) or
it is
written
as
a
new
generation
of
the
file.
The

/LOGDISPOSITION
file,
wherever

finished.,

switch tells the system
it
1is
written,
once

The

/OUTPUT

switch

whether to keep this
the
batch
job
is

specifies

when

listing of the log file to be printed:
either
never,
or
only
1f errors occur when the batch
By using combinations of these switches you
can

you

want a

always,
or
job is run.
cause
any

desirable
action.
Giving
/OUTPUT :ALWAYS
along
with
/LOGDISPOSITION:DELETE allows a record
of
your
batch
job
with only a temporary use of your disk area, and permits you
to monitor the progress of the job while it is running (give
TYPE
commands
to
view the file at your terminal).
Giving
just the /BATCH-LOG:SPOOL switch allows a record without any
of

your

disk

area,

although

Execution

Command

then

you

must

wait

1logs

1in,

the

for

the

record.

Files

soon

one

processes
your
system's command

your
login
files.

batch

Jjobs

directory's
The files

command
files
are
processed

system
and the
1in
this

order:
l.,

SYSTEM:BATCH,CMD

BATCH,.CMD

3.
4,

SYSTEM:COMAND,CMD
COMAND.CMD

If a LOGOUT command is included in the batch
control
file,
the
system processes your login directory's LOGOUT.CMD file
followed by
the
system's
SYSTEM:LOGOUT.CMD
file.
These
files
are
not
processed
if
the
batch job is logged out
automatically.

Automatic

Logout

oty

oy,

ity

oty

uvse

printed output to see this

the

batch

control

file

command,
the
batch job is
message "KILLED BY OPERATOR
file,

344

not

terminated
by
a
LOGOUT
automatically and the
printed
in
the
1log

logged-out
TTYnn" is

SUBMIT (Cont.)

Hints

Using

SET

DEFAULT

SUBMIT

If there are switches that you always or usually supply when
to
command
SUBMIT
DEFAULT
SET
the
give
SUBMIT,
using
your
of
remainder
the
for
defaults
as
them
establish
The switches will then behave as if you
session.,
terminal
had

them directly after

typed

the

You

SUBMIT.

word

can

actually
by
switches
default
these
of
any
supersede
the
supplying the switch, with another value, when you give
SUBMIT command.

For

Future

Terminal

Sessions

named
Put SET DEFAULT SUBMIT commands into a file
LOGIN.CMD in your log—-in directory
or
COMAND.CMD
if you want these default switches to be in effect

batch

for

Jjobs you submit during future terminal

If both
sessions as well.
reads LOGIN.CMD first.
For Nested

files exist,

the

system

Batch Jobs Only

named
Put SET DEFAULT SUBMIT commands into a file
directory if you want
1log-in
your
in
BATCH.CMD
a
of
time
1log-in
the
at
them to be in effect

Jjob

only,

"nested"

batch

however,

that the system also

command
started by a SUBMIT
your
of
another
of
file

that

1is, a batch job

the
within
Jjobs.
batch

control
Note,

reads COMAND.CMD

1log-in time of a batch job if the file exists
the
file
this
reads
It
directory.
in your log-in

after

Monitoring

BATCH.CMD,

the Progress of a Batch Job

that
commands
You can include the SEND command or the
the MAIL or DECmail/MS mail programs in your batch
run
control

file.

your terminal

Use

these commands to

send

messages

informing you of the status of your batch

to
addition
in
Since a batch job creates a job
job.
terminal line number
the
use
job,
timesharing
your
SEND
argument instead of the user name argument in the
command.

Information

For more information about batch jobs,

Batch

Reference

Manual.

345

see

the

TOPS-10/20

SUBMIT (Cont.)

Restrictions

Access

Rights

For

for

Batch

Specifying
You

Jobs

Control

cannot

use

Files

the

and

ACCESS

Log

Files

command

obtain

the

right

to submit control files from another directory, because
your batch jobs are logged in with rights only to
your
connected
directory
and
to
directories to which you
(through your login directory name) have
access
as
a
group
member.,
The
control
file,
if
not
in
vyour
connected
read

directory,

access

specification,
connected
access

For

Use

Within

must

you

directory
a

group

the

group

give

for

one

which

you

the

1log

file

must

for

your

which

you

have

write

member;

one,
one

have

member.

Batch

Job

Although it is possible
to
give
CONNECT
and
ACCESS
commands
within
a
batch
Jjob to obtain rights beyond
those mentioned above, you may
then
have
to
include
passwords
in
the
Jjob's
<control
file.
Because this
practice
could
endanger
system
security,
it
is
generally
best
to
establish
and rely on appropriate
group rights when preparing batch jobs for submission.
PUSH

During

Batch

Note

that
Therefore,

a
1f

command,

only

while

the

Editing

The

Queued
batch

file
edit

Execution

PUSH
your
the

command
batch

defaults

inferior

Control

system

the

change

file

will

the

file,

reads
control

set

the

exact

the
COMAND,CMD
file
contains

COMAND.CMD

are

file.
PUSH

effect

EXEC.

File

processes

specified
in
a file while it

control

Job

not

version

the

control

your SUBMIT command.
Therefore, if you
is in the batch queue, the new
version

processed.

request

process

the

CANCEL

the

request

and

latest

version
of
resubmit the job.

the

Commands

CANCEL

INFORMATION

BATCH-REQUESTS

for

withdrawing

for

examining

SUBMIT

the

requests

batch

input

queue

MODIFY

for

changing

before
SET

DEFAULT

SUBMIT

346

SUBMIT

processing

for

establishing

for

subsequent

has

default

SUBMIT

requests

begun
switches

commands

SUBMIT (Cont.)

Examples

Submit a

control

file

@SUBMIT DIFS.CTL
[Batch job DIFS queued,

begin

a batch job.

request-ID

461,

limit

0:05:00]

Submit two control files (specifying only the
filenames)
in
the
same
command.
then use the information batch-requests

command

(with the /USER switch)

@SUBMIT

SUMS,

‘the

batch

input

queue,.

examine

DIFS

[Batch job SUMS queued, request-ID 629,
[Batch job DIFS queued, request-ID 638,
@INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS /USER

Batch Queue:
Job Name
Req#

Run

e w— ey <

SUMS
Started

630

are

Time
-

e —

629
09:95:99
at 15:21:01

DIFS

There

w— u—

jobs

0P:05:080

the

your

limit
limit

entries

#:05:00]
@0:05:00]

User
D A o

> e e

— e

C.,BURKE

Stream:2

C.,BURKE

queue

progress)

Connect to another user's directory, then submit two
of
his
control
files.
Prevent
the printing of a log file for one
job, and allow the second job's to be printed only if
errors
occur within the job; make both jobs restartable.
Request an
inclusive listing of your entries in the batch queue - notice
that

the

Jjobs

are

1logged

under

although the log files
will
be
stored
directory.
Note
also
that an asterisk
currently

progress,

your

in
(*)

own

user

name,

wuser
Holland's
indicates a job

Connect back to your directory and submit
one
control files, specifying a particular jobname,
it.

of
your
own
then check on

@CONNECT <HOLLAND>
Password:

@SUBMIT /RESTARTABLE:YES
/OUTPUT: ERRORS

FLDTST.CTL/OUTPUT:NOLOG,

[Batch job FLDTST queued, request-ID 464,
[Batch job LODTST queued, request-ID 465,
@INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS /ALL/USER
Batch

limit 0:05:00]
limit 0:05:00]

Queue:

Job Name

LODT.CTL =

Reg#

Run Time

User

FLDTST

464
0@P:05:00
C.BURKE In Stream:2
/Uniqg:Yes
/Restart:Yes
/Assist:Yes
/Seq:1993
Started at
8:40:38
LODTST
465
@0:05:90
C.BURKE /Uniq:Yes
/Restart:Yes
/Assist:Yes
/Seq:1994
There are 2 Jobs in the Queue (1 in Progress)

347

SUBMIT (Cont.)

QCONNECT MISC:<C.BURKE>
@SUBMIT SUMS/JOBNAME:1-SUMS
[Batch

job

1-SUMS

QINFORMATION

Batch Queue:
Job Name
Req#
*

1-SUMS

request-ID

Run

466,

limit

#:05:00]

/ALL/USER

Time

User

466
@P:05:00
C.BURKE In Stream:2
/Restart:No
/Assist:Yes
/Seq:1995

Started

There

queued,

BATCH-REQUESTS

/Uniq:Yes

8:41:29

job

the

queue

progress)

Give a SET DEFAULT command to ensure
that
your
batch
jobs
will
be
run
after 5:00 P.M.
unless you specify otherwise.
Submit a batch job and check that this default is in
effect.
Then
use a MODIFY command to delay the starting time of this

job till 11:09 P.M.
Finally,
give
withdraw the batch request entirely.
@SET DEFAULT

[Batch

job

CANCEL

command

SUBMIT /AFTER:17:00

@SUBMIT SUMS

SUMS

@INFORMATION

the

queued,

request-ID

BATCH-REQUESTS

Batch Queue:
Job Name
Reqg#

Run

467,

limit

@:05:00]

/USER

Time

User

SUMS
467
00:05:08
C.BURKE /After: 9-Nov-85
There is 1 Job in the Queue (None in Progress)
@MODIFY BATCH 467 /AFTER:23:00

17:00

[T Job modified]

@INFORMATION BATCH—REQUESTS
Batch Queue:
Job Name
Req#
SUMS
There is

467
Job

@CANCEL BATCH
[1

Jdob

Run

Time

00:05:00

/USER

the

User
C.BURKE

Queue

(None

/After:

9-Nov=-85

23:00

Progress)

467

canceled]

Submit two control
files,
one
1located
in
vyour
connected
directory
and
the
other
in a directory you are accessing.
Use
the
/UNIQUE:NO
switch
to
allow
the
jobs
to
run
simultaneously.
Display
the
status of the batch queue and
note

that

both

jobs

are

running.

348

SUBMIT (Cont.)
@SUBMIT NETCOM,CTL, RANDOM: [LOWELL]CLEAN.CTL /UNIQUE:NO
58, limit @:05:00]
[Batch job CLEAN queued, request
59, limit G:05:00]
[Batch job NETCOM queued, request
@INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS
Batch

Queue:

Job Name

User

Run Time

Reqg#

* CLEAN

00:05:00

DBONIN

In Stream:#@

* NETCOM

@@:05:00

DBONIN

In Stream:l

2
3

00:15:00
01:00:08

PURRETTA
CSSE.WAIBLE

Job# 156 Running EXEC Runtime 0:00:16

Job# 156 Running EXEC Runtime 0:00:08

GTSTK
CIGIDN

There are 4 jobs in the queue

349

(2 in progress)

SYSTAT

Displays

information

about

the

jobs on

the

system.

Format¥*

@SYSTAT,
where

@@subcommand

means that,
more

Summary of

after

subcommands

SYSTAT Command

a comma,
on

Subcommands

ALL

CLASS

CONTROLLING
DIRECTORY

HEADER

JOB

job

number

LIMIT

LINE

octal

line

number,

DETACHED

LPT

subcommand

name,

OPERATOR,

ORIGIN

OUTPUT

file

specification

PROGRAM

STATE
SYSTEM
TIME

USER

user

name

WHAT
WHERE

WHO

350

you

successive

can

give

one

lines

(defaults

boldface)

SYSTAT (Cont.)

* For information on the
"HintsTM section below.

format,

subcommand

in-1line

refer

the

SYSTAT Command Subcommands

ALL

CLASS

gives all available SYSTAT information

prints the scheduler class in which each job
total CPU time
of
share
the
running;
is
decimal
allotted to the job, expressed as a
fraction; and the fraction of total CPU time
actual
A job's
actually used by the job.
use may be larger than its allotted share if
can
some jobs in its class are inactive; it

are
<classes
other
if
still
CPU
of
fraction
unused
this
is being allocated among active jobs.

larger
be
inactive and

time

CONTROLLING

prints, in the column headed CJB, the number
the controlling job (if any), that is, a
of
that
(pseudo-terminal)
PTY
a
owning
job
the job being described; when used
controls
descriptions
in a SYSTAT command requesting
of

jobs

particular

controlled

described
DIRECTORY

this subcommand causes

jobs,

these

jobs

also.

which
requests the name of the directory to
not the job's
if
connected,
1is
job
each
log-in directory

HEADER

calls for a headline
of

identifying the columns

information printed

Default

requesting
are
you
(unless
specific
about
information
in
users, jobs, or lines only;
default is NO
the
cases
such
HEADER.)

JOB n
LIMIT

restricts

number n;

description

job

with
prints any time limit set for each job
the
Print
command.
LIMIT
TIME
SET
the
with
Jjob
your
by
amount of CPU time used
CTRL/T or

LINE octal

output

can be used more than once,

line number or

INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS.

DETACHED

restricts output to description of

the

Jjob

1line number, or to
given
the
to
attached
be
c¢an
Jjobs;
descriptions of all detached
used

351

than once.

SYSTAT (Cont.)

sends output to the
to your terminal

LPT

line

printer

instead

(period)

CLASS
CONTROLLING
DIRECTORY

HEADER

eliminates
the
indicated
category
of
information,
when
used
with
one
of
the
keywords shown (. refers to your own job)

LIMIT
OPERATOR

ORIGIN
NO

STATE

SYSTEM
TIME
WHAT

WHERE
WHO

displays the job's originating system,
that
is, the system from which the user connected
to this system.
Default

ORIGIN

OUTPUT

filespec

sends

the

specify,

output

instead

Default
PROGRAM

program

STATE

name

information

filespec -

your

the

file

you

terminal

SYSTAT.LST

restricts SYSTAT output to
descriptions
of
jobs
using the program (or TOPS-2# command)
specified.
The argument you supply must
be
of six or fewer characters.
prints the current state of each job,
1i.e.,
(running),
or TI (waiting for terminal
input)

RUN

SYSTEM

begins output with system-wide
information,
i.e., the first two lines of regular output.
If SYSTEM
1is
the
only
subcommand
given,
SYSTAT output is restricted to this.
Default (unless
you
give
subcommands
requesting
information
about
specific users, jobs, or
1lines
only; in such cases the default
is NO SYSTEM.)

TIME

prints the accumulated
for each job

USER

WHAT

user

name

restricts output
to
logged
in under the
used more than once.

runtime

(CPU

time)

descriptions
of
jobs
given user name; can be

prints the name of the program that each job
is
running;
given
explicitly
only
with
subcommand NO,
Default

352

restrict

SYSTAT output.

SYSTAT (Cont.)

prints the line number associated with

WHERE

job;

NO,

given

each

explicitly only with subcommand

to restrict SYSTAT output.
Default

prints the user name under which each job is

WHO

logged

in;

subcommand NO,

with

only

explicitly

given

to restrict SYSTAT output.

Default

Output

Sample of

SYSTAT Output

The SYSTAT command displays on your terminal columns of
information about all the jobs on the system. Below is a
sample of the output you would

command

SYSTAT

that

(User and <Directory>):

receive

@SYSTAT ALL NO WHO NO DIRECTORY
Up 1:12:59
15:48:37
Tue 1l4~-Aug-79

Job
5

CJB Line

7
13

First you
notation:

6
217

see
the

Program State
TV

TV
EXEC

RUN

TI
RUN

(here,

3.54

Time

Cls

@:00:35
P:01:02

g
1

@:01:02

3.71

Shr

Use

0.01
©.15

.02
2.00

9.03

09.01

Limit

(in 24-hour
the current date and time
sample above was obtained 37 seconds after

3:48 P.M,), and the length of

started

3.78

Load av (class @)

45411 Jobs

response

1in

the two rightmost columns

eliminates

time

just over 1 hour).

since

the

system

was

and
(45)
The second line displays the number of user Jjobs
The next three
currently running.
(l1)
operator Jjobs
these are
numbers are the "load averages" for the system:
weighted averages of the number of runnable processes on the
and 15 minutes,
5 minutes,
system over the last minute,
(If class scheduling is enabled, the three
respectively.
load averages are the average number of jobs having at least
one runnable process, and apply to the class in which your
If you are about to start a job requiring
job is running.)
5 minutes of CPU time, and the load average remains stable
over the period in question, i.e., becomes 4.54 (3.54 + your
job = 4.54), then you can count on your job's getting about
If
1/4.54 of your class's share of the system's attention.
your class 1s assigned one third of the system's CPU time
(unclaimed CPU time),
and you do not receive any windfall
your job will be finished in a little over one hour.

353

SYSTAT (Cont.)

After

this comes the line
data
that
follows.

<Directory> columns
above,
describing

of
all

SYSTAT

Job,

displays

columns.,

the

The

of headings labeling
All
but
the
User,

information
jobs (rows).
Line,

appear
in
the
The unmodified

Program,

Origin column displays

host

followed

For

example,

AURORA

parentheses
(CTM)

node AURORA and
then
used
connect his terminal to this
network terminal types are:

the

means

User

and

sample
command
Origin

the job's ériginating

network

that

terminal

type.

the

user logged in to
the
CTERM-SERVER
protocol
to
system.
The definitions of the

CTM

CTERM-SERVER

protocol

LAT

Local

Terminal

NRT

Network

TCP

Advanced

Research

(ARPANET)

terminal

Access

each
column
Origin
and

Remote

terminal

Terminal
Project

Agency

Network

By
using
appropriate
subcommands
you
can
select
the
categories
of
information,
as
well as the specific jobs.
(The Class (Cls) and Share (Shr) categories appear
only
|if
class
scheduling
1is enabled.)
User jobs, both timesharing
and batch, are listed
first
(in
ascending
order
by
job
number),
and
then, after a blank line, operator jobs. . The
number of the job attached to your own terminal appears with
an

Sending

asterisk

Output

(*)

the

Job

column.

Elsewhere

By giving

the
OUTPUT
subcommand
you
can
direct
SYSTAT
information
to
a
file
1instead
of to your terminal.
The
subcommand LPT sends the information to the printer
instead

your

terminal,

Characteristics

Log-in

Not

Necessary

You do

not

have

logged

give

the

SYSTAT command.

Hints

Giving

Subcommands

simplify

your

arguments

these

given

Arguments

typing,
on

the

same

rules:

the

Command

SYSTAT
line

accepts
as

There will be
no
@@
prompt:
between
successive
subcommands
names

and

arguments,

354

Line

the

subcommands

command,

subject

as
to

simply
type
a
space
and between subcommand

SYSTAT (Cont.)

To get information
about
numbers, give the numbers

one
only;

or
do

more
specific
not type JOB.

Jjob

To get information about
one
or
more
specific
user
names,
give
the names only; do not type USER.
But if
the user name is by coincidence the same
as
a
SYSTAT
command

argument,

you must

request

information

about his

use

the

To get information about one or
directories,
To get
give a

give

the

mode

specific

log-in

directory names.'!

information about your own
period (.) as argument.

To get information
your
user
hame,

subcommand

job.

about
give

(attached)

job

all other jobs logged
your
user
name
and

in
NO

only,

under
.
as

arguments.

The system will not accept
the
OUTPUT
subcommand
this format; use the subcommand mode instead.

Special

Cases

OPERATOR

User

Name

¢ an

request or
OPERATOR
comma nds:

You

treat ing

—

refuse information about operator jobs by
as a user name.
The system accepts these
'

@SYSTAT OPERATOR
and

@SYSTAT,
@@USER OPERATOR
as

we 11

the

special

commands

@SYSTAT NO OPERATOR
and

@SYSTAT,
@@NO OPERATOR

Command S

INFORMATIO N

for

finding

out

other

information

about

the

system
-

VIR GED WD

D TR

N1} WS wED WD

N W

For speci fic connected
directories,
specify
the
directory
names
(a nd
structures, if not the public structure) along with
either the ALL or DIRECTORY subcommand.

355

SYSTAT (Cont.)

Examples

Find out the status of all jobs on the system.
(attached) job is marked with an asterisk (%*).)

@SYSTAT

Fri

1-Mar-84 12:28:25

7+2
Job
3
5
8

Jobs
Line
44
56
DET

183
57
207
114
41

TV
TV
EXEC
TV
NEWRUN

FORTMILLER
SCOHEN
LATTA
HARDY
LATTA

7
46

DET
3

PERF
DUMPER

OPERATOR
OPERATOR

how much CPU time
on the system,

@SYSTAT
QETIME
@@QUSER KONEN
@@USER ALUSIC
ee
27
66
43

@SYSTAT TIME
27
66
43

Find

out

P:900:01

ALUSIC
KONEN

by giving

information

ALUSIC
KONEN

P:00:02

using

Ask

subcommands

KONEN ALUSIC
EXEC
0:00:01

LINE 11
11
EXEC

QSYSTAT

the

line

11.

KONEN
about

jobs

MACRO

D.SCHEIFLER

205

PTYCON

OPERATOR

356

and

AURORA (NRT)

charged

@:00:02

@SYSTAT
43
for

been

2.60
Origin

MAX (LAT)

EXEC

who

has

2.12

MAX (LAT)

EXEC

Repeat Example
the same line.

current

Up 33:36:17

Load av (class 0)
1,97
Program
User
EXEC
R.CRISS
MACRO
D.SCHEIFLER
NVTTMP
Not logged in

9
11
14*
20
51

Determine
two users

(Your

45.

the

jobs

arguments

SYSTAT (Cont.)

Set a time limit of 4 seconds for your attached job, then ask
for
complete
1information,
1including headings, for the job.
(The period (.)
specifies
your
attached
3job.)
The
value
reported
under
the Limit heading is actually the sum of the
time limit you set (4 seconds) and the
amount
of
CPU
time
already
used
at
the
time of your SET command (2 seconds).
This CPU time is reported as 2 seconds under the Time heading
because you gave the SYSTAT command immediately after SET.

@SET TIME-LIMIT 4
@SYSTAT ALL HEADER

Job

CJB

Line

Program

State

Limit
User, <Directory>
Origin
14*
51
207
EXEC
RUN
P:00:06 LATTA, MISC:<LATTA>
Ask

for

system-wide

@SYSTAT SYSTEM
Fri

1-Mar-84

18+15 Jobs
Find

SYSTAT

12:35:44

Load

out only which

Time

Cls

B:00:02

Shr
0.02

Use
0.02

information only.

33:43:36

(class

programs are

5.19
in

3.36

2.92

use.

@SYSTAT NO WHO NO WHERE NO SYSTEM

Job

Program

2
3
4
5
6
8
9

EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
MACRO
VTECO
NVTTMP
EXEC

13
16
26

OPLEAS
LPTSPL
OPR

BATCON

Ask for a list of jobs controlled
job, marked with an asterisk (*),
job

itself

the

other.)

@SYSTAT 51 CONTROLLING

14*
51

207
41

EXEC

LATTA

NEWRUN

LATTA

357

by job 51.
(Your
attached
happens to be one of these;

TAKE

Processes

TOPS-20

command

file.

TOPS-20

commands

files

Format

@TAKE (COMMANDS FROM)
@@subcommand

filespec,

where

filespec

the

specification of

commands to be processed
Default file type -

@@subcommand

means that after a comma
following subcommands:

the

file

containing

the

.CMD
you can

type

one

the

ALLOW

tells the current level of TOPS-20, for
the
remainder
of the terminal session
(not merely the
c¢urrent
command),
to
continue
processing
a command file if
it encounters errors

DISALLOW

tells the current level of TOPS~20, for
the
remainder
of the terminal session
(not merely the
current
command),
to
ignore
any
remaining
commands
in
a
command fille
after
it
encounters
an
error in the file
Default

ECHO

tells the
system
to
print
(on
your
terminal
or in the specified file) the
commands
that
it
carries
out
while
executing
the
current
TAKE
command.
Ordinarily only
the
output,
1if
any,
produced by the commands is printed.

tells
the
system
not
to
print
the
commands
that
it
carrles
out
while
executing the current TAKE command.
A

ECHO

final
message
is
indicating
whether
were
Hints below.

executed.
Suppressing

sent,
the

however,
commands

See
Final

also
Message,

all
the

Default
LOG-FILE

filespec
tells the
from
the
specified

system

current
file.

save

the

TAKE command

output

the

Output

The

output

from

TAKE

command

consists

the

output

for

each

command
in the command file you specify as argument, followed by
the message, End of filespec, that indicates successful execution
of all the commands in this file.

358

TAKE (Cont.)

Characteri stics

Runni ng

Programs

From

Command

File

If you put commands that run programs
(including
the
PUSH
command)
into
a
command
file, and these programs ask for
arguments, you must be ready to type in these
arguments
at
your
terminal.
Only TOPS-20 commands and command arguments
can be put into a command file executed by the TAKE command.

Hints
Suppr essing

the

Final

want

you

Message

suppress

the

final

message

(of

the

form,

End

of
filespec)
that
indicates
successful
execution
of
a
command file by TAKE, give a TAKE command with no
arguments
as the last line of your command file.

Special

Ca ses

Neste d

TAKE

Commands

In the case of nested TAKE commands (those given as commands
within
command
files),
the
destination
for
output
of
commands given in an inner command file will default to that
specified or assumed for the output of commands given in the
nearest surrounding command file.
Effect

The
the

Memory and

Terminal

TAKE command affects memory and your
terminal
according
¢to
c¢ ommands stored in the command file you specify as argument.

Co mmands

INFOR MATION

commands

(when
put
tracing the

into
a
progress

for logging
COMAND,.CMD,

in;
reads
LOGIN.CMD
then
in your log=—-in directory.

PUSH

for

obtaining

reads

new

COMAND,.CMD

command
of TAKE

1level

file)

your

for

TOPS-20;

log-in

directory.
SUBMI T

for processing command
files
that
run
programs and contain program commands as
well
as
TOPS-20
commands;
BATCH.CMD,
then
COMAND.CMD,
log-in directory.

359

reads
vyour

TAKE (Cont.)

Examples

Process

command

file.

@TAKE BACKUP.CMD
End

BACKUP.CMD.
1

Type a command file that reports system statistics, then give
the
TAKE
command
with
this filename as argument; send the
output to the line printer.
Check for this listing as it
|is
being printed.
'

@TYPE STATUS.CMD
INFORMATION

DISK-USAGE
MONITOR~-STATISTICS

INFORMATION
INFORMATION

SYSTEM-STATUS

INFORMATION

MEMORY-USAGE

SYSTAT

ALL

@TAKE STATUS

LPT:

End of STATUS.CMD.,1
@INFORMATION OUTPUT—REQUESTS

Printer Queue:
Job Name
Req#

Limit

User

M TP W

D TED WS A

ame v

EXEC

There

507

1 Job

the

/USER

WD W WD WD WD B SR

S WD M

AR AP T WD D S

—

LATTA

Queue

360

(None

Progress)

TALK

Allows you to converse with other

users

your

system

1linking

terminals.

Format

@TALK

(TO)

argument

where

argument

is a

user name or

terminal

line number

Characteristics

Typing

TALK Conversation

During a TALK session, you must tell the
system
to
regard
your
conversation
as
comments,
Otherwise,
the
system
interprets your input as attempts to give EXEC commands
and

responds
with the message ?Unrecognized command.
To signal
your input as comments, begin each line with the exclamation
point
(!)
or semicolon (;) comment character.
Or, if your
comment is several lines long, use the REMARK command.

Other

Job

Not

Affected

As
soon
as
youa
give
a
successful
TALK
command,
both
terminals
begin
printing
both users' input as well as the
system's responses to that input.
Each job,
however,
will
receive input from its own terminal only.
Ending

TALK

end a conversation link between

can give

Refused

the

BREAK

command.

terminals,

either

user

TALK

Terminals can be set to refuse links
with
other
terminals
with
the
REFUSE LINKS or TERMINAL INHIBIT command.
If you
attempt to TALK to a user who has refused links from another
terminal,
the
system rings the bells on both terminals six
times, and then prints the message, ?Refused, Send
mail
to
user
instead.
If
the
user
has
refused
all
terminal
communication with the TERMINAL INHIBIT command, the
system
does not ring the bell on his terminal.
If you have Wheel or Operator capabilities enabled, you
TALK to any user who has given the REFUSE LINKS command,
not

the

TERMINAL

INHIBIT command.

361

can
but

TALK (Cont.)

Maximum

Four

Terminals

By using TALK commands, you can link up to four terminals at
once,
For
all
terminals
to share the same display, each
pair of terminals must establish a link.
For
example,
|if
terminal
A
is
1linked
to
B and C, terminals B and C will
display only A's input.
B and C must establish
a
1link
to
display each other's input.

Hints

Signaling

Once

Linked

you

have

User
established

links

with

another

user's

terminal

via
the TALK command, you can get his attention by typing ¢
series of CTRL/Gs.
Depending on the
kind
of
terminal
he
has,
these
will
be
reproduced
as
ringing
bells
or
high-pitched beeps.
This action can
be
especially
useful
when
establishing
1links
with
the
owner
of
a
display
terminal,
as
display
terminals
are
silent
1in
ordinary
operation.

Special

Cases

User

Has

Than

One

Job

If more than one job is logged in under the
user
name
vyou
specify,
the
system
responds
with
a list of that user's
terminal line numbers and the programs being run.
Type your
choice
of
terminal
1line
number
(if
available,
the one
running the EXEC) after the TTY:
prompt.

Talking

Batch

Job

PTYCON

Job

When you link to a PTY
(pseudo-terminal)
to
talk
to
the
owner
of
a batch job or PTYCON job, the system informs you
of this with a message, to
which
you
must
reply
with
a
carriage
return
to confirm the link.
To decline the link,

give a
below.

CTRL/C.

See

also Warning,

Talking

Batch

Job,

Warning

Talking

Batch

Job

Use
caution
when
communicating
through
a
PTY
(pseudo-terminal)
that
1is controlling a batch job:
do not
send a question mark (?) or percent sign (%), because
these
characters
can be attributed to errors occurring within the

job.

Also,

error

actually does

and
the
batch system's question mark
remarks) from the beginning of a line,
recognize it as an error.

362

occur

the

is displaced
the
system

batch

job

(by your
may
not

TALK (Cont.)

Talking

Between a

VT100

and

VT52

If links between VT108 and VT52
terminals
are
established
using
a
TALK
(or
ADVISE)
command, the VT52 may function
improperly during or after the
1linked
interval
(e.g.,
requiring
frequent
CTRL/Q commands to print multiple lines
of output).
Turning the terminal
off
and
then
on
again
(after the linked interval) will correct this problem.
Related

Commands

ADVISE

for sending commands to another user's job

for

BREAK

your

RECEIVE LINKS

REFUSE LINKS

ending

terminal

communications

1links

involving

for allowing other users to

talk to you

for preventing other users

from

talking

you

REMARK

for
telling
the
system
to
terminal input as comment only

SEND

for

TERMINAL INHIBIT

for
refusing
all
types
of
terminal
communication including advice, links, system
messages, user messages, and notices
of

sending

message

regard

another

user's

terminal

mail.

Examples

Give the TALK command

to establish links to another user.

@QTALK H.DAVIES

LINK

FROM

LATTA,

TTY

230

Try to talk to a user who has given the REFUSE LINKS command,
then

use

the MAIL program

@TALK GEBHARDT

?Refused,
@MAIL

use

Subject:

HUNCH

To:
cC:

"MAIL"TM

send

send mail

GEBHARDT
LATTA

363

your message.

user

TALK (Cont.)

Talk to another user, giving the REMARK
command
immediately
after
TALK,
(The other user's reply must still be preceded
by semicolons (;) or exclamation marks (!).)
Give
a
CTRL/Z
to
end
REMARK
conversation.

before

typing

the

BREAK

command

end

the

@TALK CARNAVON
LINK

FROM

LATTA,

TTY

230

@REMARK
Type

remark.

WHERE

End

PUT

with

CTRL/Z.

"REQMD"

@;1n <acctsd>deft-77.cbl
@;you should

RECORDS

AFTER

EXTRACTING

THE

ID'S?

have group access there...

THANKS

—t

@BREAK

Give the TALK command to establish links to a user who has
3
jobs
on
three
different
terminals;
choose
one
of
the
terminals running the TOPS-20# command processor.

@TALK MCKAY
TTY19, DUMPER
TTY26,

EXEC

TTY27,

EXEC

TTY:

LINK

FROM

LATTA,

TTY

238

364

TDIRECTORY

The TDIRECTORY (Time-ordered DIRECTORY) command is equivalent
to
the
DIRECTORY
command
with the subcommands CHRONOLOGICAL WRITE, REVERSE,
and TIMES (AND DATES OF) WRITE.
Use the same format
and
subcommands
with
TDIRECTORY
as with DIRECTORY.
For further information, see the
DIRECTORY command description in this manual.

When used with magnetic tapes,
DIRECTORY for magnetic tapes.

the TDIRECTORY command

is equivalent

Examples

Give a TDIRECTORY command, cancel
after the first few (most recent)

the command with
a
files are displayed.

CTRL/C

@TDIRECTORY
Write

MISC:<LATTA>

TBATCH.CMD.,1
B.DIRECTORY.1
A.DIRECTORY.l
T.CMD.1 “C

1@-May-79 13:11:57
9-May-79 12:54:00
2-May-79 13:14:52

MAccess another user's directory, and request
a
time-ordered
directory listing of all his files of a certain name.
@ACCESS

Password:

@TDIRECTORY <DEVRIES>SYSTEM,*
Write

MISC: <DEVRIES>

SYSTEM.MEM. 1
«TXT. 1
«RNO. 1
Total of 3
@END-ACCESS

19-May-79 (#9:03:48
19-May-79 #9:02:08
19-May=79 09:02:00

files
<DEVRIES>

365

TERMINAL

Sets

the characteristics

your

terminal.

TYPE)

argqument

Format

@TERMINAL

(FEATURE or

where

argument

Summary of

is
a
keyword,
chosen
from
the
list
representing
your
choice
of
TERMINAL
options; some arguments further
require
a
number to complete their meaning.

TERMINAL Command

Arguments

(defaults

below,
command
decimal

boldface)

The TERMINAL
command
arguments
are
divided
into
two
categories,
feature
and
type.
Feature
arguments
set
individual
terminal
characteristics and type arguments set a group of characteristics that
are defined for the model of your terminal.

Feature

Arguments

FLAG
FORMFEED

FULLDUPLEX
HALFDUPLEX
HELP
IMMEDIATE
INDICATE
INHIBIT

LENGTH n

Default

LINE-HALFDUPLEX

LOWERQASE

FLAG
FORMFEED
IMMEDIATE
INDICATE
INHIBIT
NO

LOWERCASE
PAGE

CHARACTER

PAUSE | COMMAND
END-OF-PAGE

RAISE
RECEIVE

TABS

366

TERMINAL (Cont.)

PAGE
PAUSE
RAISE

RECEIVE

50
75
1190

134
150
290

300

SPEED|

600
1209

TABS

1800
2400
4800
9600
-

TYPE

0-36

WIDTH n

Default n - 72

Type

Arguments

33
35
37
EXECUPORT
LAl120
LA30
LA36
LA 38
SYSTEM-DEFAULT
TERMINET
TI

VK104

VT@5
VT100
VT102
VT125
VT200-SERIES
VT50
VT52

367

TERMINAL (Cont.)

Feature

FLAG

Arguments

instructs
quotation

the
system
to
print
mark
(')
before
1t

uppercase

if
FORMFEED

you

character.

set

informs

the

This

takes

LOWERCASE

system

that

a
single
prints
an
effect

only

parameter.

your

terminal

has

form
feed
mechanism;
otherwise, the system
simulates form feeds by printing the
correct
number
of
1line
feeds
(set by the TERMINAL
LENGTH

command)

INDICATE,
set

FULLDUPLEX

TERMINAL

you

have

set

printing

TERMINAL

you

have

INDICATE.,

instructs the system to send to your terminal
each character as the program reads it.
Your

terminal does not print what you
the
system
sends
the character
terminal.,
See also IMMEDIATE.
Default
HALFDUPLEX

inhibits
terminal
your

the
system
from
each
character,

terminal

causes

prints

echoing

each
format

type
back

until
to

sending
to
and
assumes
character
control

the

your
that

itself;

characters

(for example, TAB and line
feed).
Be
sure
also
to
set
any
corresponding
switch
physically located on your terminal.
HELP

prints

information

about

the

echo

each

TERMINAL

command.
IMMEDIATE

INDICATE

instructs

the

system

you

soon

until the
Immediate

program
echoing

FULLDUPLEX

parameter

instructs

the

it,

instead

character
of

waiting

receives
the
character.
has
effect only when the

system

advancing the proper
encountering a form
character 14).
Default
INHIBIT

type

also

set.

number of
feed
or

instead

lines whenever
CTRL/L
(ASCII

notifies the system that you are not
willing
to
receive
1links,
advice, system messages,
and user messages.
Also stops beep
or
bell
signals from users attempting to TALK to your
terminal.
Only output from your own
job
is
displayed
on
your
terminal.
This command
disables the settings
established
with
the
RECEIVE

and

REFUSE

commands.

RECEIVE

and

REFUSE

settings

368

Reestablish
with

the

INHIBIT.

TERMINAL (Cont.)

sets the number
of
1lines
printed
on
each
PAUSE
TERMINAL
have
you
(I£f
page.
END-OF-PAGE set as
well,
the
system
stops
after
printing
n
1lines
and continues only
page
the
set
when you type CTRL/Q.) If you
@, the system stops printing only
to
length
when you type CTRL/S
(as
1long
as
TERMINAL
PAUSE COMMAND is in effect also); it does not
automatically stop at the end of a page.
Default n - 66

LINE-HALFDUPLEX

your
to
sending
from
system
inhibits the
assumes that
and
character,
each
terminal
1tself;
character
your terminal prints each
format control
of
echoing
cause
not
does
characters (for example, TAB and line feed).

LOWERCASE

tells the system that your

LENGTH

lowercase

printing

the

output

the

either

handles

terminal

characters

1lowercase

character

corresponding uppercase character.

NO LOWERCASE

set,

When

converts

system

the

properly,

the
to
characters
output
lowercase
before
characters
uppercase
appropriate
also the FLAG and RAISE
See
then,
sending
parameters.

Default
NO

reverses any
IMMEDIATE,
PAGE, PAUSE,
Defaults

argument

PAGE

of the arguments FLAG, FORMFEED,
LOWERCASE,
INHIBIT,
INDICATE,
RAISE, RECEIVE, and TABS
NO
FORMFEED,
NO
FLAG,
- NO
INHIBIT,
NO
IMMEDIATE,
PAUSE END-OF-PAGE, NO TABS

instructs the system to stop printing when it

reaches the end of a page,

or when you type a

a
typing
by
output
the
Continue
CTRL/S.
page length, give the
the
set
To
CTRL/Q.
command.
LENGTH
number n or give a TERMINAL
If

you

set the page length to #,

the system

any

TERMINAL

stops printing only when you type a CTRL/S.
Default

n -

argument

your

PAUSE

CHARACTER x
END-OF-PAGE
COMMAND

command given in the
LENGTH
current terminal session, or
default page length for
the
terminal

type

sending
instructs the system to stop
full
a
sent
has
it
whenever
type
you
(END-OF-PAGE), or whenever
(COMMAND) or x (CHARACTER).

output
page
CTRL/S

For argument END-OF-PAGE to stop your output,
You
argument COMMAND must also be in effect.
continue the output by typing CTRL/Q or the y
parameter

369

the CHARACTER argument.

TERMINAL (Cont.)

For

argument

CHARACTER

stop

your

output,

the COMMAND and END-OF-~-PAGE arguments must be
in effect.
With the CHARACTER argument,
you
continue
output
by
typing the y parameter.
You can specify x and y in various ways:
as
the
octal
ASCII
code
for any character or
control key; as
any
printing
character
in
double
quotes
(" ");
as the word "control"
followed by the printing representation of
a
control
character
1in double quotation marks
(for example, CONTROL "A"); and as
the
word
"space®
to
specify
the
space bar.
If you
specify x and y to be the
same,
or
if
you
omit
y,
you
get
a toggle effect.
You can
specify
CTRL/S
and
CTRL/Q
as
x
and
y
parameters,
respectively,
only
on
local
terminals.
(Network terminal connections
do
not
allow
for
CTRL/S and CTRL/Q.) But even
some local terminals require that you
select
characters
other than CTRL/S and CTRL/Q, for
example,

the

printer

port

VT125

and

the

VT100

with

the

option.

The default values for x and y are CTRL/S and
CTRL/Q for local terminals, and CTRL/A/CTRL/A
for
network
terminals,
You
can
achieve
consistency
between
local
and
network
terminals by placing the same TERMINAL
PAUSE
CHARACTER

the
To

command

various
set

LENGTH

the

TOPS-20
page

your

1length,

command.

you

to #, the system stops
when
you
type
CTRL/S
the CHARACTER argument.
Default - COMMAND
-

files

wuse
set

the
the

sending

the

length

output

(for

END-OF-PAGE

TERMINAL

page

only

parameter

all

(for

display

example,
vT54,
VT100)
CHARACTER

(for

terminal

types)
terminals,

systems.

all

for
VvT@5,
vT52,

terminal

types)
RAISE

instructs
the
system
to
interpret
all
lowercase terminal input as the corresponding
upper characters.
(This setting converts the
tilde
()
and
right brace (}) to the <ESC>
key.)
Default

RECEIVE

same as the
the same as

3790

RECEIVE

the

command.

REFUSE

command.

RECEIVE

TERMINAL (Cont.)

SPEED

sets

the

baud

rate

which

the

TOPS-28

monitor
receives
characters
from
your
terminal (nl) and sends
characters
to
vyour
terminal
(n2).
Be
sure
also
to
set any
corresponding switch
physically
located
on
your terminal.
Default

300

informs the system
that
your
terminal
has
mechanical
tab stops.
Causes the TAB key to
advance the cursor according to the tab stops
on
your
terminal.
(Some terminals let you
select tab stops while others have tab
stops
every
eight spaces).
If NO TABS is set, the
system simulates
a
tab
by
printing
eight

TABS

spaces.

TYPE

instructs the
as
terminal

table

system to treat
your
type
n, in accordance

below:

Terminal
Type

Characteristics

Model

1
2
3
4~7
8
9

Model 35
Model 37
EXECUPORT and TI
reserved for customer use
TERMINET
IDEAL
(has
a
TAB
and
mechanism,
prints
1lower

infinite
page

1line

and

infinite

length)

VT@5

11
12

VT59
LA30

VT52, except for not
having
tabs,
and
having
a
page length of 30;
used
for
a
Digital
Equipment
Corporation GT44d.

35
36

LA36
VT52
VT100

LA 38
LAl120
reserved

for

customer

use

VT125
VK100
Default

width

FORMFEED
case, has

14
15
16
17
18
19-34

WIDTH

terminal
with the

tells the system
the
width,
in
number
of
characters,
of your terminal line.
When the
system
prints
a
1line
longer
than
your
terminal
width,
it
prints
the
first
n
positions and advances a line
to
print
the
rest.

Default

371

width -

TERMINAL (Cont.)

Type

Arguments

informs the system
Teletype Model 33,
does
not
mechanism
prints

that your
which

have

lowercase

form

letters

needs
extra
time
to
certain
paper-moving
feed and vertical tab)
has

line width

has

page

terminal

length

feed

1is

tab

uppercase

print
tabs
and
characters
(form

72
66

informs the system that your
terminal
is
a
Teletype
Model
35,
which
has
the
same
characteristics as a Model 33, except that it
has a form feed and tab mechanism,

informs the system that your
terminal
1is
a
Teletype
Model
37,
which
has
the
same
characteristics as a Model 33, except that it
prints lowercase letters.

EXECUPORT

informs the system
EXECUPORT, which
does
not
mechanism
prints

needs

that your

have

lowercase

extra

form

terminal

feed

tab

letters

time

perform

has a

line width

has

page

carriage

return

H19

length

informs the system that your
terminal
s
a
Heath
Kit
H19 terminal.
The system assumes
the same characteristics as for the VT52,

372

TERMINAL (Cont.)

LA 30

informs
Digital

the system that your
Equipment Corporation

does
not
mechanism

prints

have

lowercase

form

letters

terminal
1is
LA3@, which
feed

needs extra time to perform
return, line feed, tab, and

LA36

has a

line

width

has

page

length

informs
Digital

prints

lowercase
line

width

has

page

length

prints

have

form

lowercase

line

width

has

page

length

tab

terminal
is
LA38, which

letters
of
of

lowercase

132
66

letters

has

line

width of

has

page

length

373

feed

132

the system that your
Equipment Corporation

prints

terminal
1is
LA36, which

form-feed mechanism

has

informs
Digital

a
carriage
form feed

the system that your
Equipment Corporation
not

uppercase

letters

does

LAl120

have

has

informs
Digital

tab

the system that your
Equipment Corporation

does
not
mechanism

LA 38

132
66

terminal
1is
LAl12¢, which

TERMINAL (Cont.)

SYSTEM-DEFAULT

informs the system
that
your
terminal
has
these characteristics (ensuring an acceptable
minimum level of performance for all terminal
types):

does

not

mechanism
prints

have

lowercase

form

feed

has a

TERMINET

line

width

does
not
mechanism
prints

that

have

your

lowercase

form

type

terminal

feed

has a

line width of
page

1is

tab

letters

needs extra time to perform
return, line feed, tab, and
has

a
carriage
form feed

page length of 66
Default for terminal

informs the system
TERMINET, which

tab

letters

needs extra time to perform
return, line feed, tab, and
has

length of

a
carriage
form feed

72
66

informs the system that your
terminal
1is
a
Texas
Instruments
terminal,
which
has the
same characteristics as an EXECUPORT.

VK100

informs the system that your
terminal
is
a
Digital
Equipment
VK100
with
the
same
characteristics as the VT52 and
VT100,
plus
graphics capability (both black-and-white and
color).

VT@05

informs
Digital

the system that your
terminal
is
Equipment Corporation VT#5, which

does not have a
has a
prints

needs
or

form-feed mechanism

tab mechanism
lowercase

extra

letters

time

perform

formfeed

has

line

width

has

page

length

374

uppercase

1linefeed

TERMINAL (Cont.)

informs
Digital

VT58

the system that your
terminal
is
Equipment Corporation VT58, which

does

not

prints

line width

has

page

the

form

lowercase

has

informs

VT52

have

letters
of

length

system

feed

that

mechanism
as

uppercase

your

terminal

1is

Digital
Equipment
Corporation
VT52,
The
system assumes the
same
characteristics
as
for
a
VTS50
except that it prints lowercase
letters, and has a page length
of
24
lines
instead of 12,
VT100

informs the system
Digital
Equipment
system assumes the
for a VT52,

that your
terminal
is
a
Corporation
VT104d.
The
same
characteristics
as

VT1l02

informs the system
Digital
Equipment
system assumes the
for a VT100.

that your
terminal
1is
a
Corporation
VT142,
The
same
characteristics
as

VT125

informs the system that your
terminal
is
a
Digital
Equipment
Corporation
VT125, which
has full compatibility with the VT106 and the
capability
of
business,
1laboratory,
and
scientific
graphics
in
black-and-white
or
color.

VT200-SERIES

informs the system that your
terminal
1is
a
Digital
Equipment
Corporation VT220, VT244,
or
VT24l.
The
system
assumes
the
same
characteristics as a VT100.

Characteristics

TERMINAL Commands

Before

Log-in

You can use TERMINAL commands, after an
initial
RETURN
but
before
1logging
1in,
to adjust your
characteristics.

CTRL/C
or
terminal's

Hints
Setting

Your

Terminal's

Speed

If the initial speed setting of your terminal
1line
is
not
what you want but your terminal will function at that speed,
you can give a TERMINAL SPEED command even before log-in
to
set the proper value.
If your terminal will not work at the
initial speed, ask the operator to set an appropriate value.

375

TERMINAL (Cont.)

Using

Split

Speeds

you have a terminal

that allows

split speeds, you can set

the
1input and output speeds to different values.
This will
allow you to take advantage of
fast
system' response,
for
example,
without providing a needlessly fast input line.
A
setting of 150 2400 will accomplish
this.
'Note
that
you
cannot
use
split
speeds
on
a terminal that is part of a
DECSYSTEM-2020 system.
Note also that using split speeds on
VT106,
VT125,
or
VK@@
terminals
may
cause the "smooth
scrolling” feature to function
improperly.
Refer
to
the
appropriate
terminal
manual, for example, the VT10@ User's

Guide,

Special

for

details.

Cases

Terminal

Types and

Defaults

Peculiar

to Your

System

The preceding
pages
describe
terminal
types
and
system
defaults
as
they
are
shipped
with TOPS-20.
However, by
making changes
to
the
monitor
and
the
TOPS-20
command

processor,
your
installation
can
add
different terminal
types and change the default characteristics associated with
terminals.
Check with your system manager to find out what

changes,

Terminal

Speed

1If

any,

are

Retained

effect

from Last

for

your

system,

Session

Although most terminal
characteristics
revert
to
default
settings
when you log in, the terminal line will retain the
value for speed set by the last user of the line, even if he
was
using
a
different
kind of terminal.
However, if the
system failed and was restarted after the terminal line
was
last
used,
the
1initial
speed
will
be determined by the
appropriate
TERMINAL
SPEED
command
in
the
system
configuration file.
Also, dial-up lines return to the speed
specified in this file after every use.

|
I

Restrictions

CTRL/S

and

CTRL/Q Not

Passed

Remote Nodes

CTRL/S and CTRL/Q are always processed by
your
host
node;
they are not sent to a remote node.,
Therefore, when you are

|
|
|
]

TERMINAL
PAUSE
(ON) END-OF-PAGE is set on the remote node,
CTRL/Q will not continue scrolling.
CTRL/A is
the
default
control
character recognized by the remote node for pausing
and continuing scrolling.
You can use
the TERMINAL
PAUSE

scrolling

|
|
|

connected to a remote node

with

the

SETHOST

program

and

(ON)
CHARACTER
command
to
specify the pause and continue
characters of your choosing - except CTRL/S and CTRL/Q.
It
is
recommended
that you define the same pause and continue
characters on your host and

376

the

remote node.

TERMINAL (Cont.)

Disabling

CTRL/S

and

CTRL/Q

High

Speed

Terminals

Some terminal models, when set to a high receive baud
rate,
such
as
9600, require that the CTRL/S and CTRL/Q pause and
continue characters be enabled in order to correctly
format
terminal output.
If you must disable CTRL/S and CTRL/Q with
the TERMINAL NO PAUSE COMMAND, manually set the terminal
to
fast or "jump" scroll.
If the output is still not correctly
formatted, set a slower receive baud rate with the
TERMINAL
SPEED command.
Then, manually set the same baud rate on the
terminal.

Warning

Setting

Improper

Terminal

Speed

If you
set
an
incorrect
speed
for
your
terminal,
for
example,
one that is too high, you will be unable to use it
further.
A TERMINAL SPEED command in the LOGIN.CMD file
in
your log~in directory can cause the same problem.
In such a
case, obtain your terminal
1line
number
1f
possible
(the
second
column
of
SYSTAT
command
output consists of line
numbers) and ask the operator to set an appropriate value.

Commands

INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE

for

examining

your current

terminal

settings

Examples

Declare

that

your

terminal

VT100.

@TERMINAL VT100
Do

the

same

thing,

using

the

corresponding

numerical

type.

@TERMINAL TYPE 16

Prepare your LA36 terminal for you to
lowercase text files on narrow paper.

@TERMINAL

LA36

@TERMINAL NO RAISE

@terminal width 72

377

type

some

upper—

and

TERMINAL (Cont.)

Find out
vyour
terminal's
characteristics,
then
give
the
command
that
causes
it to print a full page of blank lines
an "L in a file
when you type a CTRL/L (or when it encounters
it

printing on

your

terminal).

@INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE
TERMINAL LA36
TERMINAL SPEED 300
TERMINAL NO INHIBIT (NON-JOB

OUTPUT)

RECEIVE LINKS
REFUSE ADVICE
RECEIVE SYSTEM-MESSAGES
RECEIVE USER-MESSAGES

TERMINAL PAUSE (ON) COMMAND
TERMINAL NO PAUSE (ON) END-OF-PAGE
TERMINAL LENGTH 66
TERMINAL WIDTH 132
TERMINAL

LOWERCASE

TERMINAL

RAISE

TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL

NO FLAG
INDICATE
NO FORMFEED
NO TABS
NO IMMEDIATE
FULLDUPLEX

@TERMINAL NO

INDICATE

378

TRANSLATE

Displays the project-programmer number corresponding
to
a
directory
name,
or
the
directory
name
corresponding to a project-programmer
number,

Format

@TRANSLATE

(DIRECTORY)

dev:<directory>

@TRANSLATE

(DIRECTORY)

dev:[project-programmer number]

where

is the name of the directory,

dev:<directory>

enclosed
that

angle brackets,

you want translated
Default dev: - your
connected
structure

dev:[project-programmer number]

the

number,

project-programmer

enclosed

that
brackets,
translated
Default dev:

you

square
want

- your
connected
structure

Hints

Using

Project—-programmer Numbers

names
directory
of
Use project-programmer numbers instead
when giving file specifications to programs written for the
assembler
the
include
These
operating system.,
TOPS-10

the FORTRAN, COBOL, and ALGOL compilers; the linking
MACRO;
(providing
CREF
programs
utility
and
LINK;
loader
(for comparing
FILCOM
and
information)
cross—-reference

If you are unsure whether a system program requires
files).
project-programmer numbers, load it into memory (using the R
level,
command), give a CTRL/C to return to TOPS-2@ command
memory with the INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
examine
then
and
compatibility
If the file PAl@#S5@.EXE (the TOPS-10
command.

was
program
the
then
memory,
in
present
is
package)
a
require
may
and
TOPS-10
for
written
originally
number where you would ordinarily give a
project-programmer
directory name,

379

TRANSLATE (Cont.)

Avoiding Project-programmer Numbers

name
1logical
To avoid project-programmer numbers, define a
fewer characters) as the directory in question,
or
(of 6
the directory when
Then use this logical name in place of
The system program will accept
file specifications.
giving
then be using
the logical name as a device name, and will
the

correct directory.

Commands

DEFINE

for defining a logical name as a directory,
using a

project-programmer number

avoid

with

your

Examples

Find out the project-programmer number associated

connected directory.
@TRANSLATE

PS:<LATTA>

<LATTA>

(IS)

PS:[4,261]

Verify that the project—programmer number reported
1 does correspond to your directory on PS:.
@TRANSLATE PS:[4,261]
PS:[4,261] (IS) PS:<LATTA>

380

in Example

TYPE

Displays

the contents of one or more

files on your

terminal.

Format

@TYPE (FILE)
@@subcommand

filespeC,cce,

where

filespec

is the specification
of
the
file
want to display on your terminal

can

means that, after commas, you

pgoece

@@subcommand

file specifications

means that after a final comma
enter

the

following optional

you

vyou

give
can

subcommand:

of
formatting
the
Disables
contained
characters
control

UNFORMATTED

the

TYPE

file.

command

Normally,

displays

the

graphic equivalent for certain
for
characters,
control
and
$
as
ESCAPE
example,
The UNFORMATTED
CTRL/C as "C.
subcommand
causes
characters
to
be
displayed
1literally,
allowing
graphic
text
(for
example
REGIS
files)
to
be
displayed on the. terminal.

Output

Entire

Contents of

Files

In response to the TYPE command the system prints the entire
contents
of
a
file (up to the EOF (end-of-file) pointer),
including blank lines and line numbers if there are any.
If
you
specify
more
than one file, the filespec precedes the
contents of each

file,

Hints

Stopping

TYPE

Output

To stop the TYPE command, type two CTRL/Cs.
A
CTRL/O
will
also
stop
the
output, but will not stop the processing of
the command or the accumulation of CPU charges.
Note that a
pair
of
CTRL/0Os causes the system to skip over part of the
output

and

continue

printing.

381

TYPE (Cont.)

Commands

corY

for

copying

files

EDIT

for

examining

PERUSE

for

editing

for

printing

any device

specific

files

parts

file

read-only mode

the

line

printer

file

your

terminal.

Examples

Have

@TYPE

the

system

TEST,.TXT

This Is file TEST.TXT !

382

UNATTACH

Disengages

another

job

from

its

terminal.

Format

QUNATTACH

(USER)

name

(JOB

number

PASSWORD :password

where

name

the

number

the job number
Default number

password

user

name of

the

job's

owner

the
only
3job,
or
only
Jjob
besides
your
current
(attached)
job,
logged
in
under the user name you give

is the associated password (not requested if you
currently
logged in under the same user name as
job that you are disengaging)

are
the

Characteristics

Log=in Not

Necessary

You do not
command.

have

1logged

1in

give

the

UNATTACH

Hints

Freeing

Hung

Terminals

The UNATTACH command is useful for freeing a terminal
because
of
program
or hardware errors, is no longer
control of the user.
The command UNATTACH
n
can
be
effective than LOGOUT n for this purpose.

Ef fect

The

Memory

and

UNATTACH

terminal

current

state

left

the

that,
under
more

Terminal

command

does

TOPS-20

command

(usually

state

not

affect

suspended)

before

memory and

level.

The

and

other

the

leaves

job

disengaged

your

left

its

terminal

|is

log-in.

Commands

ADVISE

for

sending

commands

ATTACH

for

joining

another

job

DETACH

for disengaging

your own

383

another

job

terminal

your

job

from

own

its terminal

UNATTACH (Cont.)

Examples

Disengage

another

user's

job

from

its

terminal.

@UNATTACH KANE
Password:

From a terminal on which you have not yet logged in, give the
UNATTACH
command
to
disengage your only logged-in job from
its terminal.
BOSTON (KL2871)
QUNATTACH LATTA

Development

system,

TOPS-28 Monitor

6.1(7)

Password:

Give a SYSTAT command to find out what jobs you have running.
Give the UNATTACH command for two of them (you must specify a
job number for the first one so the system
will
know
which
one you mean), and check them with another SYSTAT command.

@SYSTAT LATTA
28
36*
40

26
230

EXEC
EXEC
27
EXEC
@QUNATTACH LATTA gg
{Attached to TTY26,

@QUNATTACH LATTA
@SYSTAT

LATTA

LATTA
LATTA
LATTA

confirm]

DET

EXEC

LATTA

36*
40

239
DET

EXEC
EXEC

LATTA
LATTA

384

UNDELETE

Restores deleted

files.

Format

QUNDELETE

filespecC,...

(FILES)

where

is the specification of the file you want to restore
Default .gen - all generations of the specified

filespec

files

means that, after commas, you

specifications

can

give

file

Restrictions

Erasure of Deleted

Files

same
the
given during
UNDELETE command
Oordinarily an
session as an original deletion will recover the
terminal
deleted files, unless you included the EXPUNGE subcommand to

DELETE

gave

directory,

1logs

out

while

connect

the

all deleted files are permanently erased.

if available disk space is low on the system,

However, if

a subsequent EXPUNGE command.

any user or a batch job

system

itself

may

expunge

the

your

Also,

operator

all deleted files.

system warning message is usually sent before this happens.

Special

Cases

Restoring Files Deleted With CONTENTS-ONLY Subcommand.

Any files deleted by a DELETE command with
subcommand

are

Iimmediately

expunged.

RETRIEVE command to restore these to disk.

You

CONTENTS-ONLY

must

use the

Commands

DELETE

for deleting files

DIRECTORY-CLASS commands,

For obtaining lists of deleted files

EXPUNGE

for

RETRIEVE

for restoring off-line files to disk

with the DELETED subcommand

files

permanently

erasing

deleted

UNDELETE (Cont.)

Examples

Undelete

@UNDELETE

file.

TEST.FIL

TEST.FIL.1

TEST.FIL.2
2.

[OK]

Access another user's directory,
files of type .FIL.

@ACCESS

Password:

@UNDELETE <CARSON>*,FIL
<CARSON>MEMO,.FIL.1
[OK]
<CARSON>SEARCH.FIL.1 [OK]
<CARSON>TEST.FIL.1 [OK]
<CARSON>VERFY.FIL.1l [OK]
@END-ACCESS <CARSON>

386

then

restore

all

his deleted

UNKEEP
Cancels

the

kept

status of a

fork.

Format

UNKEEP

fork

(FORK)

where

fork

is one of the

Fork name

following:

Fork number
Default -

the current

fork

Characteristics

Unkept

Forks

memory

when

Forks are normally unkept unless kept with the

KEEP

An unkept fork is a fork that is cleared

another

given.

program

1loaded

when

from

the RESET command is

or SET PROGRAM KEEP commands.
Inferior

Forks

The UNKEEP command simultaneously cancels the kept status of
a superior fork and

its

inferior

forks.

Hints

Information

multiforking-class
The UNKEEP command is one of the TOPS-2@
For more information about multiforking, see the
commands.
TOPS-20
the
in
Programs
Multiple
Running
section named
User's Guide.

Effect

Memory

does,
It
The UNKEEP command does not immediately affect memory.
to be cleared when another
in memory
fork
allow a
however,
program is loaded or the RESET command is given.
Related

Commands

for displaying the fork status

INFORMATION FORK=-STATUS

for changing an unkept fork

KEEP

kept

RESET

CONTINUE,

FORK,

SET NAME,

and

KEEP,

FREEZE,

INFORMATION FORK-STATUS,
SET PROGRAM

387

fork

for clearing

forks from memory

other

multiforking-related

commands

UNKEEP (Cont.)

Examples
1.

Give the INFORMATION FORK-STATUS command to display the
£fork
status.
Then,
give
the
UNKEEP command to cancel the kept
status of the current fork and redisplay the fork status.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (l): Kept, HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.6
FILCOM (2): Kept, "C from IO wait at 700272,
@UNKEEP
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.6

FILCOM

(2):

Kept,

“C from

Display the fork status, and
verify the new fork status.,

IO wait at

UNKEEP a

700272,

noncurrent

0:00:00.2

0:00:00.2
fork.,

Then,

@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.6
FILCOM (2): Kept, "C from IO wait at 700272, 0:00:00.2
@UNKEEP FILCOM
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.6
FILCOM (2): “C from IO wait at 7008272, 0:00:00.2

388

UNLOAD
Rewinds a magnetic tape until it is returned completely to the
source
reel, and puts the associated tape drive offline.
Use UNLOAD only for
tapes mounted on drives having device names of the form MTAn:.
Format

@QUNLOAD

(DEVICE)

dev:

where

is the name of the magnetic tape drive that you want

dev:

unload

Restrictions

UNLOAD With Open Files

has
that
If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program
tape drive and you then gave the UNLOAD
magnetic
a
opened

if
first ask
command for that tape drive, the system will
You must do so for
to close the associated file.
want
you
to
wunable
probably be
you will
but
UNLOAD to succeed,
program from that point because the file will
the
continue
now be

UNLOAD Not

closed.

for MOUNTed

Drives

the
with
obtained
drives
Use the UNLOAD command for tape
Use DISMOUNT for a tape drive obtained with
ASSIGN command.
MOUNT.

Warning

Cannot Access Tape Again

The UNLOAD command makes it impossible to access
again unless it is reloaded by the operator.
Related

your

tape

the

form

Commands

ASSIGN
DISMOUNT

for assigning a tape drive to your Jjob
for unloading tapes mounted on

devices

MTn:

REWIND

for rewinding a magnetic tape volume or
its load point (logical beginning)

389

tape

set

UNLOAD (Cont.)

Examples

Unload your magnetic

tape

from drive MTA@:.

@UNLOAD MTAQ:

390

VDIRECTORY
The

VDIRECTORY

(Verbose

DIRECTORY

command

SIZE,

TIMES

and

subcommands

with

(AND

see

OF)

DIRECTORY command

When used with magnetic tapes, the
the DIRECTORY command for magnetic

LENGTH,

WRITE.

VDIRECTORY

the

command

subcommands

DATES

with

information

DIRECTORY)

the

Use

with

equivalent
HEADING,

the

same

VDIRECTORY

the

format

DIRECTORY.

description

PROTECTION,

For

and

further

this manual.

command

tapes.

equivalent

Examples

Give the
CTRL/C.

VDIRECTORY command,

then

cut

off

the

output

with

@VDIRECTORY
MISC:<LATTA>

4-UPED. TXT.14;P777700
A.DIRECTORY.1;P20200

0(7)

25-Apr-85

9(9)

09:58:21

2~-May-85

13:14:52

24-Apr-85

10:10:10

ARTIFI.CTL.7;P777700

215(7)

B.DIRECTORY.1;P20200

0(9)

C.EXE.1;P777708

1536(36)

CONFAB.CTL.1;P777700

115(7)

DIVIDE.FOR.4;P777700

3-May-85

13:34:37

2608(7)

DUMPER.MAC.1;P777700

8-Mar-85

15:47:41

134442(7)

8-Nov-85

10:47:04

MAGNIF.CTL.2;P777700

g
1

Ask

for

VDIRECTORY

9-May-85

12:54:00

13-Apr-85

04:27:59

1°C

listing

headings.

certain

files;

include

line

@VDIRECTORY TEST.FOR,
@@HEADING
ae
PGS

Bytes(SZ)

Write

MISC: <LATTA>

TESTF1.FOR.8;P777700

TESTF2.FOR.1;P7777090
TESTF3.FOR.1;P777700

Total

pages

file

391

115(7)

25-Apr-85

115(7)

09:44:5¢0

20-Apr-85

115(7)

10:01:56

20-Apr-85

10:02:19

APPENDIX

FUNCTIONAL

GROUPING

TOPS-2¢

COMMANDS

This appendix lists and briefly explains all
non-privileged
commands
in
the
TOPS-20
command
language,
grouping
them
in categories of
similar use.

A.l

SYSTEM

ACCESS

COMMANDS

These

commands allow you to gain and relinquish access to the
system,
to
activate
and
deactivate
any
special capabilities you have been
given, and to disengage and engage jobs to your terminal.
ATTACH

Engages

DETACH

Disengages

your

Deactivates

any

DISABLE

designated

job

your

terminal.

current

job

from

your

special

capabilities

terminal.
you

have

been

granted.

ENABLE

Activates

any

special

capabilities

you

have

granted.

A.2

Gains

LOGOUT

Relinquishes

UNATTACH

Disengages

FILE

SYSTEM

The file system
delete files,
ACCESS

APPEND

access

the

TOPS-20

access

another

the

job

from

been

system.
TOPS-20
its

system.

terminal.

COMMANDS

commands

allow you

Obtains

create,

ownership

examine,

rights

directory,
as
well
directory's owner.

the

Adds

contents

one

change,

the

group

files

and

specified

rights

the

another

file.
ARCHIVE

Makes

permanent

BUILD

Creates,

Closes

modifies,

files

unopened

left

JFNs,

off-line
or

open

copy

deletes

files.

subdirectory.

program,

and

releases

FUNCTIONAL GROUPING OF TOPS-2¢ COMMANDS

CONNECT

Connects you to the specified directory.

coprY

Duplicates

CREATE

Invokes your defined editor to create a file,

DEFINE

Associates

DELETE

files
(disk
erasure
for eventual
files
Marks
only), or erases the files (all other devices).

DIRECTORY

Gives information about the files in a directory.

DISCARD

Gives up the tape copy of specified on-line files.

EDIT

Invokes your defined editor to modify a file.

END-ACCESS

Relinquishes ownership

EXPUNGE

Permanently erases any deleted files.

FDIRECTORY

Lists all the information about files.

PERUSE

Edits files

RENAME

1logical

with

name

one

filespecs.

rights

the

specified

directory.

in read-only mode.

Changes one or more

parts

existing

file

specification.

RETRIEVE

Restores off-1line files to disk.

TDIRECTORY

the
1in
files
Lists the names and write dates of
order of the date and time they were last changed.

TYPE

Prints files on your

UNDELETE

Restores

VDIRECTORY

their
as
as well
files,
names of
the
Lists
size, and the date and time they were
protection,
last

A.3

files.

files marked

terminal.
for erasure.

changed.

DEVICE-HANDLING COMMANDS

to
1it,
These commands allow you to reserve a device prior to using
manipulate the device, and to release it once it 1s no longer needed.
ASSIGN

Reserves a device for use by your job.

BACKSPACE

Moves a magnetic

DEASSIGN

Releases a previously assigned device.

DISMOUNT

Gives up access to the specified structure or tape

tape backward.

set.

EOF

Writes an end-of-file mark on a magnetic tape.

MOUNT

Requests
Seto

use of the specified
)

structure

tape

FUNCTIONAL

GROUPING

TOPS-28

COMMANDS

REWIND

Moves

magnetic

tape

backward

SKIP

Moves

magnetic

tape

forward.

UNLOAD

Rewinds

magnetic

completely

A.4

PROGRAM

The

following
COMPILE

the

tape

until

source

its

the

load

tape

point.

1is

wound

reel,

CONTROL COMMANDS
commands

help

you

Translates

run
a

and

debug

source

your

own

programs.,

program

using

the

program

appropriate

compiler.
CONTINUE

CREF

Resumes

execution

interrupted

by a

Runs

CREF

the

program,

cross—-reference listing
to the line printer.
CSAVE

DDT

(e.g.,

one

CTRL/C).
which

and

produces

automatically sends

Saves
1In
a
compressed
executable
format
the
program
currently
in
memory.
(Usually SAVE is
better for most purposes.)
Merges

DDT)

the

loaded

with

debugging

the

debugging

current

program

and

(or

then

none,

the

it
with
starts

a
the

program.

DEBUG

Compiles
a
source
program,
loads
compatible
debugging
program,
and
debugging program.

DEPOSIT

Sets
the
location.

ERUN

Runs

EXAMINE

Checks

EXECUTE

Compiles,

1if

starts

contents

system

the
location.

program

contents

loads,

the

and

specified

ephemeral

memory

fork.

the

specified

memory

begins

execution

program.,

FORK

Selects

the

current

fork

which

TOPS-20

commands

apply.
FREEZE

Stops

GET

Places

KEEP

Protects

fork

LOAD

Compiles

program

MERGE

Places

running
an

with

fork.

executable

program

from

being

and

executable

the

current

cleared

loads

program

contents

memory

Starts

A-3

and

merges

of memory.

PUSH

level

memory.

into memory.

Finishes a level of TOPS-20 and
the previous level of TOPS-20.
new

from

POP

memory.

TOPS-24.

returns

control

FUNCTIONAL GROUPING

Runs

REENTER

Starts the
alternate
entry

A.,5

system

TOPS-2¢

program,

program
currently
in
entry
point specified

Clears memory for the
and its inferiors.

RUN

Places
it.

SAVE

Copies the
executable

START

Begins

UNKEEP

Cancels

These commands
and the system

memory
at
the
in the program's

vector.

RESET

INFORMATION

COMMANDS

executable

program

contents
format.

execution
the

kept

specified

fork of

in memory

memory

the

program

status

and

into

your

Jjob

starts

file

memory.

fork.

COMMANDS

return information
as a whole.

DAYTIME

Prints

HELP

Gives

the

about

current

TOPS-20

date

commands,

and

time

explanatory message

about

your

Jjob,

day.

specific

system

programs,

INFORMATION

Provides

information

available

about

computing

your

job

resources,

and

its

and

use

about

the

system,

A.6

SYSTAT

Gives a summary of
on the systenm,

TRANSLATE

Tells

TERMINAL

you
what
assoclated with a

Sends

to
BLANK

about

project-programmer
directory name, and

current

jobs

number
is
vice versa.

COMMANDS

The terminal commands allow you to
terminal,
to
<clear
your
video
another user's terminal.
ADVISE

information

whatever

job

Clears

line

declare
screen,

you

engaged

your

the characteristics of your
and
to control linking to

type

display

another
screen

your

terminal

input

terminal.
and

moves

the

cursor

BREAK

Clears

communication

RECEIVE

Allows

your

links,

advice,

links.

terminal

system

receive

messages

communication

from

other

users.,

REFUSE

Denies

links,

terminal,

advice,

system

messages

your

FUNCTIONAL GROUPING

REMARK

Notifies
sending

the

OF TOPS-2#

system

commands

COMMANDS

that

but

your

SET

Establishes certain job-wide
your terminal session.

SET HOST

Connects

SEND

Sends messages

TAKE

Executes commands contained

TALK

Links two
what
the
his job.

TERMINAL

Informs the system of
you
determine
the

the

terminal
to

terminal

1is

not

characteristics

for

only comments.,

another

system.

terminals.

terminals so
other
wuser

the specified

that each
is doing,

file.

user can
observe
without affecting

your terminal
setting
of

type,
its

and lets
wvariable

parameters.

A.7

OUTPUT

COMMANDS

These commands allow you to request output listings of
plotter,
1line
printer,
card
punch,
or
paper
tape
examine, modify, or withdraw these requests,
CANCEL

files
on
the
punch, and to

Withdraws requests from an output
queue (waiting list).

INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS

Lists

entries

the

output

queues,

MODIFY

Changes

entries

1in

output

requests

plotter

line

printer

queue,

PLOT

Places
output

PRINT
PUNCH

A.8

BATCH

queue,

Places

requests

output

queue,

Places

requests

paper

tape

for

in a

punch

card

punch

output

queue.

can

submit

COMMANDS

The TOPS-2# system also has a batch system to
jobs

in a

which

execution.

CANCEL BATCH

INFORMATION BATCH=-REQUESTS

Withdraws

the

batch

input

Changes entries in the batch

input

entries

you

queue

from

(waiting

Lists entries in

list).

the

queue,

MODIFY BATCH

queue.

SUBMIT

Places a batch control

batch

A-5

input

queue,

file

the

APPENDIX
ALPHABETICAL

LIST

TOPS-208

COMMANDS

This appendix consists of an alphabetical list of TOPS-~28 commands and
short
descriptions
of
each.
The
varieties
of argument needed to
complete each command are shown next, in the order that you give them;
parentheses
indicate
that
the
argument
1is
optional
or
<can
be
defaulted.
Last comes the effect of the command
on
memory - whether

it clears memory (by loading a program or by other means) or otherwise
alters it, or leavés
it unaffected.
Use this appendix along with
the
question mark and recognition features to refresh your memory once you
have become familiar with the contents of this manual.

Effect
on

Command

Function

ACCESS

gets ownership
to a directory

ADVISE

sends

commands

another

user's

APPEND

adds files
of another

ARCHIVE

Arguments

Memory

rights

dev:<directory>,
password

user

—

job

terminal

requests off-line
storage of files

filespecs,
(subcommand)

ASSIGN

allocates a device
for your job

device

ATTACH

engages

user

job

end

number

filespecs,
(subcommands)

your

onto
file

name

terminal

name

name,

——

(job number)
(password)

BACKSPACE

moves a magnetic
tape backward

device name, number
of records or files

---

BLANK

clears

———

(user name or
line number)

your

terminal

video

screen

BREAK

ends
TALK

links made
command

by a

BUILD

creates, modifies, or
deletes a subdirectory

dev:<directory>,
subcommands

——

CANCEL

withdraws output
or batch requests

queue,

jobname

ALPHABETICAL

COMPILE

LIST

closes open

files

translates

source

programs

OF TOPS—28

COMMANDS

JFN

filespecs,

switches

into object

loads
compiler

programs

CONNECT

connects
to

CONTINUE

your

Jjob

directory

continues

halted

dev:<directory>,
password
NORMALLY

STAY

program

COPY

makes copies
a file

CREATE

creates

CREF

filespec,fllespec
(subcommands)

file

translates

.CRF

files

listings

into

CSAVE

stores a copy of
memory in a file
(in compressed format)

DAYTIME

tells
time

the

DDT

starts

date

loads

(switches),
filespec

EDIT

(filespec)

loads
CREF

(filespec,
locations)

memory

and

debugging

(switches)

merges

debugging

program

with
existing
memory (if
necessary)
DEASSIGN

gives up a previously
assigned device

device

DEBUG

debugs

filespec,

program

name

switches

loads
program

and

debugging
program

DEFINE

establishes or withdraws
logical name

logical name,
search list

marks

files

later

erasure

filespecs,
(subcommands)

a
DELETE

DEPOSIT

for

changes contents of
a memory location

memory
octal

location,
number

changes
one

location
DETACH

disengages a
job from your
terminal

(argument)

DIRECTORY

gives
about

(dev:<directory>,
filespecs),
subcommands

information
files

ALPHABETICAL

LIST

OF TOPS-28

COMMANDS

DISABLE

deactivates
capabilities

DISCARD

gives up tape copy
of on-line files

filespecs

DISMOUNT

gives

alias or
switches

up access
or

structure

tape

setname,

set

(switches),
filespec

EDIT

edits
files

ENABLE

activates capabilities

END-ACCESS

terminates ownership
rights to a directory

dev:<directory>

EOF

writes an
end-of-file mark
a magnetic tape

device

ERUN

existing

name

system

runs

name

system

loads

(switches)

program

program in an
ephemeral fork

program

EXAMINE

inspects
location

memory location

EXECUTE

compiles,
starts

memory

loads

and

filespec,

switches

program

loads

compiler
and/or
program

EXPUNGE

erases all deleted
files from a
directory

FDIRECTORY

DIRECTORY command
with subcommands
CRAM, EVERYTHING,

and

specifies what
fork is current

FREEZE

stops

name

number

fork name
or number

places an executable
program in memory

filespec,
(switches)

presents a short
description of a

name

system

INFORMATION

fork

running

HELP

(dev:ildirectory>,
filespecs),
subcommands

HEADING

FORK

GET

(dev:<directory>,
subcommands)

gives
about

system

program

information
system and job

arguments

parameters

KEEP

protects a
from being
reset

fork

fork name
or number

loads
program

ALPHABETICAL

LOAD

compiles
a

and

LIST

loads

TOPS-28

COMMANDS

filespec,

switches

program

loads
compiler
and/or
program

begins

job

user

name,

password,
LOGOUT

ends

- o

account

job

clears
memory

MERGE
.

merges

program

executable

with

current

filespec,
(switches)

adds
program

memory

existing
memory

MODIFY

changes

batch
MOUNT

PERUSE

output

requests

use

structure

edits

queue, jobnane,
switches

requests

files

of
tape

set

alias or
switches

setname,

(switches),
filespec

read-only mode
PLOT

plots files
plotter

POP

returns to superior
TOPS-200 command
level, ending

memory of

inferior

process

command

loads
editor

filespecs,

PUNCH

punches files
card punch or
tape punch

PUSH

begins an inferior
TOPS—-20 command
level

on
paper

allows

with
REENTER

program
at

restart
REFUSE

REMARK

of system
program, (switches)
argument

the

address

disallows
communication
terminal

argument

with

informs the system
that you are typing
only comments, not
commands

switches

name

terminal

starts

filespecs,

memory

communication

memory

switches

preserves

system

your

filespecs,

superior

program

RECEIVE

inferior

level

prints files
line printer

clears

TOPS-20

runs

switches

your

loads
program

LIST OF TOPS-20

ALPHABETICAL

COMMANDS

filespec

RENAME

changes the
specification of a
file

filespec,

RESET

clears the

fork name or
number

fork

specified

from memory

RETRIEVE

restores off-line
files to disk

filespecs

REWIND

rewinds a magnetic
tape to its load
point

device

RUN

places an executable
program in memory
and starts it

filespec,
(switches)

SAVE

stores a copy of
memory in a file

(filespec)

SEND

sends

line

messages

loads
program

number

terminals

sets various

SET

name

job

arguments

parameters
SET

HOST

SKIP

START

connects the terminal
to another system

starts

program

(memory location)

start

(jobs)

SUBMIT

submits entries

SYSTAT

gives information
about system and job

name,

device name,
number of records
or files

moves a magnetic
tape forward

memory at
address

system

switches

the batch

switches

filespecs,

system

arguments,

(subcommands)

status
TAKE

starts processing
of a command file

filespec,

TALK

makes communication
links with another

user

(subcommands)
name

terminal

number

user

TDIRECTORY

DIRECTORY command
with subcommands
CHRONOLOGICAL WRITE,
REVERSE, and TIMES

(dev:<directory>,
filespecs),
subcommands

WRITE

TERMINAL

sets various
terminal
characteristics

argument

ALPHABETICAL

TRANSLATE

gives

directory

names

for

ppn's

LIST

dev:<directory> or
[project-programmer
number]

your

filespecs

TYPE

prints files
terminal

UNATTACH

disengages another
from its terminal

UNDELETE

restores

job

UNLOAD

VDIRECTORY

cancels

deleted

the

status

unloads

tape

and

the

drive

filespec

fork name
or number

fork

magnetic

device

name

(dev:<directory>,
filespecs),
subcommands

command

HEADING,

PROTECTION,

and

kept

subcommands

LENGTH,

name,

deassigns

DIRECTORY

with

user

(job number)
(password)

files
UNKEEP

COMMANDS

and

vice versa
on

TOPS-20

TIMES

SIZE,

WRITE

B-6

APPENDIX

FILE

This appendix

ATTRIBUTES

can

lists the attributes that you

include

file

The DECnet-related attributes are described in detail
also
is
Information on file attributes
in the DECnet documentation.
the TOPS-20 Monitor Calls
Guide,
User's
TOPS~20
the
in
contained
specification.

Reference Manual, and the TOPS-20 Tape Processing Manual.

System manager defined account string

;Araccount

;BDATA:user

DECnet optional

data

binary data

Maximum size of a physical block on a labeled

; BLOCK-LENGTH:n

tape.

; BPASSWORD:password

DECnet binary password

;CHARGE:account

DECnet account

string

DECnet optional

data

;DATA:user

data

;EXPIRATION-DATE:date

; FORMAT:F,D,S,

Date

magnetic

the

tape

file

record

format:

can

overwritten

Maghetic

tape

labeled

F=fixed-length
D=variable—~length
S=spanned
U=undefined
; OFF=LINE

Designation

:P:n

File

; PASSWORD: password

DECnet

; POSITION:n

;s RECORD-LENGTH:n

: T

id
; USERID:

file

for

that

because of migration or archiving

1is

off-line

protection value

File

password

sequence

number

for

magnetic

tape

positioning

Maximum

size

1labeled

tape

record

deleted
Designation for a file that is to be
Only for
at log-out time (a temporary file).
files in log-in and/or connected directories.
DECnet

user

ID string

FILE ATTRIBUTES

Note that
you
can
Issue
TOPS-2¢
commands
as
an
alternative
to
specifying
many
of
the
file
attributes,
For
example,
SET FILE
PROTECTION, rather than the P attribute, can be used to set
the
file
protection.,
Also,
such
commands
as
INFORMATION
FILE-STATUS
and
DIRECTORY (with the EVERYTHING subcommand) display your file attribute
settings.

APPENDIX
CONTROL

CHARACTERS

This appendix lists the TOPS-20 control characters.
character,
use
the
CTRL key like the SHIFT key.
key and at the same time type the character key.

To type a control
Hold down the CTRL

CTRL
CHARACTER

CTRL/C

FUNCTION

Cancels

command

Cancels

command

execution.

when

typed

execution

(The

first

during

when

“C does

command

typed

twice

CTRL/F

Ends

ADVISE

Provides

recognition

command
names
except that it
specifications
commands,

CTRL/G

Rings
signal

CTRL/H

the

link between
input

and
key,
file
with

Use

with

file

terminals.
specifications

bell.,

for

two

command
level.
program that is
that is waiting

SEND and

TALK

CTRL/L

Advances

next
NO

the

the
page.

INDICATE

Stops output
continues to
Output

function of

the

TAB

error.

Duplicates

key.

paper on a hard-copy terminal to the top of the
To stop the "L from printing, give the TERMINAL
command.

to the terminal
execute.

resumes

while

the

when:

another CTRL/O
the program or
the

commands

user.

Reprints a command line up to the field that
1is
Type
immediately after the input error message.
the function of the BACKSPACE key.

Duplicates

command

and
arguments.
Similar to the ESCAPE
completes only one field at a time with
and
it
does
not
supply
guidewords

terminal

another

CTRL/I

CTRL/O

command

during

not echo.)

Halts a
program
and
returns
to
TOPS-~2¢
Generally,
type
two
CTRL/Cs
to
halt
a
executing; type one CTRL/C to stop a program
for input.

CTRL/E

entry.

program

is typed
command finishes
prompts for input

program

command

CONTROL CHARACTERS

CTRL/Q

Continues scrolling

terminal

output

that

was

paused

CTRL/R

Reprints
the
current
command
line,
incorporating
the
corrections
made
with
the
DELETE
key or CTRL/W.
Use on

CTRL/S or a pause on an end of page.
Use the TERMINAL PAUSE
(ON)
CHARACTER
command
to
define
alternate
pause
and
continue
characters.,
Use
the
TERMINAL
NO
PAUSE
(ON)
END-OF-PAGE command to stop pause on an end
of
page.
Use
the TERMINAL LENGTH command to set the page length.

hard-copy terminals when backslashes and underscores
caused
by
editing
with
DELETE
and
CTRL/W make the command line
difficult to read.
Use on video
terminals
when
a
system
message covers the command line.
CTRL/S

Pauses scrolling of terminal output until CTRL/Q
is
typed.
Input,
though
not
displayed,
1is
accepted into the input
buffer and processed after a CTRL/Q.
Use the TERMINAL PAUSE
(ON)
CHARACTER
command
to
define
alternate
pause
and
continue

characters.

CTRL/T

Displays

a line of information that includes:
the time
the name and status of the current fork
the amount of CPU time used
the time elapsed since login
the system's load average

CTRL/U

Erases the current command
cancels
the
command
and
command line.

CTRL/V

Allows

special

alphanumeric,

characters

line.
prints

(any

the special

On
hard-copy
three Xs at the

character

other

characters - _ .

specifications and
directory
names.
typing
the
special
character
any

terminals,
end of the

or $)

than

file

Type
CTRL/V
Dbefore
time you type the file

specification.

Special

characters

are not accepted

by the

following

system

programs:

CTRL/W

ALGOL

COBOL

CREF

FILCOM

LIBARY

LINK

MAKLIB

RERUN

ISAM

Erases the previous word.
On hard-copy
terminals,
previous word and types an underscore.,

cancels

the
CTRL/Z

Signals an
Use

end-of~file

for data

entered

from

the

terminal.

when:

COPYing
Sending

from your
a message

terminal (device TTY:) to a file.
with one of the mail programs.

INDEX

-A-

ABORT

ARPANET-WIZARD

subcommand,

/ABORT switch,

47,

90,

148,

193

subcommand,
ACCESS command,
Account, 201

setting
setting

ATTACH

argument,
argument,

subcommand,

switch,

385

254,

258,

argument,

BACKSPACE

169,

302

271, 274
command, 4
switch, 213, 242, 2508,
argument,

258,

dependency

argument, 169
switch, 47, 99,

148,

subcommand, 351
ALLOW subcommand, 358
ALPHABETICALLY subcommand,
APPEND command, 8
ARCHIVE arument, 170
ARCHIVE

keyword,

ARCHIVE

subcommand,

114

copying,

Batch

to,

101
discarding, 122

keeping disk copies of, 12
renaming, 280
retrieving, 285
status of, 179
ARCHIVED subcommand, 114
Archiving
on-line files for, 25
preventing automatic, 304
setting automatic, 304
Arguments, Intro-l
removing default, 310

dependency count

nested, 345
submitting,
talking to,

about,

argument,

ARPANET~ACCESS

170

341

338
362

348
Batch~-requests
information about, 171
BATCH-REQUESTS argument,
BATCH.CMD file, 203, 344
BEFORE subcommand, 114

/BEGIN

switch,

BINARY

subcommand,

BLANK

178

subcommand,

for,

BATCH keyword, 37
BATCH-LOG switch,

/BINARY

ARPANET

342

321

setting, 3490
Batch destination-node
Batch jobs

deleting,

information

count

SET commands with,
time~limit
modifying, 218
setting, 342

101

files

appending

334

log destination node
modifying, 214
setting, 341
log file, 340, 341, 343
preserving control file, 342
processing order, 219
restarting after error, 342

193

ARCHIVE~-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES

Archived

57,
19

modifying, 214
setting, 340
job name for, 343
labels in control file,
line number for, 34¢

302

ALL

ARPANET

command,

/BAK switch, 72, 131
Batch
access rights for, 346
account charge for, 339
assistance during, 340
card punch for, 3490
control file, 338
date for job, 339
deleting control file, 340

Alerts
checking, 169
removing, 309
setting, 309
ALERTS
/ALGOL

383
170

/BACKGROUND switch,

114

242,

subcommand,

argument,

349

-B
=

339
ALERT

301

Advice
receiving, 271
refusing, 274
ADVISE
/AFTER

64,

AUTOMATIC

ACCOUNT

ADVICE

switch,

command,

AVAILABLE

argument,

ADDRESS-BREAK

command,

default, 304
file storage,

339
ACCOUNT~-DEFAULT

ASSIGN

ACCOUNT

/ACCOUNT

subcommand,

/ASSISTANCE

ABSOLUTE-~ARPANET-SOCKETS

subcommand,

ASCII

switch,

command,

/lg-BLISS
193

Index~1

214,

244,
8,

47,

171

253,

91,

349

64,

148,

193

SWitCh'

47'

gg'

148'

/36-BLISS

switch,

47,

90,

Commands (Cont.,)
continuing, Intro-3
DIRECTORY-class, Intro-3
guidewords in, Intro-5
help with, Intro-6
LOAD-class, Intro-3
Queue-class, Intro-3
Commas between
filespecs, 197

148,

193
BREAK command,
BUILD command,

22
23
subcommand, 8,

BYTE

64,

/Cl28 switch, 72, 131
/C64 switch, 72, 131
CANCEL command, 37
Capabilities
disabling, 121
displaying assigned,
enabling, 137
Card images for
batch,

Comments

typing on terminal, 277
Common File System, 171
Compilation
forcing, 47, 91, 149, 194
preventing, 49, 92, 150, 195
COMPILE command, 46

137

/COMPILE switch,

342

CARD-READER-INPUT-SET

Compiled

argument,

punching, 257
CARDS keyword, 37
/CARDS switch, 214, 349
Characters
double at-sign, Intro-4
plus sign, 51, 95
question mark, Intro-6
/CHECK-SETNAME switch, 223, 227
CHECKSUM subcommand, 114
CHRONOLOGICAL subcommand, 114
CLASS subcommand, 351
CLOSE command, 44
CLUSTER argument, 171

148,

90,

148,

201,

executing,

358

201,

LOGOUT.CMD,

order

202,

203,

Control

260

344

order of processing with SUBMIT,
344
running programs from, 359
SYSTEM:BATCH.CMD, 203, 344
202,

203,

SYSTEM: LOGIN.CMD,
COMMAND-LEVEL

Commands, Intro-1l
abbreviating, Intro-5

COPY command, 64
CPU time-limit
setting, 317
CRAM subcommand, 114
CREATE command, 71
CREF command, 77
CREF program, 77
/CREF switch, 91, 149,
Cross—~reference files,
149,

194
48,

77,

91,

194

Cross—-reference listing,
/CROSS-REFERENCE switch,
149, 194
CSAVE command,
/CTERM switch,

77
48,

91,

81
326

CTRL-C

202

argument,

303
CONTROLLING subcommand, 351
/COPIES switch, 214, 244, 253,

202

344

command, 57
characters, D-1

CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY

206,

SYSTEM:COMAND.CMD,

Connected directory, Intro-2, 54
/CONNECTED-DIRECTORY switch, 340
CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand, 101
CONTINUE argument, 109

282

287
processing with

95,

CONFIDENTIAL subcommand,
CONNECT command, 54

193
/COBOL switch, 47, 91, 149, 193
COMAND.CMD file, 201, 202, 203,
344
Command default
setting, 304
Command files
BATCH.CMD, 203, 344
COMAND,.CMD,

programs,

COMPLETE subcommand, 114
Confidential access capabilities,

CONTINUE
47,

194

152

193

/74-COBOL switch,

149,

197

Compiling multiple

«CMD

90,

91,

listing, 48, 92, 194
Compiled programs preventing
listing, 50
Compilers
passing language-switches to,
48, 91, 149, 194
Compiling files together, 51, 152,

303
Cards

file type, 358
COBDDT program, 85
/68-COBOL switch, 47,

47,

programs

171

removing capability of, 310
Current fork, 159
/CURRENT-VOLUME-ONLY switch, 289

Index-2

/DESTINATION-NODE switch,
242, 251, 259, 341
DETACH command, 109
Detaching jobs, 383

—D-

Date

to
Date

display,

dev:, Intro-l
Device defaults,
Devices
assigning, 15

arguments

formats of, Intro-7
DATES subcommand, 115
DAYTIME command, 83
DDT command, 84
DDT

program

loading, 194
/DDT switch, 91, 194
DEASSIGN command, 87
DEBUG command, 89

/DEBUG switch, 48, 91, 194
Debugging
SET commands with, 320
specifying debugging program,
95
Debugging information
excluding, 50, 91, 194
Debugging programs, 84
/DECIDE switch, 72, 131
DECnet

nodes

displaying
setting,

accessible,

171

308

DECNET NODES argument, 171
DECNET-ACCESS subcommand, 25
DEFAULT argument, 363
Default arguments, Intro-4
DEFAULT~FILE~-PROTECTION
subcommand, 25

DELETE
DELETE

171

command, 101
subcommand, 155

/DELETE switch, 214, 244,
2608, 3490
Deleted archived files
recovering, 102
Deleted files
restoring, 385
DELETED subcommand, 115
Deletion
of archive requests, 37
of batch requests, 37
of files, 101, 385
of files at logout, 206
of logical names, 98
of mount requests, 37
of paper-tape requests,
of plot requests, 37
of print requests, 37
of punch card requests,
of subdirectories, 27
/DENSITY switch, 223
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT switch,
340
DEPOSIT command, 185

172
permanent
Directory

disk

storage,

of,

accessing, 1
connecting to a, 54
connecting to log-in, 201
defaults, Intro-2
display contents of, 112, 158,
391
displaying contents of, 365
files-only, 33
group rights, 202
ownership rights, 1, 202
protection code, 29
setting options, 298
setting protection, 385
DIRECTORY Argument, 304
DIRECTORY argument, 172
DIRECTORY command, 112
Directory for
batch, 340
Directory name

Defaults

displaying, 171
DEFAULTS argument,
DEFINE command, 98

Intro-2

changing to generic, 215
deassigning, 87
displaying available, 170
Directories
deleting, 34
displaying characteristics

Program

loading,
DDT

214,

253,

corresponding
project-programmer number,
379
DIRECTORY subcommand, 181, 351
DIRECTORY-class commands, Intro-3
DIRECTORY~GROUP subcommand, 26
DISABLE command, 121
DISABLE subcommand, 26
DISALLOW subcommand, 358
DISCARD command, 122
Discard command
undoing, 122
Disk storage quotas
infinite, 32
Disk=-usage

information about, 173
DISK-USAGE argument, 173
DISMOUNT STRUCTURE command,
DISMOUNT TAPE command, 124
DOUBLESPACE subcommand,
/DPY switch, 131

/DRIVE-TYPE

214,

switch,

—-F-

ECHO subcommand,

Index-3

358

223

115

124

“ECREATE

File

command, 31
EDIT command,

see

138

EDIT program, 71, 130
backup files, 72, 74, 133
controlling error messages, 72,
73, 131, 132
line numbers in, 72, 73, 131,
132
read-only

mode,

73,

132,

238

SWITCH.INI file, 75, 134
Edit program
backup files, 131
EDITOR: logical name, 75, 134
ENABLE

command, 137
ENABLE subcommand, 26
END-ACCESS command, 139
ENQ-DEQ subcommand, 26

/ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET
Entry

vector,

changing,

switch,

289

334

365

ENTRY-VECTOR

argument,

EOF command,

141

Ephemeral

file,

Ephemeral

fork

305

306

characteristics of, 143
program, 312
canceling ephemeral attribute,
269
Erasing
deleted files, 385
Error messages, Intro-9
ERUN command, 143
Ephemeral

ESC

key,

EXAMINE

cards,

subcommand,

command,

145

creating an inferior, 30, 265
returning to superior, 247
EXECUTE

argument,

command,

372

EXPUNGE

command,

EXPUNGE

subcommand,

SWITCH,.INX,

FILES-ONLY

304

155

FIND

101

FDIRECTORY

91,

command,

149

FILE

argument,

command,

FORK-STATUS
Forks

306

305

File protection
setting default, 304
File specifications, Intro-1

115

switch,
101

159

argument,

174

continuing, 190
displaying status of, 174
keeping, 189, 312
limited number of, 190
making current, 159
name and number of, 159
renaming, 309
running ephemeral, 143
stopping, 162

158

/FEET switch, 214, 341
File
attributes, Intro-2, C-1
setting expiration date,
setting protection, 307

subcommand,

FLAG argument, 368
/FLAG-NON-STANDARD
149, 194
FORGET subcommand,
FORK

48,
206

subcommand,

Filespecs, Intro-l
plus signs between,

—-F-

/FAIL switch,
/FAST switch,

238

trapping openings, 318
FILES argument, 20, 332
Files-only directories, 33

147

/EXPERT switch, 72, 131
Expiration date
setting default file,
setting file, 306

257

renaming, 279
replacing contents of, 281
restoring deleted, 385
retrieving offline, 284

115

EXEC

EXECUPORT

structures

/FILE switch, 215, 253
File type .CRF, 77
File types with
LOAD, 197
File types with COMPILE, 51
FILE-STATUS argument, 174
Files
See also Command files
appending, 8
archiving, 12
changing text type of, 215
closing, 44
compressed format, 81
copying, 64
copying from TTY:, 67
creating, 71
cross-reference, 77
default generation, 26
deleting, 141
displaying, 381
displaying status of, 174
editing with EDIT program, 130
erasing, 181, 155
erasing deleted, 385
indirect, 95
making ephemeral, 366
mapped, 44
offline expiration date, 28
online expiration date, 28
printing, 249
punching on paper tape and

Intro-2

EVERYTHING

structures

FORMFEED

Index-4

argument,

368

48,

91,

/FORMS switch, 215, 243,
/FORTRAN switch, 48, 91,
FREEZE

251,
149,

259
194

command,

FULLDUPLEX

162
argument,

368

-G-

.gen, Intro-l
Generation number, Intro-2
defaults, Intro-2
highest, Intro-2
Generation-retention-count
setting default, 304

JOB-STATUS

/JOBNAME
251,

subcommand,

115

changing to, 215
/GENERIC switch, 215,
259
GET

command,

Group

259,

174

38,

46,

212,

243,

341

—-K
-

243,

251,

KEEP

164

rights,

argument,

switch,

Jobs
attaching, 16
detaching, 109
JSYS trapping, 318

GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT

GENERATIONS subcommand,
Generic device

Job
displaying runtime, 352
setting options, 298
Job class
displaying, 351
Job file numbers, 44
JOB subcommand, 351
Job time limit
displaying, 351

subcommand,

102

Kept fork
characteristics,

Kept
—H-

189

forks

see

Forks

Key

H19

argument,

HALFDUPLEX

HEADER

372

argument,

subcommand,

/HEADER switch,

368

351

215,

244,

escape,

Intro-6

Keywords,

Intro-4

KILL

subcommand,

260
Headers

-L—

changing to no, 216
subcommand, 115

LAl120¢

HEADING
HELP

argument,

368

HELP command, 166
Hyphen character
-,

253,

argument,
argument,
argument,

373
373

LA38

argument,

373

/LABEL~-TYPE switch, 223
/LANGUAGE~-SWITCHES switch,

Intro-3

149,

INDICATE

argument,

Indirect
Inferior

files, 51, 152,
process, 265

368

command,

197

168

INHIBIT argument, 368
Interrupt sequence, 326,
Interrupts

displaying, 189
Invisible files, 13, 306
INVISIBLE subcommand, 115
IPCF subcommand, 26
/ISAVE switch, 72, 131

328

displaying

status

of,

LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD

171

argument,

308
LENGTH argument, 369
LENGTH subcommand, 116
LEOT argument, 332
/LIBRARY switch, 91, 149, 194
LIMIT subcommand, 351
/LIMIT switch, 215, 243, 251,
LINE subcommand, 351
LINE-HALFDUPLEX argument, 369

Line-printer
spacing
changing, 218
Links
breaking, 22
receiving, 271
refusing, 274
argument, 271,
LIST subcommand, 27
LINKS

JFNs,

91,

subcommand, 115
Late-clear~typeahead

IBM-node for
batch, 342
IMAGE BINARY subcommand, 8,
IMAGE subcommand, 8, 64, 65
IMMEDIATE argument, 368
/INCREMENT switch, 72, 131

N,
.

48,

194

LARGER

INFORMATION

373

LA34
LA36

/LIST switch,

48,

LOAD

192

command,

LOAD switches,

Index~5

193

92,

274

149,

194

259

LOAD-class commands,
Loader maps, 91, 158

LOCATION
LOG-FILE

Messages (Cont.)
warning, Intro-9
/METERS switch, 259
Migrating files
delaying, 320
off-1line, 307
preventing, 367
/MODE switch, 216, 244,
Modification

Intro-3

argument, 308
subcommand, 358

Log-in directory, Intro-2
/LOGDISPOSITON switch, 341
Logical names
defining, 98
displaying defined, 174
removing, 98
LOGICAL-NAMES argument, 175
LOGIN

command,

201

203

changing
LOWERCASE

to,

216

argument,

369

card requests, 211
paper-tape requests,

of
of
of

plot requests, 211
print requests, 211
queue and batch requests,

MOUNT

/LOWERCASE switch, 215, 251
LPT subcommand, 116, 352

command,

displaying,

194
48,

subcommand,

.MAP

files,

91,

/MAP

switch,

150,

92,

files,

195

switch, 49, 92, 1549,
195
/NOCREF switch, 48, 92, 150, 195
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE switch, 49,
158, 195
/NODEBUG switch, 49,
195
/NODECIDE switch, 73, 132

195

renaming, 280
MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES
27

subcommand,

Nodes
displaying accessible, 171
/NOFLAG-NON~-STANDARD switch,
92, 158, 195

/NOHEADER switch,

Memory

clearing, 282
displaying status of, 175
modifying, 105
preserving state of, 189
putting an executable program
into, 164
Memory locations

examining, 145
Memory sections,
269, 291
MEMORY-USAGE

MERGE

/NOCOMPILE

195

150,

84,

l64,

argument,

command,

209

Messages
error,
Intro-9
sending, 295

175

177

NAME argument, 309
/NEW switch, 224
NO argument, 309, 369
NO ECHO subcommand, 358
NO subcommand, 116, 352
/NOBAK switch, 72, 132
/NOBINARY switch, 48, 195

308

MAINTENANCE

argument,

-N-

175

argument,

177

149,

assembling using, 50, 149
/MACRO switch, 48, 92, 149,
Magnetic tapes
See Tapes, 19
Mail, 175
notice of new, 175
watching for new, 308

Mapped

177

222

MOUNT-REQUESTS

MACRO

Argument,

217

Mount-requests

/M33 switch, 72
/M37 switch, 72
/MAC switch, 48, 149,
/MACHINE-CODE switch,
194

MAIL-WATCH

211

Mount count, 125
MOUNT keyword, 37
MOUNT switches, 223

—-M-

MAIL

261

of
of

211
of queue priority,
MODIFY command, 211
Monitor statistics
information about,

Lowercase

253,

209,

216,

245,

49,

254,

261

/NOLIBRARY switch, 92, 150, 195
/NOLIST switch, 49, 92, 158, 195
/NOMACHINE-CODE switch, 49, 92,
159,

195

/NONUMBER switch, 73, 132
/NOOPTIMIZE switch, 49, 93, 154,
195
/NORMALLY switch, 57, 334
/NOSEARCH switch, 93, 150, 195
/NOSEPARATORS switch, 73, 132
/NOSTAY switch, 49, 93, 150, 195
/NOSYMBOLS switch, 93, 196
NOT subcommand, 27
/NOTE switch, 216, 243, 252, 259

Index~-6

/NOTIFY switch, 243, 252, 268
/NOUNLOAD switch, 224
/NOVICE switch, 132
NOVICE switch, 73
/NOWAIT switch, 124, 224
/NOWARNINGS switch, 49, 150, 196
/NRT switch, 327
NUMBER

subcommand,

/NUMBER

switch,

73,

132

()

Object

file
91,

94,

subcommand,

PERUSE

command,

238

/PLINES

switch,

73,

PLOT

command,

241

PLOT

keyword,

job
mode

116

243

244

number

date

for,

spooled-output,

245

244

242

246

command,

249

keyword,

Printing
account

charged

for,

250

copies for, 253
deleting file after, 253
destination-node for, 250

job name for,
mode for, 253

queue

352

owner for,
page limit

178
argument,

84,

178

sequence

209

252
for,

numbers

for,

setting date, 250
spacing during, 254
spooled-output, 255
starting page number

-P—

text

argument, 369
argument, 311,
/PAGES switch, 217, 341

251

251
preventing header for,
priority for, 252

Output-requests

switch,

for,

242

243

forms for, 251
header for, 253

changing, 217
OUTPUT subcommand, 116,
/OUTPUT switch, 341

PAGE

Paper

starting page number for, 244
time limit for, 243
time-limit in batch job, 343
unit for, 244
Plus signs between
filespecs, 197
POP command, 247
PRESERVE subcommand, 29
/PRESERVE switch, 245, 254, 261,
342

216

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

name

setting

mode

displaying,

for,

sequence

subcommand, 28
Open files
displaying status of, 314
renaming, 280
OPERATOR subcommand, 28
/OPTIMIZE switch, 49, 93, 150,
196
Optimized
object files, 91
/OPTION switch, 73, 132

PAGE~-ACCESS

305

132

preventing header
priority for, 244
saving after, 245

ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT

/OVERLAY

directory,

argument, 369
PERMANENT subcommand,

forms

subcommand, 28
/O0LD switch, 73, 132
On-line expiration date
setting, 307
ONLINE subcommand, 116

Output

assigning

for, 244
deleting after, 244
destination-node for,

OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT

changing,

directory,

PAUSE

194

Object files, 46, 147
generating, 47, 193
libraries, 1580
optimized, 50
preventing generating of,
Off-line expiration date
setting, 307
Off-line files
waiting for, 313

Output

assigning

PASSWORD subcommand,
Passwords

Plotting
copies

libraries,

OFFLINE

Password

for,

tape

260,

196

342

Privileges
see Capabilities

Index~-7

252

for,

253

244,

252,

253

title for, 254
unit for, 252
Priority for
batch, 342
/PRIORITY switch,

319

changing amount of, 215
punching, 257
PAPER-TAPE keyword, 37
/PASCAL switch, 49, 93, 151,

type

254

217,

/PROCESSING switch, 217
/PROCESSING~-NODE switch,

Punching (Cont.)
unit for, 260
PURGE subcommand, 155
PUSH command, 265
PUSH subcommand, 30

342

Program

entry vector, 273
PROGRAM argument, 312

PROGRAM EPHEMERAL argument,
PROGRAM KEEP argument, 312
PROGRAM
313

312

_Q_

NO-EPHEMERAL argument,

PROGRAM subcommand,

Queue-class

352

displaying, 180
PROGRAM-STATUS argument,

179

Programs

147,
89

R command,

184

312

executing, 147
loading, 147, 192
merging, 209
monitoring, 58
running, 269, 291

running

from command

starting

saving, 81, 293
starting, 147, 334

RECEIVE

files,

359

alternate entries,

273

PROHIBIT-MIGRATION subcommand,
116

Project-programmer number
corresponding directory name,
379
Protection
setting directory, 305
setting file, 307
PROTECTION subcommand, 29, 116
/PROTECTION switch, 224
Pseudo-terminals
advising, 5
PSI

269

/R switch, 73, 132
RAISE argument, 379
/READ-ONLY switch, 225
/READER switch, 342
/READONLY switch, 73, 132
REBUILD subcommand, 155
RECEIVE argument, 370

192

displaying version of,
ephemeral,

Intro-3

=R~

Program-status

compiling, 46,
continuing, 57
debugging, 84,

commands,

/REPORT switch, 217, 254
Report title
changing, 217
RESET command, 282
RESIST-~-MIGRATION subcommand, 116
Restartable status
changing, 217
/RESTARTABLE switch, 217, 342
RETAIN subcommand, 12
Retrieval-requests
information about, 180
RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS argument, 180
RETRIEVAL-WAIT argument, 313
RETRIEVE command, 284
RETRIEVE keyword, 37
REVERSE subcommand, 116
REWIND command, 289
/RONLY switch, 73, 132
RUN command, 291
/RUN switch, 73, 132

status

displaying, 188
PSI-STATUS argument, 180
PTYs logging in to, 204
PUNCH command, 257
Punching
account charged for, 258
card limit for, 259
copies for, 260
deleting after, 260
destination-node for, 259
forms for, 259
header for, 260
job name for, 259
mode for, 261
paper tape limit for, 259
preventing header for, 261,
priority for, 260
saving after, 261, 262
sequence numbers for, 260
setting date for, 258
spooled=-output, 263

command, 271
Recognition, Intro-5
RECORDS argument, 19, 332
REENTER argument, 109
REENTER command, 273
REFUSE command, 274
/RELOCATABLE switch, 93, 151, 196
REMARK command, 277
/REMARK switch, 125, 225
Remote node
connecting terminal to, 326
/REMOVE switch, 125
RENAME command, 279
REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES subcommand,

-S=-

262

/SAIL switch,
SAVE command,
/SAVE switch,
Scratch
tapes,

Index-8

225

49,
293
73,

93,
133

151,

196

/SCRATCH switch,

225

Subdirectories (Cont.)
files-only, 26
modifying, 23
working disk storage
Subdirectory

Screen

clearing, 21
Scrolling
with remote host,
/SEARCH switch, 93,
SEND

command,

batch

SEPARATE
Sequence

job,

244,

HOST

SIZE

74,

260,

133,

command,

313

SUBSYSTEM-STATISTICS

326

49,

93,

151,

196

117
117

command, 332
SMALLER subcommand,

117

/SNOBOL switch, 49, 93, 151,
Source files, 46, 147
/SPACING switch, 218, 254
Special arpanet queues for
subdirectories use of, 25

196

argument,

/SPOOLED-QUTPUT

switch,

SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION

System
314

START

command,

334

/START

switch,

74,

39,

246,

SYSTEM
System

argument,

109

133,

226

command,

messages

MESSAGES
status,

74,

count,

STRUCTURE

94,

314

151,

/STRUCTURE~ID

196,

227

TABS

argument,

switch,

TAKE

command,

TALK

command,

switch,

125,

individual

file

371

342
358
361

density, 223
drives, 223
labels, 223
protection, 224

226

setnames,
TAPE

227

argument,

Tape drives
assigning,
Tape

316

sets

unloading,

126

Tape-parameters

subcommands

Subdirectories
creating, 23
deleting,

271

182

Tape

181

dismounting, 124
information about, 181
mounting, 222
removing, 125
renaming files between, 28¢
transferring files within, 279
unavailable for mounting, 239
Subcommands, Intro-3

default

374

argument,

/TAG

Structures

also

274

133

argument,

argument,
350

182

SYSTEM-STATUS

argument,

50
57,

196

350

SYSTEM-MESSAGES

Structure

See

155
switch, 94,

SYSTEM subcommand, 352
SYSTEM-DEFAULT argument,

Starting programs, 334
STATE subcommand, 352
STATUS-WATCH

displaying,

argument,

mount

subcommand,

receiving, 271
refusing, 274

180
START

182

247

System mail
reading, 175

263

/STAY Switch,
/STAY switch,
334
/STEP switch,

argument,

SWITCH,INI file, 75, 134
Switches, Intro-~2
default, Intro-3
positioning, Intro-3

SYSTAT

184

SPOOLED-OUTPUT

255,

process,

/SYMBOLS

371

about,

argument,

Superior

Symbol table,
rebuilding,

output

information

SUPERIOR

SUPERSEDE

SKIP

argument,

338

181

subcommand,

SPEED

command,

Subsystem statistics
displaying, 181

342

argument,

subcommand,

Spooled

subcommand,

38,

SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP

298

/SIMULA switch,
SINCE

133

SUBMIT

252,

SESSION-REMARK

73,

for,

Subdirectory parameters
listing, 27

117

for

batch, 342
/SEQUENCE switch,

rights,

groups,

switch,

command,

group

296

number

212,

196

295

subcommand,

/SEPARATORS

SET
SET

328
151,

displaying,

183

TAPE-PARAMETERS
Tapes

protection

for,

Index-9

argument,

assigning tape drives,
backspacing, 19

183

Tapes (Cont.)
creating new file set, 224
dismounting, 124
forwarding, 332
load point, 289
mounting, 222
rewind with open files, 289
rewinding, 289, 389
setting density, 316
setting format, 317
setting parity, 317
setting record-length, 317
single volume tape sets, 230

skipping

records and

unloading,

files,

.typ, Intro-l
TYPE argument, 371
TYPE command, 381
TYPEQUT argument, 319
-

332

389

volume identifier, 226
write~enabled mode, 226
writing end-of-file on, 141
TDIRECTORY command, 365
Terminal
connecting to remote node, 326
displaying characteristics of,
183

freeing hung, 383
linking to another, 361
setting options, 298
setting speed of, 376
talking to another, 361
to modify characteristics
371
TERMINAL command, 366
Terminal lines
displaying available, 179
TERMINAL-MODE argument, 183
TERMINET argument, 374
TI argument, 374

for,

TIME

to display, 83
Time
entering in commands, Intro-7
Time arguments
formats of, Intro-7
relative time, Intro-8
Time limit

removing CPU, 311
setting batch, 342
setting CPU, 317
TIME subcommand, 352
/TIME switch, 218, 342
TIME-LIMIT argument, 317,
TIMES subcommand, 117
Timesharing jobs
ending, 206
starting, 201

TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER

subcommand, 3¢
/TPLOT switch, 218
TRANSLATE command, 379
TRAP argument, 318
Trapping
continuing after, 318
disabling, 311, 318
setting, 318

320

UDDT program, 84
UNATTACH command, 383
UNDELETE command, 385
/UNIQUE switch, 218
JUNIT switch, 218, 244, 252, 260
UNKEEP command, 387
Unkept fork, 387
UNLOAD command, 389
/UNSEQUENCE switch, 74, 133
/UPPER switch, 74, 133
/UPPERCASE switch, 218, 252
/USE-SECTION switch, 84, 164, 209,
269,
User

291

messages

receiving, 271
refusing, 274,
sending, 295
User name, 201
USER subcommand,

295

117, 352
/USER switch, 39, 218, 252, 260
USER-MESSAGES argument, 271, 274
USER-OF-GROUP subcommand, 30
UUO simulation
disabling, 311
UUO-SIMULATION argument, 319
e

VDIRECTORY command,

391

VERSION argument, 184
Visible files, 13, 308
VK108 argument, 374
vVolid, 227
/VOLIDS switch, 226
Volume identifier, 227
Volumes
information about, 185
VOLUMES argument, 185
VT@#5 argument, 374
VT100 argument, 375
VT102 argument, 375
VT125 argument, 375
VT200-SERIES argument, 375
VT50 argument, 375
VT52 argument, 375
-W-

/WARNINGS switch, 94, 196
WHAT subcommand, 352
WHEEL subcommand, 31
WHERE subcommand, 353
WHO subcommand, 353
WIDTH argument, 371
/WINDOW switch, 74, 133
WORKING subcommand, 31

Index-10

/WRITE-ENABLED switch,

226

-XXDDT program,

Index~-11

TOPS-20

Commands Reference Manual
AA-FP65A-TM

READER’S COMMENTS

NOTE:

This form is for document comments only. DIGITAL will use comments submitted on
this form at the company’s discretion. If you require a written reply and are eligible to
receive one under Software Performance Report (SPR) service, submit your com-

ments on an SPR form.
Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized? Please make suggestions for improvement.

Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.

Please indicate the type of reader that you most nearly represent.

[0 Assembly language programmer
[J Higher-level language programmer.
[J Occasional programmer (experienced)
[] User with little programming experience

(] Student programmer
[7 Other (please specify)

Name

Organization

Date

—

Telephone

Street

City

State _________ Zip Code
or Country

————————————

—

————

——

————

———

——

—

———

—————

——

—

No Postage
Necessary

if Mailed in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD MASS.

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID

BY ADDRESSEE

o
——
———
.
—
—
——
—
——
——
———
————t
—————
i
—
—

Cut Along Dotted Line

————————
——
——
—
——
.
—
o

01752

MARLBOROUGH, MA

MRO1-2/L12

200 FOREST STREET

——

SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS